CATIA Infrastructure Preface What's New?

Getting Started Basic Tasks Advanced Tasks Workbench Description Customizing Installation Requirements Glossary Index

© Dassault Systèmes 1994-2001. All rights reserved.

Preface
Welcome to Version 5! Version 5 is the first release of the next generation of Dassault Systèmes software solutions, and addresses advanced mechanical process centric design requirements. In addition to leading edge feature-based design functions, it includes highly productive capabilities for the design of mechanical assemblies and for drawing generation. Available on both UNIX and Windows environments, Version 5 is built to be totally compliant with Windows presentation standards. In order to integrate to an extended enterprise where CATIA Version 4 designs need to be exchanged and processed, it includes unique two-way interoperability with CATIA Version 4 data. Likewise, Version 5 benefits from the breadth of the CATIA Solutions Version 4 portfolio by offering interoperable applications. As an open solution, it includes interfaces with the most commonly used data exchange industry standards. Using This Guide

Using This Guide
This book is the Version 5 Infrastructure Users Guide. It contains information about the user interface and basic tools common to all Version 5 applications: installing the software and acquiring licenses starting a session getting help activating application workbenches creating, opening and saving documents laying out documents selecting and manipulating objects printing, viewing and navigating rendering and lighting effects using macros using Version 5 data in OLE-compliant applications customizing toolbars and settings using the Knowledgeware Advisor and provides information for administrators on topics such as hardware and software prerequisites, network licensing, code distribution and environment management.

Conventions

Conventions
Certain conventions are used in CATIA, ENOVIA & DELMIA documentation to help you recognize and understand important concepts and specifications. The following text conventions may be used: The titles of CATIA documents appear in this manner throughout the text. File -> New identifies the commands to be used. The use of the mouse differs according to the type of action you need to perform. Use this mouse button, whenever you read Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...) Click (icons, dialog box buttons, tabs, selection of a location in the document window, ...) Double-click Shift-click Ctrl-click Check (check boxes) Drag Drag and drop (icons onto objects, objects onto objects) Drag Move Right-click (to select contextual menu)

Graphic conventions are denoted as follows: indicates the estimated time to accomplish a task.

indicates a target of a task. indicates the prerequisites. indicates the scenario of a task. indicates tips

indicates a warning. indicates information. indicates the end of a task. indicates functionalities that are new or enhanced with this Release. Enhancements can also be identified by a blue-colored background in the left-hand margin.

What's New?
Getting Started Enhanced: the environment created at installation is now stored in a text file, and no longer in the registry on Windows Enhanced: you can now lock configuration and product licenses individually Enhanced: a suite of CD-ROMs is now necessary for installing online documentation Basic Tasks New: preview integration when using the Save All and Save All As commands Enhanced: in addition to the Edit->Properties command, you can now display and edit graphic properties via a specific toolbar Enhanced: selecting objects using the Search... command (General and Favorites/Advanced modes) Enhanced: you assign objects to layers using the Graphic Properties toolbar Enhanced: manipulating objects using the Edit...contextual command Enhanced: displaying and editing document links Enhanced: ergonomic improvements to the File->Desk... command Enhanced: you can now send a document and its linked files to a directory without opening them Enhanced: Measures (Measure Item, Measure Between and Measure Inertia commands) are associative and can be used as parameters in formulas Enhanced: Measure Item command now gives the equation of planes and recognizes ellipse-type conic sections Enhanced: Measure Inertia command gives the matrix of inertia with respect to an axis system as well as takes into account inertia equivalents and lets you keep the measure as a feature Advanced Tasks Enhanced: runtime environments, whether created at installation or using the environment management tools, are now stored in a text file, and no longer in the registry on Windows New: lscatenv administration tool for listing environments New: readcatenv administration tool for reading environments New: chcatenv administration tool for modifying environments New: you can now perform smart queries in a catalog Enhanced: the batch software management tool has been renamed CATSoftwareMgtB Enhanced: the check integrity step has been enhanced in the Software Management tool

New: CATMPKConfig variable when running a multipiped Version 5 session Workbench Description Enhanced: View toolbar New: new toolbar for setting graphic properties and layer filters Customizing - Settings New: CATOptionsMgt tool for managing settings without having to run a session first Enhanced: ability to identify which administrator locked settings Enhanced: Linked Document Localization is now located under the Document tab and not directly under the Tools menu anymore New: Document tab to support logical names for paths Enhanced: ergonomic improvements to peripheral devices and 3D picking settings New: Sticker tab for customizing sticker mapping and adjustment Enhanced: you can now associate shortcuts to user-defined workbenches

Getting Started
Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time Uninstalling Version 5 on Windows Installing Version 5 on a UNIX Workstation for the First Time Uninstalling Version 5 on UNIX Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager Running in Demo Mode Installing Additional Products Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time

Page 1 of 21

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time
This task explains how to install the Version 5 files for the first time on a single computer running a supported Windows operating system (Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98), and set up your nodelocked licenses. Note, however, that depending on the Windows platform, certain configurations and/or products may not be available. If you want information about subjects such as: installing Version 5 on several computers setting up network licensing refer to "Advanced User Tasks". Installation and de-installation rely on Windows-compliant tools enabling anyone familiar with Windows procedures and concepts to install the software without assistance. On Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98, in previous releases, you were obliged to use use network licensing requiring the configuration of a LUM (License Use Management) server, then configure your computer as a LUM client before starting the installation procedure. Now, this is no longer necessary: nodelocked licenses are now supported on Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98. From start to finish, this task should take approximately 15 minutes. Before starting the installation, refer to "What You Need Before Installing Version 5" to check you have all the hardware and software prerequisites. Furthermore, to prevent the installation from hanging due to concurrently running programs such as screen savers or virus scanning programs, we recommend that you first shut down any such programs. You must also have your license enrollment certificate (in electronic format) provided by your vendor. If you have the certificate, you will be able to register your license during the installation procedure. 1. Log on as an administrator.

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm

1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time

Page 2 of 21

You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. Otherwise, you will not be able to start the installation. On Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98, log on as a normal user. All users have equal privileges on a local computer: administrator privileges do not exist. In the rest of this user's guide, if you are running either Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98, log on as a normal user each time you are asked to log on as administrator. 2. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. The Choose Setup Language dialog box appears, prompting you to choose the user interface language for the Setup program.

The languages you can choose from are: U.S. English (default) French German Japanese Italian. 3. Click the OK button to start the installation using the English user interface, or select another language from the list box, then click the OK button. The Setup program displays a message telling you that it is preparing the installation procedure.

The progress indicator gives you an idea how much of the preparation process has been completed. Once setup is completed, an animated installation splashscreen appears, filling up the whole screen. On Windows NT file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm 1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time On Windows NT

Page 3 of 21

IBM License Use Management Runtime (LUM), needed to be able to manage nodelock licensing, is no longer installed automatically with the files: it is now integrated in the software on the CD-ROM. The installation sets up the following folder: C:\ifor\Ls\Conf On Windows 95/98 A driver used for nodelock licensing purposes is installed on Windows 95/98. The splashscreen remains displayed in the background throughout the entire installation procedure, and the different dialog boxes you will interact with will be displayed in the foreground. The Welcome dialog box is then displayed:

4. Click the Next button to move to the next step. The CATIA V5R6 License dialog box appears, asking you if you want to enter a nodelock file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm 1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time asking you if you want to enter a nodelock license key for the computer on which you are installing the software.

Page 4 of 21

Note that the target id of the computer on which you are performing the installation is displayed after the dialog box title. 5. If you want to enter a nodelock license, click the Import Certificate button to access the Import Certificate dialog box. This dialog box lets you import the license certificate (that is, if you received your license certificate by electronic mail, and provided you detached it and stored it on your disk).

6. Explore your environment containing the license certificate (ending with the suffix ".lic"), then click OK. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm 1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time

Page 5 of 21

6. Explore your environment containing the license certificate (ending with the suffix ".lic"), then click OK. This creates a nodelock file on your computer, and stores your license by default in the nodelock file on all Windows platforms in: C:\ifor\Ls\Conf\nodelock If you already installed LUM elsewhere, the nodelock file will be updated in the correct LUM environment, for example in: On Windows 2000, if the nodelock file is new, it will be created in: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Ibm\Lum\nodelock. If you decide to skip the licensing step, or if you have a license enrollment certificate in paper format only (and not in electronic format), you can enroll your licenses later, after the installation has been completed. For more information, refer to "Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation". 7. Click the Next button to move to the next step. The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears. A default destination folder is already proposed: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\intel_a (Windows NT or Windows 2000 platform) C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\win_a (Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98 platforms)

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm

1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time

Page 6 of 21

8. If the default destination folder is suitable, click the Next button to move to the next step, or click the Browse... button and navigate to select another folder and click OK. The folder you choose must be empty. You can also specify a new folder: the folder will be created after confirmation. 9. Click the Next button to move to the next step. The Setup Type dialog box appears:

This dialog box lets you specify whether you want to install all of the software on the CD-ROM, or select the configurations and/or products to be installed: Complete: specifies you want to install all the software, and moves on to the next installation step (installation of online documentation files) when you click Next Custom: lets you choose the configurations and/or products to be installed. 10. If you want to choose which configurations and/or products to install, check the Custom option and click the Next button to move to the next step. The Select Software dialog box appears:

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm

1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time

Page 7 of 21

By default, the list of all the configurations on the CD-ROM is displayed. 11. Choose whether you want to install configurations and/or products by using the list box provided. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm 1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time 11. Choose whether you want to install configurations and/or products by using the list box provided.

Page 8 of 21

Depending on what you chose, the list will display the names of all the configurations or products on the CD-ROM. 12. Click on the configurations and/or products to select them. The selected configurations and/or products are listed in the "Selected Software" list. The dialog box specifies the space available for the installation. Clicking on each configuration or product also specifies the amount of space required for installing those configurations or products; the space required is updated progressively as you select from the list. In our example, we chose to install the DP2 - CATIA - Drawing Production 2 configurationand the MD2 - CATIA Mechanical Design 2

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm

1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time

Page 9 of 21

configuration: 13. Click the Next button to move to the next step. The Choose Communications Ports dialog box is displayed:

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm

1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time

Page 10 of 21

This allows you to set up on your computer: a port reserved for the communications backbone process a port reserved for starting the communications backbone process automatically a port reserved for processing events when using peripheral devices (spaceball, spacemouse, joystick). By default, the "Set up communication ports" option is checked because it is strongly recommended. For more information about the communications backbone, refer to "Communications Backbone Files". For more information about peripheral device handling, refer to "CATIA device broker". 14. Click the Next button to move to the next step. The Select CATIA V5R6 Documentation dialog box appears:

Installing the Online Documentation 15. Check the CATIA V5R6 Documentation check box only if you want to install the online documentation during the code installation procedure: this choice is optional. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm 1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time code installation procedure: this choice is optional. If you check this box, you will be prompted after the software has been copied to your computer: to remove the CATIA V5R6 code CD-ROM and insert the first CATIA V5R6 documentation CD-ROM. 16. Clicking the Next button displays the Start Copying Files dialog box. The central area lists the current settings you set in the previous steps: configuration and product names and documentation destination folder. The result looks something like this (depending on which software you chose to install): Note that the dialog box reflects our choice to install the MD2 - CATIA - Mechanical Design 2 Configuration and the DP2 - CATIA - Drawing Production 2 configuration:

Page 11 of 21

There is nothing to prevent you from installing all the configurations and products on the CD-ROM. However, you will be able to use only the software for which you have enrolled licenses, except if you are using a demo mode license as explained in "Running in Demo Mode". 17. Click the Next button to start copying the files to your computer. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm 1/30/01

Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time

Page 12 of 21

A progression indicator appears, and an animated sequence starts showing you some of the products that you will be able to create with the software. Once the files have been copied, you may be prompted at this point to restart your computer. This is because the certain Windows system libraries are also shipped and installed with the software: these libraries will be installed if the existing libraries on your system are not present or at a lower level. After restarting, you must then relog onto the computer using the same administrator logon. Once the files have been copied, and only if you checked the CATIA V5R6 Documentation check box, the Setup CATIA V5R6 Documentation dialog box appears:

18. If you want to install the online documentation, remove the product CD-ROM from the drive, insert the first online documentation CD-ROM for your language, and click OK to restart the Setup program, this time to install the online documentation files. The default folder in which the documentation will be installed is: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc Note that the dialog box also provides a path for specifying another drive or folder from which you can install the online documentation. The default path is the drive name (usually D:) on the computer from which you are performing the installation. Modifying this path is useful if: you already inserted the online documentation CD-ROM into another drive you copied the online documentation files from the online documentation CD-ROM to a folder. If this is the case, click the Browse... button and specify the appropriate drive or folder. If you have several online documentation CD-ROMs (one for each supported language), you can only install one of file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.htm 1/30/01

htm 1/30/01 .Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time Page 13 of 21 If you have several online documentation CD-ROMs (one for each supported language). If you click the Cancel button before installing the final CD-ROM. Click the Finish button to exit the installation program and run Version 5. the documentation files previously installed will be uninstalled. Once the documentation files on the first CD-ROM have been installed.doc\src\basuggs02. install only two out of three. the online documentation may be provided on a suite of up to 3 CD-ROMs. refer to "Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code". If you do not want to install the online documentation immediately. you can only install one of these CD-ROMs at this stage of the installation. you can always install it later. the Setup Complete dialog box informs you that the installation has been completed: 19. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Once both the product and (optional) online documentation files have been copied. and continue the installation until you have inserted the last CD-ROM. Depending on your product line. Note that you must install all the documentation CD-ROMs: you cannot. for example. you will be prompted to insert the next CD-ROM. For more information.

doc\src\basuggs02.htm 1/30/01 .Drawing Production (DP2): file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. then click the Finish button.Mechanical Design (MD2) and CATIA . for example.Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time Page 14 of 21 If you do not want to run Version 5 now. If you chose to run Version 5 now. the Version 5 window will look like this. uncheck the check box prompting you to run Version 5 now. if you installed the configurations CATIA .

allowing you to enter the session immediately without having to reserve the license using the License Manager. but did not import a license certificate. the license is automatically reserved. The application window now appears.log IF YOU DID NOT IMPORT A LICENSE CERTIFICATE: If you chose to run Version 5 now.Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time Page 15 of 21 Because you imported a license certificate.log For example: C:\TEMP\cxinst. located by default in: %TEMP%\cxinst.doc\src\basuggs02. along with the License Manager dialog box: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 . a message window appears informing you that you have not yet requested a configuration or product license: Click the OK button. An installation log is created in the current temporary directory.

a session will still be started. we installed the CATIA . Note that the field specifies: "Not Granted".htm 1/30/01 . but you will not be able to work with the product: menu commands will be grayed out. if you click the OK button. In our example.doc\src\basuggs02. you need to obtain the target id of your computer.Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time Page 16 of 21 The License Manager dialog box lists the configurations and products you installed. and you have not yet reserved any licenses. and you will only be able to use the File->Exit command. The target id must accompany the license order. How To Display the Target ID of Your Computer Before ordering a nodelock license. This is because this is the first time you are starting Version 5. At this stage. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. .Mechanical Design 2 configuration.

The latest versions of each can be found at: http://www. the win32mac target id might not be available. Run "i4target -z".htm 1/30/01 . 2.exe. The TargetId of your computer is also displayed: in the "Import Certificate" dialog box when installing the software at the top of the License Manager dialog box.software. you will not be able to go any further until you register your licenses. command when running the application in the Nodelock Management tool. Depending on the network configuration of your machine.html Page 17 of 21 If you double-click on i4tgtid. There are two executable programs provided on the CD-ROM: i4target. Make sure that the string "win32mac" is also displayed alongside with the target id. The target id is a number represented in hexadecimal notation. Open a Command Prompt window and set the directory to your CD-ROM drive.ibm. This will list network adapters that can be used for the target id.exe in command-line mode is needed: 1. To register nodelock licenses after the installation.. NOTE: Do not repeat step 2 once you have a valid win32mac target id. Run "i4target -d xxx" where "xxx" is one the network adapters listed in step 1.doc\src\basuggs02. This is when i4target.exe (Intel platform) i4tgtid. a message box displaying the win32mac target id of the machine will be presented. from the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools menu. Run i4target or i4tgtid. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug..exe (Intel platform).Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time license order. At this stage. 3. You should obtain the same target id as in step 2. double-click the CATIA V5R6 default environment shortcut on the desktop to start a session directly. to import a license certificate. 4. Once you have imported a nodelock license certificate. you must select the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools->Nodelock Key Management V5R6 as explained in "Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation". access via the Tools->Options.com/is/lum/lumdownl.

.. During a session. About the Environment Created on Windows A Version 5 installation has the following impact on your computer: Installation Folder The software is installed (if you used the default location) in the folder: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\intel_a (Windows NT or Windows 2000 platform) or: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\win_a (Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98 platforms) Desktop The installation: creates the CATIA V5R6 default environment shortcut on the desktop Only one environment is created: a global environment (not a user environment).V5R6. For more information about global and user environments. refer to "Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager". The environment is no longer created in the registry. command.txt . Page 18 of 21 You can now use the software you installed and for which you enrolled a license. you can reserve and release licenses using the Licensing tab accessible via the Tools->Options. For more information. refer to "What are global and user environments?". Your licensing settings are stored in a settings file.htm 1/30/01 .B06. but in a text file located in: C:\Winnt\Profiles\All Users\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings\CATEnv (on Windows NT) C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings\CATEnv (Windows 2000) C:\Windows\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings\CATEnv (on Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98) and the environment file name is CATIA. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs02.Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time on the desktop to start a session directly.

A typical scenario involving the use of the inter-application communications backbone is implemented to allow the ENOVIA Portal DMU Navigator and ENOVIA Portal WEB to communicate: ENOVIA Portal WEB can load geometry and file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. describing the full name and filename of the font) HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT (V5 document types). Page 19 of 21 sets up the Start->Programs-> CATIA->CATIA V5R6 default environment shortcut. If the process is already running. describing the full name and filename of the font) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Fonts (Windows 95 and 98) (sets up fonts in True Type format. On Windows NT and Windows 2000 only. Nodelock Key Management V5R6 and Software Management V5R6 commands. and the Start>Programs-> CATIA-> Tools menu containing the Environment Editor V5R6.doc\src\basuggs02. The backbone needs to be set up on each computer running applications which need to communicate. it is not restarted. When one application attempts to communicate with another.Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time and the environment file name is CATIA. Registry The following registry keys are modified: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\DassaultSystemes (the key "CNext" is added containing the key "B06" which specifies the destination folder) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Uninstall\Dassault_Systemes B06 (specifies the application name for uninstallation purposes) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\AppPaths (sets up the Start->Run.htm 1/30/01 .B06. Please note that this command is only recommended for advanced users because it is potentially dangerous. Installing the product sets up the communications backbone on your computer. command so you can enter the cnext command to start a session) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Fonts (Windows NT and Windows 2000) (sets up fonts in True Type format.V5R6. the backbone process is started automatically.txt . A timeout is triggered once there are no more clients attempting to communicate with other applications. used to support process interoperability for distributed application networks in heterogeneous environments. folders and files are not protected. Registry entries. you can protect access to these entries using system tools.. for example the regedt32 command. Communications Backbone Files The communications backbone is a CATIA -specific implementation of message-oriented middleware (MOM)..

log For example: C:\TEMP\cxinst. and C:\Windows\system on Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 (certain Windows system libraries will be installed if the existing libraries on your system are not up to date) An installation log is created in the current temporary directory.Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time Page 20 of 21 ENOVIA Portal DMU Navigator and ENOVIA Portal WEB to communicate: ENOVIA Portal WEB can load geometry and product structures into a viewer such as ENOVIA Portal DMU Navigator. An installation sets up the communications backbone by creating the following lines: catiav5bb 6666/tcp catiav5run 6667/tcp in the file: %windir%\system32\drivers\etc\services Note that the line: CATDeviceBroker 6668/tcp which concerns peripheral device handling is also added to this file. 4D Navigator or CATIA. located by default in: %TEMP%\cxinst.log Administrator Setting Environments file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. If you do not want to set up communication ports during the installation. Other Folders An installation also affects the following: C:\Winnt\system32 on Windows NT and Windows 2000.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basuggs02. you can always edit the above-mentioned files manually later.

) are stored in: C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATTemp. CATReport (Windows 2000) C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp. etc. All end users can now log onto the same computer and run a Version 5 session. permanent administrator settings are created in: C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings (on Windows NT) C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings (Windows 2000) C:\Windows\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings (on Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98). CATReport. CATReport (on Windows NT) C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp.doc\src\basuggs02.htm 1/30/01 .Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time Page 21 of 21 When running a session at the end of the installation procedure (as administrator). Temporary administrator settings (CATTemp. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. because the environment created at installation is global. CATReport (on Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98).

2. button. Note that you are not able to selectively uninstall a configuration or product. select the Start>Settings->Control Panel. Log on as an administrator.doc\src\basuggs03. An Install/Uninstall dialog box appears. then double-click the Add/Remove Programs control. 1..htm 1/30/01 . On the Windows desktop. Select the item "Dassault Systemes Software B06" from the list. then click the Add/Remove. you must remove any user environments you may have created after the initial installation using the tools described in "Customizing Your Environment on Windows". and looks something like this (depending on the software installed on your computer): 3. Uninstalling relies on Windows-compliant tools enabling anyone familiar with Windows procedures and concepts to uninstall the software without assistance. you will not be able to uninstall the software.Uninstalling CATIA Version 5 on Windows Page 1 of 3 Uninstalling Version 5 on Windows This task explains how to remove the Version 5 files. Otherwise. Prior to removing the software. or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group.. You must belong to the Administrators group. A message informs you that the folder: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

you were blocked. Before. Open a command prompt (MS-DOS) window. ALL the installed configurations and products will be removed. 4. The program removes: the installation folder all desktop items (environment icon. This command removes the software in the same way as the Add/Remove Programs control. Uninstalling in Batch Mode On WINDOWS. a message will prompt you to click the OK button if you want to automatically clean up the registry and continue the installation. Enter the following command: Unload_Dir\DSUninstall. 2. However. Start->Programs-> CATIA menu) the last environment created all registry entries except for the components specified below.htm 1/30/01 . 1. What Is Not Removed? Note that the following components are not removed: the fonts installed with the software any system libraries installed to update your system. The item name for the English documentation will be. and prompts you to confirm that you want to continue and remove all the software. Click Yes to confirm. note that the procedure automatically kills any running processes which use the version you are uninstalling. your registry will be corrupted. Now. You can also use this command to remove the online documentation. you can also uninstall in batch mode by executing a command file. If you delete the installation folder instead of uninstalling cleanly using the Add/Remove Programs control via the Start->Settings command.bat where "Unload_dir" may be. for example: C:\Program Files\DassaultSystemes\B06.Uninstalling CATIA Version 5 on Windows Page 2 of 3 is about to be removed. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. for example: "Dassault Systemes CATIA EnglishDocumentation B06". The Start->Programs-> CATIA menu will not be removed if it still contains environments created using the tools described in "Customizing Your Environment on Windows".doc\src\basuggs03. You may be prompted to kill any running processes which use the version you are uninstalling. when you attempted to reinstall.

htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basuggs03.Uninstalling CATIA Version 5 on Windows Page 3 of 3 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

for example. If you are running AIX or HP-UX. The concepts.htm 1/30/01 . refer to "What You Need Before Installing Version 5" to check you have all the hardware and software prerequisites. 2. Insert the CD-ROM for your UNIX operating system into the drive. 4. You can determine if the drive has already been mounted by typing the command: mount In the output lines. If you are running IRIX or Solaris. run the command: lsdev -C -c cdrom If a line like this is not displayed: cd0 Available 00-01-00-30-CD-ROM Drive you need to add the CD-ROM drive by using the smit AIX command. 1.Installing Version 5 on a UNIX Workstation for the First Time Page 1 of 7 Installing Version 5 on a UNIX Workstation for the First Time This task explains how to install the Version 5 files for the first time on a single workstation running UNIX. If the CD-ROM drive is not mounted. On HP-UX. procedures and look and feel of the installation procedure for Windows have been carried over to the UNIX environment in order to provide a common Version 5 installation interface for all supported operating systems. inserting the CD-ROM declares and mounts the CDROM automatically (unless you disabled this feature). On AIX and HP-UX. by using the sam HP-UX command. From start to finish. check whether the CD-ROM drive is mounted. On AIX.doc\src\basuggs04. you should see a list of mounted file systems. and set up your nodelocked licenses. 3. you will have to mount it before proceeding. run the command: cat /etc/fstab If a line like this is not displayed: /dev/dsk/c201d1s0 /CDROM cdfs ro 0 0 0 you need to add the CD-ROM drive. Logon as root. The CD-ROM drive file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Before starting the installation. this task should take approximately 15 minutes. for example. check whether the CD-ROM drive is declared.

by typing the commands: mount -v cdrfs -r /dev/cd0 /cdrom (AIX) mount /cdrom (HP-UX) 6. you may use the CD-ROM directly and set the value of the CATDocView variable to the CD-ROM mount point. Change directory to the CD-ROM mount point and enter the command: . Then. The CD-ROM drive has already been mounted on your local system if a line similar to one of the following lines appears in the list: /dev/cd0 cdrom cdfrs "date" ro (AIX) cdrom on device readonly on "date" (HP-UX) where "date" is the current date. however. On AIX and HP-UX. or: . Optionally.doc\src\basuggs04. For information about the setcatenv command. refer to "Customizing Your Environment on UNIX". The setup program checks you have the correct prerequisites. If you want to install the documentation. mount the CD-ROM drive. The installation steps are approximately the same as on Windows. The Version 5 setup program will be run. use the setcatenv command to change the value of the CATDocView variable to point to the location where the CDROM contents were copied. that on UNIX you cannot install the online documentation directly from within the installation procedure. as described in "Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time". the Welcome dialog box greets you.htm 1/30/01 . About the Environment Created on UNIX A CATIA Version 5 installation has the following impact on your workstation: Installation Path The software is installed (if you used the default location) in the folder directory: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. copy the contents of the CD-ROM into a directory with sufficient free disk space.log What about the online documentation? Note./start to start the installation procedure. 5. if necessary.Installing Version 5 on a UNIX Workstation for the First Time Page 2 of 7 In the output lines. you should see a list of mounted file systems. An installation log is created in: $HOME/cxinst./start -s if you want to start the installation procedure without the accompanying music. The setup program invokes a full self-explanatory graphical interface which walks you through the installation. Then.

B06. You do not see the icon immediately. To display the icon.sh (for use with Korn or Bourne shells) CATIA .doc\src\basuggs04. You can also log off and log on to display the icon. HP-UX and Solaris The /CATCDE directory required for CDE desktops is now created in the /CATEnv directory. you must click the Application manager icon on the CDE front panel. The installation creates in this directory the following global environments required to set the Version 5 runtime environment variables: CATIA . CDE Desktop on AIX. the installation procedure offers you the choice between replacing it or creating a new environment with a different name. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.B06.B06 (file required for graphic representation of environment in the CDE desktop) /CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIA. Note that. This environment contains links to the application desktop filetree located under /CATCDE (described above). but you can create the /CATEnv directory anywhere you like.dt (action description file for CATIA document types) /CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/icons/C (contains icons for CATIA document types). then double-click the Reload Applications icon. if an environment already exists. The default is the root $HOME directory (typically "/").Installing Version 5 on a UNIX Workstation for the First Time /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a Environment Page 3 of 7 The installation offers you the choice of where to create the /CATEnv directory.htm 1/30/01 . The installation creates the following filetree required for integrating CATIA into the CDE desktop: l l l l l /CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/appmanager/C/CATIA/CATIA. go into the Desktop Tools cabinet. The result of registering the application is that the /etc/dt/appconfig/ environment on your workstation is modified. Note: UNIX system administrators can also setup a /CATEnv environment directly in the home directory of end users.csh (for use with C shell).dt (action description file for environment icon) /CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIA.V5R6.V5R6.dt (action description file for CATIA directory) /CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIAFiles.B06.V5R6.V5R6. The application is registered in the CDE application base via the "dtAppIntegrate" command which is executed automatically during the installation.

To display the icon. The visible impact on the CDE desktop is: Page 4 of 7 the creation of the CATIA directory in the Application Manager cabinet. check the option "Set up communications ports (strongly recommended)" when prompted. joystick).B06 (file required for graphic representation of the environment in the Magic SGI desktop) and installs the following files in the following system directories: /usr/lib/filetype/install/Dassault_Systemes.V5R6. The communications backbone is a CATIA -specific implementation of messageoriented middleware (MOM). A timeout is file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. The visible impact on the SGI desktop is in File -> Applications is : the creation of the CATIA directory the creation in this directory of the default global environment icon: CATIA . spacemouse. Magic SGI Desktop on IRIX The /CATSGI directory required for SGI desktops is created in the /CATEnv directory.htm 1/30/01 .Installing Version 5 on a UNIX Workstation for the First Time display the icon. used to support process interoperability for distributed application networks in heterogeneous environments. accessible via the front panel the creation in this directory of the default global environment icon CATIA V5R6.CATIAFiles. CATIA Environments. The installation creates the following directory required for integrating CATIA into the Magic SGI desktop: /CATEnv/CATSGI/ CATIA / CATIA . When one application attempts to communicate with another. To do so.doc\src\basuggs04. the backbone process is started automatically. You do not see the icon immediately.V5R6 Communications Backbone Files The installation procedure allows you to declare on your computer: a port reserved for the communications backbone process a port reserved for starting the communications backbone process automatically a port reserved for processing events when using peripheral devices (spaceball. it is not restarted.ftr (action description file for CATIA document types) /usr/lib/filetype/install/Dassault_Systemes.ftr (action description file for environment icon) /usr/lib/filetype/install/iconlib (contains icons for CATIA document types). If the process is already running. Installing CATIA sets up the communications backbone on your computer. you must log off and log on. Installing on IRIX takes longer than on the other UNIX platforms because the Magic SGI desktop is recompiled. The backbone needs to be set up on each computer running applications which need to communicate.

4D Navigator or CATIA. A timeout is triggered once there are no more clients attempting to communicate with other applications. For more information about peripheral device handling. The nodelock file is created by default in: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. that is. An installation sets up the communications backbone by creating the following lines: catiav5bb 6666/tcp catiav5run 6667/tcp in the file: /etc/services and the following line: catiav5bb stream tcp nowait root /path/CATSysDemon in the file: /etc/inetd. If you do not want to set up communication ports during the installation. you can always edit the above-mentioned files manually later.conf where "path" is the path containing the CATIA executable files.Installing Version 5 on a UNIX Workstation for the First Time Page 5 of 7 started automatically. For example: catiav5bb stream tcp nowait root /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/solaris_a/code/bin/CATSysDemon Note that the line: CATDeviceBroker 6668/tcp which concerns peripheral device handling is also added to this file. This is needed to manage nodelock licensing. If the process is already running. it is not restarted.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basuggs04. A typical scenario involving the use of the inter-application communications backbone is implemented to allow the ENOVIA Portal DMU Navigator and ENOVIA Portal WEB to communicate: ENOVIA Portal WEB can load geometry and product structures into a viewer such as ENOVIA Portal DMU Navigator. if LUM is not already installed on your workstation. refer to "CATIA device broker". Other Directories The Version 5 installation procedure on UNIX sets up on your workstation a filetree for storing IBM License Use Management Runtime (LUM) nodelock licenses.

administrator settings are created in the /CATSettings and /CATTemp directories.V5R6_2. IRIX. the same environment is created each time. CATIA . -D: specifies the /CATEnv environment directory. because the environment created at installation is global. Solaris) Administrator Setting Environments Page 6 of 7 When running a session at the end of the installation procedure (as administrator). except that the name is incremented like this each time: CATIA . -lic "pathname": specifies the path and name of the license certificate to import for nodelocked licensing. in which case the environment remains. The default unload directory is: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06. you can choose to replace it or create a new one. and using the same name.V5R6_1. -env replace: if you already installed CATIA . etc.htm . -exe: runs a CATIA session at the -s: silent mode (without music). All end users can now log onto the same workstation and run a CATIA Version 5 session. -v: verbose mode. Note that the "replace" option does not replace existing environments that you may have created using the "new" option (or using the "Create New Environment" option when installing using the GUI). and whose name is incremented.B06. in this case. end of the installation. -env new|replace: -env new: if the environment file already exists./start with at least one of the following arguments: -u: specifies the unload directory.V5R6_1. you may then have deleted the installation directory. 1/30/01 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.sh.B06.B06.doc\src\basuggs04. If you install the same level of CATIA several times. To perform a batch installation. for example: CATIA .sh. change directory to the CD-ROM mount point and enter the command: . -newdir: creates the unload directory if it doesn't exist. The default environment directory is /CATENV. Start Command Syntax The start batch command lets you install Version 5 without the graphical user interface.Installing Version 5 on a UNIX Workstation for the First Time /var/ifor/nodelock (AIX) /opt/lum/ls/conf/nodelock (HP-UX. use the "-env replace" argument to overwrite the existing initial environment and create a new one during the installation.sh.

You have to type the list of configurations and/or products.prd. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Reminder: if you run the command without arguments. -orbixport port1: specifies the Orbix daemon port number -orbixbase port2: specifies the starting port number for daemon-run servers -orbixrange: specifies the range for daemon-run servers -orbixboot: boot Orbix daemon at restart -DirCATIAV4: specifies CATIA V4 path for administrator home directory -DirVPM1: specifies VPM1 path for administrator home directory.doc\src\basuggs04. joystick).Installing Version 5 on a UNIX Workstation for the First Time -v: verbose mode. -h: displays help. -libCATIAV4 V422-1/V423-1 : specifies which version of CATIA V4 to use (V422-1 or V423-1). -VRPort port3: specifies the port reserved for processing events when using peripheral devices (spaceball. -l "list_to_unload": specifies the list of configurations and/or products Page 7 of 7 to unload. which you can obtain by running the command using the "list" argument. These are the names you must type.htm 1/30/01 .slt.. -backbonePorts port1 port2: specifies the ports reserved for the communication backbone . -noSetupPorts: specifies you do not want to set up any communication ports. and product names look like this: KIN. The arguments: -list -all -l "list_to_unload" are mutually exclusive.default values are 6666 and 6667". -all: unloads all the configurations and the products on the CD-ROM. configuration names look like this: ME2. spacemouse. In the list. the installation will be started using the graphical user interface. Separate the names using a blank. -list: lists the configurations and products on the CD-ROM.

sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source /CATEnv/ CATIA . then enter the following command to set up the environment: .V5R6. 2.csh (for C shell) 3.sh (and CATIA .B06.B06.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basuggs05. HP-UX and Solaris The delcatenv command removes only the following components: /CATEnv/ CATIA .B06.csh) if you specified these environment names using the -e option file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug./CATEnv/ CATIA .V5R6. Prior to removing the software. CDE Desktop on AIX. Log on as root. Delete the environments you created using the command: delcatenv -e env_name -d /CATEnv -v yes -a global -desktop yes This command is located in the directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/code/bin where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a and "env_name" is the name of the environment.B06 -d /CATEnv -v yes -a global desktop yes Note that environments cannot be deleted using simple operating system commands. . you must remove any user environments you may have created after the initial installation using the tools described in "Customizing Your Environment on UNIX". For example: delcatenv -e CATIA.V5R6. The delcatenv command is essential for removing all trace of environments in the desktop environment. Go to your /CATEnv directory. 1.B06. End users who set up their own user environments using the setcatenv command can only remove them using the delcatenv command.Uninstalling Version 5 on UNIX Page 1 of 2 Uninstalling Version 5 on UNIX This task explains how to remove the CATIA Version 5 files from your workstation on UNIX.V5R6.V5R6.

htm 1/30/01 .B06. you can then delete the installation directory using the command: rm -rf /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06 If a CATIA application runs a DMU application. the orbixd& process is run.To delete the CATIA application correctly.doc\src\basuggs05. 4.csh) if you specified these environment names using the -e option /CATEnv/CATSGI/ CATIA / CATIA .sh (and CATIA .V5R6.dt Magic SGI Desktop on IRIX The delcatenv command removes the following components: /CATEnv/ CATIA .B06 (file required for graphic representation of the environment in the Magic SGI desktop) if you specified this environment name using the -e option.B06.B06 (file required for graphic representation of environment in the CDE desktop) /CATEnv/CATCDE/ CATIA /dt/appconfig/types/C/ CATIA .V5R6.V5R6. Only when all environments have been deleted.V5R6.Uninstalling Version 5 on UNIX Page 2 of 2 environment names using the -e option /CATEnv/CATCDE/ CATIA /dt/appconfig/appmanager/C/ CATIA / CATIA .B06. use the following commands: Run: ps –ef& to list processes running on the workstation. then: kill –9 to kill the orbixd& process.V5R6. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

.Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager Page 1 of 6 Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager This task explains how to reserve product licenses during a session using the Licensing tab via the Tools>Options.Mechanical Design (MD2) and CATIA Drawing Production (DP2).. 1.htm 1/30/01 . it will look like this if you installed the configurations CATIA .doc\src\basuggs06. and imported a nodelock license for the CATIA . In our example. 2. Select the General category. command.. then the Licensing tab to display the Licensing tab. You must select at least one configuration license.. command. Select the Tools->Options. You will not be able to work with any Version 5 products until you have first reserved the corresponding licenses.Mechanical Design (MD2) configuration: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. The role of the Licensing tab is to allow you to reserve licenses before using these products.

none of the check buttons is checked. a sublist is displayed containing the list of all the installed licenses. for example. A "+" button is displayed next to the license in the list. In our example. Click the "+" button to switch to expanded mode.doc\src\basuggs06. if you have not previously reserved any licenses.Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager Page 2 of 6 The list contains all the installed configurations and products. the MD2 option is checked because we imported a nodelock license for this configuration (CATIA Mechanical Design (MD2) configuration (DS58BB40000 . preceded by the Any License option. or set up for use by different groups. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. the corresponding configuration is preselected in the list.htm 1/30/01 . Note that. Local: you are running on a local display and you are working with a nodelocked or server license Remote: you are running on a remote display and you are working with a server license only Server Timeout: a slider lets you specify approximately the amount of time you are prepared to wait for a server license to be made available by the license server.MD2) during the installation. for example. This can be the case. from a few seconds to a few minutes. the license imported is already reserved. If you entered a nodelock license during the installation. A list of licenses may exist. Clicking this button lets you switch between compact mode (the default) and expanded mode. when licenses are served by different servers. In the upper part of the tab: Target id: specifies the target id of your computer Display Type: informs you whether you are running on a local or remote display. In compact mode. In this mode. when you have several identical configuration licenses with different serial numbers.

htm 1/30/01 . If not. which means that you consider any of the licenses in the list to be sufficient for your needs. Click the "-" button to return to compact mode. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. just click the Any License option.doc\src\basuggs06.Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager Page 3 of 6 Your administrator may instruct you to reserve a specific license in the list.

the status Not Granted means that you attempted to reserve a license that is not available (nodelock license expired.DrawingProduction 2 Configuration". the status No License appears next to configurations and products which have been installed. you will see Local or Server which informs you whether the license is a nodelock (local) license or a server license. the name of the server will be displayed like this: Server (ip:server_name) where "server_name" is the name of the license server. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Exit and restart your session.htm 1/30/01 . and the check button cannot be checked. server license expired. Furthermore. refer to "Running in Demo Mode". the corresponding nodelock license was imported the status Granted appears next to the products in the list which belong to that configuration. 4. Click OK. You will be able to work in demo mode if you registered and reserved at least one configuration license.Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager Page 4 of 6 All configurations are considered as custom configurations. The configuration name is grayed out in the list.doc\src\basuggs06. When you install a configuration. Below each license. during the installation. For example. In our example. etc. the license will be reserved by default when you start your session. but for which you do not have a license. The product names in the list are grayed out and the check buttons cannot be checked: this is because. network server down. the "DP2 . note that: the check button next to. You need to restart your session after reserving configuration and/or product licenses. Check the check buttons for the configurations and/or products for which you want to reserve a license. When you are working with nodelock licenses. in our example. 5. 3. even if you unchecked the corresponding check button. for example. If you are using a server license.). no licenses exist for the individual products. the configuration "MD2" is checked because.CATIA . For more information about the demo mode. the list in the dialog box will contain: custom configurations appear at the top the names of the products appear after the name of the last configuration. and checked the Demo Mode option.

refer to "Customizing Your Environment on Windows" . "Not All Licenses Available" Contact your administrator. Page 5 of 6 Licensing settings are stored in a settings file. For background information about locking settings. For more information about customizing environments.htm 1/30/01 . "No License Available for Requested Configuration(s)" Click OK and select at least one valid configuration license using the Licensing tab. but no configuration license" Click OK and select at least one configuration license using the Licensing tab. "Environment xxx incorrect" Set a valid environment using the setcatenv command.Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager You need to restart your session after reserving configuration and/or product licenses. "You have not requested one or more product licenses. "No Configuration/Product Available" The path containing the information required to display the list of configurations/products. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. The settings active in the License tab depend on what you set the last time you used it. refer to Locking Settings. referenced by the CATICPath environment variable. If you run a Version 5 session in administrator mode. is incorrect. Troubleshooting Messages You may encounter one of the following messages when using the Licensing Manager: "Environment xxx not set or incorrect" Set an environment using the setcatenv command.doc\src\basuggs06. or the information is incomplete. you can now lock individual configuration and/or product licenses to control their usage.

htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basuggs06.Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager Page 6 of 6 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

the clipboard is unavailable for cutting. and save them as non-demo documents. 3. A message informs you to restart your session. but you cannot save them.doc\src\basuggs07.htm 1/30/01 . you can open only specially marked Version 4 or Version 5 demo documents you cannot embed CATIA documents in OLE documents you cannot open CATIA documents using OLE technology you cannot save documents on Windows. By default. apart from the few exceptions listed below. or at least one configuration license (which automatically provides access to the demo mode). You must have already registered either one demonstration license. then the Licensing tab in the General category.. 2. Click OK and restart CATIA .. You can also display it by selecting the Tools->Options. The CATIA Version 5 application window is opened in demo mode. Note that when running a normal (non-demo) session. demo mode is not activated. The License Manager is displayed automatically after starting CATIA Version 5 (either for the first time. copying and pasting you cannot record or execute macros you can create new workbench-specific documents. In demo mode: the automatic save (roll) mechanism is deactivated. What Is Demo Mode? Running in demo mode lets you use all the features of all the configurations and/or products installed.Running in Demo Mode Page 1 of 1 Running in Demo Mode This task explains how to run CATIA Version 5 in demo mode. you can read specially marked Version 4 or Version 5 demo documents. and click OK. command. 1. Check the Demo Mode option. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. or each time you start a session until you reserve a license). Display the License Manager.

Installing Additional Products Page 1 of 4 Installing Additional Products This task explains how to install additional products to an existing installation. In the following example. Proceed in exactly the same fashion as a normal installation. On Windows.htm 1/30/01 . Log on as an administrator. enter the new nodelock licenses (if any) for the additional products. 2. The licenses are added to the existing nodelock file. When prompted. the MD2 and DP2 configurations have already been installed: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. we recommend that you first shut down any such programs. Continue with the installation until a dialog box appears listing the configurations and products you have already installed. 3. 5.doc\src\basuggs08. 1. to prevent the installation from hanging due to concurrently running programs such as screen savers or virus scanning programs. The installation procedure is the same as for a first-time installation. with a few minor differences. 4.

Click Next. Click Complete to install all the software. or Custom to display a list containing the additional configurations and/or products you can install. This displays a list of the configurations and products you have not yet installed: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 8.htm 1/30/01 . The Setup Type dialog box appears: 7. Click Next.doc\src\basuggs08.Installing Additional Products Page 2 of 4 6.

doc\src\basuggs08. If you previously installed a service pack. and complete the installation as before. you will be prompted to update your existing environment. When installing additional products on UNIX. Select the additional configurations and/or products you want to install. or delete it and file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.Installing Additional Products Page 3 of 4 9. you will be prompted to reinstall the service pack near the end of the installation.htm 1/30/01 .

htm 1/30/01 . file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. or delete it and create a new environment.Installing Additional Products Page 4 of 4 When installing additional products on UNIX.doc\src\basuggs08. you will be prompted to update your existing environment.

If you attempt to do so. To import your electronic license certificate (if you have one). you will be reminded that using the tool requires administrator privileges. the number of days left before the license expires is indicated.doc\src\basuggs09. The File menu contains the following commands: Import Add Read Exit Note that you can display the tool without logging on as administrator. 3. 1. but you will not be able to use it. or run the program: install_root\code\bin\CATNodeLockMgt where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is. by default: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\intel_a The "Nodelock License Manager" dialog box appears: Note that the target id of the computer on which you are performing the installation is displayed inside the dialog box.Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation Page 1 of 4 Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation This task explains how to enroll nodelock licenses outside the installation procedure. and display the number of days before your license expires. Note that: a green light opposite the license serial number means that the license will still be valid for at least 30 days an orange light opposite the license serial number means that the license will still be valid for less than 30 days a red light opposite the license serial number means that the license has expired. Select the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools->Nodelock Key Management V5R6 command. If the license is still valid.htm 1/30/01 . file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 2. Log on as an administrator. select the File>Import command. A check is performed automatically to verify whether your license is still valid.

This is useful when you do not have a license certificate file to import. On Windows NT. To add a license. 4. it will be created in: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Ibm\Lum\nodelock This procedure can be used both after installing for the first time and after installing additional products. The "Add License Manually" dialog box appears: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs09. select the File->Add command. the nodelock file will be updated in: C:\ifor\ls\conf\nodelock (Windows 2000) If the nodelock file is new. this imports the license and creates the file named "nodelock" (or updates the existing "nodelock" file) in the default LUM environment: C:\ifor\ls\conf\nodelock On Windows 2000. if you already installed LUM elsewhere.lic". and your license is sent to you on paper. then click the Open button to import the certificate.Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation Page 2 of 4 This displays a file selection box which opens with the C:\Temp folder contents displayed: Explore your filetree and select the license certificate file which uses the prefix ".htm 1/30/01 .

B06. and the new license contains the same serial number as the original configuration a serial number does not exist for standalone (shareable) products.V5R6./CATEnv/ CATIA . go to your /CATEnv directory. . 2.Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation Page 3 of 4 Type the following information (contained in your license on paper) in the appropriate fields: Version Password Serial Number There may or may not be a serial number. This displays the license in the "Nodelock Key File Content" box: On UNIX 1.csh (for C shell) 3. Enter the following command to display the "Nodelock License Manager" dialog file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. select the File->Read command. The "Nodelock" file is created or updated just as if you had imported a license certificate.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source /CATEnv/ CATIA . click the Add button to add the license.doc\src\basuggs09. To enroll licenses after the installation. a new license is provided. then enter the following command to set up the environment: .V5R6. Log on as root.htm 1/30/01 .B06. 5. depending on the case: a serial number exists for all configurations: all configurations are custom configurations if you already have a custom configuration. To read a license. Annotation Comment Then. you can extend it by adding products: in this case.

you can also enroll licenses after the installation by editing the nodelock file created by default in: /var/ifor/nodelock (AIX) /opt/lum/ls/conf/nodelock (HP-UX. you can also run the command in batch: install_root\code\bin\CATNodelockMgtB (Windows) install_root/code/bin/CATNodelockMgtB (UNIX) (where "install_root" is the name of your installation directory) with the following options: -i: name of nodelock file to be imported -c yes|no: automatic license validity check -v yes|no: verbose mode (default yes) -h: help. mode (default yes) file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. IRIX. While not recommended.htm 1/30/01 . Solaris) Batch Mode On all platforms.Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation Page 4 of 4 3. Enter the following command to display the "Nodelock License Manager" dialog box: CATNodeLockMgt This command is located in the directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/code/bin where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a The user interface on UNIX is the same as the user interface on Windows described above.doc\src\basuggs09.

htm 1/30/01 . the online documentation may be provided on a suite of CD-ROMs. there are two CD-ROMs: l l the first CD-ROM contains online documentation for the Infrastructure. Mechanical and Shape and Styling solutions the second CD-ROM contains online documentation for the Analysis.doc\src\basuggs10. 2. Installing the online documentation is very similar to installing the CATIA Version 5 software. and double-click the Setup. If you click the Cancel button before installing the final CDROM. Once the documentation files on the first CD-ROM have been installed. For CATIA. Insert the CD-ROM. and insert the next CD-ROM when prompted to continue installing the documentation files on the next CD-ROM. Depending on your product line. You do not need to have administrator privileges to install the online documentation. install only one out of two. 3. Click OK. or accept the default folder which is: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc 5. Follow the instructions.exe program on the CD-ROM to start the installation. Plant. Installing the Online Documentation On Your Computer on Windows Follow this procedure if you did not install the documentation during the code installation procedure. 4. and continue the installation until you have inserted the last CD-ROM. Note that you must install all the documentation CD-ROMs: you cannot. NC Manufacturing and Product Synthesis solutions. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. You will be prompted to specify the destination folder. Log onto your computer. This sets up the documentation in the default folder. the documentation installation procedure does not start automatically. you will be prompted to insert the next CD-ROM. Use the Windows Explorer to explore the documentation CD-ROM. for example.Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code Page 1 of 5 Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code This task explains how to install the online documentation after installing the code. Unlike when installing the software. 1. the documentation files previously installed will be uninstalled.

Insert the CD-ROM for your UNIX operating system into the drive. 3. 1. select the item "Dassault Systemes CATIA EnglishDocumentation B06" (if the documentation is in English) from the list.exe program will be present if you have installed at least one Dassault Systemes or non-Dassault Systemes product using InstallShield in English. run the command: lsdev -C -c cdrom If a line like this is not displayed: cd0 Available 00-01-00-30-CD-ROM Drive you need to add the CD-ROM drive by using the smit AIX command. Uninstalling the Documentation on Windows In Batch Mode Enter the command: C:\Winnt\IsUninst. On AIX. If you installed products using InstallShield in other languages. then click the Add/Remove.. check whether the CD-ROM drive is declared. select the Start->Settings->Control Panel.doc\src\basuggs10.exe: German IsUn040C. run the command: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.isu" where "XXXX" is the name of the documentation package. the following programs will be present.htm 1/30/01 .Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code Uninstalling the Documentation on Windows Page 2 of 5 1. In the Install/Uninstall dialog box. 2. the additional documentation will be installed in the same folder. for example: CATIA EnglishDocumentation. 2. for example. then confirm when prompted. button. and there is no tool for installing the online documentation from the CD-ROM. Installing the Online Documentation on Your Workstation on UNIX On UNIX. copy the contents of the CD-ROM(s) into a directory with sufficient free disk space as explained below. To install the documentation. On the Windows desktop. If you are running AIX or HP-UX. you cannot install the online documentation directly from within the code installation procedure.exe -a -f"Doc_Install_Path\UninstXXXX. in another language). depending on the language: IsUn0407. then double-click the Add/Remove Programs control..exe: French IsUn0411. The IsUninst. Logon as root.exe: Japanese When installing additional documentation for the same CATIA version (for example. On HP-UX.

When the code was installed. for example. you should see a list of mounted file systems. if necessary. on AIX: mkdir /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/aix_a/doc file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basuggs10. On AIX and HP-UX. by typing the commands: mount -v cdrfs -r /dev/cd0 /cdrom (AIX) mount /cdrom (HP-UX) 6. 5. If the CD-ROM drive is not mounted. mount the CD-ROM drive. you will have to mount it before proceeding. The CD-ROM drive has already been mounted on your local system if a line similar to one of the following lines appears in the list: /dev/cd0 cdrom cdfrs "date" ro (AIX) cdrom on device readonly on "date" (HP-UX) where "date" is the current date. 4. If you are running IRIX or Solaris. You can determine if the drive has already been mounted by typing the command: mount In the output lines. for example. the following default directory was created: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a We suggest that you create a documentation folder inside the "OS_a" directory using the following command. Create a default directory into which you will copy the documentation.Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code cat /etc/fstab If a line like this is not displayed: /dev/dsk/c201d1s0 /CDROM cdfs ro 0 0 0 Page 3 of 5 you need to add the CD-ROM drive. On AIX and HP-UX.htm 1/30/01 . by using the sam HP-UX command. check whether the CD-ROM drive is mounted. inserting the CD-ROM declares and mounts the CDROM automatically (unless you disabled this feature).

you must update the value for the CATDocView variable in your default environment to specify the location of the documentation files. you may use the CD-ROM directly and set the value of the CATDocView variable to the CD-ROM mount point. Then. 8.htm (German) Japanesehomepage. Accessing the Online Documentation Directly From the CD-ROM Drive: UNIX Optionally.htm (Japanese) Italianhomepage. then use your HTML browser to open the following file (depending on the language) to display the CATIA Version 5 online documentation homepage: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm (French) Germanhomepage. If you want to browse the documentation directly from the CD-ROM drive. for example on AIX: cd and enter the command: cp -r /cdrom/* . refer to "Managing Environments".htm (Italian). and copy the files on the second CD-ROM to the same location using the same command. insert the documentation CD-ROM into the drive.doc\src\basuggs10. We recommend that you install the documentation in the default location. insert the second CD-ROM. insert the documentation CD-ROM into the drive. you will not be able to access the documentation. mount the CD-ROM where necessary. Change directory to the directory you just created. access the device using the Windows Explorer. If you want to consult the documentation directly from the CD-ROM drive. Using your browser. locate and open the documentation homepage for your product line. Accessing the Online Documentation Directly From the CD-ROM Drive: Windows Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. This location is also the default online documentation directory. and double-click the following file (depending on the language) to display the CATIA Version 5 online documentation homepage: CATIAhomepage. and without running a Version 5 session.htm 1/30/01 .htm (English) Frenchhomepage. If you decide to install the documentation elsewhere than in the default location.Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code Page 4 of 5 into which you can then copy the documentation files. use the setcatenv command to change the value of the CATDocView variable to point to the location where the CD-ROM contents were copied. For more information. remove the first CD-ROM. To do so. 7. to copy the documentation files from the first CD-ROM to the current directory. Otherwise. and without running a Version 5 session. then start a CATIA session and select the Help-> CATIA V5 Help command.

and map the appropriate network drive before starting a session. 2. press F1 for contextual help. Log onto another computer where there are no documentation files. Select Tools->Map Network Drive.htm (Italian).htm (English) Frenchhomepage.Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code CATIAhomepage. Install the documentation files on a computer as explained above.htm 1/30/01 . 4. Select the Start->Programs->Windows Explorer command to run the Explorer. In the dialog box. Installing the Online Documentation on a Server: Windows Page 5 of 5 You may want to install the documentation files on a server to save disk space.htm (Japanese) Italianhomepage. 1. 3. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm (German) Japanesehomepage.doc\src\basuggs10.. 5. You set up a documentation server the same way as you set up a Version 5 code server. For example. specify the path where the documentation is located. refer to "Enabling User Access to the Software Over the Network". Installing the Online Documentation on a Server: UNIX Copy the contents of the CD-ROM into a directory on the server with sufficient free disk space. 6. the samples will not work. if you attempt to activate the sample documents from within the online documentation without first installing the code. Wherever you install the documentation. A dialog box will prompt you to specify the online documentation path.htm (French) Germanhomepage.. For more information. Start a session and use one of the commands for obtaining help.

Running and Editing Macros Using Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications Transferring Version 5 Data Managing Document Links in Version 5 . Opening and Saving Documents Viewing the Spec Tree and the Geometry Area Selecting Objects Manipulating Objects Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass Dragging and Dropping Icons and Objects Printing Documents Capturing and Managing Images for the Album Viewing Objects Navigating Hiding and Showing Objects Using Rendering Styles Setting Lighting and Depth Effects Using Standard and User-Defined Views Using Layers and Layer Filters Recording.Basic Tasks Starting Version 5 Getting Help Editing in Context Within the Product Structure Creating.

Starting CATIA Version 5 Starting a Session on Windows Starting a Session on UNIX Starting a Session Using Document Icons Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on Windows Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on UNIX .

The default folder is: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\OS_a\code\bin where "OS_a" is: intel_a (Windows NT and Windows 2000 platform) win_a (Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 platforms). select the Start->Programs-> CATIA -> CATIA environment shortcut.Starting a Session on Windows Page 1 of 2 Starting a Session on Windows This task explains how to start the default CATIA Version 5 environment on Windows. On the taskbar.exe 2. 2.doc\src\basugbt0101.exe Run the following command to get help on the different options: CNEXT -h file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. double-click the CATIA V5R6 default environment shortcut . Method 3 1. On the taskbar. enter the command: cnext or: cnext.. Method 2 1. select the Start->Run. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product. 3.. Enter the command: cnext or: cnext. On the Windows desktop. This method lets you start a session using the last environment installed.htm 1/30/01 . Method 4 1. Click OK. Method 1 1. Open an MS-DOS window. command.

This prevents all users of that environment from changing the settings you locked. For more information. the following command runs CATIA and loads a CATPart document: cnext -object "e:\users\steve\Part1.CATScript or like this: cnext -env CATIA.Starting a Session on Windows CNEXT -h The options are: Page 2 of 2 specifies the name of the environment with which to start a session (for more information.CATScript if you want to run the macro in batch mode. if you want to run a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings. -env: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. refer to "Locking Settings". followed by arguments between " ". Enter the command: cnext -env "my_env" -admin where "my_env" is the name of the environment.htm 1/30/01 .V5R6.B06 -macro E:\tmp\Mymacro. Running Macros Using the CNEXT Command To start a session and run a macro automatically. for example.CATPart" Or.B06 -macro -batch E:\tmp\Mymacro. for example. by default. refer to "Managing Environments"). Starting a Session in Administrator Mode To Lock Settings 1. run the command like this: cnext -env CATIA. the default environment is started -e: starts a session and executes a command you specify -batch: starts a session in batch mode (an interactive session is not displayed) -c: starts a session and activates the workbench you specify -object: followed by object to load (between " ") when starting CATIA .V5R6.doc\src\basugbt0101. -object "arg1 arg2" -macro: starts the specified macro -admin: starts a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings -h: displays help.

This environment is created when the root userid performs the installation.V5R6.B06.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source /CATEnv/ CATIA . access the CATIA tab Application Manager in the desktop. 3. Method 1 1. Enter the command: CNEXT For information. Double-click the CATIA V5R6 icon.B06 icon. this command is located in the directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/code/bin/ where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a Run the following command to get help on the different options: CNEXT -h The options are: -e: starts a session and executes a command you specify -batch: starts a session in batch mode (an interactive session is not displayed) -c: starts a session and activates the workbench you specify -object: followed by object to load (between " ") when starting a session. HP-UX and Sun Solaris). Open the CATIA directory.htm 1/30/01 . Log on as either root or end user. 2.csh (for C shell) You may want to add this line to your .V5R6. On CDE desktops (AIX.V5R6. open the Application Manager cabinet on the front panel. the following command runs a session and loads a CATPart document: CNEXT -object "/tmp/Part1.Starting a Session on UNIX Page 1 of 4 Starting a Session on UNIX This task explains how to start the default CATIA Version 5 environment on UNIX.CATPart" file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 3. . then double-click the CATIA . Method 2 1./CATEnv/ CATIA . for example. Enter the following command to set up the environment required for startup: . On IRIX.doc\src\basugbt0102. 2.B06.profile file.

if this option is not specified. this option is also used to start other product lines. For example. Log on as either root or end user. -object "arg1 arg2" -macro: starts the specified macro -admin: starts a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings -h: displays help.B06 -object "/tmp/Part1. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. refer to "Managing Environments") -object: followed by object to load (between " ") when starting a session. for example.V5R6. this argument runs macros in batch mode (an interactive session is not displayed) -run: followed by the program to start (CATNodelockMgt. followed by arguments between " ". If the program you want to start requires parameters. 2. the following command runs a session and loads a CATPart document: catstart -d /CATEnv -env CATIA. the following command: catstart -d /CATEnv -env CATIA. CATSoftwareMgt.htm 1/30/01 . for example.doc\src\basugbt0102.V5R6. Method 3 1.B06 -run "CATSoftwareMgt L" lists the installed configurations and/or products on your workstation. for example). you must enclose the program name and the parameters between " ".Starting a Session on UNIX Page 2 of 4 Or. for example. Enter the command: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/code/command/ catstart where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a to start a session using the default environment. CATIA is started by default. -object "arg1 arg2" -macro: used with -object. Run the following command to get help on the different options: catstart -h The options are: -d: specifies another directory (other than $HOME/CATEnv) containing the environment -env: specifies a new environment name (for more information. this argument starts a session and runs the macro whose name you specify -batch: used with -object.CATPart" Or. followed by arguments between " ".

B06.V5R6./CATENV/ CATIA .B06 -object "macro /tmp/Mymacro. Starting a Session in Administrator Mode To Lock Settings Enter the commands: .Starting a Session on UNIX lists the installed configurations and/or products on your workstation. -remote: -user: Running Macros Using the catstart Command or the CNEXT Command To start CATIA and run a macro automatically./CATENV/ CATIA .htm 1/30/01 . run the command like this: catstart -d /CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R6.CATScript" This command is located in the directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/code/bin/ where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source/CATEnv/ CATIA .B06.B06.V5R6.doc\src\basugbt0102. Or like this: .csh (for C shell) catstart -run "CNEXT -admin" file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.V5R6. .CATScript" Page 3 of 4 catstart -d /CATEnv -env CATIA.CATScript if you want to run the macro in batch mode.B06.csh (for C shell) CNEXT -macro /tmp/Mymacro. .V5R6.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source /CATEnv/ CATIA .CATScript or: CNEXT -batch -macro /tmp/Mymacro. -s: non-verbose mode -h: displays help.B06 -object "-batch macro /tmp/Mymacro.V5R6.

htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugbt0102. You could also enter the command: CNEXT -admin where "my_env" is the name of the environment. For more information. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. refer to "Locking Settings".Starting a Session -run on UNIX catstart "CNEXT -admin" Page 4 of 4 if you want to run in administrator mode (using the default environment) for the purpose of locking settings. This prevents all users of that environment from changing the settings you locked.

l l l l this is a Product Structure document icon: this is a Part Design document icon: this is a Generative Drafting document icon: this is a CATIA Version 4 model icon: 2. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.Starting a Session Using Document Icons Page 1 of 1 Starting a Session Using Document Icons This task explains how to start a session using icons for existing documents. This will run Version 5. open the document and activate the workbench used to create the document originally. Note that this possibility is not available on IRIX. Method 2 1. Drag and drop a document icon onto an open Version 5 window.doc\src\basugbt0103. Method 3 1.htm 1/30/01 . Double-click on the icon. Drag and drop a document icon onto the CATIA V5R6 environment icon on your desktop (Windows only). Locate the document icon using your platform's Explorer (Windows) or File Manager (UNIX). Method 1 1.

You then simply use the tools on your operating system to choose the language in which you want to start your session. The following dialog box appears: . double-click the Regional Settings control. your session will be started in English.Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on Windows This task explains how to start Version 5 in a language other than English on Windows. select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command. If no language is chosen. then click the Regional Settings tab (if it is not displayed by default). On Windows 1. On Windows. Installing Version 5 installs the user interface files for all supported languages: English (default language) French German Japanese Italian.

it does not activate the keyboard map for the language you selected. 2. 3. The Input Locales tab is displayed. 4. Select the desired language from the languages available on the list. . On Windows NT only. selecting any of: French (Belgian) French (Canadian) French (Luxembourg) French (Standard) French (Swiss) will start the session in French. For example. Click OK. click the Input Locales tab if you want to select the input locale for your language. 5. English is selected. then start Version 5. In our example below.In our example above. The same applies to the other language variants. Select the appropriate input locale. Note that The Regional Settings tab does not activate your input locale: for example. you selected French (Standard).

.

If you install in the default installation directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/ where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a the following default environment is set up: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog (containing the English files) /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/French /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/German /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Japanese /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Italian This default environment (/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog) is pointed to by the environment variable: CATMsgCatalogPath. German and Japanese languages are already translated for you. The user interface files for the French.Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on UNIX This task explains how to start Version 5 in a language other than English on UNIX. . Installing Version 5 directly installs the user interface files (message catalogs) for the following languages: English (default language) French German Japanese.

.. What about the fonts for these languages? The installation also sets up in each language directory a file named "Dialog".What about the other languages? Installing the software also sets up in: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog a subdirectory for each additional language supported (but for which translated user interface files are not provided). your translated files will be loaded. your session will be started in English. How do I run Version 5 using translated files? Copy the file to be translated from: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog to: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Russian and translate the file. . The list of languages is: Czech Polish Russian Korean Simplified Chinese For example: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Russian /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/Czech /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog/. If no locale is chosen. 1. Open a shell window. comment out the previous font declarations and declare the new fonts. If you want to use other fonts. You then simply use your operating system tools to choose the locale in which you want to start your session. This file contains all the font declarations for use as is. The file also contains other user interface texts. for the language and locale you want to use (we have chosen the same fonts as used in Version 4 to facilitate the transition to Version 5). When you run a Version 5 session.

for the French language. Export the LANG variable for the desired locale before starting a session. Start Version 5.2.iso88591 this command on Sun Solaris and IRIX: export LANG=fr 3. For example. . enter this command on AIX: export LANG=fr_FR this command on HP-UX: export LANG=fr_FR.

Getting Help Displaying Tooltips and Help Messages Using the What's This? Command Accessing the Online Help Library Searching the Online Help Library Getting Contextual Help Accessing the Dassault Systèmes User Galaxy Displaying Copyright Information Accessing Sample Documents .

command to access the Options tab. .. You can switch tooltip display on and off using the Tooltips option of the Options tab in the Tools->Customize.. or by right-clicking any toolbar and selecting the Customize..Displaying Tooltips and Help Messages This task explains how to display tooltips and the corresponding help messages. command. with the corresponding message in the status bar. But you have to restart a session to take the new settings into account. 1. The tooltip is displayed in a small box.. Point to an icon.

2. The cursor takes on the shape of the What's This? icon. Point to an icon.Using the What's This? Command This task explains how to use the What's This? command to get help on toolbar icons. then click the icon. This displays a long help message in a box: . Click the What's This? icon or select the Help->What's This? command. 1.

Select the Help->Contents. and for the latter. refer to Installing the Online Documentation in Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First Time. The Version 5 documentation is totally Web oriented. For detailed information about the former. refer to Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Code. GIF and JPEG standard formats. and a short animation runs while the page is loading: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Navigation aids includes full text searching and a framed layout allowing a direct access from the table of contents to the information. The online help library can be installed either at the same a time as you install the code. using HTML. 1. allowing easy access and navigation using a standard Web browser. The welcome page of the Version 5 online help library is displayed.Accessing the Online Help Library Page 1 of 6 Accessing the Online Help Library This task explains how to access the online help library.htm 1/30/01 . or later after the code has been installed.doc\src\basugbt0203. Index and Search command.

a dialog box will prompt you to specify the location: if you installed the online documentation locally on your computer.Accessing the Online Help Library Page 2 of 6 If you installed the online documentation in the default location. you must first update the CATDocView variable in your environment to reference the environment containing the online documentation.htm 1/30/01 . If you do not reset the CATDocView variable. on Windows: C:\online_doc_folder where "online_doc_folder" is the name of the folder in which you installed the online documentation. If you installed the online documentation elsewhere. you must first map the appropriate network drive before starting a session. the welcome page will be displayed immediately. then specify a path as above when prompted.doc\src\basugbt0203. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. if you installed it elsewhere on the network. you can specify a path like this. for example.

The "Doc installation path" field for the CATIA Documentation Location option displays the path of the folder in which the online documentation is installed. In the General category. When you request help using the Help->Contents. accessible via the Tools->Options command.Accessing the Online Help Library Doc Installation Path Page 3 of 6 In the General tab. If the online documentation is not found. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Selecting the location updates the "Doc installation path" field for the CATIA Documentation Location option.htm 1/30/01 . the online documentation may not be displayed. This may be because the online documentation may have been physically moved to another location. the following dialog box appears: Browse to select the online documentation location.doc\src\basugbt0203. select the General tab. in the General tab accessible via the Tools->Options command. Index and Search command (or press the F1 key for contextual help). The path is the same path you entered when installing the online documentation: the path displays the value of the CATDocView environment variable.

the information you require is displayed in a framed layout: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. For example. Click the Infrastructure icon to get familiar with Version 5 fundamentals. you can specify the following path type: \remote_computer\online_doc_folder 2. otherwise.htm 1/30/01 . Point to the different icons to the left to display the icons for the corresponding online users guides. the path you enter will be ignored. Note that UNC (Universal Naming Convention) names on Windows is allowed. or the icon for the workbench you need information about.doc\src\basugbt0203. You must enter the real location. then click on the icon of your choice to access the documentation.Accessing the Online Help Library Page 4 of 6 Note: You can also type the location in the "Doc installation path" field for the CATIA Documentation Location option. In each case. 3.

use the Acrobat Reader File->Print. the Search button to perform a full text search throughout the online library: for more information about searching. To print the documentation. To print the documentation.htm 1/30/01 .. This opens a PDF version of the documentation using Acrobat Reader. refer to "Searching the Online Help Library". This opens a similar home page.doc\src\basugbt0203. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Click on the icon for the product whose documentation you want to print.Accessing the Online Help Library Page 5 of 6 4.. click the Print icon. The Home page provides access to the following: the Index button to access the indexes for all the workbench documentation the Print button to print user guides in PDF format. command. Select the Home button to return to the home page.

htm 1/30/01 .Accessing the Online Help Library Page 6 of 6 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0203.

For example.doc\src\basugbt0207. Select the Search button to perform a full text search throughout part or all of the online documentation library. The search engine searches for the string CATDoc. if you are looking for information about the CATDocView environment variable. GIF and JPEG standard formats. Fuzzy Searches 1. The online documentation is totally Web oriented. The upper part of the window looks like this by default: The default settings let you perform a basic fuzzy search throughout the entire online library. allowing easy access and navigation using a standard Web browser. and all words containing the string CATDoc at the beginning of the word. using HTML. Navigation aids includes full text searching and a framed layout allowing a direct access from the table of contents to the information. it suffices to enter the string CATDoc and click the Go button. 2.htm 1/30/01 . The search results are displayed in the "Found in" list: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Performing Simple.Searching the Online Help Library Page 1 of 6 Searching the Online Help Library This task explains how to perform full-text searching in the online help library.

Searching the Online Help Library Page 2 of 6 Entering the string CATDocView produces the same results: The documents containing the string you are searching for are displayed in the "Found in" field.doc\src\basugbt0207.htm 1/30/01 . In the search result list. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. the name of the product user guide in which the string has been found precedes the title of the task containing the search string.

This time. 3. 2. the search for the string "CATDocView" lists documents in the Infrastructure Users Guide containing the string: Infrastructure .doc\src\basugbt0207.Customizing Your Environment on Windows .htm 1/30/01 . Searching for Exact Words 1. then click the "Go" button. Select the Search button. Double-click an item in the "Found in" list to open the document containing the search string.. However. Check the "Match whole word" option. 3.& The search is not case-sensitive.. so your search query is kept. You can restrict your search to the documentation of a specific user's guide or search throughout the entire online documentation library by selecting "All documents" or the name of the user's guide in the "Search in" field. if you search for the string CATDoc. Finally. The following special characters are ignored: / \ .Searching the Online Help Library Page 3 of 6 In our example. Enter exact string you are searching for.What Is An Environment? Infrastructure . use your browser's Find command to find the occurrence (search hits are not highlighted). the search engine will not find any matches because the string CATDoc is not a whole word. The page containing the search string is then displayed in a new browser window. the string CATDocView will find matches: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

doc\src\basugbt0207.Searching the Online Help Library Page 4 of 6 Searching for Exact Phrases 1. In the "Search mode" pulldown list. Select the Search button. 3. then click the "Go" button: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 2. For example. enter the phrase "running in demo mode".htm 1/30/01 . select the "Exact phrase" option. Enter the exact phrase you want to search for.

htm 1/30/01 . 2. Specify the words you want to search for. 3. or one of a list of words or strings you specify (OR). enter the words "cnext" and file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Searching Using AND and OR Operators You can use operators to search for several words or strings not forming a phrase (AND). select "OR" in the "Search mode" pulldown list.doc\src\basugbt0207. In the "Search mode" pulldown list. To search for either "cnext" or "admin". Select the Search button. 1.Searching the Online Help Library Page 5 of 6 Only those documents containing exactly the phrase you searched for will be listed. select the "AND" option. For example. then click the "Go" button. search for documents containing both the strings "cnext" and "admin": 4.

then click the "Go" button.doc\src\basugbt0207. enter the words "cnext" and "admin". To search for either "cnext" or "admin".Searching the Online Help Library Page 6 of 6 4. select "OR" in the "Search mode" pulldown list.htm 1/30/01 . file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

doc\src\basugbt0204. Select the Help-> CATIA V5 Help command.htm 1/30/01 . if you are using the Edge Filletcommand. For example. the online help library is displayed in HTML format in a Webbrowser window. or press the F1 key. at the topic explaining how to use the Edge Fillet command: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.Getting Contextual Help Page 1 of 2 Getting Contextual Help This task explains how to get contextual help on the current command. 1.

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 . provided that the Computer-Based Training module and the CATIA Companion have been previously installed.doc\src\basugbt0204.Getting Contextual Help Page 2 of 2 Pressing the F1 key also lets you access the CATIA Companion.

htm 1/30/01 . file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. R&D. Select the Help->User Galaxy command. training. 1. partners.Accessing the Dassault Systèmes User Galaxy Page 1 of 1 Accessing the Dassault Systèmes User Galaxy This task explains how to connect to the Dassault Systèmes user galaxy. hardware. A Web browser appears displaying the User Galaxy. You can also click the CATIA P2 Solutions logo in the bottom right corner of the main window to access the User Galaxy. and much more. a full online information package helping you to find all the general information you expect to find about existing and upcoming products. services.doc\src\basugbt0205.

htm 1/30/01 . version and release number. etc. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. build date. 1. Select the Help->About CATIA V5 command.Displaying Copyright Information Page 1 of 1 Displaying Copyright Information This task explains how to get background information about the product you are using. A dialog box appears providing you with copyright information about the product.doc\src\basugbt0206.

For example. 1.Accessing Sample Documents This task explains how to access sample documents. the topic "Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer" looks like this: The step highlighted in red prompts you to open the document "Select. If your default browser is Internet Explorer. the browser then prompts you to choose whether to save . Locate a help topic containing a prerequisite step prompting you to open a sample document. Sample documents (installed along with the online help library) are provided in many (but not all) cases. The name of the document is a hypertext link. to support the topic scenario explaining how a specific command works. Click the link. 3. Access the online help library using any of the usual methods.CATPart". 2. the browser then prompts you to choose whether to save the file to disk or open it from its current location: If your default browser is Netscape.

then click OK. Simply click OK if you are using Netscape because the "Open it" option is already checked. Check the option "Open this file from its current location" if you using Internet Explorer.4. Your session is opened and the sample document is loaded: .

if you attempt to activate the sample documents from within the online documentation without first installing the code. the folder: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc\online\prtug\samples contains the sample documents for the Part Design Users Guide. In the online documentation filetree. . the samples will not work: the Version 5 document extensions must be registered on a computer where the code is installed. in the following location: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc\online\xxxug\samples where "xxx" represents the three-letter code for the product.The online documentation is installed by default on Windows in: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc The sample documents are installed in user guide-specific sample folders. The registering of extensions is performed automatically on the computer during the installation of the code. there is one samples folder for each users guide. Wherever you install the documentation. For example.

Editing in Context Within the Product Structure What Is the Product Structure? Accessing the Navigation Tools Creating a New Workbench Document in the Product Structure Activating a Different Workbench in the Product Structure Creating a New Document for a Different Workbench .

a wheel subassembly (comprising four wheels). doors... a car (the product) has a bodywork sub-assembly (roof. and a large number of other parts.htm 1/30/01 ..). and an empty product structure document (a . and navigate within your product structure: the Product Structure workbench. subassemblies and parts: for example. when you open a Version 5 session. If the configuration you are using provides access to the Product Structure workbench.doc\src\basugbt0301.What Is the Product Structure? Page 1 of 3 What Is the Product Structure? Every industrial product can be organized in as a logical structure comprising a large number of assemblies. you will automatically be placed in a product structure context. The Version 5 infrastructure provides you with a set of product structure management and navigation tools designed to help you structure and organize your products logically.CATProduct document) like this will be opened by default: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

and the product structure icon is displayed as the current workbench. What Is the Product Structure Workbench? The Product Structure workbench is activated by default.What Is the Product Structure? Page 2 of 3 The added value of this approach is not simply the possibility to structure and organize your products logically.Assembly Design workbench. Inside this document. You can also work exclusively on one type of the document. These commands are also available when you activate the CATIA . structure and manipulate your product by: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Saving the product structure document also saves all the data inside the product structure. you can navigate from one sub-assembly or part to another. This is referred to as "editing in context". data created using the Part Design. An Assembly toolbar is also displayed (beneath the Select icon): The Product Structure workbench also provides commands on the Edit and Insert menus. They allow you to organize. the Product Structure document. and edit them using the workbench used to create them.doc\src\basugbt0301. However. Analysis and Generative Drafting workbenches is created and saved in separate documents outside the product structure. directly inside the product structure.htm 1/30/01 .

or hierarchical designs of assemblies in specific contexts (engineering.What Is the Product Structure? Page 3 of 3 inserting new and existing components inserting new parts moving parts and components establishing context-specific representations.htm 1/30/01 . manufacturing.Product Structure Version 5 Users Guide. etc. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. refer to the CATIA .doc\src\basugbt0301.) For more information about these commands.

In our example.Accessing the Navigation Tools Page 1 of 3 Accessing the Navigation Tools Understanding the Navigation Assistant The product structure contains a specification tree. Three situations are possible when navigating from one workbench to another. Note that activating the Analysis or Generative Drafting workbenches creates new documents in a new window. which appears when you start a session or when you click the icon representing the current workbench. You can navigate from one workbench to another using the "Welcome to CATIA V5" dialog box. Double-click an object in the tree to activate the object-specific workbench. The navigation assistant will always privilege the creation of a new document in the current product structure. 1. The navigation assistant manages transitions between different workbenches. The easiest way to navigate in the tree is by simply clicking on a branch. This contains the icons for the workbenches belonging to the configurations and/or products you installed.htm 1/30/01 . the workbenches illustrated are the result from installing the Mechanical Design file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0302. not in the Product Structure. Depending on: which workbench you come from to which workbench you want to go and what you selected before navigating the navigation assistant will: create a new workbench document in the current product structure activate a different workbench in the product structure or create a new document for a different workbench.

2. uncheck the appropriate option "Do not show this dialog at startup". The use of this technique prevents icons from appearing on the menu. Select the Start menu to access the same icons: the workbench names and the associated icons are displayed at the top of the menu the second area in the menu contains the list of the solutions containing the configurations/products you installed. Note that. If you do not want to display this dialog box at the start of each session.htm 1/30/01 . When the user exits the Start menu. the display area is redrawn.Accessing the Navigation Tools the result from installing the Mechanical Design configuration. but on the SGI platform. export the following variable before starting a session: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. You can also access the workbench icons by right-clicking the current workbench icon: Page 2 of 3 3. on SGI workstations. the icons do not appear next to the names on the Start menu. a special technique has been implemented to improve display redraw performance. These entries in turn provide yet another means of accessing the same product workbenches a check list lets you switch between document windows the User Galaxy lets you access the Dassault Systemes Galaxy online information package accessible via html browser (refer to "Accessing the Dassault Systèmes User Galaxy" for more information). If you want the icons to be visible.doc\src\basugbt0302.

htm 1/30/01 . Page 3 of 3 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. To remove icons from these locations. or select the Tools->Customize.arrow..doc\src\basugbt0302.. the Welcome dialog box and by right-clicking the current workbench icon. Then click the Close button to confirm. dialog box. drag the icon name from the "Favorites" list and drop it on the "Available" list. command. do the reverse: drag them from the "Available" list and drop them onto the "Favorites" list. however. or select the icon and click the <---.. The list varies according to the configurations and/or products installed.Accessing the Navigation Tools If you want the icons to be visible. export the following variable before starting a session: SGI_NO_OVL=YES Keep in mind. Note that the "Available" list remains the same because it contains all available workbenches.. that if you are displaying a large model. 4. The Favorites list contains the workbenches available on the Start menu. To add icons. or select the icon and click the ---> arrow. To customize the list of workbench icons available. this will degrade display performance when exiting the menu. right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the Customize.

the "Welcome" dialog box or from the list accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon. Selecting it indicates your intention to create a new document inside the product structure. Expand the tree (by clicking the "+" symbol) to see the Part document itself: . and activate the workbench for the new document. 1. 2. Double-click the Product document in the specification tree to activate the product structure workbench and select it. Note that the symbol next to "Part1" is a product structure symbol. and the Part Design workbench is activated. a Part Design component is added to the product structure. Select the workbench using the Start menu. For example. if you select Part Design.Creating a New Workbench Document in the Product Structure This task explains how to create a new document inside the current product structure document. 3.

in this product structure document. the product structure workbench is active: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0304. 1. For example. Identify the current workbench.Activating a Different Workbench in the Product Structure Page 1 of 3 Activating a Different Workbench in the Product Structure This task explains the how to activate a different workbench inside the same product structure document.htm 1/30/01 .

for example. the "Welcome" dialog box or the list accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon. You can use the Start menu. double-click the Part document. The Part Design workbench is activated in the same product structure window: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 . To activate the Part Design workbench. or select the Part document and access the Part Design workbench.doc\src\basugbt0304.Activating a Different Workbench in the Product Structure Page 2 of 3 and the product structure document is active: 2.

Activating a Different Workbench in the Product Structure Page 3 of 3 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0304.htm 1/30/01 .

a new Part Design document will be created in a separate window. and thePart Design workbench will be activated: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugbt0305.Creating a New Document for a Different Workbench Page 1 of 2 Creating a New Document for a Different Workbench This task explains how to create a new document and activate the corresponding workbench. 1. if you select the Part Design workbench. Select the workbench using the Start menu. Note that the document color is blue in the tree. Click the Product document in the specification tree to activate the product structure workbench. For example. the "Welcome" dialog box or from the list accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon. 2.

Creating a New Document for a Different Workbench Page 2 of 2 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0305.htm 1/30/01 .

Opening and Saving Documents Creating New Documents Opening Existing Documents About Data Sharing Between Windows and UNIX About Filenames Creating a New Document from an Existing One Opening Most Recently Used Documents Closing Documents Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name Saving Existing Documents Saving Documents In Other Formats Saving All Documents and All Documents As.doc\src\basugbt0400.. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.Creating..htm 1/30/01 . Opening and Saving Documents Page 1 of 1 Creating.

. Using the File -> New Command 1.doc\src\basugbt0403.Creating New Documents Page 1 of 6 Creating New Documents This task shows you how to create a new document when Version 5 is already running. Choose the document type from the following: Part A document like this will appear: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. The new document types you can create are listed. 2.. command. Click the New icon or select the File->New. The list contains only the document types for the configurations/products you installed and for which you have a license. double-click the document type or select it then click OK.htm 1/30/01 . In the New dialog box.

Creating New Documents Page 2 of 6 For more information about the Part Design workbench. Drawing After selection of the standard to be used. a dialog box like this will appear: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 . see the CATIA .Part Design User's Guide.doc\src\basugbt0403.

doc\src\basugbt0403.Creating New Documents Page 3 of 6 For more information about the Generative Drafting and Interactive Drafting workbenches. Analysis A document like this will appear: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.Generative Drafting User's Guide and CATIA . Product A document like this will appear: For more information about the Assembly workbench. see the CATIA .Assembly Design User's Guide.htm 1/30/01 . see the CATIA .Interactive Drafting User's Guide.

see the CATIA .htm 1/30/01 .Generative Assembly Structural Analysis User's Guides.Generative Part Structural Analysis and the CATIA . CatalogDocument A document will appear like this: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0403.Creating New Documents A document like this will appear: Page 4 of 6 For more information about the Generative Part Analysis workbench.

htm 1/30/01 . Select the document type you wish to open.Creating New Documents Page 5 of 6 Process ProcessLibrary ZipMill For more details about the above three document types. Either on the Desktop area of Windows or in the appropriate directory of Windows NT Explorer (making sure you do not select any items when doing so) right-click once then select the New command. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 1. 2.doc\src\basugbt0403. refer to the CATIA Prismatic Machining Users Guide and the CATIA Surface Machinist Users Guide. Using the New Contextual Command on the Desktop This task shows you how to create a new document whether or not Version 5 is already running.

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 4. replace New CATIA Part. 3. Double-click on the icon that is created.CATPart with MyFile.doc\src\basugbt0403. Click in the name field that appears with the icon just created and replace the default name with a name of your own choosing (for example.Creating New Documents Page 6 of 6 An empty icon indicating the document type is created (see "Starting a Session Using Document Icons").htm 1/30/01 . The new document is created. a session is opened. If you do not have a session running.CATPart).

For a reminder. select the file location.. refer to "About Filenames". Using the File ->Open Command 1.Opening Existing Documents Page 1 of 6 Opening Existing Documents This task shows you how to open an existing document when Version 5 is already running. The following dialog box appears: 2. The address to be specified should look something like this: http://UNIXserver: port/V4datalocation You will not be allowed to open a document created using Version 5 if its name contains national characters or forbidden special characters. PROJECT files or library objects residing on UNIX can be accessed from Windows NT using the http protocol. V4 models. If you wish to access V4 data such as V4 models. PROJECT files and library objects on Windows or UNIX or access CDMA objects on UNIX you can do so provided you purchase the V4 Integration product. 3. (Make sure beforehand that an http server has been installed on the machine where the V4 data resides.. Click the Open icon or select the File>Open. command.doc\src\basugbt0404. In the File Selection box. Click the "Files of type" list to display the list of document types which you can open: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 .

catalog or .CATAnalysis files.model files. The following list contains all possible document types (classified by order of appearance in the list): All CATIA V5 Files Lets you open V5 documents such as .Opening Existing Documents Page 2 of 6 Check the "Show Preview" option to display a preview of the selected file (only on Microsoft Windows NT workstations). All CATIA V4 Files Lets you open V4 documents such as .doc\src\basugbt0404.htm 1/30/01 . Select the document type.CAADoc files. for example. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 4. The list of document types you can open depends on the configurations/products installed and for which you have a license. All CATIA CAA Files Lets you browse CAA files such as .CAABsk or .

CAABsk or . All Standard Files All Image Files 3dmap act asm V4 Assembly Modeling document. CATAnalysis CATDrawing Generative Drawing or Interactive Drafting document. without having to use another application. CATMaterial Material library. see the CATIA . For more information. CATProduct. For more information about the Generative Drafting and Interactive Drafting workbenches. For more information about the Part Design workbench. CATProcess Process document. see the CATIA Prismatic Machining Users Guide. bmp Page 3 of 6 Lets you browse BMP files from within a session. For more information. CATPart Part Design document.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugbt0404.Interactive Drafting User's Guide.CAADoc files. see the CATIA Assembly Design User's Guide. CATProduct file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. see the CATIA .Real Time Rendering User's Guide.e.Opening Existing Documents Lets you browse CAA files such as . saved as an Assembly Design document i. brd catalog Refer to "Using Catalogs". see the CATIA Generative Drafting User's Guide and CATIA .Part Design User's Guide. For more information.

Assembly Design User's Guide. cdd CATIA-CADAM file. cgm cgr DenebProcess dbnzip dxf/dwg Autocad DXF and DWG formats. i.htm 1/30/01 . saved as an Part Design document. For more information about the V4 Integration workbench. For more information. CATPart document.Opening Existing Documents CATProduct Page 4 of 6 Assembly Design document. see "Exporting a CATDrawing into a DXF/DWG File" in the CATIA Generative Drafting User's Guide. For more information. picture Lets you browse CATIA Version 4 picture files from within a Version 5 session. see the CATIA .doc\src\basugbt0404.V4 Integration User's Guide. idf igs IGES file. ldf library model V4 model document.e.Part Design User's Guide. For more information about the Assembly workbench. Creates a CATDrawing document. see the CATIA . jpg Lets you browse JPEG files from within a session. rgb sdnf session file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. without having to use another application. see "Importing an IGES File" in the CATIA .

V4 Integration User's Guide. tdg and TDG STRIM/STYLER files. STEP. Before you open a session. On UNIX. 1. For more information. 6. Converted to a CATProduct document. check the box Open as read-only. see "Importing a STEP AP203 Document" in the CATIA . Double-click the document icon. If you are sure you do not intend to modify the document in any way. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. wrl 5. For more information about the V4 Integration workbench.htm 1/30/01 . without having to use another application. Click Open. If so.doc\src\basugbt0404. 2. you can use the File Manager. click Start and select Documents. see the CATIA . A Version 5 session is opened and your document is displayed. click My Computer or run the Windows Explorer and find the location of the document you wish to open. Using the Windows Explorer or My Computer on (Windows) or the File Manager (UNIX) This task shows you how to open an existing document via a document icon when no Version 5 session is already running. Using the Start->Documents Command on Windows This task shows you how to access an existing document 1. 2. Select the document you wish to open. tif Lets you browse TIFF files from within a Version 5 session. step. A Version 5 session is opened and your document is displayed.Assembly Design User's Guide. Before you open a session.Opening Existing Documents session Page 5 of 6 V4 session document containing several CATIA V4 models. stp and STP Creates a CATProduct document. you may want to open the document in read-only mode.

Your document is opened for editing.htm 1/30/01 . Page 6 of 6 Dragging and Dropping a Document Icon This task shows you how to open an existing document via a document icon when a Version 5 session is already running. Note that this method is not available on IRIX. drag and drop the icon in your Version 5 application window. If a Version 5 session is already open.doc\src\basugbt0404. you can use the File Manager.Opening Existing Documents On UNIX. 1. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

Several implementations of NFS exist. Note: all these scenarios are based on exchanges from UNIX to NT for filenames containing National or Special characters and NT forbidden characters. provided by different vendors. Transferring data by TAR.About Data Sharing Between Windows and UNIX A communication protocol such as ftp. make sure you are aware of the system limitations on file names described in "About Filenames". ftp and WinZip command successively. The ftp and NFS protocols can be used for sharing data between these environments. Limitations Whatever technical solution you choose for sharing your data. Reading data using NFS Hummingbird. Reading data using DiskAccess Microsoft. Transferring data by ftp.exe on a command window. different kinds of scenario have been performed: 1. . http or NFS is required for sharing data between Windows and UNIX. 4.0. 5. 2.1 Intergraph DiskAccess Microsoft 2. The following products have been tested using different scenarios: HummingBird NFS Maestro Version 6. Transferring data using the Hummingbird ftp graphic Interface. Data Sharing Scenarios To illustrate the data sharing possibilities from UNIX to NT . 3.

model KO KO KO OK Get 'real filename'.model on UNIX** AB CD.model KO KO OK OK Put 'real filename'.model on NT AB CD.exe client. The last V4 models were transferred from an NT login by ftp.model on UNIX AB+CD.model KO KO OK OK ** (+ ) in the filename corresponds to the Plus/Minus character (0xb1) Scenario Description The first two V4 models were transferred from a UNIX login (NT server is inetinfo).Transferring Data from UNIX to NT by ftp Protocol Scenario 1: By ftp.exe transfer AB+CD. .model KO KO KO OK Mget *.exe Window ftp. Conclusion: Transferring V4 data must be done only from NT .exe on a Cmd.model on NT Mput *. Data exportation from UNIX must be excluded if some special characters ( like 0xb1) have been frequently used on the V4 site.

Note: Concerning national character transfer.model OK Mget *.model OK Scenario Description The V4 models have been transferred from NT login using ftp graphic command provided by Hummingbird. Scenario 3: Transferring by TAR UNIX IBM 932 / FTP / WINZIP NT ISO1 Model name IBM932 AB'Japanese'CD.model OK Put AB+CD.model on NT Mput *.model Model name ISO1 NT OK (Garbaged characters) OK CATIA V5 reads model OK OK .model AB+CD.model OK Get AB CD.model OK Put AB CD. Conclusion: the graphic interface can be useful for a small numbers of transfers.exe transfer AB CD. the ftp configuration must be in mode "NO filename verification" (which is the default).model on NT ftp.model Not done Mget *.model Not done Get AB+CD.exe transfer AB+CD.Scenario 2: By Hummingbird ftp on NT (Graphic Interface) ftp.model OK Mput *.

Conclusion: mixed environments can lead to unpredictable behavior on the filename. The FTP.exe command is run on NT for transferring data. Consequently. Our recommendation is to use the same code page (ISO 646 subset). Scenario 4: Transferring by TAR UNIX IBM 932 / FTP / WINZIP NT IBM932 Model name IBM932 AB'Japanese'CD. V4 models have to be read in the same code page where WinZip utility has been performed. The first one contains Japanese katakana SBCS characters and the second one the Plus/Minus character. Model name IBM932 OK OK CATIA V5 reads model OK OK . The WinZip utility is run on NT to extract the above mentioned data.**The characters obtained after transferring Japanese filenames are garbaged because the resulting code page on NT is ISO1. The first one contains Japanese katakana SBCS characters and the second one the Plus/Minus character. The TAR command is run on UNIX. The TAR command is run on UNIX. Scenario Description The V4 models were created on UNIX IBM932. The FTP.model AB+CD.exe command is run on Japanese NT for transferring data.model Scenario Description The V4 models have been created on UNIX IBM932 . The WinZip utility is run on Japanese NT to extract the above mentioned data.

Using NFS Hummingbird 6. Conclusion If the model name contains: national characters ( and especially +.model AB?CD.model AB*CD. Scenario 6: Using DISK ACCESS Microsoft Model name read in CATIA V5 NT KO : Strange unicode character KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : Does nothing KO : Does nothing KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : 'AB' result .0xb1) metacharacters * and ? special characters the CATIA V5 File/Open box rejects them.model AB<CD.Reading UNIX data from NT Scenario 5: Using HUMMINGBIRD NFS Model name under UNIX AB+CD.model AB"CD.model AB>CD.model Scenario Description A few V4 models containing NT forbidden characters are read directly using NFS MAESTRO HUMMINGBIRD.1 can be recommended only if the NT_COMPATIBILITY value has been employed in the V4 CATIA declaration file to prevent future data corruption.model AB:CD.

it is possible to read National ones ( for instance.model AB?CD.The Plus/Minus character and Japanese directories containing V4 models can be read directly by DiskAccess. Plus/Minus character ).model AB:CD. you activate the lock mechanism and keep the same case in file names. The same scenario has been performed between a Japanese UNIX and a Japanese NT machine: equivalent results were obtained . We also recommend that you evaluate the product within the context and environment of your company before deploying it.Model name under UNIX AB+CD.model AB>CD.model AB<CD.model AB*CD. when using these products. . in order to check that it meets your needs and is appropriate for your processes. Conclusion: Although DiskAccess refused also the forbidden NT characters.model AB"CD.model Scenario Description Model name read in CATIA V4 NT OK KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : Does nothing KO : Does nothing KO : Invalid name in File/Open box KO : AB resulting A few V4 models containing NT forbidden characters are read directly by DiskAccess. General Recommendations We recommend that.

There are a certain number of file naming constraints you need to be aware of. This means that: you cannot use national accented characters or any of the forbidden special characters listed above when creating and saving documents. The ISO-646 subset contains the principal symbols you characters you may need to use for naming documents: characters A to Z (upper and lower case) numbers 0 to 9 and certain special characters. . national accented characters are not supported. On both Windows and UNIX Firstly. Furthermore. However.About Filenames This section specifies what you need to know about file names. the following special characters are not supported on Windows: > (greater than) < (less than) * (asterisk) : (colon) " (quotation mark) ? (question mark) \ (backslash) | (vertical bar) and the following special character is not supported on both Windows and UNIX: / (slash). ISO-646 provides the subset of characters common to all code pages. etc. and is included in all industry standard code pages such as ISO8859-x. and renamed using your operating system. on UNIX. if they contain national accented characters or forbidden special characters. only the ISO-646 subset of characters is authorized (with the limitations described below). EUC-xxx. a filter is activated systematically to prevent you from creating documents whose names contain special characters not supported on Windows you cannot read documents created with Version 5. to enhance document interoperability between the UNIX and Windows platforms.

What About Version 4 Model Documents? The following table specifies. . so it does not contain special characters. any problems in reading the data due to forbidden characters in the data name: UNIX Data from Version 4 On UNIX model (or PRJMODEL) You can read Version 4 model documents containing Example: MY***. Impossible to read. You can read Version 4 model documents containing national accented characters. On Windows Impossible to read. for each Version 4 data type listed. You must rename the model before reading it.model either national accented characters or any of the forbidden special characters. *MASTER *LISTFAM PRJ tables using ":" You can read them. but you cannot read Version 4 documents containing forbidden special characters.

You can give the new document the same name as that of the already existing one if you wish but if you do this you must put the new document in another directory. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.. (This distinguishes File->New from..htm 1/30/01 . close the document you want to copy if not already closed and select the File->New from.doc\src\basugbt0411.. Select the existing document from which you want to create a new one and click Open. An exact copy of the existing document is displayed with a default name. To do this.. command. You may want to create a new document whose basic characteristics are the same as an existing document. The dialog box New document from an existing file appears. from File->Save As. 1.. The only difference between this document and the already existing one is that the new document is given a new UUID by the File->New from.Creating a New Document from an Existing One Page 1 of 2 Creating a New Document from an Existing One This task shows you how to create a new document based on a copy of an existing one. Save the new document giving it a name other than the default.) 3. 2.... command.

htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugbt0411.Creating a New Document from an Existing One Page 2 of 2 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

Opening Most Recently Used Documents This task shows you how to open a recently used file.. the name of the file you wish to open. 1. . command and click. at the bottom of the menu.. Select the File->Open.

Specify whether the file is to be saved or not. . If changes have been made since the last save. Select the File->Close command.Closing Documents This task shows you how to close a document. 1. 2. the Close dialog box appears.

Select the File->Save As. In the Save As dialog box.. the following message appears: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name Page 1 of 2 Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name This task shows you how to save a document for the first time or under another name. 2. Click Save.. 3. command.doc\src\basugbt0407. If the name you give the file already exists. 1.htm 1/30/01 . The Save_as_new option lets you save an existing document under a new name but this new document will be given a new UUID (Unique Universal IDentifier). specify the location of the document to be saved as well as its name and type.

For a reminder. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugbt0407. On Windows NT.Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name Page 2 of 2 You will not be allowed to use national characters or forbidden special characters in the document name. refer to "About Filenames". documents cannot be stored in a folder for which delete authorization is not set.

. This can be done by means of the File->New from.. command. A message appears in the status bar to confirm that the document is saved. You can choose to set an automatic save for your file using the General tab of the Tools->Options. 1. it is stored in the UTF8 Unicode format. See Creating New Documents from Existing Documents. Click the Save icon or select the File->Save command. This is because both files have the same UUID. command. To avoid this happening each file must have its own UUID. If you save an existing file in another directory without changing the file name you will only be able to open one of these files at any given time..For more information. This ensures that the data contained in it can be read on both Windows and UNIX whatever the session code page used.. If one of them is already open you will not be able to open the other. see "Customizing General Settings".Saving Existing Documents This task shows you how to close a document.. When a document is saved.

a Drawing document as a DXF document (... 3. command.stp): see "Exporting CATPart or CATProduct Data to a STEP AP203 File" in your CATIA Version 5 Interfaces Users Guide. 4.cgm). you may wish to save: a Part Design or Assembly document as a STEP AP203 document (.dxf): see "Exporting a CATDrawing into a DXF/DWG File" in your CATIA Version 5 Interfaces Users Guide. Select the document type from the list displayed. Select the File->Save As. see "Exporting 3D Documents to VRML" in your CATIA Version 5 Interfaces Users Guide.wrl). 1.Saving Documents In Other Formats This task shows you how to save a document in another format. a 3D document as a VRML document (. a Drawing document as a CGM document (. Click the Save as type: list. In the Save As dialog box. 2. . select the location of the document to be saved. see "Exporting a CGM File" in your CATIA Version 5 Interfaces Users Guide. For example.

Saving All Documents and All Documents As...
These tasks show you how to save some or all of the documents you opened and how to control their names and locations.

Saving All Modified Documents
The Save All command lets you save very easily all modified or read only documents. 1. Select the File->Save All command. If all the documents modified in the session can be saved, they are saved automatically. Otherwise, the following dialog box will appear when some of the documents are new or read only:

If you have made no changes to any of the documents you want to save or if these documents are read only files, this dialog box will not appear. 2. Click OK to open the Save All dialog box:

3. Click the Save As... button to specify a name for each read only or new document. The number of unsaved files is indicated at the bottom of the dialog box and a preview is displayed on the right..

4. Click OK to confirm. If symbolic links exist between files, for example if a Drafting document has been created from a Part document, the names of each of these files will also appear and will be saved if the Part document is saved. However, if you want to be able to save all files independently regardless of any existing links between files, check the option Enable independent saves at the bottom of the dialog box. Clicking the Save As... button is mandatory if you want to save your document under another name.

Saving All Documents As...
This command lets you save all your modified documents under a new name and a new location. 1. Select the File->Save All As... command. The following dialog box will appear:

The Path column indicates all files that are currently used along with their paths. If a file has been modified or saved since last load, its state is displayed in the State column. The Action column enables you to check the actions you perform on your documents (save, modify, and so on.), the document original state being still displayed in the State column. Here are the various states that may be assigned to a document: New: identifies a newly created document. You have to select a file name in order to save it Opened: identifies a document open in your session that has not been modified Modified: identifies a document that has been modified in your session Read Only: identifies a modified and read-only document. You have to specify a new name for this document if you want to save it Save: identifies a document that will be saved Save Auto: identifies a dependent document that will be saved. Dont` Save: identifies a new or modified document that has not been saved yet.

2. Select the file you want to save. 3. Click the Save As... button to open the following dialog box:

4. Indicate the name and destination folder of the new created file, respectively in the File name and Save in fields. 5. Click the Save button. When using the Save As... command for a .CATProduct document containing other modified components, these components will be assigned the Auto Save Pending state and will be saved when clicking OK. Once you have saved a product in a new directory, you can use the Propagate directory... button to save the file(s) linked to this product into the same directory.

To go back the document original state, select the document then click the Reset button. 6. Click OK to confirm.

The Save All As... command will automatically save impacted files as well. If there are still unsaved files left when you click OK , the following message will be displayed:

Viewing the Specification Tree and Geometry Area
About the Specification Tree and Geometry Area Setting Document Window Layout Preferences Using the Full Screen Using Document Windows Using the Specification Tree Overview Using the Geometry Overview Expanding and Collapsing the Specification Tree

About the Specification Tree and Geometry Area
Version 5 provides a unique specification-driven and generative modeling approach, which captures and reuses process specifications, ultimately accelerating the design process. Version 5 offers a specification modeler which lets you concentrate the design effort on establishing the proper design specifications, while leaving it to the system to compute or update the resulting geometry when required. This approach is implemented as a generalized mechanism for all Version 5 applications, for instance feature-based part design, assembly design and drawing generation. Version 5 model, part, drawing and assembly documents consequently allow you to view and edit data either in the specification tree, the geometry area, or in both at the same time.

Setting Document Window Layout Preferences

Page 1 of 2

Setting Document Window Layout Preferences
This task explains how to set document window layout preferences. 1. Select the View>Specifications command. This is the default layout option. It displays both the specification tree and the geometry together:

2. Select the View>Specifications command again. This removes the specification tree:

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0502.htm

1/30/01

Setting Document Window Layout Preferences

Page 2 of 2

You can also use the F3 key to toggle more quickly. 3. Toggle the View->Geometry command on and off to display and hide the geometry.

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0502.htm

1/30/01

Using the Full Screen
This task explains how to make the geometry area fill the whole screen. 1. Select the View->Full Screen command. The geometry area fills the whole area of your screen. 2. To restore the document window to its original size, right-click then uncheck the Full Screen option.

Using Document Windows
This task explains how to use document windows. 1. Select the Window ->New Window command. A new window is opened containing the document you are editing. The remaining commands on the Window menu let you organize your windows horizontally or vertically with respect to each other, so that they do not overlap, (Window->Tile Horizontally and Window->Tile Vertically) or in a cascading arrangement in which they overlap each other (Window->Cascade). Note that you can switch from one document window to another by selecting the window name at the bottom of the Window menu. On the Sun Solaris platform, we recommend that you set the following desktop resource to always keep your Version 5 window on top:
Allow primary always on top

Using the Specification Tree Overview

Page 1 of 3

Using the Overview on the Specification Tree
This task explains how to use the overview to zoom in or out on the specification tree. 1. With the specification tree visible, select the View->Specifications Overview command (or press the Shift and F2 keys) to display the Overview window containing a view of a portion of the specification tree:

2. Point to the Overview window to display the cursor, and drag. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0506.htm

1/30/01

Using the Specification Tree Overview 2. Point to the Overview window to display the This drags the overview viewport through which you view part of the specification tree.

Page 2 of 3 cursor, and drag.

While dragging, the cursor changes to: You can zoom the size of the overview viewport by dragging the handles located at the top right and bottom left corners of the viewport. Only that part of the tree you see inside the overview viewport will be visible in the document window.

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0506.htm

1/30/01

Using the Specification Tree Overview

Page 3 of 3

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0506.htm

1/30/01

Using the Geometry Overview

Page 1 of 4

Using the Geometry Overview
This task explains how to use the overview to view the geometry. 1. With geometry visible in the geometry area, select the View->Geometry Overview command. The geometry is displayed in the overview window, but not the specification tree:

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0507.htm

1/30/01

Using the Geometry Overview

Page 2 of 4

2. Point to the Overview window to display the

cursor, and drag.

This drags the overview viewport through which you view the geometry. Only that part of the geometry you see inside the overview viewport will be visible in the document window:

Note that you can resize the overview window itself to see the whole of the viewport. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0507.htm

1/30/01

Using the Geometry Overview Note that you can resize the overview window itself to see the whole of the viewport. 3. Zoom the size of the overview viewport by dragging the handles located at the top right and bottom left corners of the viewport. While you drag, the cursor changes to: window: . This lets you zoom the geometry in and out in the document

Page 3 of 4

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0507.htm

1/30/01

Using the Geometry Overview

Page 4 of 4

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugbt0507.htm

1/30/01

Expanding and Collapsing the Specification Tree
This task explains how to expand and collapse the specification tree. 1. Open a any document with geometrical data, for example:

2. Select the View->Tree Expansion->Expand First Level command to see the first level of the tree:

3. Select the View->Tree Expansion->Expand Second Level command to see the second level of the tree: 4. . Select the View->Tree Expansion->Collapse All command to collapse the tree.

.

Selecting Objects Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer Selecting Using the Traps Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator Selecting Using the Other Selections... Command (Favorites and Advanced) Storing Selections Using Selection Sets . Command Selecting Using the Search... Command (General) Selecting Using the Search...

in the geometry area. is highlighted in red. This option is active by default. and the object name is highlighted in the specification tree: The identity of the preselected element is displayed in the status bar: Highlighting will only be active if you checked the option "Preselect in geometry view" (active by default) using the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options. Note that the selection color and pre-selection color are the same. . 1. 2. You can also set the preselected element linetype using the " Preselected element linetype" option in the Visualization tab. As you point to objects. if it is not already activated. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode. Using the Select command.CATProduct... Point to the part of the object you want to select. Open the document Select. different parts of the objects are highlighted.Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer This task explains basic selection techniques using the pointer. the Select command is active. you can select any object in your document. for example. All the selection tools are available using this command. command. Whenever you are not using an application command. The face on the object opposite. You can also use the same tab to set a variety of useful selection features including selected element color and pre-selected (highlight) linetype.

. you can only select objects required as input for the command. in other words: faces vertices edges planes axes. Ctrl-click another face to add it to the initial selection. Shift-clicking can be done in: the specification tree lists in dialog boxes. you are prompted to select a face or a plane: no other elements can be selected. Whenever you are using an application command. Ctrl-clicking can be done in: the geometry area the specification tree lists in dialog boxes. To deselect. click anywhere in the background. 5. 3. the selected face now changes color because we changed the selection color. For example. In our example. Once the element is highlighted. you can select the constituent elements of objects. when creating a hole in a pad.In the geometry area. click on the object to select it. 4.

note that hidden faces and edges are also highlighted as you point at them. Selecting the Esc key deselects all selected elements.Edges are highlighted as you point them and arrows are displayed to indicate to which element the edge belongs to. Hidden faces and edges are displayed in a different color. This is especially useful in case of overlapped elements as shown in our example: On certain objects. Refer to "Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator" for a more powerful method for selecting hidden or coincident elements. .

The objects will be highlighted to indicate they have been selected. The Intersecting Trap icon on the Select toolbar also allows selection using a The Intersecting Trap trap. then double-click to close the polygon. Release the mouse. 2. and slide it to the right to select the icon. Drag the bounding outline until the object(s) you want to select is(are) completely inside the bounding outline. Press and hold down the left mouse key. The principle is the same: drag (using the left mouse button) to create the trap around the object(s). Any objects intersected by the trap will be selected. Drag to define create the polygon around the object to be selected. Drag (using the left mouse button). You access this icon by clicking the Select icon to see the Select toolbar: . Note that only those objects located entirely inside the trap will be selected. The objects must be completely inside the bounding outline: if not. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode. The Selection Trap Note that you can also use the Selection Trap icon to perform the same function. A bounding outline will appear as you drag: 3. Using the Bounding Outline 1.Selecting Using the Selection Traps This task explains how to select objects using the selection traps. they will not be selected. and then dragging. if it is not already activated. Paint Stroke Selection . except that the trap you can draw is a closed polygon. Furthermore. you can start the creating the trap by pointing to an existing object. 4. The Polygonal Trap The Polygonal Trap icon works like the other traps.

Any object crossed by the paint stroke will be selected.The Paint Stroke icon lets you select objects by simply drawing a paint stroke across them. . Drag to create the paint stroke.

seconds". or elements located elsewhere in the specification tree. The preselection navigator appears. in seconds. and click OK. Click anywhere in the geometry area using the middle mouse button. Click anywhere in the geometry area. Position your pointer over the object you want to select. Check the option "Display the preselection navigator after . dragging slightly the cursor. Press any keyboard arrow. Method 2 1. set the spinner to the time delay. Open the document Select. 4... Point to the part of the object you want to select. which elapses before the preselection navigator appears after pointing at an object. In the General category. The spinner sets the amount of time.CATProduct Displaying the Preselection Navigator Method 1 1.. 3. 2.Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator This task explains how to use the preselection navigator (or the keyboard arrows) for selecting hidden or coincident elements. . Select the Tools->Options. command. 3. 2. select the Display sub-category then the Navigation tab..

5. Press any keyboard arrow. The selection tool is displayed after the time delay you set: Using the Preselection Navigator The following diagram describes graphic selection tool features: .

faces. This method is particularly useful for large parts since it lets you select. These arrows turn black when you reach an extremity.. 1. Note that the circle used for selection validation will not appear until you move the mouse. to highlight hidden or coincident elements. edges. edge. .. from the front to the back of the object. Two figures above and below the cross indicate the number of remaining elements respectively above and below the pointed object in terms of depth. in other words. The cursor shape changes according to the type of the preselected element as shown below: point. An invisible area around the selection tool determines selection tool sensitivity. etc.. for example. Four arrows are used for navigating or scrolling through the object you point at. which are not visible or accessible near the front of the part..A cross pinpoints the selected location. Click the up arrow to navigate "in-depth".

Using any of these keys displays the selection tool automatically. click the left arrow and look at the specification tree to see each click on the left arrow takes you to the top of the tree. For example. not just inside single objects. 2. then click the right arrow to navigate downwards. 3. When one object hides another. The up and down arrows also let you activate the multiple selection. and validate your selection using the ENTER key.or face: The identity of the preselected element is displayed in the status bar: Note: the preselection navigator lets you use the contextual menu. Click the left and right arrows to navigate up and down in the object hierarchy. towards the front of the object. Click the circle in the center to validate your selection and exit the preselection navigator. 4. . You can also navigate between different objects. You can also press the up and down keys to achieve the same effect. Click the down arrow to navigate in the opposite direction. the preselection navigator will also let you select elements belonging to the hidden object.

However.Similarly. and validate your selection using the ENTER key or the left mouse button. you can also press the left and right keys to achieve the same effect. once a selection has been made. in any case. or if you point or click outside the selection activation area around the selection tool. A prehighlight of the preselected edge is also provided which is especially useful in case of overlapped elements: The selection tool disappears. the preselection navigator can be deactivated at anytime by pressing the Esc key. .

contextual command.Selecting Using the Other Selection.CATProduct 1. Open the document OtherSel. The window contains the location of the selected element in the specification tree. point to the circular face at the end of the cylindrical part to highlight it: 3.. The name of the circular face is: "Face".. 2. The element is selected. and the Other Selections window appears. Point to the object to highlight the element you want to select.. In this example. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode. Select the Other Selection.. Command This task explains how to display an object's structure in a separate window to facilitate alternative selections. if it is not already activated. and describes the path to the top of the tree. .

You can also navigate up and down the tree inside the Other Selections window using the preselection navigator or the keyboard arrows. and select other objects.. Select the Other Selection. This time. 4. 5. contextual command. Click on Axis to select it. This type of element is a characteristic element.. This is the axis used when the cylindrical part was created. this time. point to the body of the cylinder to highlight the surface. 6. The element is selected. command is the only tool that lets you select characteristic elements.. and the Other Selections window appears. Note that. .. an additional element (highlighted in blue) has been detected: Axis. The Other Selection.

dimensions. You can also run the command using the Ctrl+F shortcut. Click the General tab: . command.CATProduct Performing a Quick Search for a Named Object 1. or of a specific type or color visible or hidden objects.) objects created using a specific workbench. or lines with specific linetypes or thicknesses product properties elements through the value of a specific attribute (material name.. command to search for and select objects. in the selection list... 2.. Command (General Mode) This task explains how to use the Edit->Search. etc. Note also that you can perform searches on model documents created using CATIA Version 4. The Search dialog box appears. in the current document or throughout the whole document.. Open the document Search. You can search for: objects with a specific name.. Select the Edit->Search.Selecting Using the Search.

all items in the specification tree will be found. When the object is selected in the search result list.. The Search..command does not prevent you from running other commands on the search results (once selected). you can also use the "Center graph" and "Center view" contextual commands. it remains active. This means that you can: run commands using the menus and icons and also apply commands in contextual menus to selected search results using the power input field: for example. Enter the name "My Sketch" in the Name field: . "c:cut" commands. command... The item "My_Sketch" and the corresponding path are highlighted in the list in the Search dialog box. you can manipulate selected specification tree elements using the "c:center on".. "c:center graph". If you select the Search button now. A query is also generated in the "History" field: .then click the Search button.. So you can also work with other commands while the Search dialog box remains open.If the Select command was active before you selected the Edit->Search. 3.

and the sketch "My Sketch" is preselected in the geometry area: ..The "History" field lets you run one of your previous queries (with the same filter) simply by selecting it from the pulldown list. . ..

Click the Select button to select the sketch.4. The sketch is selected: .

. . Select the Edit->Search. Click OK to exit search mode.5. Searching Using a Combination of Search Criteria Open the document Search. command. 1. You can sort the results alphabetically by Name and Path in the Search dialog box by clicking the corresponding column header.CATPart. Note that clicking OK has the same effect as clicking both the Select and Close buttons.. The Search dialog box appears.

entering: Point* will select all objects whose names begin with the character string "Point".2. Click the General tab: 3. Enter the object name in the Name field. Note. Similarly. Check the "Case sensitive" option if you want the search to be case sensitive. For example. or the Properties contextual command. . that the other options allow you to filter your searches progressively. The names are stored only as long as the session is active: closing the session clears the list. entering: * and using the default settings for the other options in the Search dialog box will search for and select all objects in the document. The list below the Name field stores the names you entered during previous searches so you can select them. however. You can also use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard. This is particularly useful if you renamed objects using the Feature properties tab of the Edit->Properties command.

otherwise. Because the query references the RGB values of the color and not the color name. Specify the workbench in the Workbench field. a warning message will be displayed. In the list box. To the right. If you type only the first few characters of an object type. To do so. Set the filter option in the "Look:" list box. a warning message is displayed. changes to the color palette will not affect the search: the search will always find elements referencing a color expressed using RGB values. the system will automatically display the full name of the type.. selecting a workbench filters the list of types in the Type field: for example.4. at the bottom of the color list to access the color chooser to select basic or previously custom colors. however. then press ENTER. the list box "Type" also contains "*". 6. This is useful. However. The names of basic colors. the corresponding workbench will be displayed . If several types contain the same characters. Refer to "Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties" for a full description of how to use the color chooser. the Type field will be filtered to contain only the element types available in Part documents and if you select the type " ". By default. When you select a new workbench. or click More Colors. the correct workbench name is displayed in the "Workbench" list box. a search query is generated. The filter options are: . 5. by deleting the custom color. or add new custom colors. for example. "*" appears in the Workbench field. If the element type belongs to only one workbench. The option "From Element" lets you use the color of an existing element. "*" appears in the Color field. by default "*" remains in the Type field. and search for elements using these colors. Whichever workbench is selected in the "Workbench" list box. the first name containing these characters is displayed. you can search for element types belonging to any other workbench by typing the name of the type in the "Type" field. or deleting the color settings file in your settings folder) then retrieve a search query. Select the desired color. remain the same. if you select the workbench "Part". By default. Specify a color if you want to search for objects in a specific color. the RGB code is used instead of the color name for custom colors. This means that the search will be performed on all types of elements created by all workbenches. This means that the search will be performed on elements of any color. Note: the object type is NOT necessarily the name you see in the specification tree. When you apply basic and custom colors to elements. If the type belongs to several workbenches.. The same principle applies to the other document or workbench types. if you modify your color palette (for example. select the element whose color you want to use in your search. The selected color will be displayed in the Color field.

the search will be performed throughout the whole product structure. inside all the documents integrated in the product structure (if these documents are accessible in design mode) In "Element": the search will only locate objects belonging to "Element" . if you are performing the search in a product structure document (in design mode). for example "Point*" to search for all points click the Search button: Several points are found and preselected in the Name column. selecting the filter <From Product.. regardless of the workshop used to create them.. The search does not reach the lower levels in the tree: the individual elements that make up the different parts will not be searched. Selecting the filter <In Product. In this case. The corresponding path is displayed and preselected in the Path column: . where "Element" is the name of the active object. objects created using the Part Design workbench will be searched.Everywhere: searches the whole specification tree from top to bottom.1> will enable you to locate only the objects that can be created in the Product Structure workbench and that belong to "Product..1 to bottom> will let you locate all the objects contained in "Product. to find objects created using all workbenches. and searches inside the selected objects to the bottom of the tree. command select the "From current selection" option enter the name of what you are searching for. For example. and that can be created using the current workbench. Let's assume the product root name is "Product..1". command. but NOT objects created using the Sketcher workbench. if you are using a Part document. From current selection: this option will only be available if you already selected objects before selecting the Search. to the bottom of the tree. This is particularly useful when you know the object in which you want to search: you simply select the object. let's assume you have a product document which includes several parts. to the bottom of the tree.1". From "Element" to bottom: searches the elements in the active "Element". to understand how this option works in our document: select "My Sketch" select the Edit->Search. For example. In the previous example (a product including several parts).1". the filter will display "In Product. then search inside the object.1". In a further example.

Click the corresponding column header (i. The Search dialog box is resized to include a list containing the search results at the bottom of the dialog box.e. then click the Search button again. To do so. If the list is very long. You can deselect items in the list by clicking on them. From search results: the search is performed on the list of objects preselected in the list at the bottom of the Search dialog box. respecify a search string in the Name.click the Select button to select it. you can search the list of selected objects using the "From search results" option which becomes available once the first search is performed. Click the Search button to start the search. 7. . Name or Path) to sort the search results alphabetically. Type or Color.

Click the down arrow at the end of the "History" field to display previous search queries.. This helps you to become familiar with the search language. The object found will be directly selected. Button 1.. The Search dialog box appears 2. because they are stored with your settings. Click the More. You can also use this language when you are using power input mode. command. More Advanced Searching Using the More.. refer to "Using the Search Language". Select the Edit->Search. .. button.The History field displays the search query formulated in the search language. which can be used for searching without using the Search.. For a complete description of the search language.. command. Queries are also stored across sessions. Simply selecting a search query executes the search. This enables you to recover queries from one session to the next... Click the General tab: 3.

9. For more information about visible and hidden elements. 7. Click the Search button to start the search.The More. 5. button becomes the Less... . button and the Search dialog box now looks like this: 4... select the layer number in which you want to perform the search. In the Layer field. In the Visibility field. Specify the line weight in the Weight list box.. Specify the line type in the Dashed list box. choose: visible: searches for visible elements hidden: searches for element hidden in the No Show space. 6. refer to "Hiding and Showing Objects". button to return to the original Search dialog box. Select the Less. 8..

You can also run the command using the Ctrl+F shortcut.. command.CATProduct Searching Using the Favorites Mode The Favorites mode lets you save your favorite queries in order to reuse them as many times as you wish. without having to reenter your search criteria. 2. Open the document Search.. Click the General tab: . command.. Command (Favorites and Advanced Modes) This task explains how to use the Favorites and Advanced modes of the Edit->Search. Select the Edit->Search. 1.... The Search dialog box appears.Selecting Using the Search.

. button. Enter your query in the corresponding fields. The Create a favorite query..3. 4... Your query is generated in the History field and the Name and Path of the query are highlighted in the search list.... refer to the Selecting Using the Search... dialog box appears: .. For more information on searching using the General mode. command (General Mode) task. Click the Add to favorites.then click the Search button..

Your query is displayed in the Favorites list. This enables you to recover your favorite queries from one session to the next. Select the Edit->Search. command then click the Favorites tab. You can select a query then use one of the three icons displayed to move up delete this query. You can also click the column headers to sort the queries alphabetically. move down or A query may be modified directly in the Favorites list by clicking its name or its content under the corresponding column. .. 7. because they are stored with your settings in the SearchFavoriteQueries.5. Key in a name for your query or leave the default name displayed in the Name field. The query syntax is displayed in the Query field and can be modified if necessary. 6. Favorites are stored across sessions.. Click OK then Close. The query is added to your favorites.CATSettings file. .

The query is also generated in the Generated queries field. 1.and the object is preselected in the geometry area.8. Select the Edit->Search. 9.. Double-click the query to begin the search... The Search dialog box appears: .CATPart.. command. The generated query is not editable and is displayed for information only. "Or" and "Except" operating signs. The filter option in the Look list is automatically updated to match your search criteria. 10. Open the document Search. Click OK to exit the search mode. Click the Select button to select the object. Searching Using the Advanced Mode The Advanced search mode lets you compose more precise queries using a combination of search criteria as well as the "And". . The object. My Sketch in our example. is selected.

To do so. if you select the attribute "Name". Each workbench corresponds to a list of types and each type corresponds to a list of attributes.e. i. Click the Advanced tab: 3. "Product" in the Type field and "Revision" in the Attribute field then enter your value in the Attribute`s criterium dialog box.2. the corresponding Attribute`s criterium dialog box is displayed. The above mentioned attributes are permanent attributes. among which: Name: indicate the name of the searched element Color: select a color from the color chooser or use the color of an existing element Set: a selection set indicating a numeric value with the corresponding unit of measure. For example. Depending on the value you select. Select an attribute for the Attribute field. . just select "Product Structure" in the Workbench field. associated to any element type. you will see: The Product Structure workbench lets you search for dynamic attributes you defined for a product.

For example. . You can also use the default value (*) as a wildcard. Within a product structure. Click OK when you have entered your attribute criteria. "*" appears in the Type field. we selected the attribute "Name". 7. the "!=" operating sign and the value "line*" in order to search for any element whose name is different from a name starting with "line". The number of operating signs displayed in the list depend on the attribute you chose. The properties you can search for (the same as those you assigned to the element) are: Part Number Revision Definition Nomenclature Product Description Component Description. Select a Type. You assign properties to products (and parts in products) by selecting an element from the Product property list box. you can also search for elements in the product structure which possess certain properties. type in the value of the property in the "of value" field. This means that the search will be performed on all types of elements created by all workbenches. By default. then press ENTER. In our example. you must select the "Production Description" property then enter text included in the description. Select the operating sign in the list box then enter a value in the field. 8. 6. 5.4. the system will automatically display the full name of the property. the list box Workbench also contains "*". The attribute name appears then in capital letters in the query. To the right. If you type only the first few characters of a property. if you assigned a description to the element. Select a Workbench. Here is an exhaustive list of the available operating signs: = ! = (different) < <= > >= Check the "Case sensitive" option if you want the search to be case sensitive. Once you have chosen the property.

The Drafting workbench also lets you search for elements of type Geometry such as 2D lines. of type Dimension with a value between 137 and 138 millimeters. For example: Drafting. These two values are separated by "-". for example to add brackets and group queries together. 10. Or and Except buttons to combine several search criteria and refine your query. For more information. Click the Search button to start the search. 2D curves and so on. In our example. The query is displayed in the Generated queries field and can be modified.. Use the And.Dimension. . refer to the Searching Using a Combination of Search criteria part in the Selecting Using the Search. 11. Set the filter option in the "Look:" list box.Dimension.Value<=140mm searched for all objects created using the Drafting workbench.If you select the Drafting workbench. refer to the Using the Search Language task in this guide.. command (General Mode) task in this guide. you can search for dimensions by selecting the "Dimension" value in the Type field then entering your value or scale of value in the Attribute`s criterium dialog box. we are searching for elements created using the Part Design workbench and whose names begin with the character string "line" or "circle": For more information on the search language. 9. of type Dimension with a value lower than 140 millimeters Drafting.Value='137mm-138mm' searches for all objects created using the Drafting workbench.

button. refer to the Searching Using the Favorites Mode. . Click the Select button to select the objects in the geometry area. For more information on favorites. 13. you can also use the "Center graph" and "Center view" contextual commands..A list containing the search results is displayed at the bottom of the Search dialog box: You can add your query to your favorites by clicking the Add to favorites.. 12. Note: when the object is selected in the search result list. Click OK to exit the search mode.

.

select two of the lines: 2.. right-click to display the contextual menu. and select the Selection Sets.. Selection sets are saved with your documents.CATProduct 1. command. Select several objects. Point to the selected objects. For example. The Selection Sets dialog box is displayed: . Open the document SelectionSets.Storing Selections Using Selection Sets This task explains how to group selections and store them in selection sets.

In our example. the number is incremented. is created. add the hole to the selection set and click the Add button: You can add objects to any selection set. Once a selection set has been created. If you want to recover your original selection. A selection set named "Set001". then click the Add button. You can also rename the selection set using the text field at the bottom of the Selection Sets dialog box. select the selection set and click the Delete button. Click the Create button. command.. continue selecting elements. Note that you cannot delete the <Current Selection>. . click <Current Selection> in the list. To add more elements to your selection set. and to the <Current Selection>. If you want to delete a selection set.The list contains a highlighted item: <Current Selection>. and containing the lines. just double-click the corresponding line in the list to reuse it.. Each time you create a new selection set. click the selection set name in the list. 4. 3. The current selection contains the element you selected before selecting the Selection Sets.

command to add objects. or delete it.5. . You can create a selection set quickly by selecting the objects. rename the selection set. You can then use the Selection Sets. then right-clicking to select the Define Selection Set command. Click the Close button...

Manipulating Objects Undoing Actions Redoing and Repeating Actions Cutting and Pasting Objects Copying and Pasting Objects Deleting Objects Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties .

2. This is indicated by the caption Undo Active Object opposite the Edit->Undo command. A maximum of 10 undo actions is possible. If you do remove the active object in this way it can easily be recovered. Performing an Undo action may cancel the active object itself. If you want to undo one or more actions preceding the last one you simply have to repeat step 1.Undoing Actions This task shows you how to reverse the last action. This cancels the last action performed. Some actions cannot be undone. . When this is the case. Click the Undo icon or select the Edit->Undo command. 1. the Undo icon is grayed out.

It cannot be used to perform actions not canceled by an Undo. The Redo command is replaced in certain cases by the Repeat command. enabling you in the right conditions to restart a command that you just used. When this is the case the Redo action is grayed out. If you want to repeat the last action more than once. 2.Redoing and Repeating Actions This task shows you how to recover the last action undone. Some actions cannot be redone. The Redo can only be used to recover what you have canceled by performing an Undo. Click the Redo icon or select the Edit->Redo command. A maximum of 10 undo actions is possible. A redo may recreate an active object. and repeat actions. 1. This is indicated by the caption Redo Active Object opposite the Edit->Undo command. . simply repeat step 1 as many times as required.

. 2. Note that the application workbenches offer a variety of specific cutting and pasting scenarios. or in the geometry area or the specification tree. To cut. or in the geometry area or the specification tree. This places what you cut in the clipboard. this is equivalent to the cut operation). 3. drop what you are dragging (see above). 1. drag the selection (although not a graphical cut.Cutting and Pasting Objects This task shows you how to remove the selection and paste it to the desired location. Select the object you want to cut. you can either: click the Cut icon select the Edit->Cut command select the Cut command in the contextual menu. you can either: click the Paste icon select the Edit->Paste command select the Paste command in the contextual menu. To paste.

To paste. 1. This places what you copy in the clipboard.Copying and Pasting Objects This task shows you how to copy the selection and paste it to the desired location. you can either: click the Copy icon select the Edit->Copy command select the Copy command in the contextual menu or in the geometry area or the specification tree. Note that the application workbenches offer a variety of specific copying and pasting scenarios. . To copy. drop what you are dragging (see above). 2. Select the object you want to copy. 3. press and hold down the Ctrl key and drag the selection. you can either: click the Paste icon select the Edit->Paste command select the Paste command in the contextual menu or in the geometry area or the specification tree.

Select OK to confirm. 3.. Deleting objects may lead to deleting other objects dependent on the object to be deleted. The object(s) selected are highlighted in both the geometry area and the specification tree. . Click the More>> button when necessary for more advanced deletion possibilities: 4. 2. When this is the case. either in the specification tree or in the geometry tree. 1. and prompting you to decide whether to delete the impacted features or not. Select the Edit->Delete command or the Delete. a dialog box appears identifying which features are impacted by the deletion.Deleting Objects This task shows you how to delete an object. Select the object or objects you wish to delete.. command in the contextual menu.

.

1. A Properties dialog box similar to the one opposite is displayed: . The object to be selected when using the Part Design application is the PartBody item in the specification tree. Select the object. Select the Edit->Properties command or select the Properties command on the contextual menu.Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties This task shows you how to display and edit the graphic properties of a selected object. 2.

The graphic properties available in this toolbar are identical to those of the Properties dialog box. Click the Graphic tab to display the graphic properties of the current object. refer to Assigning Objects To Layers in this guide. the only difference being the availability of the Layer box. . The opposite capture illustrates the relation between the displayed boxes and the graphic properties they impact: 3. the GraphicProperties toolbar is hidden.You can also select the View->Toolbars->GraphicProperties command. The GraphicProperties toolbar is displayed: By default. For more information on this box.

If you want to deactivate inheritage. To set object colors. click the Color combo box for Fill. Linetype and Weight Line and Curve Color.The graphic properties available for editing are: Fill Color (colors the current object) and transparency Edge Color. 5. for instance. ready for use the More Colors. to highlight an object among other without altering its graphic properties. A list appears containing: a blank color field (No Name) a list of sixteen default colors from the color palette. . Pointing the cursor over the combo box displays the name of the selected color. option. When you apply a color onto an Assembly object.. the GraphicProperties toolbar also contains the "Auto" option to make the color standard. However. Select the desired color. The selected color is now displayed in the field in the combo box. In addition to those options. any other element located at a lower level in the specification tree will inherit this color. the color modification only impacts display at a rendering level and not graphic properties. just click the color combo box. This may be useful. Linetype and Weight Point Color and Symbol Show and Pick attributes Set as default 4..

To access more colors.. The remaining four rows contain extra colors. or to create your own colors. option at the bottom of the list to access the color palette. click the More Colors. the first sixteen colors (in the top two rows) are the same as those in the previous list. The Custom Colors area contains sixteen free boxes in which you can place your custom colors. 7. In the Basic Colors area. Click the Define Custom Colors >> option to display the full color palette and color customization tools: .6..

Green and Blue) values vary according to where the cross is located. Drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the spectrum. . Once you are happy with the color. 8. The HSL (Hue. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your exact color specifications. then Click the Add to Custom Colors option to add the custom color. click one of the free boxes in the Custom Colors area. Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red.The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum. Move the arrow up or down to vary the brightness of the custom color.

. only 2 transparency types are available: "0%" (no transparency) and "50%" (semi-transparency). then Apply. If you selected a line or curve. Note that you can set either of two transparency modes: Screen Door Alpha Blending with the Performance tab using the Tools->Options command. "100%" corresponds to a full visibility and when you are working in a non material mode. you can set the point color in the same way as for parts. Click OK in the Properties dialog box. To set color edges on parts. The color of the selected object is changed: 11. 15. If you use the GraphicProperties toolbar. 12. linetype and weight the same way as for parts. click the Color combo box for Edges and proceed the same way. 13. drag the Transparency slider to set the appropriate value (between 0 and 255). To make the part more or less transparent. For more information. refer to "Customizing Performance Settings".9. If you selected a point. To select the symbol used to represent the point. The color is now displayed in the Color fill field of the Graphic properties tab. use the appropriate combo boxes. To set edge line types and weight. you can set line and curve color. select the symbol from the Symbol combo box. 14. 10. Click on the custom color.

. Click on the More. 17. Some applications. refer to "Hiding and Showing Objects". button. check the Shown check box if you want the object to always be visible.. do not display all available tabs in the Edit->Properties dialog box when it is first displayed.. the Feature Properties tab appears alongside the three already shown. 18. In the Show and Pick field.. In the case shown opposite. Drafting for example. button to access any other tabs. The More. to always be in show mode... button then disappears. in other words. . check the Pickable check box if you want the object to always be selectable. For more information about the show and no show modes. In the Show and Pick field. Click Apply or OK to confirm.16. if you now click on the More.

Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass About the 3D Compass Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass Manipulating Objects Using the Edit. Command Snapping the Compass to Selected Objects Automatically Locking the Current Compass Orientation Locking the Privileged Plane Parallel to the Screen Swapping the Privileged Plane Making the Privileged Plane the Most Visible ...

DMU Navigator. The point close to the Z axis is the free rotation handle used for freely rotating the compass and the document's objects at the same time. It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators which require working planes (for example. The 3D compass is always active. move and rotate non-constrained objects using the Edit. The Z axis is the default orientation. when creating planar patches or modifying control points using the FreeStyle Shaper) . The compass is displayed by default in the top right corner of the document.P2 mode using the Real Time Rendering application) ..htm 1/30/01 . which simply modifies the viewpoint from which you look at an object: the position of the object in the document remains the same.). is the privileged plane. You can also rotate objects around this point. Moving should not be confused with panning an object.. This concept is not useful when simply using the Select command.. contextual command file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.About the 3D Compass Page 1 of 2 About the 3D Compass You can use a graphic manipulator referred to as the 3D compass to perform a certain number of manipulations on certain objects created and managed by certain applications (for example. Y and Z represent the axes. You can also use the compass to manipulate viewpoint representations ("cameras") used to capture viewpoints and materials (in CATIA . The red square is the compass manipulation handle you use to drag the compass and place on objects to be manipulated. Note that hiding the compass does not deactivate it. The base of the compass. FreeStyle Shaper. The letters X. Assembly. What Can You Do With the 3D Compass? The 3D compass lets you: manipulate viewpoints using the mouse and compass: this is just another way of panning and rotating all objects in the document at the same time move and rotate non-constrained objects using the mouse and compass Moving objects in this context means physically moving them so as to redefine their spatial coordinates with respect to the absolute axis system in a document. the XY plane.. You can show and hide the compass by toggling the View->Compass command.doc\src\basugbt0801..

consider the 3D compass as a preliminary tool for positioning components in space prior to fine positioning of those components within the assembly. you can manipulate groups of objects in assemblies which are linked to each other by constraints. either a reference plane or a plane you create. refer to the Generative Shape Design Users Guide. If you select the sketch.About the 3D Compass Page 2 of 2 move and rotate non-constrained objects using the Edit. when manipulating control point manipulators on planar patches and curves. for example. If the object was created using the Generative Shape Design application. which provides a number of advanced positioning tools. otherwise the space mouse lets you manipulate the viewpoint. For more details. When you drag and drop the compass onto the pad (refer to "Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass" for more details). or no links to other entities. objects not linked together by constraints. If you are using a space mouse. Which Objects Are We Talking About? You can use the 3D compass to manipulate non-constrained objects. you will see that the parent of the sketch is a fixed plane. you can also manipulate the 3D compass when it is in the scene. contextual command lock the compass orientation snap the compass automatically onto a selected object set the plane in which you move objects parallel to the screen switch the privileged plane to the XZ or YZ planes of the compass use the privileged plane as a working plane in applications such as the FreeStyle Shaper application. for example. If you are also using the Assembly application. you can convert it into a datum element: the object then possesses no construction history. About Moving Objects with the Compass When you create a pad. You cannot move the pad until you have either isolated the fixed element (using the Isolate contextual command). then select the Parent/Children contextual command. a message will inform you that certain elements in the pad are fixed (the plane from which the sketch was created). and therefore you cannot move the pad. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. However. you create it from a sketch which itself is located in a fixed plane.. in other words..htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugbt0801.

1. Rotate to see how the objects. Y or Z) of the compass rotate in a plane pan in a plane rotate freely about a point on the compass view the document perpendicular to any of the axes of the compass. . This is just another way of panning and rotating all objects in the document at the same time.CATProduct Note that the 3D compass and the absolute axis at the bottom right of the document are aligned identically by default.P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Open the document Manipulators.Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass This task explains how to manipulating viewpoints by simply dragging certain parts of the compass using the mouse. You can: pan along the direction of any axis (X. 3D compass and the absolute axis are rotated together. You need access to a CATIA .

Point to the compass. The cursor shape changes to: . 3. The edges of the bounding box around a selected object always remain aligned with the compass axes. The viewpoint is panned along the direction of the axis. If you checked the option "Display manipulation bounding box" in the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options command. point to and click on the planar patch to see the bounding box appear. dragging the Z axis upwards pans up along the Z axis like this: . a box will appear around the selected object if it can be manipulated by the compass. When you drag any part of the compass. the cursor shape changes to: .2. In our example. For example. You will also notice that the following parts of the compass are highlighted as you point to them: compass axes arcs on the planes of the compass and the planes themselves. Drag any axis on the compass.

4. Drag an arc on the compass. For example. dragging the arc YZ to the right rotates the objects in the plane subtended by the arc YZ like this: .

For example. dragging further away from the red square rotates more slowly.Dragging close to the red square rotates the objects quickly. 6. The rotation axis used is the same as that used when rotating using the other rotation tools. dragging to the right the plane subtended by the arc ZY moves the objects on the same plane like this: Select the View->Render Style->Perspective command to perceive the effect more easily. Drag the free rotation handle (the point at the top of the compass) to rotate the objects freely like this: . 5. Drag a plane on the compass.

clicking the letter Z lets you view the document along the Z axis like this: . Y or Z to highlight the letter. Point to either X. then click the letter to make that axis perpendicular to your eye-point. For example. Clicking the same letter reverses the point from which you view the objects.7.

.

Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass Using the mouse and compass. You do so by dragging and dropping the compass onto the object to be manipulated. you can manipulate not only viewpoints but also non-constrained objects recognized by the compass. Drag the compass.CATProduct. You need access to a CATIA . . The privileged plane is realigned with one of the planes on the object and is snapped to the object. As you drag the compass. Point to the compass manipulation handle (the red square located on the privileged plane at the base of the compass). Release the mouse button to drop the compass onto the object. The square base represents the current privileged plane. Open the document Manipulators. drag and drop the compass onto the planar patch. You set this color using the Handles option in the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options command. Dropping the compass onto the object snaps the compass to the object and selects it. 1. The cursor shape changes to: 2. by moving or rotating them. In our example. The compass changes color. One possible result could look like this: . and the compass The axis is the Z axis by default. the default color is light green. 3.P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. the cursor shape changes to: now looks like this: .

then drop to reposition the planar patch. The value displayed will be preceded by the "-" sign (negative) if you move the object in the direction opposite to the compass orientation. . depending on where you drop the compass. 4. You do so by simply dragging certain parts of the compass. you can begin to manipulate the object. This time. drag the X axis of the compass to move the planar patch to the other side of the block. exactly as you do to manipulate viewpoints as explained in "Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass". Note that the X axis is now w|x. the Y axis u|y. In our example. and the Z axis v|z. The distance from the origin of the axis (the red square or compass manipulation handle located on the compass base) is displayed in real time as you move the object. the object (and not the viewpoints) will be manipulated. the compass and a representation of the planar patch are moved. in our example.Note that. an extra letter is added is this way to indicate that the axis in question is no longer oriented the same way as the absolute reference axis in the bottom right corner. While dragging. Once the compass is snapped to the object. the compass could also be oriented differently.

When you drop the compass. the planar patch will now be positioned approximately like this: .The translation increments are preset: you cannot reset the translation increments displayed.

drag and drop the compass onto the absolute reference axis. The compass is now disconnected from the object. 5. To reorient the compass the same way as the absolute reference axis. Drag the compass away from the selected object and drop it.You can also: rotate the object in a plane (by dragging one of the compass arcs): the degree of rotation is also displayed in real time move the object in a plane (by dragging one of the compass planes): the distance from the origin to the new location (along both axes in the plane) is displayed in real time rotate freely about a point on the compass (by dragging the free rotation handle at the top of the compass) as explained in "Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass". The compass is repositioned at the default position and takes the default orientation: . and restore the compass to its original position in the top right corner of the document. but maintains its orientation: 6.

Release the left mouse button before releasing the Shift key. If you checked the option "Display manipulation bounding box" in the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options command. you could drag the compass onto the pad and align it with one of the pad edges like this: . In our example. In our example. Note also that the bounding box remains oriented the same way as the compass. The View->Reset Compass command also restores the compass to its original position. then drag and drop the compass. a box will appear around the selected object if it can be manipulated by the compass. you can also press and hold down the Shift key. You can also align the compass on objects that the compass cannot manipulate: this technique is useful if you want to detect a direction on the object for manipulating non-constrained objects. click on an object to see the bounding box appear: You can then drag any of the edges of the box to move the object in the corresponding direction.To achieve the same effect. but does not restore the default orientation.

Just click the OK button when warned that you cannot move the pad. This is the ideal solution for manipulating several objects at a time. . select the first object. To do so. then CTRL-click on other objects to add them to your selection. You can then select the planar patch and drag the compass to move the planar patch in the same direction as the edge of the pad.

P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. contextual command. 1. You need access to a CATIA . Y and Z axes rotating the object (or just the compass) about the X. then point to the compass and right-click to display the 3D compass.. or an angle between two elements (line/edge/plane) you select. a planar patch). Drag and drop the compass onto the object.. by specifying its X. Command This task explains how to manipulate objects precisely. You can only use the Edit.CATProduct. Open the document Manipulators. using the Edit... Y and Z axes in increments translate over a specified distance in the direction of the privileged plane translate over the distance between two elements (line/edge/plane) you select rotate through an angle you set. contextual command with the same objects as those with which you can use the compass (for example.Manipulating Objects Using the Edit. Y and Z coordinates and rotation coordinates with respect to the center of the 3D scene translate the object (or just the compass) to a new position in increments along the X. In our example.. drag and drop the compass onto the planar patch and right-click: . You can: reset the position of the compass (and selected object) via its manipulation handle (red square). or double-click the compass to display the contextual menu..

is the point of intersection of the 3 planes located on the pad. Note that the current coordinates of the compass manipulation handle (red square).2. command to display the Compass Manipulation dialog box: The Compass Manipulation dialog box stays open during manipulation. then click the "Apply new position" button. Reset the compass U. in this case.. the center of the 3D scene. V and W coordinates of the compass to zero. are displayed in the corresponding fields for the Position option. with respect to the center of the 3D scene. In our example. 3. In our example. the compass and the planar patch are moved to the center of the 3D scene as follows: . Select the Edit. because you dropped the compass onto the planar patch. using the Position option..

6. You can select any of the following: a point a line or a plane. The value for the detected distance is highlighted in the appropriate fields. click the "Measure Distance" button and select the two elements. To rotate. rotating about the U axis produces this result: . To translate an object along a vector derived from two objects you select. with the object still located at the center of the 3D scene.4. some or all of the U. and the object will be translated over this distance and in the same direction. However. If the second element is a plane. then click the "+" button or the "-" button to translate in forward or reverse direction respectively. all options and fields in the dialog box are grayed out. depending on the compass orientation. Then. set the rotation angle and click the "+" button or the "-" button for the axis about which you want to rotate. To translate the compass and planar patch by increments along an individual axis (U. and you can enter the distance for the translation in the Distance field. For example. expressed in the units of the compass. Note that. if you just select the two elements. the distance between the two is displayed in the Distance field. 5. the direction of translation is normal to the plane. set the translation values for an axis. V or W) using the Increments option. For example. If the first element is a line or a plane. you can then select a second element or enter a distance. When you click the "Measure Distance" button. click either the "+" or the "-" button to the right of the "Distance" option to translate the object in the forward or reverse direction. selecting a line implies that you want to translate the object in the direction of the line. V and W coordinates may be calculated.

7. Then click the "+" button or the "-" button for the axis about which you want to rotate. You can select a line or a plane. click the Measure Angle button and select the two elements. . The angle is displayed in the Angle field. To rotate the object through the angle between two elements.

Select the command Snap automatically to selected object.CATProduct. In our example.P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. The compass keeps its current alignment. Select an object.Snapping the Compass to Selected Objects Automatically This task explains how to snap the compass to a selected object. You need access to a CATIA . Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. As long as the command Snap automatically to selected object remains activated. as an alternative to dragging and dropping the compass onto the object. 2. . 1. 3. select the planar patch: The compass is snapped automatically only onto non-constrained objects recognized by the compass. Open the document Manipulators. the compass will be snapped automatically.

CATProduct. 1. if the default orientation was current before dragging. . 4. this orientation will be kept. Open the document Manipulators.Locking the Current Compass Orientation This task explains how to lock the current compass orientation. select the Lock Current Orientation command again. Drag the compass. To reorient the compass. You need access to a CATIA . For example. the symbol will remain like this while you drag: When you drop the compass onto an object. the compass symbol remains oriented the same. 2.P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Select the Lock Current Orientation command. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. 3. Note that as you drag the compass over objects.

1. Select the command Lock Privileged Plane Orientation Parallel to Screen. In our example. This works even if you change viewpoints in the document.Locking the Privileged Plane Parallel to the Screen This task explains how to force the privileged plane to be parallel to the screen plane. Open the document Manipulators. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. drag and drop the compass onto the planar patch like this: 2. You need access to a CATIA . This forces the privileged plane parallel to the screen.CATProduct.P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. The compass is now oriented like this: . 3.

Manipulate the planar patch as desired. . The privileged plane will remain parallel to the screen as you manipulate the object.4.

It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators which require working planes.P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario.CATProduct. 2. Point to a control point on the patch. 4. 1. Click the Control Points icon Control points appear on the patch. in the XY plane. and the Control Points dialog box appears. Open the document Manipulators. Activate the FreeStyle Shaper workbench. You need access to a CATIA . by default. Manipulators appear: Note that the manipulators. when creating planar patches or modifying control points using the FreeStyle Shaper. are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the compass. 5.Swapping the Privileged Plane This task explains how to swap to a different privileged plane (XZ or YZ). 3. This command is not useful when simply using the Select command. for example. Select the planar patch. Drag the compass onto the patch and align it in the following direction: .

6. Drop the compass onto the patch as follows: The compass has now detected the orientation of the patch. .

Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu. Select the command Make YZ the Privileged Plane. The compass keeps the same orientation: 8.7. not on another object). 9. The manipulators are now located in the YZ plane: . This means that you now want to orient the manipulators in the YZ plane of the compass. Drag the compass away from the patch and drop it into empty space (in other words.

. even though the axes on the compass still indicate that the privileged plane is still XY.Do not be confused by the fact that the compass axes do not change: the compass is reoriented to make the YZ the privileged plane.

3. You need access to a CATIA . in the XY plane. 4.CATProduct. Click the Control Points icon Control points appear on the patch. It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators which require working planes.P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario. Select the planar patch. This command is not useful when simply using the Select command. for example.Keeping the Privileged Plane the Most Visible during Viewpoint Manipulations This task explains how to keep the privileged plane visible during viewpoint manipulations. Drag the compass onto the patch and align it in the following direction: . when creating planar patches or modifying control points using the FreeStyle Shaper. Point to a control point on the patch. 5. 1. Activate the FreeStyle Shaper workbench. Manipulators appear: Note that the manipulators. are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the compass. by default. Open the document Manipulators. and the Control Points dialog box appears. 2.

by default. Drop the compass onto the patch as follows: The compass has now detected the orientation of the patch. .6. are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the compass. Note that the manipulators.

it may be difficult to work if the privileged plane is not always clearly visible: . Drag the compass away from the patch and drop it into empty space (in other words.7. rotating. The compass keeps the same orientation: 8. not on another object). Manipulate the viewpoint by. the privileged plane may be more or less visible. Because rotating the viewpoint also rotates the compass. for example. When you work with commands that use manipulators which require working planes.

10.9. This time. Select the command Make Privileged Plane Most Visible. the privileged plane is forced to be the most visible: the compass and the manipulators are reoriented accordingly: . Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu.

11. Each time this happens. the compass is reoriented accordingly. . the manipulators are also repositioned in the new privileged plane. the privileged plane switches. as you rotate. You will notice that. so that the privileged plane always remains clearly visible. This function is useful for both creation and modification commands. Continue to rotate.

Dragging and Dropping Icons and Objects Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects Dragging and Dropping Objects Onto Objects .

if it is not already activated. Open the document SelectionSets. 2. This displays the Edge Fillet dialog box. As soon as you point at the pad face. Release the mouse button. Drag the Edge Fillet icon from the toolbar onto a face of the pad.CATProduct 1. and you can proceed to create the fillet: .Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects This task explains how to drag and drop icons onto objects to run commands. which is a quicker alternative to selecting commands or icons. the face is highlighted and the pointer changes to this shape : 3. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode.

.The drag and drop method of running commands is not available everywhere: refer to your workbench documentation for more details.

so as to highlight it. 3. 2. Open the document DragObject. the face is highlighted and the pointer changes to this shape: . Press and hold down the Ctrl key and drag the fillet to another edge on the part.Dragging and Dropping Objects Onto Objects This task explains how to drag and drop objects onto objects. which is a quick way to copy objects. if it is not already activated. Point to the fillet to be copied. You will select a fillet and copy it to another location on the same part.CATProduct 1. As soon as you point at the pad face. Select the Select icon to enter selection mode.

The fillet is copied to the selected edge: .4. Release the Ctrl key and the mouse button.

To do so. you will be informed that a copy is being performed (and not a move) by the appearance of the symbol. when you drag the fillet. The drag and drop method of running commands is not available everywhere: refer to your workbench documentation for more details. when you were expecting the object to be moved. you cannot drag (move) a part onto a line in a sketch: the part and the sketch were created in different workshops. the following symbol appears: . In certain cases. within the same document window. an object may be copied without pressing and holding down the Ctrl key before dragging. This is typically the case when you attempt to drag an object created in one context (in one workshop) onto an object created in another context (workshop). the move is only allowed if the object onto which you drop your object can be edited in the current context (workshop). instead of copying it. . In this case. So.You can also move the fillet. For example. simply drag the fillet to the new location.

Printing Documents About Printing. Capturing Images and the Album Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings Previewing Documents Prior to Printing Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents Printing To a File Printing on UNIX .

or print images from the album you can preview documents prior to printing. refer to "Capturing and Managing Images for the Album". capture and print images directly from the Capture toolbar. For more information about capturing images and using the album. The fact that these functions are shared make it easy to use the print.About Printing. capture and album functions together. or preview images in the album you can save images to other formats using the Capture toolbar or the album you can copy images to the clipboard using the Capture toolbar or the album. . Capturing Images and the Album A certain number of identical functions are available in different parts of the software: you can print documents.

select the Quick Print icon . You can only print a document if a default printer has been set up. . However. Once your document is open. you will only be able to print once you have set up a printer. On Windows.Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings This task explains how to print a document quickly to the default printer using default print settings. The current document is sent to your default printer using the current print settings. as explained in "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX" . you print using the default printer (declared by your Windows system administrator). 1. on UNIX.

Select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box: 2.Previewing Documents Prior to Printing This task explains how to preview documents prior to printing. Select the Preview. option to display the Print Preview window: . Open the document Print...CATProduct 1.

the percentage of the real size is displayed top right as you zoom. if you want to display the document at its real size. press and hold down the middle mouse button in the Print Preview window. To zoom. then click the left mouse button and drag (still holding the middle mouse button down). For example. zoom to reach 100%. . You can also preview the document size in real size by zooming. Zoom up or down to increase or decrease the document size. or select the Quick Print icon to print.You can also use the Fit All In icon and zooming commands inside the Print Preview window.

command via the Preview icon in the Tools->Image->Album... .The Preview window is also available to preview images: via the Print icon in the Tools->Image->Capture... command.

.Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents This task explains how to customize the settings in the Print dialog box and print your documents. On Windows. You can only print a document if a default printer has been set up. However..CATProduct.. as explained in "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX". you print using the default printer declared by your Windows system administrator. command and the Tools->Image->Album... command. . The type of printer you choose determines the default settings in the dialog box: The Print window is also available via the Print icon in the Tools->Image->Capture. Select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box. command. Open the document Print.. you can only print a document if a default printer has been set up using the File -> Printer Setup. on UNIX. 1.

paper margins). You can also resize the image by dragging the image handles (using the left mouse button). using the default paper format with the default margins. page setup (paper format. image scale and position are instantaneously displayed in this area. The proportional relationship between image width and height is always maintained. Select a printer. 2. Note that these handles are not available if you check the Fit in Page option (the default setting)..The area to the right is a preview area displaying a shaded rectangle representing the size of the image to be printed. The current page setup (page format and page size) set using the Page setup. . Any changes you make to page orientation. Resizing the document window resizes the image accordingly. option is displayed as a reminder. Refer to "Printing To a File" for more information. Orientation settings are: Portrait: sets portrait orientation Landscape: sets landscape orientation Best orientation: if you resize the image beyond the page margins (displayed in red in the image to the right). or check the Print to file check box and enter the name of a file. The image size matches the real size of the geometry area in your document window. Set the page orientation. Best orientation keeps the image to be printed at its original size. 3. but automatically changes the page orientation (as displayed in the preview area on the right of the dialog box) to fit the image into the page. with respect to the selected paper format..

Whichever method you use. and scaling the image. To do so. Set the image position and size of the image to be printed. scales the image up to the largest size which still fits into the current paper format. drag the image handles. you need to uncheck the Fit in Page option first (if it is checked) to access the position and size options.4. Clicking the Fit in Page option deactivates the other options in the Position and Size area. enter the scale percentage or use the scale spin box. . and the image resize handles are no longer available. the scale field and the image width and height are updated: You can also use the Fit in Page option which. This involves changing the position of the image on the selected paper format. used in conjunction with Best orientation. To scale the image. This is the default setting.

However. with respect to the paper margins. this does not prevent you from setting the paper format. 5. You can: choose a standard paper format reset paper margins or reset printer defaults. To set the paper format. In our example. the image of the paper format and the image to be printed are resized accordingly. a message will inform you that the format should not exceed the dimension for the printer. select the format from the Name list. If the format selected is incompatible with the printer currently selected.To position the image. and click OK when you have finished. at the origin) drag the image to the new position or enter the position of the bottom and left corner of the image. Click the page setup option to display the Page setup dialog box. the first image uses the A4 ISO . If you set a new format. you can: click the Center option (to center the image) click the Origin option (to position the image bottom left.

whereas a factor of 5.0 produces a lighter image. button to access the Options dialog box and set the Color options determining the type of color output. A gamma factor of 0. Check the Print white vectors as black check box if you want to print white vectors as black on the resulting printout.1 and 5. The example shows how the new margins (represented by dashed lines) affect the position of the image: 6.1 produces a dark image. To set the paper margins. Click the Options. Top and Bottom margins. Set the color type for the image to be printed: Full color: true color image Grayscale: grayscale image (produces a smaller print file) Monochrome. . Right. and the second the A3 ISO format: The new paper format and corresponding page size are displayed in the Page Orientation option box.0). enter values for the Left.. The gamma factor (between 0.format..

by default. Click the Banner tab and set the banner options: if you want to show a banner on the printed output. this field contains the $USER. print your username. Bottom Horizontal. The banner option is also available when using the Generative Drafting application. you can also position it Top Horizontal. and select the button to navigate in your file system and select the graphic file to be used as the banner. and the current date and time in the banner at the bottom of the printed output. use the banner field to print information about the current print job in the banner .7. Position: setting Position to None removes the banner . . This field is editable: you can delete the variables if required and replace them with a text of your choice. $DATE and $TIME variables which. Left Vertical or Right Vertical Insert logo: check this check box if you want to insert a graphic logo in the banner.

Click the Various tab and set the various options.8. This option does not impact print previewing. the higher the image quality. . the longer the print time. The higher the setting. Set the Line Cap option to choose how line ends are drawn (useful for drafting): Flat Square Round. Set the Rendering Quality factor which determines the quality of printed output: low (screen): the quality of the printed output matches the screen resolution medium highest. Select OK successively in each dialog box to confirm all your print settings and print the document. 9. the larger the print file. Set the Line Width Specification: Absolute: original linetype specifications are preserved Scaled: the print image scale is applied to linetypes No thickness and Line Type Specification: Absolute or Scaled. This option does not impact print previewing.

... Select a printer name. Check the Print to File check box: . 2.Printing To a File This task explains how to print to a file. Open the document Print. You can also print to a file via the Print icon in the Tools->Image->Capture. command and the Tools->Image->Album. The type of printer you choose determines the default settings in the dialog box. 3. Select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box. 1.CATProduct. command..

. Enter a file name. Type the file name. button to display the Print to File dialog box: 5. then click the Save button to save the file and return to the Print dialog box. The file is saved with the . The information in the file depends on the printer you chose in the Print dialog box. 6. or click the File Name.4. .prn extension (the only extension available).. Click the Apply or OK button to save the file.

or if the printer is on a network: copy myfile. . for example: copy myfile.prn LPT1 where "LPT1" is the local print port. To print the file. use the operating system command appropriate for your platform. open an MS-DOS window (on Windows) and use the copy command. On UNIX.7. and "printername" is the name of the printer.prn \servername\printername where "servername"is the name of the print server.

you can use default settings in most cases. 2.. For the purposes of this task. For more information and advanced printer setup scenarios. Note that the Available printers field is empty the first time you use this command.. command to display the Printer Setup dialog box.. . 1.. Note that this dialog box presents a number of default settings. Select the File->Printer Setup. needed for printing. in $HOME/CATSettings/Printers. refer to "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX". Click the Add. button to display the Printer Properties dialog box.. command. Setting up a printer creates a printer configuration file.Printing on UNIX This task describes how to quickly set up a printer and print a document on UNIX using printer setup defaults.. You can only print a document on UNIX if at least one printer has been set up using the File -> Printer Setup.

If this declaration does not exist. 4. enter a comment describing the printer name. In the Submission Scripts group box.. Note that. If it exists.. Use a meaningful comment as printer name. A PostScript printer is probably the most accessible printer on your network.dat" in this directory. The name you enter will be visible on the list of printers to choose from when using the File ->Print. for upward compatibility reasons. Use the defaults in the Paper Format group box. the file is used. Click the OK button to redisplay the Printer Setup dialog box which now looks like this: This creates the following printer configuration file: $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOT0000. If not. the system searches the Versatec plot configuration file for the declaration: export VGSDIR=EXTERNAL and. command. if it finds this declaration.. For the purposes of this task. click the combo box opposite the Default Queue Name and select a physical printer from the list of printers available on your network: 5.3. the system searches for the file "prmfil. for example. button.. uses the variables set in the declaration part of the submission script associated with the plotter. leave the driver set to Post Script. The specific parameter files for these drivers are delivered in the following directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/startup/PrintServices/PrintDriverData For Versatec drivers.plot_cfg. it searches for a declaration like this: export VGSDIR=path . CATIA Version 4 UNIX print drivers are supported. In the Printer group box. My PostScript Printer. and do not click the Advanced Configuration.

Print icon 7. For more information about these options. 6. 8. . Click the Test button to send a test print job to the printer. If you want to set other print settings.. and then sets the appropriate variables.where "path" is the path of a directory containing all the Versatec files. or click the Quick . because you have now set up a printer.. the Remove. refer to "Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX". Note that. click the Quit button in the Printer Setup dialog box. Configure. Click the OK button to print the document. and Test option buttons are now available. then select the File->Print command to display the Print dialog box: Note that the printer name you created previously is displayed in the Printer Name field. or preview the document prior to printing.

Capturing and Managing Images for the Album Capturing Simple Images Capturing Selected Areas of Images Previewing Images in the Album Renaming Images in the Album Deleting Images from the Album Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only) Saving Images to Other Formats Printing Images from the Album Recording Interactions in Video Format .

This lets you access the Banner field containing the $NAME. print your username. Click the Options icon to access the Capture Options dialog box. when viewing only the specification tree in a document. Select the Tools->Image->Capture.Capturing Simple Images This task explains how to capture images. the Vector command is activated by default. 1. $DATE and $TIME variables which. and the current date and time in the banner at the bottom of the capture. 2. check the White Background option if you want the capture to be taken on a white background.. by default. command to display the capture toolbar: Note that the command activated by default in the capture toolbar depends on the type of document active when you display the toolbar: when a part (or assembly) document is active. The General tab lets you set the following options: check the Show Banner option if you want to show a banner on the capture.. when a drawing document is activated. . the Vector command is activated by default. This field is editable: you can delete the variables if required and replace them with a text of your choice. the Pixel command is activated by default.

Click the Pixel icon or the Vector icon to choose between a pixel or a vector image. the greater the quality of the capture. Use the Preview icon to compare captures made with different rendering quality factors. 4. and specifies the image name. Click the Album icon to capture the image and store it in the album. in which edges are not displayed.. A message appears in the status bar informing you that the captured image has been stored in the album.The Various tab lets you set the following options: check the Capture White Vectors as Black option if you want to print white vectors as black on the resulting capture set the Rendering Quality factor which determines the quality of output: low (screen): the quality of the output matches the screen resolution medium highest. command to display the album. In Shading mode. . capturing vector images is not useful. not shaded surfaces. and produces images that cannot be viewed in the album: you capture only lines and edges in vector mode. The album is displayed. The higher the setting. 3.. Select the Tools->Image->Album. listing the current contents of the album. 5.

The contents of the album are stored on your system in a non-editable file in the location defined by the CATTemp environment variable. . Deleting this file deletes the contents of the album.

Click the Album icon to capture the image and store it in the album.. 5. The Capture toolbar now looks like this: 3. the height and width of the outline you are drawing (expressed as the number of pixels) are displayed: 4. command to display the Capture toolbar: 2. As you drag. Click the Select icon in the Capture toolbar to activate the selection tool. The bounding outline still displays the size in pixels. Select the Tools->Image->Capture.Capturing Selected Areas of Images This task shows you how to capture selected areas of images.. 1. . Release the mouse button. or the sides of the outline. Click in the geometry area and drag to create a bounding outline around the area to be captured. but you can also: drag the outline by dragging the "x" symbol at the center of the outline or resize it by dragging the handles at each corner.

6. command to display the album. .. Select the Tools->Image->Album. and double-click the image to preview it.. The selected area of the image has been captured.

.. Images are named "Capture_xxx". Select an image from the list and click the Preview icon the list to display the Print Preview window: or double-click the image name in . You can display images in the preview area to the right by selecting them in the list. The system automatically assigns names to each image. Select the Tools->Image->Album. command to display the album contents. 1. 2.Previewing Images in the Album This task explains how to display images in the album. where "xxx" is a number from 001 to 999. This allows you to easily identify the image content.

Select OK to exit the Print Preview window. .3.

You can perform multiple selections by Ctrl-clicking. Click the Preview icon . . This time. Our example shows that all images in the album have been selected: 5. select several images in the list. All selected images are now displayed together in the Print Preview window. Performance and image quality will be determined by the number of images on the preview page. Shift-clicking or dragging using the left mouse button.4.

.You can also use the Fit All In icon and zooming commands inside the Print Preview window.

2.Renaming Images in the Album This task explains how to rename images in the album. . Image names are "Capture_xxx". we renamed "iso_view" to "iso_view_of_my_new_part. a horizontal scroll bar appears at the bottom of the name list when you press the Enter key to confirm the new name. where "xxx" is a number from 001 to 999.. In our example. To rename an image. The system automatically assigns names to each image. Select the Tools->Image->Album. click in the text box and enter the new name.. 1. then press the Enter key to confirm. command to display the album contents." The scroll bar allows you to scroll to read the full name. we want to rename "Capture_004" to "iso_view": If the new name exceeds the size of the text field. In our example.

we want to delete "Capture_000".. In our example..Deleting Images from the Album This task explains how to delete images from the album. . Select the Tools->Image->Album. command to display the album contents: 2. 1. Select the image(s) to be deleted from the album.

Click the Erase icon to erase the selected image. The image list is updated.3. In our example. "Capture_000" has been deleted. .

command to display the album. Click the Copy icon . 4. a word processing package). 1. In our example. for integration into OLE-compliant application documents.. 3. The selected image is copied to the clipboard. Paste the image into the external application.Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only) This task explains how to copy images from the album to the clipboard. from where it can then be pasted into another application document (for example.. 2. Select the image(s) to be copied to the clipboard. Select the Tools->Image->Album. the selected image has been pasted into Microsoft Word: .

For general information about linking and embedding data from Version 5 documents in OLE-compliant applications. command offers two modes: you can either paste (embed) the data as normal.. or link the copied data to its source. There is a quicker alternative: you can also select the Tools->Image->Capture..You paste data into OLE-compliant documents using either the Paste command or the Paste Special. command and simply click the Copy icon in the Capture toolbar. . The image is not stored in the album... command: the Paste command simply copies the data into the OLE-compliant application the Paste Special... This captures the image and copies it directly to the clipboard. refer to "Using Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications".

. command to display the album.. icon .. 3. Click the Save As. 4. Enter a name for the file. . Select the Tools->Image->Album.. Select the image(s) to be saved to another format. 1. The formats to which you can save depend on the format (pixel or vector) of the image you selected.Saving Images to Other Formats This task explains how to save images in the album to other formats. 2.

its color depth (bits per pixel) and its compression scheme. The advantage of bitmap files is that they can reproduce complex scenes (for instance photographic or photo-realistic images) that could not be reproduced using basic geometrical shapes. called the palette. The formats you can save to depend on the format (pixel or vector) in which the image was originally saved. the formats are: HP/RTL (UNIX only) JPEG Fair Quality (*.pdf A bitmap is a set of pixels arranged in lines and columns and is fully described by its width and height.adobe.tif) TIFF Indexed (*. Some of these bitmaps are coded on 8 bits and the pixels are indexed on a color table. The format common format is true color (24 bits per pixel).5.rgb) Windows Bitmap (*. An additional color component.jpg) JPEG High Quality (*.partners.jpg) JPEG Medium Quality (*.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/TIFF6.jpg) JPEG Lossless (*.ijg. TIFF True Color (*. The bitmap format generally supports compression (either lossless or lossy).org http://www.tif) RGB (SGI Format) Not Compressed (*.tif) TIFF BW Packbit (*.tif) TIFF Indexed Packbit (*.org and http://www.tif) TIFF True Color Packbit (*.tif) TIFF Grey Scale Packbit (*.jpeg. MS Photo Editor) recognize the JPEG format without loss of information).jpg): very few applications (MS Office. browse the following Internet sites: http://www. Select a format from the list. For pixel images.bmp) (Windows only) For detailed information about JPG and TIFF format. may be used to define the transparency of each pixel. called Alpha component. The following table summarizes information about bitmap files and the various formats you can use to save your images in the album: .

partners.adobe. vector graphics and bitmaps. the formats are: Windows Metafile (Windows only) PostScript: PostScript is a page description language that supports text.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/PLRM. browse the following Internet site: http://www.1 BMP X Bit depth 8 16 24 X X X 32 X None X Compression RLE JPEG ZLIB X CCITT Maximum size in pixels 2G*2G Comments JPEG X X X X X 64K*64K PNG X X X X X X 2G*2G RGB X X X X X X X 64K*64K TIFF X X X X X X X X 2G*2G Standard bitmap storage on MS-Windows Very few applications support the lossless JPEG mode Successor of the GIF format Supported by very few applications Very popular and general format recognized by most imaging applications For vector images. It may also be included in a larger PostScript document . For detailed information about PostScript. It is device-independent and implements an industry standard for communicating graphic information between applications and hardware devices such as printers.pdf EPS: Encapsulated PostScript does not contain page description directives and is designed for portable exchange between applications and platforms.

CATIA Version 5 supports the CGM Version 1 and Version 3 standards. HP-GL. The advantage of vector files over bitmap files is that image scaling does not affect image appearance.PDF: Portable Document Format is a platform-independent page description file format designed for platform exchange.pdf HP-GL/2-RTL: Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language file format is an instruction set developped for controlling plotters. It may contain text. When zooming bitmap files. its color and filling type.org .adobe. splines. browse the following Internet site: http://www. which as been developped for pen plotters. vector graphics and bitmaps. improved font and text support as well as bitmap compression. The CGM-ATA and CGM-CALS profiles which are specific subsets of the Version 3 standard are also supported. HP-GL/2-RTL is an evolution of HP-GL providing more graphic primitives (such as polygons or curves) and a support for bitmaps. dots. text with font information or bitmaps (only in metafiles) and are used to reconstruct the final image. rectangles. browse the following Internet site: http://www. Each element has its own attributes specifying its size. its relative position in the whole image. circles. For detailed information about PDF. polygons. is now obsolete. For detailed information about CGM formats. CGM Version 3 adds vector primitives such as Bezier and Nurbs.com/sn/developer/acrosdk/DOCS/PDFRef.partners. pixels become visible as shown in the example below: Vector image Bitmap image The following CGM vector formats are supported: CGM ISO CGM CALS CGM ATA. Vector files contain geometrical descriptions of the image elements. CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile) is an ANSI/ISO standardized platform-independent format used for the interchange of vector and bitmap data.cgmopen.These elements may be lines.

. The Save As.. You do not need to open the album first to save images to other formats. and if you save to a vector format. Compressing Images Here are listed the several methods you can use to compress images: .The table below summarizes the purposes of the above mentioned formats: Printing/Plotting Data Exchange Purpose Format HP-GL/2-RTL PS EPS PDF CGM X X X X X 6. 7.. Note that high quality images require longer computation time. button to set further save options associated with saving rasterized images: DPI: resolution in dots per inch (DPI) width height and click OK or Cancel... icon is also available by selecting the Tools->Image->Capture. allowing you to save to a file directly (without saving the image in the album).. Click the Save button. click the Options. command and clicking the Save icon in the Capture toolbar. On UNIX only.

There is no loss of information but the file size is impacted.) JPEG lossy compression This method looses information by removing details the human eyes can hardly perceive. These two methods are mainly used for TIFF files. The loss of visible details may be minimized at the expense of the compression factor. The LZW algorithm and the GIF format are both patented. Note that this method is not available in CATIA. The lossless JPEG compression is also part of the JPEG file format but is supported by very few applications LZW This method is used for GIF and TIFF files and removes redundancies in the picture. Typically. It is used for PNG format which is meant to be a non-patented successor of the GIF format. This method is suitable for images with large uniformly colored areas. you can compress images by a factor of 20 without losing the subjective quality. etc. BMP. Note that this method is not available in CATIA. it cannot achieve high compression ratios like those of more sophisticated compression algorithms. typically found in computer graphics.RLE Run-length encoding is the easiest and fastest compression method. The reconstructed image is not identical to the original one. since it is bigger. ZLIB This lossless compression method belongs to the same category as the LZW method. However. The table below shows the most appropriate compression method for a specific image type: Image type Compression Lossy JPEG ZLIB CCITT G4 None X X X X X X 20:1 5:1 15:1 1:1 Computer graphics Photographic Bi-level Typical ratio X You can save images in bitmap format without having to compress them. . The compression ratio mainly depends on the data content. CCITT/Fax encoding CCITT Group 3 and CCITT Group 4 are lossless data compression methods for black and white (bi-level) images. which are typically scanned images with a great size. Most bitmap files support run-length encoding (such as TIFF.

.

. 3. Refer to "Printing Documents" for a full description of how to print. 1. Click the Print icon to display the Print dialog box: Images are printed the same way as any other document.Printing Images from the Album This task explains how to print images. Select the Tools->Image->Album... Select the image(s) to be printed. command to display the album contents: 2.

.You do not need to open the album first to print images.. allowing you to print the file directly (without saving the image in the album). command and clicking the Print icon in the Capture toolbar.. The Print command is also available by selecting the Tools->Image->Capture.

The video formats supported vary according to your operating system: Microsoft AVI (Windows) AVI Motion JPEG (generated on all platforms.. In our example.) provided on your system. Note that no tools are provided for replaying video captures: to do so. but can only be read on Windows) Still Image Capture: available on all operating systems.. Click the Recording button to access the Video Properties dialog box which lets you set up the video capture parameters prior to recording the video: Choosing the Video File Format and Location 3.avi" and the video format is "Microsoft AVI". Choose the Format of the video file to be recorded. Quicktime. command is only available if a document is open. depending on your operating system.. The Video. If you install the appropriate CODEC for the MPEG format.Recording Interactions in Video Format You can record sequences of interactions and store them in standard and proprietary video formats. command to display the Video Recorder dialog box: Note that the name of the video file to be generated and the current video format are both indicated. compressed JPG captures SGI Movie (IRIX) Quicktime (IRIX) MPEG (IRIX). etc. the video file name is "movie00000. Select the Tools->Image->Video. this format is not generated by operating system-dependent libraries and provides still. 1. Setting Up the Capture Session 2. use the video replay tools (Windows Media Player. .. you will be able to generate MPEG format files on Windows (you can download video CODECs from the Microsoft Support Internet site).

If you uncheck this option. etc.).avi".4. along with a drive and folder (or directory) name. but does not record interactions in pulldown menus. Specifying which part of the screen to record 5.). If you choose another folder or directory. select which part of the screen you want to capture. dialog boxes. You can also click the When you first access the dialog box. A preview area opposite the list of options illustrates which part of the screen will be captured.avi" when you set the video format to "Microsoft AVI". like this for example on Windows: c:\Videos\MyMovie. Recording interactions in any window area containing the focus Window: lets you shift the focus to any window in any application on the screen which accepts the focus. If you want the video file name (and number) to be set automatically.avi. which is activated by default. the file number will be incremented (movie00001. the video file name is "movie00000. In the Capture tab. In our example. Recording interactions in the current document window The options are: Document Window: records viewpoint manipulations in the current document window. for example "MOVIE. jpg.avi icon. Each time you generate a new video file using the Recording button. its name is displayed: C:\Videos\ (Windows) /u/users/steve/videos (UNIX). etc. . the Name field becomes editable and the prefix changes to "MOVIE". navigate to the appropriate location and rename the file. movie00002. then capture that window.avi. check the Automatic File Name option. Note that you can zoom and pan the selection in the preview area. You can then rename the file in the Name field. etc. Check the Window option to activate the selection arrow above the preview area. it specifies the default folder: C:\TEMP\ (Windows) /tmp (UNIX). the system automatically names the video file starting with the prefix "movie00000" and appends the video extension (avi. If you do so.

Then.and displays it in the preview area when you release the button. . Your pointer changes to the shape of a cross: +. Recording interactions in any rectangular area you draw Area: lets you draw a rectangular area anywhere on the screen. As you drag. dragging the "+" pointer inside the Capture tab highlights the frame of the Capture tab.. and the size of the rectangle is displayed: .. As you drag. each part of each application window is highlighted. for capturing what happens inside this area only. Check the Area option to activate the selection arrow above the preview area.. Practice dragging the "+" pointer around your screen to see the different areas that can be highlighted. you draw a rectangle like this. In the example opposite. select the arrow to see your pointer change shape like this: Then drag (using the left mouse button). All interactions are recorded.. select the arrow to see your pointer change shape like this: Drag (using the left mouse button). Then.

.Release the mouse button to close the rectangle and define the part of the screen to be recorded. All interactions are recorded. All interactions are recorded. The area inside the rectangle is displayed in the preview area. Right-click to interrupt the selection of the part of the screen to capture. Recording interactions anywhere on the whole screen Full Screen: specifies that you want to capture the whole screen.

Check the Timer option if required: using the timer will record a frame every "n" milliseconds (you set the value using the editable field or spinner): note that if you set a low value. the Compressor list contains the option: Full Frames (Uncompressed). check the Include Cursor option if you want the cursor to be visible in the recorded sequence. or the Stop button to stop the recording. Selecting this option prior to recording has the following effects: the resulting video file is larger (because it is not compressed) but performance during the recording is enhanced (because each frame is not compressed as soon as it is recorded). then configure it.. a low value displays a smaller number of frames per second. zooming. 10. Installing Version 5 does NOT install CODECs on your computer. refer to the CODEC supplier's documentation. Messages in the status bar and the Video Recorder dialog box inform you each time a frame is recorded: 11. 8. the system will record a frame only each time the viewpoint is updated (by rotating. Setting Movie Replay Parameters Using the Movie tab. button to set up your video compression/decompression parameters. This option defines the video replay speed: a high value displays a large number of frames per second. On Windows only.). The list of CODECs differs from one platform to another.. etc. Set a value for the option Rate in Frames per Second. 9. Click OK in the Video Properties dialog box to start the recording. the system will record a high number of frames. Clicking this button will display a dialog box allowing you to choose a CODEC from the list of CODECs installed on your computer. 7. The role of the CODEC is to compress your video files. set the movie playback parameters.6. For information about how to configure the CODEC. Click the Pause button to pause. so the recording will be replayed more quickly. . which will consequently impair performance and create a larger video file if you do not check the Timer option. so the recording will be replayed more slowly. Select the Compressor Setup. On Windows.

Viewing Objects Activating Viewing Tools Using the Mouse Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area Panning Zooming In Zooming Out Zooming In On An Area Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane Rotating .

Press and hold down the middle mouse button. Drag using the middle mouse button. Click the middle mouse button. then the left (or right) mouse button. as indicated in the table below: Mouse To use the mouse to.. and drag (still holding both buttons down). Press and hold down the middle mouse button... Center the display at a specific location Pan Rotate Zoom Do this. The following example shows you how to get this from this in three steps: ..Activating Viewing Tools Using the Mouse or the Keyboard You do not have to use the viewing tool commands or icons to perform all viewing operations. For quick access. you can also use just the mouse or the keyboard to activate a certain number of viewing tools. then click the left mouse button and drag (still holding the middle mouse button down).

.

Press and hold down middle Pan button.. Press and hold down the middle mouse button. then drag. rotate. then drag. then drag (still holding the middle mouse button down). This key combination using a . Note: See "Hiding and Showing Objects" for information about showing and hiding. 2-button mouse . etc.. the requisite drivers are delivered with these devices. and "Using Rendering Styles" for hidden line rendering. Press and hold down the middle press and hold down CTRL or left mouse button. to perform graphic viewing manipulations (zoom. then click the left mouse button. the middle mouse button. Clicking on the corresponding icon runs the corresponding command once only. until you click to exit. then drag. right) mouse button.. a 3-button mouse. then the left (or button. pan.). Rotate (3D/zoom/2D) Zoom Press and hold down CTRL ALT and Press and hold down CTRL and the right button.. Zoom . Using the View->Modify commands or pressing and holding down the middle mouse button activates a permanent viewing mode for each command. then drag. and this key combination on Do this. then drag. On Windows computers: the IntelliMouse (two buttons plus a wheel) is an alternative to the 3-button mouse: pressing and hold down the wheel the same way as the middle mouse button (but rolling the wheel is not supported) a 2-button mouse may alternatively be used (the third button is emulated using a key combination). in addition to the mouse. The 3-button mouse is recommended for usability reasons.. Then: Release the CTRL or left button.The SpaceBall or SpaceMouse can be used.. Press ALT and right button.. then drag.. Then: With ALT and right button held down.

This keyboard shortcut .. shortcut for 3D objects....Keyboard You can use these shortcuts in Examine mode only.. and this keyboard for 2D objects . Pan Rotate around the X axis (3D only) Rotate around the Y axis (3D only) Rotate around the Z axis (3D only) - Zoom In Zoom Out .... Press CTRL and arrows Press CTRL and arrows Then: With Shift and left or right arrow With Shift and up or down arrow With CTRL and Shift and left or right arrow (Auto-repeat when pressing and holding down the keys) Then: Press CTRL and Page Up Press CTRL and Page Down Then: Press the left arrow Press the right arrow Press the up arrow Press the down arrow Move to the left view (2D only) Move to the right view (2D only) Move to the up view (2D only) Move to the down view (2D only) Press CTRL and Page Up Press CTRL and Page Down Do this.

. 1. or click the Fit All In Fit All In zooms the current view out so that all the document contents fit into the space available in the geometry area.Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area This task explains how to fit the current document contents into the geometry area. Select the View->Fit All In command. icon.

or click the Pan 2. . then release the mouse button. Select the View->Pan command. Drag (left or right mouse button) to a new location. 1. icon.Panning This task explains how to move the current document contents by panning the camera viewpoint.

icon.Zooming In This task explains how to zoom in by predetermined increments. To zoom up close (as illustrated). . not by increments. 1. Select the View->Modify->Zoom In command. click on the icon several times in succession. or click the Zoom In You zoom in by one increment each time you click on the icon. You can also use the View->Zoom In Out command and drag (left mouse button) to zoom in progressively.

Select the View->Modify->Zoom Out command.Zooming Out This task explains how to zoom out by predetermined increments.or click the Zoom Out icon. click on the icon several times in succession. You can also use the View->Zoom In Out command and drag (left mouse button) to zoom out progressively. To zoom out (as illustrated). . 1. You zoom out by one increment each time you click on the icon. not by increments.

Drag (left mouse button) to draw the bounding outline containing the area on which you want to zoom in. .Zooming In On An Area This task explains how to zoom in on an area. 2. Select the View->Zoom Area command. The area now viewed is the area you captured inside the bounding outline. 1.

.Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane This task explains how to view an object along a perpendicular to a selected plane 1. 2. Select the View->Modify->Normal View command or click the Normal View icon. Select a plane. The object is projected onto the selected plane so you can now view along a normal to the plane.

Press and hold down the left (or right) mouse button to see the rotation sphere symbol appear around the object. 1. 4. or click the Rotate 2. drag to rotate. Still holding the button down. .Rotating This task explains how to rotate an object. Click to stop rotation. icon. 3. Select the View->Rotate command.

Navigating Navigating in Examine Mode Navigating in Walk Mode Navigating in Fly Mode Changing Views Viewing Objects against the Ground Magnifying Looking At Objects Turning Your Head To View An Object .

see "Activating Viewing Tools Using the Mouse".Navigating in Examine Mode Navigating in Examine Mode is the default mode. For more information. in the View . zoom out) to different objects. You can examine your document as you would from the outside by moving around the document's perimeter. or as you would from within. turning your head to view or moving closer (zoom in. available when using the beginners walk and fly modes. You can also access the Examine mode via the Examine icon toolbar.

Select View->Navigation Mode->Walk. you must be in a perspective view (View>Render Style->Perspective). You begin to walk straight forward in the chosen direction. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document. 2. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 . then click the left mouse button to begin to walking. Release at the desired location. Releasing the mouse button means you exit the command. The icons used in the beginner's walk mode appear in the View toolbar: These commands are also available via the View->Modify command in the menu bar. Click the Turn Head icon in the View toolbar then drag (left mouse button) to define your starting position (the direction in which you look at the object).model. Open the document Platform.doc\src\basugbt1302.Navigating in Walk Mode Page 1 of 5 Navigating in Walk Mode In Walk mode. Before using the Walk navigation mode. Two walk modes are available: Beginner's mode Advanced mode for experienced users. If you attempt to activate Walk mode. Click the Walk icon. Beginner's walk mode commands are single-action commands. 1. You can only move forward in beginner's walk mode. Beginners Walk Mode This task shows you how to navigate in beginner's walk mode. 3. you can walk forward and backward (backward in advanced mode only) as well as turn right or left as you walk along the horizontal plane. A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view. you will be prompted to switch to a perspective view. 4.

Drag the cursor back towards the center of the view to continue walking straight forward in the new direction. The further you drag away from the center of the view (represented by the circular change in direction. To modify your speed. As you drag. then click the Walk icon again followed by the left mouse button to pursue your walk. 7. drag to the right or left. The speed is optimized so that you reach the point you target in approximately 10 seconds. Advanced Walk Mode file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. You walk in the direction in which you drag. click the Examine mode View toolbar icon in the You can also set mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in the Visualization tab. To return to the default navigation mode.doc\src\basugbt1302. 8. dragging to the right produces the same effect in the opposite direction. 5. to change direction. the greater the Dragging to the left lets you view the object as if you had turned your head to the left.Navigating in Walk Mode Page 2 of 5 A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view. or up or down. and is calculated automatically. click the Accelerate or Decelerate icon one or more times.htm 1/30/01 . symbol). the shape of the arrow changes to reflect the direction in which you are walking: 6. Still holding the left button down. The figure below the arrow specifies the speed at which you are walking: The speed at which you first approach the object depends on the initial distance from the object. accessed via the Tools->Options command.

Page 3 of 5 Before using the Walk navigation mode.e. Press and hold down the middle mouse button to define the horizontal view plane. you must be in a perspective view (View>Render Style->Perspective).doc\src\basugbt1302. Open the document Platform. 4. 3. click the left mouse button to begin walking. It is easier to walk through documents in contexts where you would find a virtual ground. In the Walk mode. press and hold down the middle mouse button until you've finished navigating. You begin to walk forward in the chosen direction. 1. drag to the left or to the right to determine the direction in which you wish to walk.htm 1/30/01 . Still holding the button down. When in the direction in which you wish to walk. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document. in buildings. planes or ships for example.model. i. A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view. like when using the beginner's walk mode: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.Navigating in Walk Mode This task shows you how to navigate through a document in Walk mode. Select View->Navigation Mode->Walk. 2.

Pressing the PageUp and PageDown keys modifies your speed.htm 1/30/01 . 6. Click the left mouse button again to reverse the direction. When a collision is detected. drag left or right to change direction: Page 4 of 5 Dragging to the left lets you view the object as if you had turned your head to the left. Note: The left and right directions are now defined as if you were walking away from the target with your back towards it. away from the target. Still holding the middle button down. Speed is indicated in the status bar. dragging to the right produces the same effect in the opposite direction. the green arrow turns red. whether you navigate in beginner's or advanced Walk mode: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 7. You begin to walk backward.doc\src\basugbt1302.Navigating in Walk Mode 5. Drag the cursor back towards the center of the view to continue your walk straight forward in the new direction.

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. accessed via the Tools->Options command.Navigating in Walk Mode Page 5 of 5 You can also set mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in the Visualization tab.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugbt1302.

You can only move forward in beginner's fly mode.doc\src\basugbt1303. Beginner's Fly Mode This task shows you how to navigate in beginner's fly mode. Beginner's fly mode commands are single-action commands. Two fly modes are available: Beginner's mode Advanced mode for experienced users.Navigating in Fly Mode Page 1 of 7 Navigating in Fly Mode In Fly mode you can move upward or downward on any horizontal view plane as you move forward or backward (backward in advanced mode only). 1. Releasing the mouse button means you exit the command. Click the Fly Mode icon in the View toolbar or select View->Navigation Mode->Fly. The icons used in the beginner's fly mode appear in the View toolbar: These commands are also available via the View->Modify command in the menu bar. Open the document Platform. Before using the Fly navigation mode. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document. you will be prompted to switch to a perspective view. you must be in a perspective view (View->Render Style->Perspective). If you attempt to activate Fly mode. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.model.htm 1/30/01 .

2.htm 1/30/01 . Click the Fly icon. 4.Navigating in Fly Mode These commands are also available via the View->Modify command in the menu bar. Click the Turn Head icon in the View toolbar then drag (left mouse button) to define your starting position (the direction in which you look at the object).doc\src\basugbt1303. 3. Release at the desired location. Page 2 of 7 You begin to fly forward in the chosen direction. A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. then click the left mouse button to begin to flying.

the greater the change in direction. 5. or up or down.Navigating in Fly Mode Page 3 of 7 The figure below the arrow specifies the speed at which you are flying: The speed at which you first approach the object depends on the initial distance from the object. then drag to pursue your fly. drag to the right or left.htm icon one or more times. Drag the cursor back towards the center of the view to continue flying straight forward in the new direction. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. to change direction. To modify your speed. You fly in the direction in which you drag. click the Accelerate or Decelerate click the Fly icon again.doc\src\basugbt1303. 7. the shape of the arrow changes to reflect the direction in which you are flying: 6. The further you drag away from the center of the view (represented by the circular symbol). As you drag. Still holding the left button down. The speed is optimized so that you reach the point you target in approximately 10 seconds. and is calculated automatically. then 1/30/01 .

providing a more realistic effect.doc\src\basugbt1303. click the left mouse button to begin flying. 4. Press and hold down the middle mouse button to define the initial horizontal view plane. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. the only difference being that in Fly mode you can move upward or downward on any horizontal plane as you move forward or backward. Click the Fly Mode icon in the View toolbar or select View->Navigation Mode->Fly. 1. Before using the Fly navigation mode. When you collide with a solid object when flying. click the Examine mode icon in the View toolbar. To return to the default navigation mode. Page 4 of 7 Advanced Fly Mode This task shows you how to navigate through a document in Advanced Fly mode.htm 1/30/01 . press and hold down the middle mouse button until you've finished navigating. Open the document Platform. and you will no longer fly through the object. you will slide along the object's surface. 8. 3. drag to the left or to the right.model. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document. When in the direction in which you wish to fly. to determine the direction in which you wish to fly. This feature is also available in Advanced Fly mode. 2. Fly is used in exactly the same way as Walk. In the Fly mode. you must be in a perspective view (View->Render Style ->Perspective). Pressing the Shift key and dragging lets you bank left or right.Navigating in Fly Mode Each click on the icon increases or decreases the speed by approximately 40%. Still holding the button down. You can also mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in the same Visualization tab. or up or down.

The speed is optimized so that you reach the point you target in approximately 10 seconds. When in the direction in which you wish to fly. click the left mouse button to begin flying. Still holding the middle button down. A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view. drag left or right to change direction. like when using the beginner's fly mode. Drag the cursor towards the center of the view to continue flying forward in the new direction: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 6. the greater the change in direction. You fly in the direction in which you drag.doc\src\basugbt1303. The further you drag away from the center of the view. You begin to fly straight forward in the chosen direction. The speed at which you first approach the object depends on the initial distance from the object.Navigating in Fly Mode 4. Page 5 of 7 5.htm 1/30/01 . and is calculated automatically.

accessed via the Tools>Options command. You can use the option " when navigating" in the Visualization tab. While turning in Fly mode. Each press of the key increases or decreases the speed by approximately 40%. the up and down are reversed. Click the left mouse button again to reverse direction: You begin to fly backwards. to fix the X. Speed is indicated in the status bar. away from the target.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugbt1303. this file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. When flying backwards. 7.Navigating in Fly Mode Page 6 of 7 Pressing the PageUp and PageDown keys modifies your speed. Y or Z axis during navigation.

Page 7 of 7 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in the same Visualization tab. You can also set gravitational effects. like when using the beginner's fly mode.htm 1/30/01 . as in a real plane.doc\src\basugbt1303.Navigating in Fly Mode >Options creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with respect to the fixed axis.

This task shows you how to change views. views are created each time you pause during your walkabout or fly around. Navigate in Examine mode (zoom.) to create and save several different views. Select the View->Modify->Next View command.doc\src\basugbt1304. The previous view is displayed in the geometry area. 3. In walk and fly modes. pan.htm 1/30/01 . etc. Views are stored and can be reviewed.model. Select the View->Modify->Previous View command again. 1. walk and fly modes.Changing Views Page 1 of 1 Changing Views Individual views are created as you navigate through your design in examine. Select the View->Modify->Previous View command. The next saved view is displayed in the geometry area. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document. 4. 2. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Open the document Platform.

2. the plane parallel or tangent to the bottom point of your document is considered to be the ground.Viewing Objects against the Ground Page 1 of 1 Viewing Objects against the Ground Ground lets you visually insert a plane at the ground level of your document. Select View->Ground. The ground plane is displayed in the geometry area. 1.htm 1/30/01 .model. To hide the ground. You need a V4 Integration license to open this document. then release the mouse button. The ground is repositioned as defined. This task shows you how to show and hide the ground. Drag (left mouse button) the ground up or down to a new location. When you first access a document.doc\src\basugbt1305. simply repeat the same step. Open the document Platform. thus enabling you to recognize when your document is viewed the right way up. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

Magnifying This tasks explains how to obtain a magnified view of your document in a separate window. Select the View->Magnifier. 2. 1... command. The Magnifier window opens containing a magnified section of your document: The section magnified is defined by the magnifier viewport which appears over the object in your document: Note that the magnifier viewport has handles: the "+" symbol lets you move the viewport the handles in the corners let you resize the viewport. Point to the + symbol and drag it to move the viewport and magnify another area of the document: .

All the viewing and manipulations performed in the document window are also reflected in the Magnifier window. Point to one of the handles and drag it to size the magnified area up and down.3. While you drag. rotate the object to see how the object is also rotated in the Magnifier window: . the symbol appears. For example.

.

You can also press and hold down both Shift then the middle mouse button for a quicker result. a rectangle with two diagonals appears and continues to grow as long as you continue to drag. The viewport is then shaped like a pyramid: your eyepoint is located at the vertex of the pyramid. 4. You now see what is targeted inside the viewport. 3. 1. Release the button. Continue dragging to move around. You can resize the viewport by dragging the middle mouse button. resize and reposition the viewport. Drag (left mouse button) slowly to display the viewport. .Looking At Objects This tasks explains how to look at the document in a specific direction by targeting through a user-defined viewport. 2. This rectangle represents the viewing window of the future view. Select the View->Modify->Look At command. As you begin to drag.

Turning Your Head To View An Object This tasks explains how to view an object by simulating what happens when you turn your head to look at the scene. Select the View->Modify->Turn Head command. 2. A navigation symbol appears to help you understand what happens as you drag. In our example. Drag (left mouse button). Release at the desired location. 1. . or click the Turn Head icon in the View toolbar. 3. dragging to the right lets you view the object as if you had turned your head.

Hiding and Showing Objects Hiding Objects Displaying Hidden Objects .

The object is no longer displayed: it has been transferred into the No Show space. In our example. A component placed in no show in the product structure will appear in low highlighting in the tree. the object is transferred to the No Show space in each document window. Select an object. select the line.Hiding Objects This task explains how to hide objects by transferring them to the No Show space (they are no longer displayed). Click the Hide/Show icon again to display the object in the Show space. or select the View->Hide/Show->Swap Hide/Show command. click the Graphic tab. 2. Click the Hide/Show icon. Note also that if you have several document windows open containing the same objects. and set the Shown option to achieve the same effect. After selecting an object. In our example. 3. . you can also use select the Edit->Properties command. 1. the line is no longer displayed.

Click the No Show icon again to return to the Show space. 2. Click the No Show icon to display the contents of the no show area. The geometry area changes color to indicate you are now viewing the No Show space. a line which was originally displayed is now in the no show area. Display the same geometry as in the preceding example. 3. . You can also select objects and transfer them back to the Show space using the Hide/Show icon. In our example. you now see only the line.Displaying Hidden Objects This task explains how to display objects transferred to the no show area. You can continue working on objects in the No Show space. 1. In our example.

Using Rendering Styles Wireframe (NHR) Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) Shading (SHD) Shading with Edges (SHD+E) Displaying Perspective and Parallel Views Customizing the View Mode .

Wireframe (NHR) This tasks explains how to display objects in wireframe mode. Select the View->Render Style->Wireframe (NHR) command or click the icon. Wireframe Setting a shaded part to NHR has the following effect: . 1.

Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) This tasks explains how to display objects in quick hidden line removal mode. 1. . Select the View->Render Style->Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) command or click the Dynamic Hidden Line Removal Setting a shaded part to HRD has the following effect: icon.

Select the View->Render Style->Shading (SHD) command or click the icon. 1.Shading (SHD) This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode. Shading Setting a part in NHR mode to SHD mode has the following effect: .

. Select the View->Render Style->Shading with Edges (SHD+E) command or click the Shading with Edges Setting a shaded model to SHD+E has the following effect: icon.Shading with Edges (SHD+E) This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode with edges. 1.

Perspective is related to the size of the object being viewed. Select the Render Style->Perspective command. and the distance of the object from the observer. before using the Walk and Fly navigation modes. . or the Render Style->Parallel command.Displaying Perspective and Parallel Views This tasks explains how to display objects in perspective or parallel views. Note that. 1. you must be in a perspective view.

If you selected OK.Customizing the View Mode This tasks explains how to use the customize and apply view parameters. The "Custom View Modes" dialog box appears. you will be able to apply these settings to the current document by selecting: the View->Render Style->Apply Customized View command or. Customize your own view parameters by checking or unchecking the appropriate options. In our example opposite. Select OK if you want to save your customized view parameters. the view settings for the current document will be checked in the dialog box. In certain cases. 1. checking one option may also activate other options. . 3. If this is the case. or Cancel to exit without saving them. the current view is updated dynamically to take your settings into account. 2. If this is the first time you are using the command. your view parameters will be stored with your settings. Select the View->Render Style->Apply Customized View command. the Shading parameter is checked: this means that the view mode for the current document is "Shading". the icon in the list of rendering options in the View toolbar. Each time you check or uncheck an option.

.

Setting Lighting and Depth Effects Setting Lighting Effects Setting Depth Effects .

1.. Select the View->Lighting.Setting Lighting Effects This tasks explains how to vary ambient lighting effects.. like this: ..... command to display the Light Source Editor dialog box. . and produce a lighting effect. for example. The default light source settings look like this.

2.Note that the Single Light icon is activated by default. The handle on the sphere indicates the direction from which the light is being projected: by default. Drag the handle down and towards the bottom right: the light is now coming from the bottom right: 3. You can drag the handle around (using the left mouse button) to change the lighting direction. A slider at the bottom of the dialog box lets you adjust light source brightness. The new lighting effect is created instantaneously as you drag the handle. Click the Two Lights icon to add another light source. the light is coming from the top left. The sphere indicates the current lighting direction. .

. 4.In our example. Drag the brightness slider (the first slider in the list) to the left to reduce the brightness. using two light sources means that the lighting is now too bright.

Now drag the lower handle up towards the top left to change the direction of the corresponding light source. .5.

6. . Click the Neon Light icon to produce a neon light effect.

. Click the No Light icon to switch off all light sources.7.

Using the Color Chooser To Color Light Sources You can also color light sources using the color chooser.The bottom two sliders control contrast and specular intensity of light sources respectively. .

The HSL (Hue. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your exact color specifications. Drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the spectrum. The Color Chooser appears: The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum. Double-click a light source handle.1. 3. 2. Move the arrow up or down to vary the brightness of the custom color. Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red. . Green and Blue) values vary according to where the cross is located. Click Apply or OK to apply the changes.

The vertical lines represent the front (near) and back (far) clipping planes. The color of the area behind the orange sphere is the background color of your document. You can also drag the vertical lines representing the near and far clipping planes to produce the same effect. depth effects are deactivated: if you zoom in and out. 1. namely. You can keep the Depth Effect dialog box open and continue working with other commands. entering values and pressing Enter in each case. Set the Near Limit and Far Limit by checking the Fixed checkbox for each option. you will see that for the moment the geometry is not clipped. You will be able to understand the results obtained by setting depth effects by zooming in and out. command to display the Depth Effect dialog box.. By default. Select the View->Depth Effect. The white cross represents the center of the objects in the geometry area. clipping geometry between clipping planes and creating fog effects. Note that location of the vertical lines representing the clipping planes has changed. 2.Setting Depth Effects This tasks explains how to achieve 3D depth effects. .. The orange sphere completely encompasses the objects in your document.

4. Click the Foggy option. Zoom out to see all the geometry. 5. .The back (far) section of the geometry is clipped. You now only see what is located between the near and far clipping planes. The foggy option introduces a foggy effect.

The fog gets thicker as you continue to zoom out beyond the back clipping plane. As you zoom out. Zoom out again. the fog effect is increased. .6.

Using Standard and User-Defined Views Using Standard Views Creating. Modifying and Deleting User-Defined Views .

Note also that. The list provides a number of standard views you can use to display the document: *front *back *left *right *top *bottom *iso. 2. double-clicking *front obtains the front view: When you apply standard views. Double-click the desired view. if the "Animation during viewpoint modification" option is checked in the Visualization tab.. The other views are: You can also use the quick access icon bar (accessed via the View toolbar) for applying standard views more quickly.Using Standard Views This task explains how to use standard views. the views are no longer rezoomed. .. the change of view will be animated. For example. Select the View->Named Views. The Named Views dialog box appears. 1. command.

You can modify the standard view properties by selecting a view in the list then clicking the Properties button.3. The Named Views Properties dialog box is displayed: 4. If you click the Custom button. the fields are ungrayed to let you select the views you wish to apply from the pulldown lists as shown below: . ANSI or Custom. Select one of the three standard views by clicking the corresponding button: ISO.

Click OK or Apply. the icon bar looks like this: . When pulled away from the View toolbar.5.

1. command and double-click the desired view.. modify and delete user-defined views. Select the View->Named Views. Adjust the different view parameters (zoom. rotation.) until you are happy with the result.. Note that user-defined views are stored with the document. You are now ready to customize the view.Creating. 2. . etc. Open the document NamedViews.CATProduct. Your license must provide access to the product structure functions to open this document. Modifying and Deleting User-Defined Views This task explains how to create.

. 4. and the name is also displayed in an editable field below the list. Rename the view in the editable field as required and press Enter. The default name of the view is "Camera 1". If you want to set the camera properties (the properties of the view). 5. . Select the View->Named Views. command. or click Apply. click the Properties button to access the Camera Properties dialog box. then click the Add button to add the view to the list..3.

You can set the center of rotation by clicking the middle mouse button on the desired point: the coordinated are memorized with the camera. .The settings are as follows: Name: name of your user-defined view (cannot be modified) Type: lets you set a Parallel or Prospective view projection Origin: coordinates of your eye position Target: coordinates of the center of rotation of the camera (the point located at the center of the viewport).

Zoom: zoom factor (available in parallel views only). select it. 6. You can also delete views by selecting the view from the list and clicking the Delete button. If you want to modify any customized view you already saved. a small angle has the reverse effect. modify the view parameters again. then click the Modify button to save your changes. . A large angle has the effect of zooming out to make the geometry look small.View angle: sets the vertical angle from the eye position (with respect to the center of the view) to define the direction in which you look at the view (available in perspective views only). The Reverse button lets you view the object from the reverse angle.

Using Layers and Layer Filters Assigning Objects To Layers Adding and Naming Layers Using Visualization Filters .

then the "+" symbol next to Pad to see the following: . Click the "+" symbol next to PadandCylinder.Assigning Objects To Layers This task explains how to assign objects to layers.CATProduct The document looks like this when you first open it: 1. you then create visualization filters (refer to "Using Visualization Filters") which allow you to display only those objects located on specific layers referenced by the visualization filter. Open the document Layers. Once you have assigned objects to layers.

For the moment.You can now see clearly that the two features are named PadandCylinder and Pad. The following layers are always available: None 0 General 1 ." command which lets you create your own named layers. Refer to "Creating New Layers" for more details. The Layer box also contains the "Other Layers. These layers cannot be deleted.. which guarantees that all the contents of your document are visible. . 2. You can assign objects to "None": any object assigned to "None" will always be visible. you have not yet assigned any objects onto a layer.999 (even though they are not visible at first in the Layer list). Select the View->Toolbars->GraphicProperties command to look at the Graphic Properties toolbar: "None" in the Layer box: indicates that there is no current layer..

This is because the features inside a part body inherit the 6. 7. The Layer box now looks like this: only the number because all layers are identified primarily by their number. then close the document without making any changes. PadandCylinder is assigned to the layer "0 General". select any of the sketches. To prevent the geometry from being assigned to a layer. Note that these features are also located on the layer "0". Note.2). if you open existing documents with a current layer set to a layer other than "None". Select PadandCylinder in the tree. the name of the layer on which the object is located is displayed in the box. Click on the "+" symbol next to PadandCylinder. Select Pad in the tree. Opening Existing Documents When opening existing documents (created using either previous releases or Version 5 Release 4). the current layer is displayed in the Layer box. You can also create new objects on a specific layer by setting the appropriate layer in the Layer box first. Any new objects will be created on this new current layer. This time. to find out which layer an object is assigned to. set the current layer to "None" before opening existing documents. then enter the layer number in the box. Select the different features in PadandCylinder (Pad. Pad is still located on the current layer: . 5. Note the following: If no objects are selected. .3. The link between a given feature or object and a given layer is stored with the document. you will be prompted to save the document because the geometry was assigned to the current layer when opening the document. PadandCylinder is expanded. select the object and look at the Layer box. Furthermore. Pad. however. . Consequently. all existing layers are preserved as is: the layers are stored in the Version 4 document. When opening Version 4 documents containing layers.1. To change the current layer. first make sure no object is selected. then select "0 General" from the list. If an object is selected. still in PadandCylinder. that the sketches from which the features are built remain on the current layer "None". click the arrow on the Layer box. You see 4. existing geometry will be migrated to the current layer.

2. The Named Layers dialog box appears: 3. Using the Named Layers Dialog Box 1.. The layer "1". and the name "Layer 1" is assigned automatically: . is added to the list. then select the 0ther Layers. command from the list.. Click the New button. Click the arrow on the Layer icon box. Select the View->Toolbars->GraphicProperties command to look at the Graphic Properties toolbar.Adding and Naming Layers This task explains how to add and name your own layers.

You can also edit the layer number. The list of layers in the Layer box now looks like this: If you select an object before creating the new layer. Then. The layer you just added ("Layer 1") is now the current layer. This enables you to set up named layers to comply with your company's layer conventions. enter the new name and click anywhere outside the editable field to confirm the name. the new layer name is "My_Layer". slowly click twice the line containing the layer name to make the field editable. If you want to rename a layer when creating it.4. In our example. . it will be transferred automatically to the new layer created. Click OK. after clicking the New button. and it is displayed in the Layer box like this: .

. The following information is stored with your settings: the list of named layers the current layer the current filter and filter description (refer to "Using Visualization Filters"). Enter a number between 0 and 999. and to the list in the Layers box. 3...999 are automatically provided. 2. Adding layers adds them to the list in the Named Layers dialog box. Using the Layer Box 1.Clicking the Num and Name buttons presents the lists in numerical and alphabetical order. Click inside the Layer box. command as described in "Using the Named Layers Dialog Box". Whichever method you use. Rename the layer as desired by using the Other Layers. note that you do not create any new layers as such: the layers 0 .

The Visualization Filters dialog box appears: .. Open the document Layers. command. Select the Tools -> Visualization Filters. A visualization filter is a group of layers.Using Visualization Filters This task explains how to use visualization filters. You then apply the filter to visualize (or not) only those objects located on the layers in the filter.CATProduct The document looks like this when you first open it: 1..

This creates a new filter "Filter001" (with the default filter syntax) in the Visualization Filters dialog box: . The Filter list specifies the final filter syntax. Or and Not buttons provide you with the corresponding logical functions for combining layers. the default is "=" the list box to the right lists the named layers (you can type any layer number between 0 and 999) And. >. allowing you to build the filter from the following building blocks: Criterium: this list box contains the operators =. Click the New button. 3. 2. The default filter syntax is: layer = 0 which means that the filter contains layer "0". delete "0" then type "1" so that the filter syntax now looks like this: layer = 1 4. Click in the Filter: field. The Visualization Filter Editor dialog box appears. <. Click OK. This filter cannot be deleted.The default current filter "All visible" is applied automatically: it lets you see all the contents of the document. !=. <= and >=.

select the root object Layers in the tree. click inside the Layer box. . Pad is assigned to the layer "Layer 1". then select "0 General" from the list. This time. . PadandCylinder is assigned to the layer "0 General". The filter is still active. 7. The root object is now assigned to the layer number "0". 10. then type "0". Select the root object Layers in the tree. This remains the case even if you assign the objects to layers other than layer "0". click the arrow on the Layer box. Select PadandCylinder in the tree. 6. then type "1". Select Pad in the tree. The Layer box now looks like this: 9. then type "1" to assign it to layer "1". Why are the objects no longer displayed? All the features below the root object in the tree are considered to be on layer "0" if applying the visualization filter makes the objects invisible. The Layer box now looks like this: 8. Select "Filter001" in the Visualization Filters dialog box and click Apply. Click the Layer box.5. then elect the View->Toolbars->GraphicProperties command to look at the Graphic Properties toolbar. click the Layer box. and the filter remains active. but this time only the object Pad becomes visible: . The objects are no longer displayed.

select the "All visible" filter then click Apply. but this time applying the visualization filter has the effect of making objects visible.Why is only one object displayed? Both the root object and the Pad object are both on layer "1". To see all the objects again. so the Pad object becomes visible. .

Running and Editing Macros Automating Repetitive Tasks Using Macros Recording a Macro Running a Macro Editing a Macro Creating a Macro From Scratch Deleting a Macro .Recording.

You can use it to create macros from scratch. a link is kept in the current document to the file containing the macro. short for Visual Basic Scripting Edition. You can use the following scripting languages. and clicking Run. . you can run it by selecting Tools->Macro->Macros. Macros can be stored in the current document or in an external file. Once the macro is created. that you group in a single command to perform the requested task automatically. You can. depending on the platform you are running on: BasicScript 2. This is the scripting language used when you record a macro JScript. A macro is a series of functions. Note that macros created using Version 5 Release 1 cannot systematically be replayed using later releases: upward compatibility is not guaranteed. you can take advantage of a macro to automate it.. to best fit your needs.. If a macro is created while a document is current. and is stored in an external file. You can create macros either by recording an interaction sequence or by editing a file (written in a scripting language) to insert the functions you wish. an implementation of JavaScript by Microsoft for Windows NT. either by means of recording an interaction sequence or editing a file. selecting the macro.Automating Repetitive Tasks Using Macros If you perform a task repeatedly.2 SDK for UNIX (BasicScript is a registered trademark of Summit Software Company) VBScript. You can also modify an existing macro. use a macro to automate: the creation of a series of holes in a part the extraction of bills of materials from an assembly the addition of a standard title block to a series of drawings the printing of a series of documents. written in a scripting language.. for Windows NT (Visual Basic is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation). but macros are not recorded in JScript. either recorded or created from scratch. for example.

Click Yes to start recording the macro while overriding the existing one. Perform the dialog sequence you want to record. you need to store the macro in a file. 5. click in the "Macro in" area: the current document name to store the macro in the current document or "External File" to store the macro in a file.Recording a Macro This task explains how to record a macro from a dialog sequence. Even if you choose to store the macro in a file. and you can either start recording with no current document. In this case. If you choose to store the macro in a file. or select the Tools->Macro->Stop Recording command. 6. You can store the recorded macro in the current document or in a file. 4. Click Start to begin recording the macro. . A Warning box is displayed if the macro already exists. The dialog boxes related to the macro recording disappear and the Stop Recording dialog box appears. When this is complete. and the macro can afterwards be selected and run using this link from the document. Select the Tools->Macro->StartRecording command to display the Macro Recording dialog box. click Stop in the Stop Recording dialog box. Your macro is now ready for replay. 2. 1. Give a name to the macro If you choose to store the macro in the current document. or delete the created link from the current document when the macro is recorded. if a document was current when you began to record the macro. click Select. 3. The Select External File dialog box appears. In the Macro Recording dialog box. enter the macro name in the "Macro Name" area. If you want to record a macro that is not pointed to by any document. a link is created in this document to the file storing the macro. select or create the appropriate file and click Open.

.

click in the "Macro in" area: the current document name to run a macro either stored in.. On UNIX.V5R6. In the Macro dialog box. Double-click the . click the macro name in the "Macro Name" area If you choose to run a macro stored in a file and not pointed to by the current document. 2. command to display the Macro dialog box. Method 1 1.. Method 2 1. export the environment: . Click Run to replay the selected macro.V5R6. 2. where "Mymacro. Click the appropriate file name.B06 -macro E:\tmp\Mymacro. Method 3 1.Running a Macro Page 1 of 2 Running a Macro This task explains the different methods of running a macro. . or select the file and select the Open contextual command.CATScript to run the macro in batch mode. Select the name of the macro to run: If you choose to run a macro either stored in.htm 1/30/01 .CATScript file. run a command like this: cnext -env CATIA. On Windows.B06. 4./CATENV/ CATIA . or pointed to by the current document or "External File" to run a macro stored in a file and not pointed to by the current document. 3. or pointed to by the current document.CATScript file.CATScript or like this: cnext -env CATIA. Explore your file system and locate the . click Select and the Select External File dialog box appears. click Open. A session is started and the macro is executed.CATScript" is the name of the macro file.B06 -batch -macro E:\tmp\Mymacro.V5R6.doc\src\basugbt1903. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

CATScript" is the name of the macro file.CATScript" catstart -d /CATEnv -env CATIA .CATScript" or like this: catstart -d /CATEnv -env CATIA .CATScript" to run the macro in batch mode.V5R6.B06.CATScript" CNEXT -batch -macro /tmp/Mymacro.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source/CATEnv/ CATIA .csh (for C shell) then run a command like this: CNEXT -macro /tmp/Mymacro.B06. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.V5R6. .B06 -object "-batch macro /tmp/Mymacro.B06 -object "macro /tmp/Mymacro./CATENV/ CATIA .htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugbt1903. where "Mymacro.V5R6.V5R6.Running a Macro Page 2 of 2 .

3. If you choose to edit a macro stored in a file and not pointed to by the current document. 5.. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros. . 1. In the Macro dialog box. click in the "Macro in" area: the current document name to edit a macro either stored in. Select the name of the macro to edit: If you choose to edit a macro either stored in. Click the appropriate file name and click Open. command to display the Macro dialog box. Click Edit..Editing a Macro This task explains you how to edit a macro. Your favorite editor opens on the selected macro. click Select and the Select External File dialog box appears. click the macro name in the "Macro Name" area. or pointed to by the current document. and save the macro. or cancel the modifications. 4. 2. or pointed to by the current document or "External File" to run a macro stored in a file and not pointed to by the current document. Modify the macro instructions as you want.

enter the macro name in the "Macro Name" area and click Create If you choose to create a macro stored in a file. 3. type the macro name and click Save. and save the macro. 4. a link to this file is inserted in the current document. Insert the macro instructions as you want. Type the name of the macro to create: If you choose to create a macro stored in the current document. In the Macro dialog box.Creating a Macro From Scratch This task explains you how to create a macro from scratch. click in the "Macro in" area: the current document name to create a macro stored in the current document or "External File" to create a macro stored in a file. command to display the Macro dialog box.. If the macro is stored in a file. Select the directory in which you want to create the macro. 2. . The Create External File dialog box is displayed. 1. click Create. Your favorite editor opens on the selected macro. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros..

command to display the Macro dialog box. . 1. 3. click the macro name in the "Macro Name" area. the file containing the macro is NOT deleted. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros. Pay attention. To delete several macros or links to macros stored in files from a document.Deleting a Macro This task explains you how to delete a macro. that this file could also be pointed to by other documents. then click Delete and click Yes in the Warning box. however. The Select External File dialog box is displayed. and then click Delete. one with the "External File" selected in "Macro in" to delete the file. click in the "Macro in" area: the current document name to delete a macro stored in the current document or to delete the link to a macro stored in a file or "External File" to delete a macro stored in a file. In the Macro dialog box.. Select the name of the macro to delete: To delete a macro stored in the current document or to delete the link to a macro stored in a file.. when you delete a file. Select the macro you want to delete and click Open. and click Yes in the Warning box. click Delete. To delete a macro stored in a file. When you delete a link to a macro stored in a file from your document. click Select. If you want to delete the link AND the file. 2. you need to perform two delete operations. hold down CTRL and click the macro names you want to delete in the "Macro name" area. one in the current document to delete the link.

Using CATIA Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) Embedding Existing Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications Creating Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications Copying Version 5 Images to OLE-Compliant Applications .

As no links are created. Embedding of CATIA V4 models is also forbidden. a normal Version 5 session is displayed. If you experience problems with OLE features. . The linked or embedded document appears as an image (or. When the document is double-clicked. a part. .model documents implement OLE document server. any changes made to the document in the Version 5 session are not made to the document in the OLE-compliant application. if double-clicking a document icon does not start a session as expected. OLE is available on Windows only. a drawing or an assembly (referred to. Embedding is forbidden in demo mode. run the command: cnext /regserver then try again.e. However. The graphic representation still exists but can no longer be edited (unless the link is repaired via the Edit-Links menu in the OLE-compliant application. for example.CATProduct. if you specify otherwise.CATAnalysis and .CATDrawing. . as an icon). Version 5 documents may be linked or embedded in host container documents. Version 5 supports the Microsoft /regserver and /unregserver options for OLE.About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) Certain applications (e. referred to as OLE-compliant or OLE container applications. if you move the target file to another directory the link is severed. Such applications.CATPart. in an OLE context. You can either link or embed the contents of the geometry area of a Version 5 document: Linking the document means that all changes made to it in a Version 5 session are also made to the document inserted in the OLE-compliant application. Microsoft Office) support what is known as Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). allow you to retrieve a Version 5 document i. Embedding the document means that a copy of the document is inserted in the document within the OLE-compliant application. Only .g. Linking is always allowed. as the OLE document server). .

.

In the Object dialog box.Embedding Existing Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications This task shows you how to embed Version 5 data into an OLE-compliant application.. In the OLE-compliant application.. place the cursor where you wish to embed the data and select the Insert->Object command. The Object dialog box appears: 2. 5.CATProduct 1. click on the Create from File tab. In the Browse dialog box. specify the file location and click on OK to confirm. A frame containing OLE. 3.CATProduct is inserted at the desired location in your OLE-container file: . Open the document OLE. Click on Browse. 4.

6. A normal Version 5 session is displayed. double-click on this frame. select this option. When you have finished making the changes close and save the document. . You will see that the changes you have just made are reflected in the OLE-container document. there are two options: Link to file: see "About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)" Display as icon: if you prefer the Version 5 document to appear iconified. In the Object dialog box. If you want to work on the Version 5 document.

5. The document type CATIA Model is listed but cannot be selected (because it is non-editable). A gray frame is inserted at the desired location in your OLE-container file and a normal Version 5 session appears: . In the Object dialog box. In the OLE-compliant application. Select the type of document you want to create. Click on OK to confirm. 1. place the cursor where you wish to insert the new data and select the Insert->Object command. The Object dialog box appears: 2.Creating Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications This task shows you how to embed Version 5 data into an OLE-compliant application. 4. 3. click on the Create New tab.

If you prefer the Version 5 document to appear iconified. In the Object dialog box. . select this option. When you have finished working on the new document close and save it.6. there is the option Display as icon.

. select the Tools->Image->Capture. 8.CATProduct document. 5. Select OK to confirm in the Paste Special dialog box. Click the Album icon to capture the image and store it in the album. 7. command. . 2. To copy the image to the clipboard click the Copy icon The selected image is now in the clipboard from where it can be pasted into an OLE-compliant application..Copying Version 5 Images to OLE-Compliant Applications This task shows you how to copy images of Version 5 data to an OLE-compliant application. Open the OLE-compliant application. Use the cursor to draw a rectangle around the part you see in OLE. 3. Open the OLE.. In the Version 5 document. 4. 1. . Place the cursor where you wish to insert the image and click the Edit->Paste Special... command to display the Capture toolbar.CATPart. Place the cursor where you wish to insert the image and click the Edit-Paste Special.. 6. command.

there is the option Link to file. In the Paste Special dialog box. For more information about this option. see "About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)" .The image you selected is pasted at the desired location in the file.

Transferring CATIA Version 5 Data Sending Version 5 Data In the Mail Transferring Version 5 Data To Another Directory .

can be sent. Before doing anything.) All the data. Any data that can be opened in a Version 5 session. (This is available on Windows only. Select the File->Send To Mail command. The four columns provide information about the file name. provided it can be found. including linked documents. The dialog box will then look something like this: . 1. is included in the send. Click on the icon between the two lists. the location and whether or not the file was found. Open the Version 5 document you want to copy. 3. 2. including V4 models.Sending Version 5 Data In the Mail (Windows Only) This task shows you how to send Version 5 data in the mail. make sure you have saved all the files you intend to send. the file type. The Send To dialog box appears: In the upper part of the dialog box you can see a list of all the different documents linked to the document you selected for the send operation.

You will find this in the lower left-hand corner. If you want to select the files by type. You can: select one of the identically named files and click the icon to be sent rename one of the files using the Rename Target button. If you prefer.) Before sending your documents in the mail. not include it in the files . The OK button may be grayed out. place the cursor inside the list and right-click to display the list of file types and then select the appropriate type. the lower list also contains a column showing potential problems such as duplicate file names.The files have now been sorted. As well as the information provided in the upper list. The list in the lower part of the box shows a list of those files that will be sent. This means that problems shown in the Problem column have not been resolved. This can be remedied by using the Tools->Search Order or Edit->Links commands (see "Creating a Document Search Order" or "Editing Document Links"). There are two occurrences of duplicate file names in the case shown above. to move it to the upper list i. In the upper list remain those files that could not be found.e. you may want to check the size of the documents to be sent. There are different ways of resolving this. you can select the files in the upper list individually and transfer them to the lower list using the icon . (Selecting by type in this way operates of course in the lower list as well.

select the new name just entered in the Rename dialog box. If you want to give one of the files a different name in the target directory. . . The old name is restored. To cancel the rename. You will now be prompted to give the name of your e-mail system. You can of course move all files to the upper list at any time by using the icon 5.4. select the file and click the Rename Target button in the lower right-hand corner of the dialog box. Enter the new name and click OK. The dialog box opposite appears specifying the name of the file selected. delete it and click OK. Click OK.

Note: you do not need anymore to open the document(s) before sending them to a directory. make sure you have saved all the files you intend to include in the copy. Select the Version 5 document you want to copy as shown above. provided they can be found. those documents will also be copied to the directory (or diskette) you choose. 3. including V4 models. Any data that can be opened in a Version 5 session. can be copied. The Send To Directory dialog box opens: . The File Selection dialog box appears: 2.Copying Version 5 Data To a Directory or Diskette This task shows you how to copy Version 5 data to a directory or diskette. Click the Open button. 1. If the document to be copied is linked to others. Select the File->Send To Directory command. Before doing anything.

In the upper part of the dialog box you can see a list of all the different documents linked to the document you selected for the copy operation. Click on the icon this: between the two lists. the file type. the location and whether or not the file was found. 4. The four columns provide information about the file name. The dialog box will then look something like .

The files have now been sorted. The list in the lower part of the box shows a list of those files that will be copied. . This can be remedied by using the Tools->Search Order or Edit->Links commands (see "Creating a Document Search Order" or "Editing Document Links"). In the upper list remain those files that could not be found.

) 5. There are two occurrences of duplicate file names in the case shown above. select the file and click the Rename Target button in the lower right-hand corner of the dialog box. the lower list also contains a column showing potential problems such as duplicate file names. you can select the files in the upper list individually and use the icon to transfer them to the lower list . You can of course move all files to the upper list at any time by using the icon .e. to know the size of the documents to be copied. It might be useful. place the cursor inside the list and right-click to display the list of file types and then select the appropriate type. Enter the path of the target directory in the Copy to: field using the Browse button if necessary. not include it in the files to be copied check the Keep Directory Structure button thus avoiding having files with the same name in the same directory rename one of the files using the Rename Target button. and click OK. Enter the new name and click OK. If you want to select the files by type. If you want to keep the same directory structure in the target directory check the Keep Directory Structure box between the two lists. 6. The dialog box opposite appears specifying the name of the file selected. delete it and click OK. This means that problems shown in the Problem column have not been resolved. The OK button may. be grayed out. Click OK. The old name is restored. as in the case shown above. 7. There are different ways of resolving this. As well as the information provided in the upper list. You will find this just above the Copy to: field. This field is in fact a list and contains the nine destinations last used. 8. You can: select one of the identically named files and click the icon to move it to the upper list i. To cancel the rename. If you want to give one of the files a different name in the target directory. (Selecting by type in this way operates of course in the lower list as well. especially if copying files to a diskette. Once checked. this box remains selected when you next use the Send To Mail command.If you prefer. select the new name just entered in the Rename dialog box. .

A progress box appears as each file is copied: .If you copy to an as yet non-existent directory. the following message appears: If the target directory contains any files with the same name as any copied. the Confirm File Replacement dialog box will be displayed. Click the appropriate button.

. size and type of the files copied.When the copy has been performed the Files Copied dialog box appears telling you the number.

Managing Document Links in CATIA Version 5 Using the FileDesk Workbench Displaying Document Links Editing Document Links .

with a part loaded: 1. 3. The original document looks like this.CATProduct.. uncheck the option "Load referenced documents". command. The part is no longer loaded (indicated by a special symbol in the specification tree): .. then click OK. In the General category. Close then reopen the same document. select the General tab. Select the Tools -> Options. 2. Open the document NamedViews.Using the FileDesk Workbench This task shows you how to view the relationships between different documents and to obtain information about their properties.

4. The Desk window appears (the document stays open): . Select the File -> Desk command.

especially with complex relationships. The example below illustrates a document including a child document that has not been found. you can see the changes as you make them. the relationships between the document opened and any others are clearly shown. You may to see everything. You can leave the Desk window open when you modify the relationships or add or delete any of the documents in the view. The colors used to identify the various document types are the following ones: white for loaded documents black (reverse video) for documents that are not loaded in the current session red for documents that have not been found. . As the view is automatically updated.As you can see. Unloaded documents are shown in reverse video. All types of V5 have to click on the Fit All In icon data and V4 models can be viewed in this way. The relationship in our sample document includes a child document that has not been loaded (see "Load Referenced Documents").

e. .CATPart. select the document then select the Properties contextual command. then select the Load contextual command. 6. In the Desk window.5. The part is now loaded and you can then select the Open contextual command if you want to open the document. the symbol representing the document will change to that of a loaded document. The specification tree will be updated as a result i. select the document Part1. The Document Properties dialog box below appears. If you want to see the properties of any loaded or unloaded document.

e. refer to the corresponding task in this guide by clicking one of the above hyperlinks. If you want to open a loaded or unloaded document...7. contextual command File->Save All File->Save All As For more information on these commands. select it then select the Open contextual command. . loaded or not) in the Desk then the Links. The FileDesk workbench also lets you use the following commands: File->Send To->Mail or Directory once you have selected a document in the Desk Edit->Links: once you have selected a document shown in white or in black (i.

.

command.CATDrawing.e. After you zoom in. the document looks like this: 1. Only direct links i. Open the document LinksFound.. pointed to by an inactive document can be displayed by activating the inactive document... Other links.. external links directly pointed to by the active document can be displayed using the Edit->Links.Displaying Document Links This task shows you how to display document links. The Links of document dialog box appears: . command. Select the Edit->Links.

five (or six. all links are displayed regardless of their type and owner.e. e. the path and name of the document pointed to in the session. i. Click one of the the lines showing the features pointing to the document you opened. these lists contain the value "All" which means that no filter is applied and thus. This activates the Open button and provides you with file-related information below the file list: The file-related information in the bottom left-hand corner of the Links dialog box indicates the Pointed document.Under the Links tab. Use the "Link type filter" and the "Owner Filter" drop-down lists to filter the information to be displayed respectively in the "Link type" and "Owner" columns. A link may be assigned one of the following statuses: OK Not synchronized Reference not found Document not found Document not loaded Isolated 2. CCP and so on "Owner": the element to which the link belongs to "Status": the status of the link. Import. depending on the type of element you opened) columns are displayed to provide link-related information: "From element": the pointing element "To element": the pointed element "Pointed document": the document containing the pointed element or "In Instance": the product instance in which the pointed element has been selected (this column is displayed for products only) "Link type": the type of the link. 3. By default.g. . ViewLink.

CATPart. . is displayed.e.CATDrawing. Click the Open button. i. the file pointing to LinksFound.You can click the Pointed documents tab to display only the documents pointed to by the current object: 4. The Links of document dialog box disappears and the file LinksFound.

.

Other links pointed to by an inactive document can be displayed by activating the inactive document. Only direct links i.CATPart: ... command.. external links directly pointed to by the active document can be edited using the Edit->Links. Open the document EditLinks. confirming that a link has been found to the document EditLinks. 1.CATDrawing. command.e..Editing Document Links This task shows you how to edit document links. The Links of document dialog box appears. Select the Edit -> Links.

2. 3. 4. the Open dialog box appears along with the document opened and a broken link icon appears in the specification tree. Click OK and exit your session.CATDrawing. you can select the Edit -> Links.. The Open dialog box appears. explaining that the document EditLinks. command then click the Find button to find the missing file. Move the document EditLinks. There are several reasons why a link may no longer work: the files could not be found which means they have been moved. renamed or deleted or the files contain the wrong information which means that they exist but they are different from the files pointed to.. .CATPart could not be found: Whenever a document is opened and one or more of its links are invalid.CATPart to another folder. Click the Desk button or double-click the file path inside the field in the Open dialog box. If you click the Close button. 5. You can check link validity at any time using this command. then reopen the document EditLinks. Restart your session.

The File Selection dialog box opens: 8. Right-click then select the Find menu. Click the document shown in red in the Desk window. . select it. 7.The Desk window appears: 6. then click Open. explore your file system to find the file. In the Find Selection dialog box.

The File Selection dialog box disappears and the file EditLinks.CATPart from the Desk. the file pointed to by EditLinks.e. If you want to open the EditLinks. just select it then click Open in the contextual menu: .CATDrawing is now displayed in white. 9. i.CATPart.

refer to the Using the FileDesk Workbench in this guide. 10. command with the EditLinks. . the Links dialog box will indicate that the right file has been found and loaded.CATDrawing document active..For more information on the Desk. If you now select the Edit->Links..

In that case. the link Status will change from "Not synchronized" to "OK" use the Isolate button which lets you remove a link. The link Status will then change to "Isolated" use the Activate/Deactivate button to avoid the synchronization of deactivated links during part update.When you click a line in the Links of document dialog box. . you can also: use the Synchronize button to update the links in your document.

Advanced Tasks Setting Up Network Licensing Distributing Version 5 on Windows Distributing Version 5 on UNIX Managing Environments Managing Version 5 Software Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX Using Power Input Mode Virtual Reality Configurations Using and Customizing Fonts Using Catalogs Using Knowlegeware Capabilities .

Setting Up Network Licensing Setting Up IBM License Use Management (LUM) Setting Up Your Network License Server Setting Up Your Network License Clients .

Setting Up IBM License Use Management (LUM) The IBM License Use Management software for managing nodelocked licenses is integrated into the software. you can install the rest of the product from the LUM CD-ROM accompanying the software to avoid having to download the software over the Internet. Additional information about LUM may be found at: www. and if you want to set up a network license server. If you need to install the complete LUM package.ibm.software.com/is/lum .

Log on as root onto the workstation on which the network license server is to be configured. in particular "Scenario 3: Configuring a Network License Server" in the chapter "Getting Started with License Use Management Runtime". you must determine whether you want to use direct binding or namespace binding. we strongly recommend that you use direct binding. This scenario shows you how to set up a network license server on one workstation (ravel).Setting Up Your Network License Server This task explains how to set up a network license server. we strongly recommend that you read the following sections in the manual Using License Use Management Runtime for your platform: Chapter 2 "Planning Your Network Licensing Environment": note that before starting. and is intended for the administrator who is setting up an environment to allow multiple client workstations to share licenses stored on one or more network license servers. For reliability reasons. . In our scenario. Go to the LUM installation location. 2. read the section "Selecting a Type of Network Binding". the section "Setting Up Your Servers and Clients". and the scenario "Setting Up Your Network License Clients" two network license clients on two other workstations (mozart and chopin): Designing the network licensing environment requires careful thought and planning. 1. the workstation name is "ravel". Consequently. For more information about what this means.

8. check the option "Start services at system startup" if you want the configured server to start when you power on your workstation./i4cfg -list to check that the server is up and running. 6. If you have decided to use direct binding (strongly recommended). then answer the questions when prompted. and specify the log file directory where you want the log to be kept. type the command: . Run the command: ./i4cfg The Configuration Tool notebook is displayed. select 3. 10. 5. . on AIX. On the Start up page. has both a graphic user interface (GUI) and a script interface. Run the command: . select the Direct Binding page. 4. and enter in the Name field the TCP/IP host name of the server workstation ("ravel" in our scenario). Windows NT and Windows 2000 only. On the Log page. and click the Yes button to save your changes. On all platforms./i4cfg -start to start the server. the license server can be configured using a script. To do so. check the Network License Server and Advanced Configuration options. then press the <<Add button to add the server to the Servers list. 9. On the Configure As page./i4cfg -script and in response to the first question.You configure the network license server using a configuration tool which. select the events you want to be logged. 3. Run the command: . Select Close from the system menu at the top left corner of the Configuration Tool notebook. 7.

5. This command will only be available with the future 4.8 release. you MUST migrate to 4.5. For detailed information and a scenario explaining how to enroll licensed products and register the licenses. refer to the sections "Performing Basic Administration".8. in the chapter "Getting Started with License Use Runtime" in the manual: Using License Use Management Runtime for your platform. This phase involves: enrolling the products and the licenses distributing the licenses to the network license server. . we recommend that you run the following LUM command on Windows: i4ls -clean and the following command on UNIX: i4lmd -clean to check and if necessary repair the license database.You are now ready to enroll your licensed products and register the licenses using the Basic License Tool. If you suspect that the license server database has been corrupted. Note that if you want to implement server licensing on Windows 2000. "Scenario 6: Managing a Licensed Product".

4. Log on as root onto a workstation to be configured as client. select 1. and that the client can communicate with the server. 3. select the Direct Binding page. 5. the license server can be configured using a script. type the command: . 6. You need to install License Use Management Runtime on at least one client. and on which you installed License Use Management Runtime./i4cfg -script and in response to the first question. Windows NT and Windows 2000 and Windows 98 has a graphic user interface. Refer to the section "Setting Up Your Servers and Clients". If the network license client is to locate the network license server using direct binding (strongly recommended). in particular "Scenario 4: Configuring a Network License Client" in the chapter "Getting Started with License Use Management Runtime". 7.Setting Up Your Network License Clients This task explains how to set up two network license clients on two other workstation. You configure network license clients using a configuration tool which on AIX. Select Close from the system menu at the top left corner of the Configuration Tool notebook. On the Configure As page. and click the Yes button to save your changes. 1. 2. To do so. as clients of the network license server you set up in "Setting Up Your Network License Server" . check the Network License Client and Advanced Configuration options. On all platforms. . Run the command: . Go to the LUM installation location. Run the command: ./i4cfg The Configuration Tool notebook is displayed. and enter in the Name field the TCP/IP host name of the server workstation ("ravel" in our scenario) with which the client will communicate. then answer the questions when prompted./i4tv to check that the server is up and running. then press the <<Add>> button to add the server to the Servers list.

If you migrated your machine from Windows NT to Windows 2000. or to %System_Root% if it does not exist /var/ifor/ (AIX) /opt/lum/ls/conf/ (HP-UX.The configuration creates the i4ls. IRIX. To configure the other clients. The same file can be used on Windows and UNIX. IRIX and Solaris: /var/lum/->/opt/lum/ls/conf/ . Solaris). simply copy this file to the corresponding locations on each client: you do not need to install License Use Management Runtime on each client. use the regedt32 command and delete the following registry entry: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\IBM\License Use Runtime\I4DRIVER Note that the following symbolic links must be set up on HP-UX.ini configuration file in: C:\winnt (on Windows NT) %I4_INSTALL_DRIVE%\IFOR\LS\CONF (on Windows 2000) if it exists.

Distributing CATIA Version 5 on Windows About Distributing Version 5 on Windows Setting Up the Server Distributing the Software To a Single Client Computer Distributing the Software To a Client Using the RCMD Command .

.About Distributing Version 5 on Windows There are basically several ways in which you can provide multiple end users with access to Version 5. There are two types of profile available to end users: local user profiles roaming profiles. . This will enable end users to log onto different computers to run Version 5 and recover their customizations. Refer to your Windows online documentation for more information about roaming profiles. Customizations performed by end users of Version 5 using the Tools->Options. This section explains how to: copy the Version 5 software to a folder from which you set up a Version 5 installation server from which you can distribute the software to other Windows computers distribute the software to a client computer using a silent installation file distribute the software to a client computer using the RCMD command (part of the Windows NT Workstation Resource Kit). Your roaming profile is the same on every computer you use. You can: install the software on each computer directly from the CD-ROM install the software on each computer from a server. and involve installing and maintaining the software on each computer.. command are stored in settings files in: C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings (on Windows NT) C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings (Windows 2000) C:\Windows\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings (on Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98). Both solutions are ideal if you want the best level of performance. Windows system administrators should ensure that Version 5 end users use roaming profiles.

1. Still on the server. is "ravel". Open the Windows NT Explorer and explore the CD-ROM drive. It involves copying the Version 5 software from the CD-ROM to a folder from which you set up a Version 5 installation server from which you can distribute the software to other Windows NT computers. and the contents of the CD-ROM are displayed. The installation procedure starts automatically. You must belong to the Administrators group. The Setup program displays a message telling you that it is preparing the installation procedure. The name of the server computer. let's assume the CD-ROM is mapped to drive D:. Stop the installation procedure from starting automatically. in our example above. 3. insert the CD-ROM into the drive. 4. The Explorer window appears. . or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. Among the files on the CD-ROM. 2. One way of preventing the installation procedure from starting automatically after inserting the CD-ROM is to press and hold down the Shift key immediately after inserting the CD-ROM. note the presence of the file Setup.exe which you will use later. Log on as Administrator onto the Windows computer to be used as the server. This avoids having to install the software from the CD-ROM on each computer. For the purposes of our example.Setting Up the Server This task explains a suggested method (not mandatory) for setting up the server.

use the View->Options command in the Explorer. Automated electronic software distribution. which in this case is "Setup.iss. and "ResponseFile" is the name of the response file. and copy the files to your new folder.iss". check the Show all files option. you do not need to monitor the installation and provide input via dialog boxes. Make sure that all the files are visible. For the purposes of this scenario. then click OK. also known as silent installation. Create a new folder. For the purposes of our example. then click OK. choose the default folder: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06 Using the "-r" command line parameter with the Setup. check the Shared As option. which is a record of the installation input. is possible.exe -r -f1path_name\ResponseFile where "path_name" is the pathname of the folder containing the response file. A hand symbol will now appear below the folder icon in the Explorer. using the Edit -> Select All command in the Explorer). The default name of the file is: Setup. without any end-user intervention. 8.exe command causes Setup.exe to automatically generate a silent installation file (or response file). enter the command: Setup. Sharing the folder is essential to successfully setting up the server. . To share the folder. select the View tab. The installation proceeds exactly as a manual installation. 7. confirming the folder is now shared. You can specify an alternate location in which to create the using the following command: Setup. let's assume the folder name is: My_CATIA_V5_Folder. located by default in the Windows folder (in other words. for example on the C: drive of the server. Open an MS-DOS window and go to the folder C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder using the commands: C: cd My_CATIA_V5_Folder You are now ready to perform an installation of Version 5 from the folder containing the software you copied from the CD-ROM.exe -r and follow the installation instructions. in the folder C:\Winnt).5. To do so. 9. To start the installation. 6. A silent installation runs on its own. display the folder properties. when you are prompted to choose a destination folder in the Choose Destination Location dialog box. In this mode. Select all the files (for example. and set it up as a shared folder. select the Sharing tab.

add the following to the response file: NbConfigSelected=N selectionConfig-1=Configuration1_Name . reset the access rights (to make sure that the file can be modified) by unchecking the Read-only option via the Properties command. create a command file.. Go the folder C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder... 11.exe -s -f2path_name\LogFile -f1path_name\ResponseFile where "path_name" (after -f2) is the pathname of the folder (in our example.. selectionProd-N=ProdN_Name Installing the Online Documentation . You are now ready to distribute Version 5 to other computers on your network by running the "myinstall. selectionConfig-N=ConfigurationN_Name If you want to add configurations to the server. . . containing the following command: Setup. Adding Configurations and/or Products If you want to add configurations to the server.bat". Note that there is no space after "f2".ini".. 12. edit the file and change the line: EnableLangDlg = Y to: EnableLangDlg = N This will ensure the installation runs in silent mode without invoking the graphic user interface. locate the file "setup. "myinstall. In our example. Copy the response file from the Windows folder to the folder where the Setup. This file will be used by the Setup. for example. copy the file to the folder: C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder. ..exe program is located.bat" command file. C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder) and "LogFile" is the name of a file for logging the installation.....exe program when distributing Version 5 to other computers in the scenarios discussed later. 10. add the following to the response file: NbProdSelected=N selectionProd-1=Prod1_Name . .Note that there is no space after "-f1".log. In the same folder. The default log file name is Setup...

You then have to create the myinstall. .bat command file as before.You can also install the online documentation using the method described above by copying the contents of the documentation CD to: C:\My_CATIA_V5_DocumentationDirectory and choosing during the installation the following installation directory: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc The documentation installation information will be stored in the response file.

. 1. this task explains how to distribute the software from the server to another computer.exe program in the folder C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder on the server. as explained in "Setting Up the Server" . The name of the client computer. 2. in our example above. or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. is "chopin". Select the Start->Programs->Windows (NT) Explorer command to run the Explorer. You need to use the Explorer to connect to the server over the network and access the Setup. Note that the online documentation files can be distributed using the same scenario. Log on as Administrator onto the client computer.Distributing the Software To a Single Client Computer Now that the server has been prepared. You must belong to the Administrators group.

explore the drive: My_CATIA_V5_Folder on `drive' (F:) and double-click the "myinstall. In our example.. Using the Explorer.exe program is executed by the command file "myinstall. then double-click on the server name in the Shared Directories list to display the shared directories on the server. for example: My_CATIA_V5_Folder on `drive' (F:) 6. The shared directories are easily identified by a hand symbol below the folder. the folder will be: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\intel_a . and click OK. The Setup.. and contains the response file (by default. Setup. Select the folder My_CATIA_V5_Folder on the server. 5.exe -s -f2path_name\LogFile -f1path_name\ResponseFile The "-s" parameter replays the previously recorded response file and installs the software on the client computer using the information recorded in the response file. Note that selecting the folder displays the server name and folder name in the Path field: \server\My_CATIA_V5_Folder In the All Folders list in the left window of the Explorer. This is the folder you created when setting up the server. This means that the software is installed on the client in a folder using the same name.exe program to install the software. Select Tools->Map Network Drive. and looks something like this: 4.bat" (which you created previously in the scenario described in "Setting Up the Server" ) containing a command with the following syntax: Setup. The Map Network Drive dialog box is displayed. you will now see the connection to the server.iss).3.bat" file which runs the Setup. Select a Drive. The folder was set up as a shared directory.

-7: Unable to write to the log file. you need to reboot the client after the installation. you will find a code. If you then reuse the silent file to perform the same install on another computer. it may not work. -53: Invalid option selected. -10: Data type is invalid. installing Version 5 also reinstalls some system libraries if the installation detects that the Windows system is not up to date. -9: Not a valid list type (string or number).iss). -4: Not enough memory available. When this is the case. -12: Dialogs are out of order. -51: Cannot create the specified folder. -6: Cannot write to the response file. Code -12 Error Code When installing on the server. you decided to record the install steps in a silent file (Setup. The error codes belong to and are generated by the InstallShield product (InstallShield Software Corporation). After the ResultCode key name. then log on again as administrator on the client to run the command: C:\install_folder\code\bin\cnext /regserver where "install_folder" is the name of the folder where you installed the software. The meaning of each code is: 0: Success -1: General error. -5: File does not exist. -52: Cannot access the specified file or folder. to . -11: Unknown error during setup. -8: Invalid path to the response file.The end section of the log file contains the result code indicating whether or not the installation succeeded. and the installation may fail. For example. -3: Required data not found in the Setup.iss file. the dialog steps are not in the same order. However. -2: Invalid mode. If the libraries were different. the installation will work if both computers have the same level of system libraries.

start the OLE server (to allow OLE capabilities during a Version 5 session). .

For more information. Microsoft (and Dassault Systemes) do not guarantee the performance of the Windows NT Workstation Resource Kit tools. Log onto the server using an account with Domain Administrator privileges. which is part of the Windows NT Workstation Resource Kit. or bug fixes to the tools. 1. . then starting the Remote Command server. for distributing the software from the server to another computer inside the same domain. This involves installing a Remote Command server on each client computer. You need the Windows NT Workstation Resource Kit on the client computer ("chopin" in our example above) and on the server ("ravel" in our example above). response times for answering questions. refer to the following Windows NT online help topic: RCMD. The software supplied by Microsoft in the Windows NT Workstation Resource Kit is not officially supported. Furthermore.EXE: Remote Command Service.Distributing the Software To a Client Using the RCMD Command This task explains an alternative to the previous scenario: how to use the RCMD command. The software (including instructions for its use and printed and online documentation) is provided "AS IS" without warranty of any kind. the RCMDSVC service must be started beforehand on the client computer. for the RCMD command to operate.

bat where "chopin" is the remote client name and "MyRemoteInstall. 3. the folder is: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\intel_a The command: c: net use z: /delete exit unmaps the z: device and terminates the command. "LogFile" and "ResponseFile".bat. using the password "steve" (password enabling the user on the client "chopin" to connect to the shared folder on "ravel"). The example in the illustration below explains the role of each command in the file. "path_name". Open an MS-DOS window and execute the command file as follows: rcmd \remote_client_name path_name\name_of_commandfile In our example. For the purpose of this example. For more information about the net use command. .bat" is the name of the command file. name the command file: MyRemoteInstall. the exact command to run is: rcmd \chopin C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder\MyRemoteInstall. refer to the Windows online help system. 4. "shared_dir_name".2.exe -s -f2path_name\LogFile -f1path_name\ResponseFile c: net use z: /delete exit where you substitute your own values for "server". making sure that each command is on a separate line: net use z: \server\shared_dir_name pwd /user:domain_name\user_name z: setup.exe command and writes an installation log file. Note that the domain name is "CATIAV5" and the name of the user on "chopin" is "steve_evans". The command: z: setup. The command: net use z: \ravel\My_CATIA_V5_Folder steve /user:CATIAV5\steve_evans maps the z: device (the device must be available) on the client computer "chopin". This means that the software is installed on the client in a folder using the same name. The "-s" parameter replays the previously recorded response file and installs the software on the client computer using the settings in the response file. "pwd". to the shared folder "My_CATIA_V5_Folder" on the server "ravel". In our example. Create a command file (in the folder C:\My_CATIA_V5_Folder) containing the following commands. "domain_name" and "user_name".exe -s -f2z:\my_log_file -f1path_name\ResponseFile runs the Setup.

part of the Windows NT BackOffice suite. .The end result is illustrated below: You can also use the System Management Server (SMS). SMS includes desktop management and software distribution that significantly automates the task of upgrading software on client computers.

Distributing CATIA Version 5 on UNIX About Distributing Version 5 on UNIX Setting Up the Server Distributing the Software To A Client Workstation Enabling User Access to the Software Over the Network .

. and facilitates future upgrades since means that you only have to upgrade the software on one computer: the server. This is the ideal solution if you want to save space on each computer. either directly from the CD-ROM or from a server This is the ideal solution if you want the best level of performance. DFS is an open. Note that you can also use DFS (Distributed File System). and is compatible with Version 5.About Distributing Version 5 on UNIX There are basically two ways in which you can provide multiple end users with access to Version 5. set up the software on a server. and involves installing and maintaining the software on each computer. You can: install the software on each computer. You can run Version 5 using CATIA Version 4 userids. cross-platform distributed file system for managing network security and administration. or. Using Version 5 with a CATIA Version 4 userid is transparent as is the case for other userids. and simply set up a minimum environment on each user's computer so end users can access the software over the network. The distribution scenarios described in this section are based on mounting NFS file systems.

We have chosen the AIX platform for the purposes of this scenario. is "ravel". 2. 5. Check whether the CD-ROM drive is declared. the name of the directory is: /usr/My_CATIA_V5_Directory 6. Copy the contents of the CD-ROM to a directory you already created. . Log on as root onto the UNIX workstation to be used as the server. This avoids having to install the software from the CD-ROM on each workstation. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive on the server. It involves copying the Version 5 software to a directory from which you set up a Version 5 installation server used to easily distribute the software to other UNIX workstations. in our example above. 3. if necessary. Go to the directory as follows: cd /usr/My_CATIA_V5_Directory You are now ready to perform an installation of Version 5 from this directory. Check whether the CD-ROM drive is mounted. 1. The name of the server. For the purpose of our example. and mount the CD-ROM drive. 4.Setting Up the Server This task explains a suggested method (not mandatory) for setting up the server.

refer to "Start Command Syntax"./start and follow the instructions provided by the program. You could also export the CD-ROM directory itself in read only mode. For the purposes of this scenario.7. To start the installation. when you are prompted to choose a destination directory in the Choose Destination Location dialog box. enter the command: . You are now ready to distribute Version 5 to other workstations on your network. choose the default installation directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/aix_a For detailed information about the start command. .

. Log on as root onto the client.Distributing the Software To A Client Workstation Now that the server has been prepared. The directory must be accessible from the client. Mount the exported directory via NFS. as explained in "Setting Up the Server" . this task explains how to distribute the software from the server to another workstation. We have chosen the AIX platform for the purposes of this scenario. You already copied the contents of the CD-ROM into the following directory on the server: /usr/My_CATIA_V5_Directory using the scenario described in "Setting Up the Server" . in our example above. Export the directory to the client. 4. The name of the server. 2. is "ravel". Log on as root onto the server. 1. Go to the mounted directory. 5. You are going to perform the installation by allowing the client to access this directory on the server. 3.

refer to "Start Command Syntax". The Version 5 software is installed on the client in the directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/aix_a For detailed information about the start command. enter the command: . . To start the installation.6. then mount the /cdrom directory from the client. export the /cdrom directory to the client. You have another alternative if you have not already copied the CD-ROM contents into a directory: insert the CD-ROM./start and follow the instructions provided by the program.

The name of the server. The name of the client. is "ravel". From the server. 6. 3. This task explains how to allow end users access to Version 5 by setting up an environment on eac software on the client workstation. export the installation directory (/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06) to the client. Log on as root onto the server. 4. 1. mount the exported installation directory (/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06) via NFS. Log on as root onto the client. in our example above. is "chopin". You already installed the software in: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/aix_a 2.htm 1/30/01 . Set the path of the installation directory on the server using the command: export PATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/aix_a/code/bin:/usr/DassaultSystemes/B04/a The following list contains the variables to modify on each UNIX system: export LIBPATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/aix_a/code/bin (AIX) file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Go to the mounted directory.Enabling User Access to the Software Over the Network Page 1 of 2 Enabling User Access to the Software Over th We have chosen the AIX platform for the purposes of this scenario. From the client. The directory must be accessible from the client. in our example above. 5.doc\src\basugat0304.

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugat0304.B06 -d /CATEnv -regserver Note that CATIA .V5R6.V5R6.B06 -p /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06 -d /CATEnv -cs yes -a global Then.B06 -d /CATEnv -desktop yes –a global delcatenv -d /CATEnv -unregserver For a description of the setcatenv and delcatenv command syntax for UNIX.Enabling User Access to the Software Over the Network Page 2 of 2 export LIBPATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/aix_a/code/bin (AIX) export SHLIB_PATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/hpux_a/code/bin (HP-UX) export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/solaris_a/code/bin (Sola export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/irix_a/code/bin (IRIX) 7.htm 1/30/01 .B06 is a reference environment. but does not 8.V5R6. use the -regserver option as follows: setcatenv -e CATIA . To delete this environment: delcatenv -e CATIA . refer to UNIX" . Now run a Version 5 session to check your environment has been correctly set up. Create the following global environment as "root" using the command: setcatenv -e CATIA .V5R6. 9. Running the setcatenv command as a normal end user runs successfully.

Managing Environments What Is An Environment? Customizing Your Environment on Windows Customizing Your Environment on UNIX .

B06. in other words how it is represented to the user on the user's desktop. on Windows. The term environment also includes its graphical representation. or the root userid on UNIX. edited or deleted by a Windows administrator.htm 1/30/01 . When you want to access the online documentation.doc\src\basugat0401. Global environments can only be created. A user environment is visible to and can be used and manipulated (customized or deleted) only by the user who created it.What Is An Environment? Page 1 of 3 What Is An Environment? What is an environment? An environment is a set of runtime environment variables. the software will look for the files in this location. but in a text file located in: C:\Winnt\Profiles\All Users\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings\CATEnv (on Windows NT) C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings\CATEnv (Windows 2000) C:\Windows\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings\CATEnv (on Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98) and the environment file name is CATIA. on Windows. For example. these variables were contained in the registry.V5R6. How are environments managed? Environments are managed: by the installation procedure. or the root userid on UNIX. which creates a default global environment The default environments created at installation on each platform are described in "About the Environment Created on Windows" and "About the Environment Created file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. For example. Each variable points to a path searched by the software when you start a session. What are global and user environments? A global environment can only be created by a Windows administrator.txt . Before. The environment is no longer created in the registry. the default environment created at installation is a global environment: "global" means that it is visible to and can be used by all users on the computer on which it has been set up. the CATDocView variable is set by default to: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc meaning that the online documentation files are installed in the folder C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc.

you may install the online documentation at a location different from the default location.doc\src\basugat0401. V5R1 V5R1 V5R1 V5R2 V5R1 V5R1 V5R1 1/30/01 . The runtime environment variables are listed in the table below: Variable Name Description PATH Executable code search path (UNIX only) LIBPATH Library search path (AIX) LD_LIBRARY_PATH Library search path (Solaris) LD_LIBRARYN32_PATH Library search path (IRIX) SHLIB_PATH Library search path (HP-UX) CATInstallPath Installation path CATDLLPath DLL search path (internal use only) file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. or setting up new environments. This means that if you customize a local environment.V5R6. You can ONLY create. Do not attempt to edit the CATIA. When customizing runtime environments. using the setcatenv command: this command creates and edits user and global environments (if you are administrator or root. you can: create new environments edit existing environments copy existing environments (UNIX only) delete environments but you cannot create new variables. edits and deletes environments using the lscatenv command (to list the names of environments) using the chcatenv command (to edit one or more environment variables) using the readcatenv command (to read the variables of an environment). you have to edit the environments on all of those computers if you want the environments to be identical. and the same environment exists on other computers.. Please use the official tools provided to manage environments.txt environment file using a text editor. If this is the case.B06. or rename existing variables.htm Introduced in Release. What does customizing an environment mean? Customizing your runtime environment means providing different values for the runtime variables in your default environment. this is an example of what we mean by customizing your runtime environment.What Is An Environment? Page 2 of 3 "About the Environment Created on Windows" and "About the Environment Created on UNIX" respectively. For example. modification and deletion of REMOTE environments is not supported. modify and delete LOCAL environments: the creation. you need to specify where the documentation files are located by modifying the value for the CATDocView variable. you can edit the default global environment) using the delcatenv command: this command deletes environments using the catiaenv command (to run the Environment Editor) on Windows only: this GUI-based tool creates.

log) CATReport Conversion trace report location V5R2 CATSharedWorkbookPath Points to shared workbooks for ENOVIA Portal ENOVIA V5R6 CATW3PublishPath ENOVIA Portal search path pointing to location ENOVIA V5R4 for storing HTML documents created by the ENOVIA Portal Snapshot command. LDR_CNTRL SUN environment variable _HP_DLDOPTS HP-UX environment variable DB2INSTANCE DB2 environment variable TNS_ADMIN TNS environment variable ORACLE_HOME ORACLE environment variable ORA_NLS33 ORACLE environment variable file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.What Is An Environment? CATDLLPath CATICPath Page 3 of 3 DLL search path (internal use only) V5R1 Search path for product identification (internal V5R1 use) CATCommandPath Command search path V5R1 CATDictionaryPath Library dictionary search path V5R1 CATDocView Online documentation search path V5R1 CATReffilesPath Reference file search path V5R1 CATFontPath Font search path V5R1 CATGalaxyPath Search path for User Galaxy online information V5R1 files CATGraphicPath Graphic and icon search path V5R1 CATMsgCatalogPath Application message file search path V5R1 CATFeatureCatalogPath Feature catalog search path V5R2 CATStartupPath Sample file search path V5R1 CATW3ResourcesPath ENOVIA Portal search path pointing to HTTP ENOVIA V5R4 resources visible to ENOVIA Portal clients.doc\src\basugat0401. set by default to CATInstallPath/docs CATReferenceSettingPath Default reference setting search path. CATErrorLog Error log search path: points to the default file V5R1 name (error. also used V5R1 to store settings locked by the administrator CATUserSettingPath Permanent user setting search path V5R1 CATTemp Temporary user setting search path V5R1 CATMetasearchPath ENOVIA Portal search path pointing to location ENOVIA V5R4 where ENOVIA Portal MetaSearch stores data required for metasearch engine operation.htm 1/30/01 .

1. The Environment Editor appears. and looks like this: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.Customizing Your Environment on Windows Page 1 of 12 Customizing Your Environment on Windows This task explains how to customize an existing environment on Windows using the Environment Editor. Select the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools->Environment Editor V5R6 command.doc\src\basugat0402.htm 1/30/01 .

2. The list will contain the environments detected on your computer.V5R6. For example. However.Customizing Your Environment on Windows Page 2 of 12 Note that the list of existing environments is displayed in the Environment name list. double-click the environment name. The variables and their values are displayed: the variable name is displayed on the left and the value (path) for the corresponding variable is displayed to the right. once you create new environments.htm 1/30/01 . these will also be displayed in the list.doc\src\basugat0402. This will be the only environment name in the list after a default installation. double-click the CATIA . file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.B06 environment which is the name of the default global environment set up at installation. To display the variables for a given environment. Only the New and Edit commands is available at first: the other commands are grayed out.

The Type field indicates one of two possible values: User: indicates that the environment was set up using your userid. you will be able to display an environment. 3. You can only edit environments which belong to you. or which the administrator authorized you to see. but not edit it. or who has the privileges assigned to the Administrators group (you can see all the global environments on your computer): this is what you will see after an initial installation on your computer. Click a variable name in the list. This means that you will only see in the Environment name list the names of environments you created. if you select a global environment as end user.Customizing Your Environment on Windows Page 3 of 12 Note that Edit and Delete commands are also available for editing and deleting environments.doc\src\basugat0402. Furthermore. is visible to you and can only be accessed by you (you cannot see anybody else's user environments) Global: indicates that the environment was set up by somebody belonging to the Administrators group. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 .

Customizing Your Environment on Windows 3. Page 4 of 12 The name of the variable is displayed in the Name field at the bottom of the window.htm 1/30/01 . and the corresponding value is displayed in the Value field just below. For the purpose of illustration. Click a variable name in the list. the following example reflects the case of an end user displaying (and not being able to edit) a global environment: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugat0402.

For example. Click OK. For example. then click the Set button. If you are authorized to edit the variable. the system folder may be "C:\Windows" on one system and "C:\Winnt" on another. Consequently. CSIDL Values in Environment Variable Paths There are a number of folders that are used frequently by applications. you may have installed the online documentation in a different folder. you would type in the new path for the variable CATDocView. The variables concerned are: CATUserSettingPath CATTemp CATReport CATErrorLog CATMetasearchPath CATW3PublishPath To create an environment using the New command file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. CSIDL values are now part of paths pointed to by environment variables.htm 1/30/01 . 5. 4.doc\src\basugat0402. type in the new value in the Value field. the default path for the CATDocView variable is: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc\intel_a\doc However. but may not have the same name or location on any given system. CSIDL values provide a unique system-independent way to identify these special folders. The value of the variable is reset in the Environment Variables field.Customizing Your Environment on Windows Page 5 of 12 For example.

The default installation folder path is: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\OS_a\ where "os_a" is the operating system. 2. If you logged on as administrator. 1. Select the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools->Environment Editor V5R6 command.doc\src\basugat0402. Enter the path of your installation folder. 4. 6. 5. this is " CATIA ". The type can be user or global (global is available only for administrators only). enter the environment mode.htm 1/30/01 . Click the New button to display the following dialog box: Page 6 of 12 3. To create or customize an environment using the setcatenv command You can also customize environments using the setcatenv command. In our case.Customizing Your Environment on Windows This task explains how to create a new environment using the Environment Editor. If you are logged on as a normal end user. 7. Enter the name of the environment to be created. This command lets you create both user and global environments. The command is located in: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. the type is set automatically to "user". Click OK to create the environment. Set the product line.

htm 1/30/01 . it is set to the default installation folder: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06) -server: creates an environment suited for the ENOVIA Portal environment. this time it is not overwritten (nothing happens). the name of the environment created will be "DefaultEnvironment" -p: specifies the installation folder.Customizing Your Environment on Windows \install_folder\OS_a\code\bin where "install_folder" is the name of the installation folder. Behavior Options These options determine a type of behavior: -v yes/no: -v yes (default): verbose mode -v no: non-verbose mode. and is mandatory if the "-u" or "-k" options are not specified (by default.doc\src\basugat0402. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. -new yes/no: yes ( default): an environment with the same name (if it exists) is overwritten no: if an environment has the same name. The value can be CATIA (default) for the CATIA product line -e: environment file name. The full list of options for the command: setcatenv Page 7 of 12 is as follows: Operating Environment Options These options specify the general operating environment: -cs: specifies the name of the product line for which the environment is being created. if the "-e" option is not specified.

an environment is created then modified by "u" and "-k". Creating an environment using the setcatenv command sets up the following environment: sets up Start->Programs-> CATIA by adding the shortcut for your environment file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. The catenv.doc\src\basugat0402. -h: displays help. if it does not already exist. If both the "-p" and "-u" options are specified at the same time.htm 1/30/01 .Customizing Your Environment on Windows Page 8 of 12 However. Action Options These options specify a particular creation or modification action: -a user/global: specifies whether you are creating a user or global environment. but will be integrated in a different way in future administration tools. -u: updates a variable by adding a new value for the variable (the previous value is kept.log log file logs environment creation and modification operations. note that if no environment using the same name is detected. Note that you need administrator rights to create a global environment. if TMP is not defined. Note that the "-u" and "-k" options will no longer be supported as such in future releases: the functions performed by these options will continue to exist. if both TMP and TEMP are not defined. a new environment is created in both cases (whether you use "yes" or "no"). the current directory. -desktop yes/no: sets up the desktop representation of the environment. The default is "yes". Keep this point in mind if you write your own administration scripts which encapsulate current administration tools using these options. the path specified by the TEMP environment variable. but is concatenated with the new value: the new value is read first) -k: updates a variable by providing a new value for the variable (there is no concatenation: the previous value is overwritten). The log file is created in the temporary folder in one of the following locations: the path specified by the TMP environment variable. The default value is "user".

the name of the environment deleted will be "DefaultEnvironment" -desktop: if it exists. -e: environment file name. Note that you need administrator rights to delete a global environment. you can start a session using the new environment with the command: cnext -env my_new_environment where "my_new_environment" is the name of the environment you created. deletes its graphical representation. The default value is "user". To read environments using the readcatenv command file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. The default value is "user". Keep in mind that deleting an environment using the delcatenv command deletes all the registry entries. To delete an environment using the delcatenv command Use the command: delcatenv -a user/global: Page 9 of 12 specifies whether you are deleting a user or global environment. in other words. To list environments using the lscatenv command Run the lscatenv command to list the names of all environments on your computer: lscatenv -a user/global: lists user or global environments.htm 1/30/01 . shortcut in Start menu.). if the "-e" option is not specified. etc. how it is represented to the user on the user's desktop (desktop shortcut. If you create a new environment. The default is "yes". -v yes/no: -v yes (default): verbose mode -v no: non-verbose mode.doc\src\basugat0402.Customizing Your Environment on Windows sets up Start->Programs-> CATIA by adding the shortcut for your environment and creates the shortcut for your environment on the desktop.

your previous licensing settings are retrieved. acquire the corresponding license. The default value is "user". The default value is "user". Each time you use one of the configurations. When you start "Configuration 2". so you must acquire the new license. your licensing settings are saved. then exit your session.Customizing Your Environment on Windows To read environments using the readcatenv command Run the readcatenv command to read the environment variables in a specified environment: readcatenv -e: environment file name. the name of the environment read will be "DefaultEnvironment" -a user/global: specifies user or global environment. This means that.doc\src\basugat0402. your licensing settings are stored in the same place.htm 1/30/01 . To Set Up Two Environments With Different Licensing Settings A situation may arise in which you have two different configurations installed on your computer. and you want to use both configuration licenses. To modify environments using the chcatenv command Run the chcatenv command to edit one or more environment variables: chcatenv Page 10 of 12 -e: environment file name. you have to continually reacquire the corresponding license each time you start. -u variable=value: specifies a variable whose value is to be modified -new variable=value: creates a new variable with its corresponding value -del variable: deletes a variable. Each time you exit. the name of the environment modified will be "DefaultEnvironment" -a user/global: specifies user or global environment. This means that when you start "Configuration 1". file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. -var: specifies a variable whose value is to be read. when you use different configurations alternately. if the "-e" option is not specified. the previous licensing settings are overwritten by the new licensing settings. if the "-e" option is not specified.

let's assume each variable has the following values: Environment 1 CATReferenceSettingPath CATUserSettingPath C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\intel_a\resources %CSIDL_APPDATA%\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings For example. Edit "Environment 2" and reset the value for the CATUserSettingPath variable as follows: C:\Winnt\Profiles###BOT_TEXT###quot;user"\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings_Config2 4. and that you are authorized to edit each environment. Let's assume that the two configurations are installed on an Intel computer running Windows NT. Environment 2 CATReferenceSettingPath CATUserSettingPath C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\intel_a\resources %CSIDL_APPDATA%\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings Note that. The two variables of interest are: CATReferenceSettingPath CATUserSettingPath In the default environments created. acquire the license and exit the session.Customizing Your Environment on Windows Page 11 of 12 You can avoid this problem by editing each environment.htm 1/30/01 . CATUserSettingPath usually points to: C:\Winnt\Profiles###BOT_TEXT###quot;user"\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings where "user" is your userid. Select the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools->Environment Editor V5R6 command. Edit "Environment 1" and reset the value for the CATUserSettingPath variable as follows: C:\Winnt\Profiles###BOT_TEXT###quot;user"\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings_Config1 3. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 2..doc\src\basugat0402. Start configuration 1. on Windows NT. Your licensing settings are saved here each time you use a configuration. for the moment. the path pointed to by CATUserSettingPath is the same in both cases. 1.

However.htm 1/30/01 . and without having to reacquire the corresponding license each time. acquire the license and exit the session. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Page 12 of 12 C:\Winnt\Profiles###BOT_TEXT###quot;user"\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings_Config2 You will be able to use each configuration alternately. Start configuration 1. Start configuration 2.Customizing Your Environment on Windows 4. acquire the license and exit the session. Your license settings will now be stored in: C:\Winnt\Profiles###BOT_TEXT###quot;user"\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings_Config1 5.doc\src\basugat0402. you must not use the Tools->Options command.

the name of the environment created will be "DefaultEnvironment" -d: specifies the directory in which the environment file will be created ($HOME/CATEnv by default) -p: specifies the installation directory. The value can be CATIA (default) for the CATIA product line environment file name .htm 1/30/01 . LD_LIBRARY_PATH (Solaris and IRIX) or SHLIB_PATH (HP-UX). or run the command as follows: install_directory/OS_a/code/bin where "install_directory" is the name of the installation directory. set to the default installation directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06) -server: -e: creates an environment suited for the ENOVIA Portal environment. and "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a. there is no interactive tool available for customizing values for runtime environment variables: you must use the setcatenv command. The full list of options for the command: setcatenv is as follows: Operating Environment Options These options specify the general operating environment: -cs: specifies the name of the product line for which the environment is being created.Customizing Your Environment on UNIX Page 1 of 9 Customizing Your Environment on UNIX On UNIX. Before running the command. if the "-e" option is not specified. set the PATH variable and LIBPATH (AIX). To create or customize an environment using the setcatenv command The setcatenv command is available for customizing environments. and is mandatory (by default.doc\src\basugat0403. Behavior Options These options determine a type of behavior when creating or updating environments: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

except on IRIX where the default is "no". The default value is "user".Customizing Your Environment on UNIX Page 2 of 9 These options determine a type of behavior when creating or updating environments: -v yes/no: -v yes (default): verbose mode -v no: non-verbose mode.dt (action description file for CATIA document types) l $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/icons/C (contains icons for document types) l $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIA. this time it is not overwritten (nothing happens). a new environment is created in both cases (whether you use "yes" or "no"). The default is "yes". -desktop yes/no: sets up the desktop representation of the environment. note that if no environment using the same name is detected.CATIAEnvironments. However. It also sets up support for dragging and dropping of documents inside the desktop environment.ftr (action description file for the CATIA environment icon) l /usr/lib/filetype/install/iconlib (contains icons for CATIA document types).doc\src\basugat0403. if it does not already exist. This option creates the following files for the CDE Desktop: $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIAFiles.htm 1/30/01 . -regserver: registers the application on the workstation by adding or modifying a certain number of files. -new yes/no: yes (default): an environment with the same name (if it exists) is overwritten no: if an environment has the same name. Action Options These options specify a particular creation or modification action: -a user/global: specifies whether you are creating a user or global environment.dt (action description file for DELMIA document types) l $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/DELMIA/dt/appconfig/icons/C (contains icons for document types) l $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/DELMIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/DELMIA. Note that you need administrator rights to create a global environment.dt (CDE desktop) l $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/DELMIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIAFiles.ftr (action description file for CATIA document types) l /usr/lib/filetype/install/Dassault_Systemes. l file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.dt (CDE desktop) l and the following files for the Magic SGI Desktop on IRIX: /usr/lib/filetype/install/Dassault_Systemes.CATIAFiles.

To read environments using the readcatenv command Run the readcatenv command to read the environment variables in a specified environment: readcatenv -e: environment file name.Customizing Your Environment on UNIX Page 3 of 9 If a base configuration is already installed. To modify environments using the chcatenv command Run the chcatenv command to edit one or more environment variables: chcatenv -e: environment file name. On Windows. -var: specifies a variable whose value is to be read -d: specifies the directory containing the environment. this option serves no useful purpose since the desktop environment is already present. and can be used only by an administrator.htm 1/30/01 . The catenv.log log file lets you log environment creation and modification operations. if the "-e" option is not specified. Only use the "regserver" option if no base configuration is already installed. The default value is "user". -h: displays help. To list environments using the lscatenv command Run the lscatenv command to list the names of all environments on your computer: lscatenv -a user/global: lists user or global environments. The log file is created in the $HOME directory. if you create a new environment. It should be used after creating a reference environment. if the "-e" option is not specified. the name of the environment read will be "DefaultEnvironment" -a user/global: specifies user or global environment. -u variable=value: specifies a variable whose value is to be modified -new variable=value: creates a new variable with its corresponding value -del variable: deletes a variable -d: specifies the directory containing the environment.doc\src\basugat0403. The default value is "user". you can start a session using the new environment with the command: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. The default value is "user". Any environment created by either an administrator or an end user using the setcatenv command is a user (not global) environment. the name of the environment modified will be "DefaultEnvironment" -a user/global: specifies user or global environment.

.B06.csh for use with C shell The name of this environment is specified by using the "-e" option.doc\src\basugat0403.V5R6.dt file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.V5R6.B06. On UNIX.htm 1/30/01 .csh (for C Shell) CNEXT My_New_Environment What Is the Impact On My Environment? Creating a global environment GLOBAL1 and a user environment USER1 using the setcatenv command creates the following files : $HOME/CATEnv Default environment: CATIA . the setcatenv command creates in your $HOME directory the following filetree: $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/ CATIA /dt/appconfig/appmanager/C/ CATIA Contains files required for graphic representation of the default global environment and global environment in the CDE desktop: CATIA .sh for use with Korn or Bourne shell USER1./$HOME/CATEnv/ CATIA .Customizing Your Environment on UNIX cnext -env my_new_environment where "my_new_environment" is the name of the environment you created. SUN systems running the CDE desktop. Run the following commands: Page 4 of 9 .sh (for use with Korn or Bourne shell) CATIA .V5R6.V5R6. HP-UX. the "-e" option does not exist.V5R6.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source/CATEnv/ CATIA .B06 GLOBAL1 $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/ CATIA /dt/appconfig/types/C Action description file for default global environment and global environment icon: CATIA .B06.sh for use with Korn or Bourne shell GLOBAL1.B06.csh (for use with C shell) Global environment: GLOBAL1. On AIX.B06.V5R6.csh for use with C shell The name of this environment is specified by using the "-e" option User environment: USER1.

doc\src\basugat0403.Customizing Your Environment on UNIX CATIA .dt/appmanager/My_ CATIA File required for graphic representation of user environment in desktop: USER1 $HOME/.dt and CATIAFiles.dt/types Action description file for user environment icon: USER1.GLOBAL1 User environment icon: My_ CATIA : USER1 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.V5R6.dt Page 5 of 9 Note: the files CATIA .dt/icons The CATIA icons are not present in this directory because they are already present in: $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/ CATIA /dt/appconfig/icons/C Application Manager Cabinet Default global environment and global environment icon: CATIA : CATIA .htm 1/30/01 .B06 .dt (file created by the option -regserver) $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/ CATIA /dt/appconfig/icons/C Icons for document files: CATIA icons (files created by the option "-regserver") $HOME/.V5R6.dt are not present in this directory because they are already present in $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/ CATIA /dt/appconfig/types/C. $HOME/.dt Action description file for CATIA directory: CATIA .dt GLOBAL1.B06.dt (file created by the option "-regserver") Action description file for CATIA document types: CATIAFiles.

then double-click the Reload Applications icon.CATIAEnvironments.V5R6 . /usr/lib/filetype/install Action description file for CATIA document types: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.ftr are not present in this directory because they are already present in: /usr/lib/filetype/install.fti directories are only created if the desktop integration was not successful: these directories allow the administrator to perform the integration manually.fti The CATIA icon filesare not present in this directory because they are already present in: /usr/lib/filetype/install/iconlib. The files in the /.V5R6.ftr The files Dassault_Systemes. go into the Desktop Tools cabinet.doc\src\basugat0403.CATIAFiles. You can also log off and log on to display the icon.htm 1/30/01 . you must click the Application manager icon on the CDE front panel. the setcatenv command creates in your $HOME directory the following filetree: $HOME/CATEnv/CATSGI/ CATIA Files required for graphic representation of default environment.ftr and /.ftr and Dassault_Systemes. To display the icon.GLOBAL1 the creation of the My_ CATIA directory and the creation in this directory of the user environment icon: USER1 On the Magic SGI Desktop on IRIX. The visible impact on the CDE desktop in the Application manager cabinet is: the creation of the CATIA directory and the creation in these directories of the default global environment icon and global environment icon: CATIA . global and user environment in the SGI desktop: CATIA . $HOME/CATEnv/CATSGI/ CATIA /.B06 GLOBAL1 USER1 $HOME/CATEnv/CATSGI/ CATIA /.Customizing Your Environment on UNIX My_ CATIA : USER1 Note Page 6 of 9 You do not see the icon immediately.

-e: environment file name. -unregserver: deletes the following files on the CDE Desktop: $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/ CATIA /dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIA. -v yes/no: -v yes (default): verbose mode -v no: non-verbose mode. if the "-e" option is not specified. The default value is "user".dt (action description file for CATIA document types) $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/ CATIA /dt/appconfig/icons/C (contains icons for CATIA document types) file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. you must log off and log on. To display the icon.dt (action description file for CATIA directory) $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/ CATIA /dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIAFiles.Customizing Your Environment on UNIX Dassault_Systemes.ftr (created by the option "-regserver"). the name of the environment deleted will be "DefaultEnvironment" -d: specifies the directory containing the environment file to be deleted ($HOME/CATEnv by default) -desktop: if it exists. Note that you need administrator rights to delete a global environment.ftr (created by the option "-regserver") /usr/lib/filetype/install/iconlib Icons for CATIA document types: CATIA icons (created by the option "-regserver") Note Page 7 of 9 You do not see the icon immediately. The default is "yes".V5R6 .GLOBAL1 creation of the My_ CATIA directory and the creation in this directory of the user environment icon USER1.CATIAFiles. The visible impact on the SGI desktop in File->Applications is: the creation of the CATIA directory and the creation in these directories of the default global environment icon and global environment icon: CATIA .htm 1/30/01 . how it is represented to the user on the user's desktop. in other words. To delete an environment using the delcatenv command delcatenv -a user/global: specifies whether you are deleting a user or global environment.CATIAEnvironments.doc\src\basugat0403. Action description file for environment icon: Dassault_Systemes. deletes its graphical representation.

file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. The default value is "user". CATIA Environments.unregserver" option should be used after deleting an environment. -var: specifies a variable whose value is to be read -d: specifies the directory containing the environment (UNIX only). if the "-e" option is not specified. For more information.htm 1/30/01 . The ". and can be used only by an administrator.doc\src\basugat0403. To modify environments using the chcatenv command Run the chcatenv command to edit one or more environment variables: chcatenv -e: environment file name. The default value is "user". To read environments using the readcatenv command Run the readcatenv command to read the environment variables in a specified environment: readcatenv -e: environment file name.ftr (action description file for CATIA document types) /usr/lib/filetype/install/Dassault_Systemes. the name of the environment read will be "DefaultEnvironment" -a user/global: specifies user or global environment.ftr (action description file for environment icon) /usr/lib/filetype/install/iconlib (contains icons for CATIA document types). -u variable=value: specifies a variable whose value is to be modified -new variable=value: creates a new variable with its corresponding value -del variable: deletes a variable -d: specifies the directory containing the environment (UNIX only).CATIAFiles. refer to Enabling User Access to the Software Over the Network.Customizing Your document Environment on UNIX CATIA types) Page 8 of 9 and the following files on the Magic SGI Desktop on IRIX: /usr/lib/filetype/install/Dassault_Systemes. To list environments using the lscatenv command Run the lscatenv command to list the names of all environments on your computer: lscatenv -a user/global: lists user or global environments. the name of the environment modified will be "DefaultEnvironment" -a user/global: specifies user or global environment. The default value is "user". if the "-e" option is not specified.

doc\src\basugat0403. Page 9 of 9 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 .Customizing Your Environment on UNIX -d: specifies the directory containing the environment (UNIX only).

Managing CATIA Software Getting Information About Installed Software Installing a Service Pack Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs Checking Integrity and Prerequisites Getting System Information .

htm 1/30/01 . If no service packs have been installed. and which configurations and/or products have been installed. and the General tab specifies the following information: Build level: specifies the software build level Service Pack Level: identifies which service packs (SPK) have been installed (under certain conditions. Select the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools->Software Management V5R6 command. more than one service pack may be installed). by default: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\OS_a where "OS_a" is: intel_a (Windows NT and Windows 2000 platform) win_a (Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 platforms).Getting Information About Installed Software Page 1 of 4 Getting Information About Installed Software This task explains how to identify the level of Version 5 software (General Availability build level or service pack) installed on your computer. the "Service Pack Level" field specifies: No Service Pack Installation Path: specifies the installation folder for the specified build level.doc\src\basugat0904.exe where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed. You do not need to be an administrator to obtain information about installed software: this capability is available to all users. On Windows 1. or run the program: install_root\code\bin\CATSoftwareMgt.

V5R6. The installed configurations and/or products are listed: On UNIX 1. 2. then enter the following command to set up the environment: . Go to your /CATEnv directory.V5R6.B06. the Service Pack Level field will specify the service pack level. and the last service pack level that was committed.Getting Information About Installed Software Page 2 of 4 If a service pack has been installed. Log on as root. 2.csh (for C shell) file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Note that you can have several service packs installed on your computer.B06.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source /CATEnv/ CATIA . For information about what committing and rolling back a service pack means. .doc\src\basugat0904. refer to "Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs". Click the Installed Software tab./CATEnv/ CATIA .htm 1/30/01 .

log (Windows) For example: C:\TEMP\CATSoftwareMgt.Level 3 (checks existence and validity of all installed files ): may take several minutes. the default is: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. .V5R6. you can also run the command in batch: install_root\code\bin\CATSoftwareMgtB (Windows) install_root/code/bin/CATSoftwareMgtB (UNIX) (where "install_root" is the name of your installation directory) with the following options: -L: -I: lists installed configurations and/or products checks integrity (see "Checking Integrity and Prerequisites") -I1: Checks integrity . Page 3 of 4 The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed. and Prerequisites") you must be administrator to use these options (see "Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs") -o logfile: sets name of output logfile (default is CATSoftwareMgt. Enter the command: CATSoftwareMgt This command is located in the directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/code/bin/ where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a.csh (for C shell) 3. Batch Mode On all platforms. along with the General tab containing the same options as on Windows (see above).Level 2 (checks existence of all installed files) -I3: Checks integrity .Getting Information About Installed Software source /CATEnv/ CATIA .Level 1 (only control files are checked): quickest -I2: Checks integrity . located by default in: %TEMP%\CATSoftwareMgt.log) A log is created in the current temporary directory.doc\src\basugat0904.log On UNIX.B06.htm 1/30/01 -P: checks prerequisites (see "Checking Integrity -C/-R: performs service pack commit or rollback.

-D: dumps system information to the output logfile (see "Getting System Information"). This option is only available on Windows.log Page 4 of 4 If you do not specify the " -o" option. -h: provides help on arguments.doc\src\basugat0904. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. the output will be displayed on the screen on both Windows and UNIX.Getting Information About Installed Software $HOME\CATSoftwareMgt.htm 1/30/01 .

refer to Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs. 2. Delivery is synchronized for Windows and UNIX platforms. For more information.Installing a Service Pack This task explains how to install a service pack. you are not allowed to start a session directly at the end of the installation procedure. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. and note the following: the service pack will be installed automatically in the same folder as the current Version 5 release: you cannot choose to install it elsewhere you are not allowed to choose configurations or products: the service pack CD-ROM contains fixes for all configurations and products available at the time it is built. . Software fixes are distributed in the form of service packs. Log on as an administrator. From start to finish. The service pack CD-ROM contains fixes for all configurations and products available at the time it is built. The installation starts automatically. Installing a service pack also involves committing or rolling back a service pack. Each service pack supersedes the previous ones and may be installed on top of the released level or on top of a previous service pack. Fixes are installed for the configurations and products detected in your installation. Otherwise. refer to Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs. this task should take approximately 15 minutes. You must belong to the Administrators group. During the installation. Installing a Service Pack On Windows 1. or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. A service pack can only be installed after installing a major release. Follow the instructions. you will not be able to start the installation. Service packs are made available on a regular basis. you can choose to commit the service pack automatically. For more details. No individual corrections are delivered in between two service packs. Background information about service packs. unlike a normal installation. This is useful when you want to save disk space.

depending on your UNIX system (as described in "Installing Version 5 on UNIX for the First Time"). ./start -s Follow the instructions. you will be prompted to enter the path you are not allowed to choose configurations or products: the service pack CD-ROM contains fixes for all configurations and products available at the time it is built. 3.log For example: C:\TEMP\cxinst. 4.An installation log is created (or the existing log is updated) in the current temporary directory. Enter the command: . you are not allowed to start a session directly at the end of the installation procedure. Logon as root. Examples: startspk: starts service pack installation using the graphic user interface startspk -b: installs the service pack without automatically committing the service pack startspk -bc: installs and automatically commits the service pack. Fixes are installed for the configurations and products detected in your installation. Insert the CD-ROM for your UNIX operating system into the drive. and note the following: the service pack will be installed automatically in the same directory as the current release: on UNIX.log You can also install a service pack in batch mode using the following command: startspk [-b] [-h] [-bC] -b: batch mode without automatic commit -bC: batch mode with automatic commit -h: help. located by default in: %TEMP%\cxinst. Installing a Service Pack On UNIX 1. 2. if you installed the current release elsewhere than in the default location. unlike a normal installation. Declare and mount the CD-ROM drive if necessary.

. installs in the default directory (/usr/DassaultSystemes/B06) without automatic commit start -u /mydirectory: in batch mode. if "-u" is not specified. Examples: or start -s: installs the service pack using the graphic user interface. installs in the directory "/mydirectory" without music and without automatic commit ("-b" is superfluous). located by default in: $HOME/CXINST.log Batch Mode You can also run the installation in batch mode using the following command: start [-s] [-b] [-u unloaddir] [-h] [-bC] -s: silent mode (without music) -b: batch mode without automatic commit ("-b" is useless if there is at least one argument other than "-s") -u: specifies the unload directory. installs and automatically commits the service pack in /home/install/DassaultSystemes/B06 start start -s -b: in batch mode. the default directory is /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06 -h: displays help -bC: installs and automatically commits the service pack.An installation log is created (or the existing log is updated) in the current temporary directory. and without music start -s -u /home/install/DassaultSystemes/B06 -bC: in batch mode.

Log on as an administrator.doc\src\basugat0902. The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed. you can identify at any time the level of software on your computer. and restores the software level to the level prior to installing the service pack. you may find that the service pack is not suitable. the tab will inform you that no service packs are installed. On Windows 1. before making it officially available to your end users. Click the Service Pack Management tab. the tab will inform you exactly what you can do. 3. If no service packs are installed. "Committing" a service pack means applying the service pack to your installation. and the General tab is open. This deletes the previous level.Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs Page 1 of 3 Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs This task explains how to commit or roll back service packs. However. You must belong to the Administrators group.htm 1/30/01 . Select the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools->Software Management command. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. so that it becomes the official working level.exe where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is. you may want to spend some time using the service pack for validation purposes. 2. thereby saving disk space. You must be an administrator to commit or roll back software. if a service pack is detected. or run the program: install_root\code\bin\CATSoftwareMgt. by default: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\OS_a where "OS_a" is: intel_a (for the Windows NT and Windows 2000 platform) win_a (for Windows 95 and 98). If this is the case. As explained in "Getting Information About Installed Software". or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. After spending some time using the service pack for validation purposes. you can "roll back" the service pack: rolling back a service pack uninstalls the service pack. After installing a service pack.

the new software is also automatically committed. 4. Click the Commit button to commit the service pack. you may decide to commit the service pack.Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs Page 2 of 3 For example. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. if you then add configurations or products to your installation. The consequences of choosing to automatically commit a service pack at installation are: the service pack overwrites any previous level (GA or service pack): if you have already decided to commit the new service pack. Depending on the results of your validation. and you do not want to keep the previous version. Commit and Rollback Rules Keep the following rules in mind when committing and rolling back service packs: if you install a GA level. you cannot roll back to the previous level (GA or service pack) when you add products after automatically committing a service pack. this allows want to save disk space once you have automatically committed the service pack.htm 1/30/01 . and then intend to install "Service Pack 2". when you reinstall "Service Pack 1". the following tab informs you that "Service Pack 1" has been installed after a GA installation. you will be prompted at the end of the installation to reinstall "Service Pack 1". you must commit "Service Pack 1" before installing "Service Pack 2" let's assume you install a GA level. You can also choose to commit a service pack automatically during service pack installation. then "Service Pack 1". or the Rollback button to uninstall the service pack and restore the previous level. and commit the service pack.doc\src\basugat0902. then "Service Pack 1". the service pack is committed automatically. or roll back to the previous level.

and the General tab is open. Logon as root. The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed. 4.V5R6.B06. then enter the following command to set up the environment: . Click the Service Pack Management tab. On UNIX 1. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source /CATEnv/ CATIA . Enter the command: CATSoftwareMgt This command is located on the directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/code/bin where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a.B06.Committing and Rolling Back Service Packs software is also automatically committed.doc\src\basugat0902. Go to your /CATEnv directory.htm 1/30/01 . . Page 3 of 3 2. and proceed as explained for Windows (see above).csh (for C shell) 3./CATEnv/ CATIA .V5R6. The same commit and rollback rules apply on UNIX.

The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed. 2. On Windows 1. by default: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\OS_a where "OS_a" is: intel_a (for the Windows NT and Windows 2000 platforms) win_a (for Windows 95 and 98).htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugat0903. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.exe where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is. or run the program: install_root\code\bin\CATSoftwareMgt. and the General tab is open.Checking Integrity and Prerequisites Page 1 of 3 Checking Integrity and Prerequisites This task explains how to check software integrity and prerequisites. and at any time. Click the Check Integrity tab: This checks the overall integrity of your software. You do not need to be an administrator to obtain information about installed software: this capability is available to all users. Select the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools->Software Management V5R6 command.

when the message: Integrity is KO appears. it will be followed by troubleshooting information helping you to identify the problem.Checking Integrity and Prerequisites There are three integrity check levels: Page 2 of 3 Level 1: (only control files are checked): quickest Level 2: (checks existence of all installed files Level 3: (checks existence and validity of all installed files ): may take several minutes. Integrity checks have been extended. This simply checks if you still have the prerequisite environment required for CATIA to operate: On UNIX file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Click the Check Prerequisites tab. 3.htm 1/30/01 . your installation has been corrupted (for example.doc\src\basugat0903. some files are missing). The message: Integrity is OK confirms there is no integrity problem. However.

then enter the following command to set up the environment: . Click the Check Integrity or Check Prerequisites tab. The checks performed are the same as on Windows (see above).doc\src\basugat0903.Checking Integrity and Prerequisites On UNIX 1. 4.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source /CATEnv/ CATIA .B06./CATEnv/ CATIA . Page 3 of 3 2. Log on as root. .V5R6. Go to your /CATEnv directory.V5R6.csh (for C shell) 3.B06. Enter the command: CATSoftwareMgt This command is located on the directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/code/bin where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed. and the General tab is open.htm 1/30/01 . file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

and the General tab is open. or run the program: install_root\code\bin\CATSoftwareMgt.exe where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is.htm 1/30/01 . A tab like this is displayed: The tab provides the following information: machine target id operating system level file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.Getting System Information Page 1 of 2 Getting System Information This task explains how to get detailed information about the system on which you are running CATIA .doc\src\basugat0905. 2. Click the System Information tab. The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed. On Windows 1. by default: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\OS_a where "OS_a" is: intel_a (for the Windows NT and Windows 2000 platform) win_a (for Windows 95 and 98). Select the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools->Software Management V5R6 command.

V5R6. Page 2 of 2 2.V5R6. physical memory. then enter the following command to set up the environment: . file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 4.B06. paging space display settings video settings prerequisite Microsoft DLLs installed and the DLL version registry variables for CATIA environments system environment variables./CATEnv/ CATIA . Log on as root. Go to your /CATEnv directory. and the General tab is open.csh (for C shell) 3. On UNIX 1.Getting System Information operating system level processor.htm 1/30/01 .B06.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source /CATEnv/ CATIA .doc\src\basugat0905. Click the System Information tab. . Enter the command: CATSoftwareMgt This command is located on the directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/code/bin where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a The Dassault Systemes Software Management dialog box is displayed.

Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX About Setting Up Printers on UNIX Adding a Printer Removing a Printer Configuring an Existing Printer Testing the Printer .

the following message appears: The objective of this section is to show you how to set up your environment to get your printer operational.About Setting Up Printers on UNIX You can only print a document (using either the File->Print... If you attempt to print on UNIX before setting up a printer. you will only be able to print once you have set up a printer. . which is performed by creating and customizing a file called a printer configuration file. you print Quick Print icon using the default printer declared by your Windows system administrator. The role of this file is to declare your printer so it is recognized by Version 5. Once at least one printer has been declared. We assume that the physical printing device has been installed and connected to the system your system administrator has already declared your printer to your UNIX operating system. on UNIX. the above message will no longer appear. On Windows. command or the ) if a default printer has been set up. However.

command.. Click on the Driver button and choose the appropriate driver for the printer. 1. button to display the Printer Properties dialog box: 3.. Note that the Available Printer field is empty.Adding a Printer This tasks explains how to set up your printer. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box. 2.. . Click the Add. You can only print a document on UNIX if at least one printer has been set up using the File -> Printer Setup..

set the desired paper format options: default and maximum paper size. PLOT0002. In the Paper Format group box. 6. Refer to your plotter documentation for information about the configuration options for each driver. Click on the Advanced Configuration. The Custom buttons let you specify the location of your own submission scripts. In the Submission Scripts group box.plot_cfg. A printer configuration file containing all the settings you set in the Printer Properties dialog box is created in: $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOT0000.plot_cfg.plot_cfg.Ask your system administrator which printers require which drivers. . etc. margins and orientation (portrait or landscape).. The format of Version 4 plot configuration files is not compatible with the Version 5 format. The list of available drivers is: PostScript HP-GL/2 RTL CGM ISO Raster Calcomp Gerber Oce Versatec Custom The following new drivers are supported: the CALS and ATA formats for CGM HP 1000 Series plotter HP-GL and IBM-GL support for pen plotters. button to configure the driver. This group box lets you specify: the default output file name: each time you print a document. 7.. set the desired options activated when the print job is submitted. The numbers of additional printers created are incremented by one. Click OK to return to the Printer Setup dialog box. an output file is created at the location you specify in the text field the default queue name: this field lets you choose which print queue to send the print job to. Driver configuration options vary from one driver to another. 5. 4. as follows: PLOT0001.

.

Note that the name of a printer is displayed in the Available printers combo box list. 3. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box. 1.Removing a Printer This tasks explains how to delete a printer.. At least one printer must have been set up using the File -> Printer Setup. Click the Remove button to remove the printer. Select the printer to be deleted from the Available printers combo box list. command. The printer configuration file ($HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOTxxxx. 2. ..plot_cfg) is deleted.

. command.. The printer is reconfigured printer configuration file ($HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOTxxxx. Note that name of a printer is displayed in the Available printers combo box list..plot_cfg) is modified.button.. Click the Configure. . Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box. 1. At least one printer must have been set up using the File -> Printer Setup. Select the printer to be reconfigured from the Available printers combo box list.Configuring an Existing Printer This tasks explains how to reconfigure an existing printer. 3. 2.

1. You need to have already set up at least one printer.Testing the Printer This tasks explains how to test your printer on UNIX. . Click the Test button. 2. Select the File->Print Setup command to display the Printer Setup dialog box.

Using Power Input Mode About Power Input Mode Entering Data Running Commands Using the Search Language .

. it is intended as an alternative to typing values in dialog boxes (dialog boxes are however still available) enter commands directly (by typing the c: followed by the name of the command) entering selection queries using the query language available for the Edit->Search. then restart your session. command. command. To activate power input mode. and click the CATIA ..About Power Input Mode Power input mode is a user-friendly productivity assistant allowing you to: enter numeric data more easily in editable fields and spinners (but cannot be used in combo lists).. Power input is available in certain (but not all) application commands. The power input field is located in the bottom right corner of the status bar: ..P2 option. click the General tab. as such. select the Tools->Options.

This mechanism is also implemented in drafting documents when you enter text: as soon as you start typing. For example. the focus is transferred automatically to the text editor window. in the Part Design application. note that: the area to the left of the power input field displays the names of the dialog box options for which power input is possible: this is the case only for editable fields and spinners (but not for combo lists) the power input field contains the default values for those options. 1. Even if the cursor focus is in a document window. then press ENTER to validate your input. Select a command that allows you to use the power input field for data entry. Select the ESCAPE key to return the focus to the document window. making sure that you separate each entry using the separator appropriate for your language environment. the power input field is displayed: If we zoom on the lower right corner of the window. . In the lower right corner of the window. you know that the command you are using supports power input.Entering Data This tasks shows you how to enter data more rapidly and more productively. The dialog box remains open by default. separated by commas the icon appears to the right of the power input field: when this icon is displayed. you could select the Chamfer command. you do not need to click in the power input field to transfer the focus to the power input field: any characters you type will be directed to the power input field automatically Use the Tab key to scroll from the power input field in the main application window to the data input fields in application dialog boxes. Enter the values for all the options in the power input field. 2.

However. you can set the separator you want to use. then click the Number tab. In dialog boxes.On Windows.") for the English. and the semi-colon (". Using power input helps you to be more productive because it provides an alternative to using dialog boxes for inputting data. select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command. if a dialog box provides contextual commands. The power input field lets you concentrate on just the data you have you enter. or use the Tab key. On UNIX. to move from field to field. you have to click in each editable field. Use the up and down keyboard arrow keys if you want to recover any input you previously entered. . double-click the Regional Settings control. you icon. you cannot set the separator. Finally. and the semi-colon (". Korean and simplified Chinese environments. right-clicking over the power input field also accesses the same commands.") for all other supported environments. If the dialog box is still open. The values you enter in the power input field are updated instantaneously in the fields in the dialog box. this means that you have made a mistake: for example. To do so. Korean and simplified Chinese environments. Set the separator using the List Separator option. If the dialog box is no can also remove the dialog box by clicking the longer visible.") for all other supported environments. The default is the comma (". If the color of the text you enter in the power input field changes to red. The separator is the comma (". pressing ENTER validates your input and executes the command (equivalent to Apply and OK). and thereby facilitates data input. click Apply or OK in the dialog box. Japanese. Japanese. the number of values you enter may exceed the number of options for which power input is possible.") for the English.

to remind you that you can also run the command from the power input field. when you point at the New c:New icon. 2.. For example. Press the ENTER key to run the command. When pointing at icons. enter the following command: c:New. the following message is displayed: . the syntax for running the associated command is displayed to the left of the power input field. For example. command. enter a command like this: c:command_name where command_name is the name of the command as it appears in the menus. 1..Running Commands This task explains how to run commands from the power input field. or: c:New to run the File->New.. To run a command from the power input field..

. the objects are selected. If the current command is the Select command. <=. Press the ENTER key. The message catalog KeyboardInput. Operating Signs The search language uses the following separators (whose role you will discover in the examples below): : and = (these separators are interchangeable) != (different) <. The localized version of this message catalog determines the exact syntax and shortcuts for each language. and search language shortcuts. 1.. 2. Searching using this command generates a search query (expressed in the search language) displayed in the "Generated query" field of the Search dialog box. command described in "Selecting Using the Search. => .Using the Search Language This section explains how to use the search language to search for objects.. Search Language: Syntax You can search for objects using the same criteria as with the Edit->Search. Command".. The search language offers almost all of the search functions available with the Edit->Search.CATNls sets up the power input search syntax.. command. The searched objects are sent to the current command. Enter the search string.. The search query both searches for the elements and automatically selects them. >. The search language can now be used both in the power input field and in the Advanced tab of the Search dialog box.

check that there are no identical shortcuts for two different items. You can also use the "*" character as a wildcard to replace any number of characters.Searching by Name You can search for an object name displayed in the specification tree. This is particularly useful if you renamed objects using the Feature properties tab of the Edit->Properties command. For example. there is no ambiguity between the shortcut "c:" (used in the power input area to enter a command). The name can also contain special characters. or the Properties contextual command. The message catalog KeyboardInput. and "col:" (used for searches on color).CATNls sets up unambiguous default shortcuts. For example. the command: name:wheel* searches for all objects starting with the string "wheel". To search for an object by its name. Searching by Type . enter the following command: name:object_name or name=object_name or a command using an abbreviation referred to as a "shortcut" as follows: n:object_name where "object_name" is the name of the object. In localized versions of the catalog.

Color='Sea Green' and: ." (period) as follows: For example: 'Part Design'.name= workbench.type. and of the color Sea Green.Pad searches for all objects of type Pad created using the "Part Design" workbench.Pad. enter the following command: type:type or type=type or: t:type You can also search for types using the ". To search for an object by its type.Pad are equivalent.Use the Type field in the Search dialog box to display a list of types (the types are translated in each language).Pad. You can also omit certain expressions as follows: 'Part Design'. The following syntax is also allowed: workbench.type.color= For example: 'Part Design'. Similarly: 'Part Design'.Pad and: .Color='Sea Green' searches for all objects of type Pad created using the "Part Design" workbench.

type. Here are some more examples using other operators described in Using Operators: workbench.type.type=Pad & Color='Sea Green' are also equivalent.type.name!=point* workbench.type.color!='sea green' workbench.name=point* workbench.name:point* and: workbench.type.color='sea green' workbench.type.color:'sea green' The following are also allowed: col='sea green' color='sea green' name=*1 n=*1 type=hole t=hole .

100)' Searching by Product Properties . when using the Edit->Properties command or the Properties contextual command. To search for an object of a specific color. For example: color:'(200. refer to "Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties". enter the following command: color:color_name or: col:color_name where "color_name" is the color of the object.100. If the name of the color contains a blank (which is the case with most of the colors available). you can type the full name as follows: color:Sea Green You can also surround the blank or the color name with a single quote (by default) like this: color:Light' 'Blue or like this: color:'Light Blue' You can also search for colors using their RGB values. For a reminder about color names.Searching by Color You assign colors to objects using the Color dialog box Graphic tab.

and setting the properties in the Product frame. Searching Objects Belonging to a Selection Set .Text.'Text String'='my text' searches for any element containing the text string "my text". You can also sue the following queries: product description:completed product' 'description:completed You can also search by product attributes.You assign properties to products (and parts in products) by right-clicking an element in the specification tree and selecting the Properties command from the contextual menu. the search queries: Product Description:completed Product' 'Description:completed 'Product Description':completed 'Product Description'=completed search for all elements whose Product Description contains the text "completed". For example. The property name is not case sensitive. The properties you can search for (the same as those you assigned to the element) are: Part Number Revision Definition Nomenclature Product Description Component Description. clicking the Product tab in the Properties dialog box. for example: Drafting.

To search for an object belonging to a selection set.CATNls determines the exact syntax for your language. "color" and "set" are appropriate for the English language only. The message catalog KeyboardInput. "type". enter the following command: set:selection_set_name where "selection_set_name" is the name of the selection set. or elements hidden in the No Show space using the following syntax: visibility:visible vis:visible and: visibility:hidden vis:hidden Searching for Lines by Thickness or Linetype You can also search for lines using specific thicknesses or linetypes like this: weight: w: or: dashed: d: . Searching for Visible or Hidden Elements You can search for visible elements. The strings "name".

Searching Using Favorites You can search for objects using your favorite queries defined via the Favorites mode. You can use any of the special characters such as "=".0000 mm thick. the search results are selected in the specification tree.When searching for lines with a specific weight. . "!" or "&" and combine them as you wish. you will just have to type: favorite!=Query_1 or f!=Query_1 In that case. When you press ENTER. This query searches for any element named "My Sketch". the search filter is not modified. Suppose you want your search to select all elements whose names are other than "My Sketch". Note that the language is case sensitive.all to search for all lines which are 2. you can specify the weight index like this: weight:6. To do so: favorite=favorite_query_name or f=favorite_query_name where "favorite_query_name" is the name of the favorite query. For example. let's use the query defined in Searching Using the Favorites Mode.

. For example: name:*''* searches for all names containing a '. For example: name:*'&*'* searches for all names containing the string &*. = blank . & + . colors and selection sets. The following line in the KeyboardInput.You can modify the search filter. Use of Special Characters in Searches A name can contain any of the following characters. specifies the default character for surrounding strings. The new filter will supercedes the previous filter. In this case. types. just indicate the new filter after the favorite query name in the power input field: favorite=Query_1. However. from will search for any element named "My Sketch" From Search to bottom and not Everywhere as originally defined in Query_1. you may also want to search for names containing the character ' itself. enter the character twice and make sure you place the two characters outside any string surrounded by the character '. Note also that the character ' can be used when searching for names.CATNls resource file : Quote = '.( ) " * . ! ' < > You must use the character ' (apostrophe by default) to surround strings containing special characters and which are to be interpreted exactly. which also play a special role in the search syntax: : .

OR and EXCEPT respectively) and ( ). They may be surrounded by '. it may be surrounded by apostrophes. and .Another example: name=my' 'favorite' 'part'.1' The above example shows that if a text string does not contain any apostrophe but special characters. Blanks are not considered as separators. +. The command: name:wheel1 + name:wheel2 . The following examples: name:*wheel'&'door&type:Part name:*wheel'&'door & type:Part name:*'wheel&door' & type:Part name:*'wheel&door'& type:Part name:*wheel'&'door &type:Part all search for parts whose names end with "wheel&door".(for AND.'1' is identical to name='my favorite part. The command: name:*wheel' ' searches for names ending with "wheel". but this is not mandatory. Using Operators The supported operators are: &. The command: name:' 'wheel* searches for names beginning with "wheel ".

the case is taken into account. If there is at least one upper case character. To avoid ambiguity. but there is a priority in their order of appearance (from left to right). the query: type:Part & name:toto + type:Hole & Color:Black is interpreted as: type:Part & (name:toto + (type:Hole & Color:Black) ) and thus searches for elements of type "Part" among the objects in the document that are "black holes" or named "toto". use parentheses like this: type:Part & (name:toto + (type:Hole & Color:Black) ) to obtain the same result. Upper and Lower Case When searching for names. Using Search Filters . if the value is entered in lower case.searches for two objects named "wheel1" and "wheel2". Priority There is no priority among operators. For example. the case is ignored.

Context keywords must always be placed at the end of the search string.. "in". in: the search will locate the appropriate elements in the active object and in the workbench you are currently using from: searches the elements in the active object to the bottom of the tree. and the semi-colon (".") for all other supported environments. command. by using the context keywords "all". The default is "in". all The separator is the comma (".You can use the same search filters (except In List) as with the Edit->Search.. For example." like this: type:Hole. Japanese. to find objects created using all workbenches. in a Part document. both parts and sketches are searched. Korean and simplified Chinese environments. "from" and "sel": all: searches the whole specification tree from top to bottom. sel: if you already selected objects before selecting the Search. this option searches from the selected objects to the bottom of the tree.. command.") for the English. and after the separator ". ..

Virtual Reality Configurations About Virtual Reality Support in Version 5 Stereoscopic Viewing Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session Using Head and Hand Tracking Devices in Version 5 .

Virtual reality essentially moves the computer out of your way.About Virtual Reality Support in Version 5 What is Virtual Reality? Clicking and dragging your way through a 3D graphics application may be interactive. When you're immersed. or a GUI. Any project in which 3D information must be navigated or closely examined will benefit from virtual reality technology. In virtual reality. design.).. engineer and understand such relationships. an "immersive" application lets you focus on the task at hand. Unlike interactive 3D graphics (which can consist of a series of still images coming off disk). you don't need virtual reality. virtual reality lets you intuitively manipulate and navigate through a real-time simulation of an object. but it's not virtual reality. you focus directly on your subject and disregard everything else. word processing. or the fact that you're actually looking at something made from digital bits instead of physical atoms. If you're working in two dimensions (web design. Immersion refers to your sense of engagement with the virtual model or environment. Where is Virtual Reality technology useful? Virtual reality adds value to virtually any application where it's vital to experience spatial relationships. "Immersion" (or "presence") is the goal of virtual reality.. so you can interact directly with your data or information. or the UNIX command line. and analyze. or a process. . It's not Virtual Reality because it's not immersive. so you don't deal with a mouse. What are the different types of Virtual Reality configurations? . or a place.

This range of equipment includes stereoscopic workbenches. Projection Large virtual models and environments are projected onto flat or curved screens. each creating a different impression of immersion. However. boom-mounted displays. Desktop devices The traditional monitor serves as a window into virtual world. throttle. "body contact" input/output to virtual models or environments through such devices as head-mounted displays. provide high resolution. with which you interact using shutter glasses and 3D input. in Silicon Graphics Reality Centers). pedals. These are ideal for digital prototyping. driver training and games. They are ideal for digital prototyping. with which you can navigate through virtual environment. and provide a highly immersive experience. haptic feedback systems. Simulators can also involve multiple participants. They can also be projected onto vertical and/or horizontal surfaces in special chambers like "caves" (for example. Which Virtual Reality tools/technologies can be used in Version 5? . easy keyboard access). motion platforms. and are ideal for applications such as pilot training. etc. they are limited to single users. and are suitable for scientific data visualization. They are also flexible (easily switch from monoscopic to stereoscopic. data gloves. data suits. desktop devices suffer from the following drawbacks: they are based on the single user approach they do not provide a full immersion experience. using such technologies as virtual reality walls (for example. the Fakespace CAVE) or "walk-in domes". These devices are the most sophisticated (and most expensive). However. These categories are not mutually exclusive: Simulators Simulators use a physical mockup of vehicle with real controls (steering.).Virtual reality technology can be recognized by the presence of specific I/O devices which can be organized into four categories. They also require a lot of physical space. tables and desks. This is a low-cost alternative to wearable devices. and allow groups of participants to get involved and collaborate. Wearable devices Wearable devices provide direct.

Projectors The Silicon Graphics Reality Center is a sophisticated facility which implements a large "wrap-around" display screen (160-degree horizontal field-of-view) in a setting that accommodates groups of people in theater-like or conference-room seating. at the lowest price investment. Tan or Trimension workbench. lightweight plastic glasses. and capable of providing some level of immersive experience: Stereo glasses for stereoscopic viewing Stereoscopic shutter glasses provide a partially immersive experience of CAD data. the company behind CrystalEyes shutter glasses. also offers the stereoscopic Z-Screen. we can already identify a short-list of hardware useful for navigating through or manipulating CAD data in real time. provided that the graphic board supports them. You view the image with position-tracked stereo glasses and use a tracking stylus to manipulate the model. Equipped with position-tracking capability. . StereoGraphics. the "ircombine" display output tool on the SGI Onyx2 facilitates the process. Digital prototyping also is served well by the Fakespace. Multithreaded Version 5 Session" for more information head and hand tracking: refer to "Using Head and Hand Tracking Devices in Version 5" for more information. Barco.In the myriad of tools and configurations available. A more immersive experience is afforded by headmounted displays. a large table onto which a stereoscopic image is projected so it looks like it's resting on top of the table. This device mounts on top of a standard monitor (like a filter) and you view it while wearing inexpensive. This is ideal for designing large assemblies and facilities. these displays output imagery based upon the position of your head and neck. Caves The CAVE approach (by Fakespace Systems) is top-of-the-line: here you enter a room that itself is a stereo display that surrounds you with images and sound. They're extremely easy to implement: for example. What does Version 5 support natively? The Version 5 infrastructure provides support for: stereoscopic viewing: refer to "Stereoscopic Viewing" for more information multipipe and multithread rendering: refer to "Running a Multipiped.

.

perspective and presence in three-dimensional space. Consider the examples of hardware configurations mentioned in this section as no more than that: just examples. architects and scientists the best possible understanding of three-dimensional information.Stereoscopic Viewing This section provides background information about stereoscopic viewing. It delivers the most realistic visual representation possible of complex digital models. giving engineers. These images can be perceived by a user wearing special glasses which continuously transmit separate images to the left and right eyes. Stereoscopic viewing describes how we use both eyes. Computer technology uses stereoscopic viewing to recreate the way we naturally see depth . creating a view of computer or video-based objects that have depth. and yielding levels of technical proficiency not available using a typical 3D view. each with a slightly different perspective. .stereoscopically. to perceive depth in a physical environment. We do not intend to describe here all the possible hardware configurations which support stereoscopic viewing for Version 5.

The CrystalEyes® range of glasses (designed by StereoGraphics.fakespacesystems.com/ 1.What Do You Need? Stereoscopic viewing is possible on both entry-range and high-end configurations: you do not automatically need expensive equipment to enter the realm of stereoscopic viewing. but also a whole range of high-quality. and a set of special glasses. . you need at least a graphics board supporting stereoscopic viewing on your platform. immersive. Many graphics boards are supported. and general information about FakeSpace Systems products. For detailed information about supported hardware configurations if you are running Windows NT.stereographics. Set up the appropriate hardware configuration.) is an example of the type of special glasses supported allowing you to benefit from stereoscopic viewing capabilities. products. which allow you to manipulate. stereoscopic display platforms from vendors such as FakeSpace Systems. browse the following Internet site: http://www. browse the following Internet site: http://www.htm High-End Configurations High-end configurations typically involve not only specific graphics boards and special glasses. assemble. and disassemble virtual mechanical objects while navigating through the entire digital mock-up. Inc. and general information about StereoGraphics.com/boards/brd-chrt. For detailed information about supported hardware configurations. Inc. Entry-Range Configurations On entry-range configurations.

On certain platforms. Click the Devices tab. Start a session. then restart. 5.. The screen characteristics are defined accordingly. type the command: $ ls /usr/gfx/setmon The different files in this directory represent the different screen characteristics that are available. 4. and set the Stereo option to ON to enable stereoscopic viewing. command. type the command: $ /usr/gfx/ircombine 3.. From the command line. width and frequency characteristics of the graphic interface. type the command: $ /usr/gfx/setmon -x1024x768_96s On the "Infinite Reality" workstation. . For a "Solid Impact" workstation. On IRIX: From the command line. Select the Tools->Options. You are required to determine the height.2. type the command: $ /usr/gfx/setmon -x yyyyyy where "yyyyyy" represents the settings you have chosen. Exit your session to save your settings. 6. you must also enter operating system commands to set up the hardware before starting a session.

. 8." command from the list." command. stereoscopic viewing is disabled (Off). Set the Stereo option to On to enable stereoscopic viewing. command. select the Tools->Customize. You can then add the command to a toolbar for easy access as explained in "Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping". Select the command once it has been moved to the toolbar or select the View->Commands List. . The Stereoscopic viewing dialog box looks like this: By default.. select the Commands tab.... Display the Stereoscopic viewing dialog box as follows: enter the following command in the power input field: c:Stereoscopic or.7.. then select the "Stereoscopic. command then choose the "Stereoscopic... select the "All commands" item from the "Categories" list.

the eye-distance is adjusted automatically depending on the zoom factor. in which you focus on the rotation point. . so that you can adapt your field of vision to the working context. If the focal point is far away. When automatic mode is active. the line of sight converges on the focal point. 9. Use this setting if you are viewing an object that in real life you could reasonably manipulate using your hands. This setting is suitable for working in confined spaces requiring an accurate perception of depth. the line of sight is parallel. and objects are located before the focal point. you should set the distance between your eyes accordingly. This mode is particularly suitable for working in Walk or Fly mode. these objects will be viewed in a fashion more precise than in real life. The value you enter will be in millimeters. Automatic mode When working in Examine mode. when working on large-scale assemblies or industrial plants requiring a wider field of vision. Manual mode Manual mode provides you with precise control over the distance between your eyes. you should set the eye gap to "automatic". The default mode is "Automatic". In automatic mode.Note that visualization performance will be impaired if you set the Stereo option to ON. In this mode. If you need to perceive a high degree of depth. This mode sets the distance between your eyes when using stereoscopic viewing. so viewing results are unrealistic in this case. Set either "Manual" or "Automatic" mode.

Note the following platform-specific restrictions when using stereoscopic viewing: on AIX: you lose colors by passing from 24-bit to 12-bit color using the GXT800 graphics board on SGI: performance decreases by approximately 10%. .

A typical configuration is an SGI ONYX2 workstation using four graphics pipes. There is a price to pay in memory usage and a very slight price to pay in computer overhead to manage the multiple pipes. However. You can also have a single pipe feeding three display channels like this: Nothing prevents you from using virtual reality configurations with just one pipe. 1.doc\src\basugat1103. etc. which allow "multithreading" of applications. What is a "pipe" and what is the difference between a single and multipipe system? A "pipe" in this context refers to the graphics board associated with each single window into an application. and create three secondary windows (each one using its own graphics pipe) for projection onto a Reality Center-type projection screen. the problem is that the overhead of running multiple applications in a single piped system can result in very poor performance.) about each graphics pipe like this: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. resolution. Each application in a " multipipe" system has its own distinct pipe to the graphics hardware.Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session Page 1 of 4 Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session In "About Virtual Reality Support in Version 5". we discussed the different types of virtual reality configurations available. or inside a virtual reality cave. intensive use of virtual reality technology leads to loss of performance if you are using only one graphics pipe. Log onto the ONYX2 workstation. In a "multipipe" system. but the overall positive effect on system performance is dramatic. Note that: the Version 5 infrastructure for UNIX platforms provides support for 16 windows maximum one window/pipe can be assigned to two threads (2 CPUs). 2. you can have several graphics boards. and each graphics board feeds a different display channel. It also refers to the data that is placed by the application which owns the pipe.htm 1/30/01 . Run the following command to display graphics subsystem information about your configuration: /usr/gfx/gfxinfo This command displays information (display name. You run a main Version 5 session using one pipe from a workstation. Performance can be enhanced even further if you are running workstations using multiple processors.

doc\src\basugat1103. a more powerful environment variable providing wall support: export CATMPKConfig=path/myconfigfile Note: you need to download the corresponding library. Edit the configuration file.2") 1280x1024 . You can also export the CATMPKConfig variable.. Managed (":0. 4..V5R6. Graphics board 1 is "KONAL" graphics.sh (for Bourne or Korn shell) source /CATEnv/ CATIA . For detailed information.0" is used for the main Version 5 session..B06..htm 1/30/01 . 6..1") 1280x1024 . If the display ":0. the syntax of the following file shows how to project a session using three separate pipes: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. browse the Internet site: http://sgi.Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session Graphics board 0 is "KONAL" graphics.csh (for C shell) 5. Managed (":0. Go to your /CATEnv directory. /CATEnv/ CATIA . then enter the following command to set up the Version 5 environment: . Graphics board 0 is "KONAL" graphics.. Synchronize the graphics pipes with the video channels in your configuration by running the program: /usr/gfx/ircombine Refer to your IRIX documentation for more information about the ircombine program. Page 2 of 4 3. Managed (":0.3") 1280x1024 .0") 1280x1024 .com/software/multipipe/sdk/ These two variables are not compatible and if you export both of them. Export the following environment variable: export CATMPConfig=path/myconfigfile where "path" is the path of a directory and "myconfigfile" is the name of a configuration file which you must create and edit to set up the secondary windows and assign them to different graphics pipes and displays.. Managed (":0. Graphics board 1 is "KONAL" graphics. the CATMPConfig variable supersedes the CATMPKConfig variable.B06..V5R6.

run the command: c:MPConfig file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.2" window { x0 y0 width 1280 height 1024 // Second pipe declaration // Display name // Second window declaration //Horizontal position (in pixels) //Vertical position (in pixels) //Window width (in pixels) //Window height (in pixels) wall_position [1280.0 } } pipe { name ":0. the center of the main window is 0.htm 1/30/01 . In your main session.3" window { x0 y0 width 1280 height 1024 // Third pipe declaration // Display name // Third window declaration //Horizontal position (in pixels) //Vertical position (in pixels) //Window width (in pixels) //Window height (in pixels) wall_position [-1280. 0] } } pipe { name ":0. 8. 0] } } 7. Save your changes to the configuration file.0] //Define the wall position (in pixels). then start your main Version 5 session.1" // Display name window // First window declaration { x0 //Horizontal position (in pi y0 //Vertical position (in pixels) width 1280 //Window width (in pixels) height 1024 //Window (in pixels) reference //Use width and height of this window to compute all size parameters wall_position [0.doc\src\basugat1103.Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session Page 3 of 4 pipe // First pipe declaration { name ":0.

In your main session.Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session Page 4 of 4 to start multipiping. This creates the three empty secondary windows whose display name. for example. run the command: c:MPConfig again to stop multipiping. The video output displayed inside your main session is now projected coherently across the three windows. select the command View->Full Screen. run the command.doc\src\basugat1103. Note that you can use stereoscopic viewing from within a multipiped session. 9. 10. In your main session. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. the three windows will be displayed side-by-side.htm 1/30/01 . If you are using a Reality Center-type projection screen. size and position you defined in the configuration file.

The driver may be launched on a different host as the one of the Version 5 session. The driver will declare itself to the instantiated broker and will answer Version 5 when an event enumeration or an event sending is requested. Application Examples Head tracking . 3. respectively. you need to set up these actors proceeding the following way: 1.Using Head and Hand Tracking Devices in Version 5 This task aims at giving you a general overview of the necessary virtual reality devices as well as two application examples for head tracking and hand tracking. Device Overview The virtual reality devices which can be handled are connected to Version 5 through a socket communication mechanism involving three actors: Version 5. In the meantime. Start the driver. a broker and a device driver. The broker role is to list and store any device declaration and to provide this list to Version 5 when requested. When started. Prior to using head or hand tracking in Version 5. these devices will be asked to start or stop event sending. Start a Version 5 session. The broker must be started on the same host as the one of Version 5 session. Version 5 will ask the broker for a list of devices and will ask each device for an event enumeration. 2. Start the broker.

-70. Edit a configuration file to adapt it to your own configuration. displayed image coordinates) are to be expressed in millimeters within the same axis system as the the data sent by the Fastrak compatible tracker.0.0. 0. -30. 1.0.0.The following example details the viewpoint tracking installation procedure using a Polhemus Fastrak sensor and an Irix platform.0] RIGHTEYE [0.0. 100] LOWERRIGHT [1000.0.0] # RIGHTEYE [ 30. 100] UPPERRIGHT [1000.e.400 . The screen is assumed to be rectangular. SCREEN { UPPERLEFT [1000. Should be left to "COM1" SERIALPORT "COM1" # bit rate in bits per seconds (ex : 9600) # Take care the tracker is set to this bit rate BPS 9600 # Driver should use the tracker 0 to send VIEWPORT_EVENT TRACKER 0 VIEWPORT_EVENT # # # # # # SCREEN Definition all the screen coordinates (i. 400] } # Eyes coordinates expressed in the mobile tracker axis system # ex : InterSense IS900 head tracker (rough figures) # LEFTEYE [-30. 400. The configuration file below explains how you can comment the necessary information: ### Begin of sample configuration file # serial port. 61.0] LEFTEYE [0. 124.0. -70.0. -30. -400. 0.0] #End of sample configuration file .

We recommend you to pay attention to the coordinates you enter. For a standard installation. 4... The more careful you are. This driver may be used with any device compliant with the Fastrak protocol.. the path should be /usr. jump to Step 13./B06/irix_a/code/command/catstart If you want to use stereoscopic viewing. Run the tracker device driver for viewpoint tracking: /. you have to perform Steps 5 to 12 otherwise. Run the Virtual Reality broker using the following instruction: /./ is the Version 5 installation path. 3../B06/irix_a/code/command/catstart -run PolExecDaemon -object "machine_name configuration_file" where "configuration_file" is the full path name of the configuration you edited in step 1 and "machine_name" is the name of the machine. 2.. the better the results will be. Start Version 5: /. ..../B06/irix_a/code/command/catstart -run CATVisVRBroker where /.

enter: c:VRViewTracking The Viewpoint Tracking is activated. Click OK to validate your parameters. 9. check the Manual option. set the "Stereo enable" and the "Virtual reality starting mode" options to On and Automatic. In the "Stereo enable" area. check the On option. In the power input field. 6. command then the Devices tab from the General category. Hand tracking This example is designed for hand tracking using a Joystick Spacestick VirtualPresence with a Polhemus sensor and the DMU Navigator 3 product.. Restart Version 5. 7. 12. Use the c:VRViewTracking command to deactivate Viewpoint Tracking. respectively. In the power input field. enter the following command: c:stereoscopic 11. 8. 13. Click OK. In the "Virtual reality starting mode" area. Select the Tools->Options. .5.. In the Devices tab. 10.

-70. -30.0.0. 400. -30.0. The screen is assumed to be rectangular.0] RIGHTEYE [0.400 . SCREEN { UPPERLEFT [1000. 100] UPPERRIGHT [1000.1.0] #End of sample configuration file .0.e. displayed image coordinates) are to be expressed in millimeters within the same axis system as the the data sent by the fastrak compatible tracker. 400] } # Eyes coordinates expressed in the mobile tracker axis system # ex : InterSense IS900 head tracker (rough figures) # LEFTEYE [-30. -70. 100] LOWERRIGHT [1000.0] # RIGHTEYE [ 30.0] LEFTEYE [0. Should be left to "COM1" SERIALPORT "COM1" # bit rate in bits per seconds (ex : 9600) # Take care the tracker is set to this bit rate BPS 9600 # Driver should use the tracker 0 to send VIEWPORT_EVENT TRACKER 0 VIEWPORT_EVENT TRACKER 1 POSITION_EVENT # # # # # # SCREEN Definition all the screen coordinates (i. -400.0.0.0.0. 0. 0. 124. Edit a configuration file as shown in the example below: ### Begin of sample configuration file # serial port. 61.

serialPort is the port to which the joystick is connected (e. Run the Joystick3DExecDaemon using the following command: catstart -run "Joystick3DExecDaemon brokerHost serialPort" where . COM3 or COM4).: COM1. Run the PolExecDaemon. . 3. 4.g.brokerHost is the name of the machine on which the device broker and Version 5 are running . COM2.2. Run the DMU Immersive Review configuration then the DMU Navigator 3 product.

Using and Customizing Fonts About Fonts Customizing User Interface Fonts on Windows Customizing User Interface Fonts on UNIX Customizing Fonts for Displaying Texts Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry Area Texts Adding Extra PostScript Fonts Understanding Differences Between Font Display and Printed Output Recovering Custom Fonts Developed Using CATIA Version 4 .

and explains how you can customize fonts. you will also find information about how to recover the fonts for use in Version 5. the text you see in the geometry area may not look exactly the same when you print. command names. tooltips. in certain contexts. . and which reference fonts: a typical example is the text you enter in drawing documents created using the Generative Drafting product. The areas of the software which allow font customization are: user interface: menu names. if you used the CATFONT utility in CATIA Version 4 to customize your own fonts. dialog box names and texts. etc.About Fonts This section contains principally conceptual information about font support in general. identifies which areas of the Version 5 software are concerned by font support. And finally. You will also find information about how. specification tree texts texts you enter in certain applications.

dialog box and tooltip text fonts. then OK. The following dialog box appears: 2. message box. select the items: Menu Message Box if you want to customize menu command. 1. exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect. Select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command. . If you have a Version 5 session open. 5.Customizing User Interface Fonts on Windows This task explains how to customize user interface fonts on Windows. 3. then click the Appearance tab (if it is not displayed by default). or click on a user interface item in the area in the center of the dialog box. Use the Item list to select an item of the user interface you want to customize. Select the desired font. 4. font size and color. For example. Click Apply.

Note that you can declare Motif fonts only. Go to the directory: Install_directory/resources/msgcatalog/ where "Install_directory" is the root installation directory you chose when installing the software. . Go to the appropriate subdirectory if you are using a language other than English. 1. 4. If you installed the software at the default location. The "Dialog" file contains resource declarations for fonts (and foreground and background colors) for certain user interface components. Edit the file named "Dialog". you would go to the following directory: /usr/Dassault Systemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog if you are using the English language. Make sure you exported the LANG variable for the desired locale before restarting a session. 2. The file is delivered at installation and is ready for use as is. 3. A subdirectory is provided for each language supported. Customize the last line of each user interface component declaration if you want to change the font and the font size. exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect.Customizing User Interface Fonts on UNIX This task explains how to customize user interface fonts on UNIX. If you have a Version 5 session open.

Part Design. On UNIX 1. Assembly workbenches and. On Windows 1. Go to the appropriate subdirectory if you are using a language other than English. 2. font size and color. Select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command. click the Display control then click the Appearance tab (if it is not displayed by default). A subdirectory is provided for each language supported. you would go to the following directory: /usr/Dassault Systemes/B06/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog if you are using the English language. all 2D texts. exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect.Customizing Fonts for Displaying Texts This task explains how to customize the fonts used. . 5. or click inside the Message Box item (on Message Text) in the area in the center of the dialog box. If you have a Version 5 session open. Click Apply. select the Message Box item. This does not concern texts you enter in drawing documents created using the Generative Drafting product. In the Item list. in general. 4. Select the desired font. to display: texts in the specification tree constraint texts in the Sketcher. for example. 3. Note that system fonts are used for displaying these types of text. Go to the directory: Install_directory/resources/msgcatalog where "Install_directory" is the root installation directory you chose when installing the software. If you installed the software at the default location. then OK.

you must do the following on the receiving site: install and activate the appropriate locale for reading the document make sure that the appropriate system fonts are installed and declared correctly on the receiving site. This is required to allow end users to zoom the text size. The file is delivered at installation and is ready for use as is. exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect. Each font is declared using six identical declarations which differ only in the font size. Customize each line if you want to change the font. Bitstream or custom fonts. Note that you can declare Motif fonts only. specification tree texts. Edit the file named "Visualization".2. Korean and Simplified Chinese) environments contains two lines for each declaration: one line for the SBCS character set. To display all text correctly. Make sure that the appropriate fonts are installed and declared correctly on the receiving site. If you do not have the same fonts installed on both sites. As explained above. for example. If you exchange documents with a site using a different language. Text in the geometry area points to CATIA Version 4. the text will not be lost: it will just not be displayed correctly. and one line for the DBCS character set. 3. The range of font sizes allows end users to zoom within the limits of those font sizes. If you have a Version 5 session open. Make sure you exported the LANG variable for the desired locale before restarting a session. The Visualization file for the DBCS language (Japanese. The "Visualization" file contains resource declarations for fonts for displaying annotation texts. 4. . text display may contain "garbage" in 2D areas such as the specification tree and in editable fields. are displayed using system fonts.

Use the Text Editor dialog box to write the text. 1. 2. but inside the main application window. when using the Generative Drafting product. 4. . The Properties dialog box is displayed: 5. and lists the fonts you can choose from. specify the text height and define the anchor point. font style and size. Click the Font tab. The Text Editor dialog box is displayed. The objective is to present the list of fonts supported. justify it. 3.Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry Area Texts This task explains how to choose fonted texts displayed in the geometry area. The Text Editor dialog box disappears. Point to the text. right-click and select the Properties command. then click anywhere outside the Text Editor window. for example. then click a point in the drawing to position the text. Open a drawing you created using the Generative Drafting product. The Font tab includes controls for setting the font. You need access to the Generative Drafting product license to follow this scenario which shows you how to enter text in a drawing and choose a font for the text. Click the icon.

no Type 1 fonts are provided. note that on Windows only. the 22 Bitstream fonts support ISO-8859-1 environments only. if a TrueType version of the font exists or has been created. Taiwanese and Chinese environments. With respect to the PostScript Type 1 font format. . whereas the CATIA Version 4 fonts are delivered in regular style only. Which Fonts Are Provided? The following fonts are supported and are installed ready for use without further customization when you install Version 5: all default stroke fonts delivered previously with CATIA Version 4 22 Bitstream Type 1 fonts an extra font (customized by Bitstream): CATIA Symbols. the TrueType version of the font can be used to optimize visualization quality. Korean. For Russian. no CID fonts are provided. only Version 4 fonts. only Version 4 fonts. Polish and Czech environments.Which Font Formats Are Supported? Version 5 provides the following font formats: PostScript Type 1 format PostScript CID (rearranged fonts are not supported) CATIA Version 4 FONT format. Note that the Bitstream fonts are delivered in several different styles (depending on the font). Furthermore. Note that no PostScript CID fonts are provided. this font contains the symbols from Version 4 fonts. For Japanese.

pfb bold italic CoureBI.pfb UniversalMath1 BT regular Mathe.pfb SymbolProp BT regular SymbP.pfb bold italic SwissBI.pfb bold italic DutchBI.pfb Swis721 BdOulBT bold outline SwiOuB.pfb italic MonosI.pfb Dutch801 Rm BT roman Dutch.pfb Courier10 BT roman Coure.pfb Note that: the Swiss 721 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Helvetica the Monospace 821 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Helvetica Monospaced the Dutch 801 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Times Roman the CATIA Symbols font (not in the above list) contains the symbols from Version 4 fonts.Which Bitstream Fonts Are Supported? The Bitstream fonts are: Font Name Swis721 BT Attribute File Name roman Swiss.pfb bold italic MonosBI.pfb Monospac821 BT roman Monos.pfb bold CoureB.pfb light condensed italic SwissCLI.pfb Swis721 LtCn BT light condensed SwissCL.pfb italic SwissI.pfb italic CoureI.pfb bold MonosB.pfb bold DutchB.pfb SymbolMono BT regular SymbM.pfb italic DutchI.pfb bold SwissB. .

SYM3.font.font: Kanji font (Japanese) Regarding the KANJ font. The installation adds the fonts (in TrueType format) to the list of system fonts you can view by selecting the Start->Settings->Control Panel command and double-clicking the Fonts control. SYM4.font. SYM2.font: 4 simplex sans serif fonts ROM1.font: Simplified Chinese font.font: Hangeul font (Korean) TRCH. Note that: SYM1 contains annotation and tolerance symbols. SSS4.font: Traditional Chinese font SICH.pfb. from now on.font. halfwidth Katakana characters are displayed with a smaller width than the width with which they were displayed in CATIA Version 4 KOHG.font. ROM2. .ttf. Note: On Windows only.font.font: 4 symbol fonts KANJ. The TrueType font format offers enhanced visualization quality. . Which Version 4 Fonts Are Provided? The following Version 4 fonts are supported and are installed ready for use without further customization when you install Version 5: SSS1. ROM3. and plot markup characters SYM2 contains ISO symbols fonts SYM3 contains roughness symbols SYM4 contains graphic and mathematical symbols as well as miscellaneous technical symbols. .font: 3 roman fonts GOTH. the following files are delivered in the location referenced by the CATFontPath variable: in the Postscript folder or subdirectory: .For each of the Bitstream fonts. SSS2.afm in the ExtraFiles folder or subdirectory: .pfm.font.font: 1 Gothic font SYM1.inf. . SSS3. installing Version 5 also installs in the ExtraFiles environment the equivalent fonts in TrueType format.font.font.

command. .Adding Extra PostScript Fonts This section explains how to add extra PostScript Type 1 fonts. You can address questions about ordering Bitstream fonts to: http://catia_support@bitstream. the following files are required: ". If an agreement exists between the font supplier and Microsoft. If you already have the TrueType fonts. To do so. The "full name" refers to the name of the font visible when selecting the Start->Settings->Control Panel command and double-clicking the Fonts control.afm" file.cid" suffix) the CMAP file associated with UNICODE encoding (with the ". Copy the new fonts to your Version 5 environment in: install_root\resources\fonts\PostScript where "install_root" is the installation folder (Windows) or directory (UNIX). To achieve enhanced font visualization (Windows only). then select the File->Install->New Font.. 3. double-click the Fonts control. and when prompted. (http://bitstream. 2. To do so.. A large choice of PostScript or TrueType fonts is available from Bitstream Inc. if the associated TrueType font does not exist. then select the File->Install->New Font. .pfa" font files ".. For Type 1 fonts. double-click the Fonts control. then click OK. select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command. 4.com 1.inf).com). Note about CID Fonts For CID fonts. the system will then generate the corresponding TrueType font. Edit the file: install_root\resources\fonts\PostScriptRelatedTrueType to map the PostScript file name with the full name of the TrueType equivalent. select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command.pfb" or ". If not. . Select the font. the font will not be generated. notably the first option in the dialog box: "Convert Type1 to TrueType". you can ask the system to generate it from the PostScript files (the following file types are needed: .pfb. you can simply install them.afm" and ". command and select the fonts to be installed.cmap" suffix) the ".inf" files. check the three options.afm. the following files are required: the CID font file (with the "..

.

Understanding Differences Between Font Display and Printed Output This section contains information about minor differences you may notice between the way text is displayed in the geometry area and how it looks in printed output. whereas in all other cases.A. whereas Type 1 Postscript fonts are used on UNIX. printing the text produces a bitmap. texts are printed using the font referenced in the following resource file: Install_folder/resources/msgcatalog/Print PostScript By default. discretization is applied to 2D texts. text is displayed using TrueType fonts. if the CATIA . the font is Helvetica. For 2D texts (for example. you can expect the following results: Driver GDI Font Used for Printing Font Used for Printing On UNIX On Windows NT TrueType N. For DBCS languages. Any differences between displayed and printed text depend on how your System Administrator set up your printer. Differences between Text Display and Printed Output When printing on printers using the drivers listed below.P2 setting is active. there is a slight difference in how text is displayed between Windows NT and UNIX: on Windows NT. Text Display In general. in the specification tree). Your printer may be set up in one of three ways: the printer has all the required memory and fonts the printer does not have the fonts. . but the PostScript file contains fonts Discretization is applied to Drafting texts.

.or you may have to map your printer to a specific font. to view your printer properties in a Version 5 session. For example. select the File->Print command. CGM HP-GL2.A.. HP-RTL CalComp C907 Oce N. click the Properties. button and view the printer properties on the Advanced tab.0 VRF Discretization is applied to texts . Graphics GPR50 Versatec: VCGL and VGS 2.

Regarding FONT CODE names. the associated orders are ignored. Make sure that the fonts you created are in the FONT format (described using the UNICODE code key) and not in the FONTDATA format (described using the EBCDIC code key). Note that none of the CATIA Version 4 basic delivered fonts used any of these options. as a minimum level. 2. you must do so using the CATFONT utility using. The internal font format we recommend from CATIA Version 4 Release 1. Note that the following is no longer supported: the font described with proportional format the grid defined by five numbers. Regarding Korean fonts. no Version 4 user-defined Korean font can be used directly in Version 5. 1. 3. Declare your Version 4 FONTLIB names by referencing them in the following file: install_folder\resources\fonts\V4FontInteroperability This file maps to a Version 4 FONTLIB name. refer to your CATFONT Version 4 utility documentation. Copy the Version 4 FONT files to your Version 5 environment in: install_folder\resources\fonts\Stroke where "install_folder" is the installation folder (Windows) or directory (UNIX).8 onwards is described using UNICODE codes. CATIA Version 4 Release 1. If you did not already migrate your user FONTDATA files to FONT files and FONT CODE files. since there are differences in Korean ideogram UNICODE codes between the UNICODE used in Version 4 and Version 5.Recovering Custom Fonts Developed Using CATIA Version 4 This task explains how to use CATIA Version 4 FONT files and set them up in your Version 5 environment. In both cases. refer to your CATFONT utility documentation for more details.8. Copy the FONT CODE files to your Version 5 environment in: install_folder\reffiles\NLS\fontcode 4. For more information about CATIA Version 4 FONT files. the FONT and FONT CODE associated with it. .

.

Using Catalogs Getting Started with Catalogs Creating a Catalog Previewing a Catalog Browsing a Catalog Making a Query in a Catalog .

After catalog creation. a chapter ALL_FASTENERS referencing end chapters (SCREWS and NUTS) which. CATPart. two functions facilitate and expedite navigation: search by keyword allowing you to find more easily the entities that come closest to your requirements .g. color. PowerCopy).e. The entities referred to by the end chapters (by SCREWS for example) can be described using keywords such as reference. ball bearings or computer parts. For details about creation from scratch see Creating a Catalog. length. i. diameter. standard.g. CATProduct.V4 Integration User's Guide. Users often need a way of storing and classifying the many objects they have at their disposal. These can either be created from scratch or through the conversion of CATIA Version 4 libraries. etc. type. To facilitate fast and easy retrieval of such objects thus avoiding time-wasting redesign Version 5 offers the possibility of creating catalogs. The example shown below and elucidated in the following tasks is a generic family comprising screws and nuts. These objects may number tens of thousands. You can associate keywords to chapters and families and thus. To find out more about the conversion of V4 libraries see "Converting CATIA Version 4 Libraries into Version 5 Catalogs" in the CATIA . size.Getting Started with Catalogs This section tells you what you need to know about catalogs. diameter. etc. length. V4 documents (e. A Version 5 catalog is in the form of a tree structure made up of: chapters: a chapter is a way of classifying other chapters or families families (end chapters): a family is a set of components components: a component is an entity such as features (e. models) or V5 documents (e. etc.) keywords: a keyword is an attribute describing the chapter and family content. Each component may be assigned its own attribute value.g. in turn. whether they be screws. each with its own specific characteristics such as shape. perform searches by attribute value to filter their content. reference entities.

Any chapter can be considered to be an entry point into a catalog. This means that you have more than one way of accessing a catalog entity.Obviously. . There are two important points to bear in mind: Any chapter can be referenced by one or more other chapters. the more criteria you use the easier it is to narrow down the search for as satisfactory a result as possible a preview function enabling the viewing of all entities in a given chapter to facilitate and expedite your search: You can of course define more levels in the catalog's tree structure than shown above.

. see the CATIA .Team PDM database. catalogs can be incorporated into the CATIA .Team PDM User's Guide. For more information about this product.Finally.

The new chapter is created and displayed in the catalog structure. a Version 5 catalog is made up of chapters. An empty catalog containing a first chapter is created as you access the workbench. This chapter must not be a family. 1. 4. In our example. grayed or ungrayed. commands from the main menu to display the Chapter dialog box .e. 2. For example. In the left-hand part displaying the catalog structure. according to the contextually edited element. keywords and descriptions. SCREWS and NUTS. Key in the name of your new chapter in the Name field.. The icons available in the Catalog Editor are updated. 3. Click the Add Chapter icon or select the Insert -> Add Chapter. .Creating a Catalog Creating a Catalog using the Catalog Editor Creating a Catalog in Batch Mode Creating a Catalog using the Catalog Editor This first section introduces the Catalog Editor workbench which provides interactive commands to create and modify your own catalogs by adding chapters. double-click to activate the chapter under which you want to create a chapter or a subchapter.catalog comprises a chapter. i. Now let`s go to adding elements to our catalog! Add a Chapter As shown in the Getting Started with Catalogs task. From the Start menu.. ALL FASTENERS. select the Infrastructure->Catalog Editor commands to open the Catalog Editor workbench. Click OK. and two families. the ALL_FASTENERS. if you double-click a family you will only be able to add a keyword or a description. each chapter describing what we call a "family".

.catalog window. The family is created. Add a Link to Another Catalog 1. 1. In the other catalog. Add a Family The family will be directly added to the current chapter. Open the catalog to which you want to create a link. you can easily modify its name and its icon using two methods: select the chapter in the catalog structure and use the End chapter object->Definition. select the chapter or the family to be linked. 4. commands from the main menu to display the Chapter Definition dialog box. 2. command from the contextual menu. Click the Add link to another catalog icon commands from the main menu. or select the Insert -> Add link to another catalog..Once a chapter has been created. Indicate the name of the family in the Name field. Click the Add Family icon or select the Insert -> Add Family.. . 2. An icon is displayed in the graph and its appearance changes according to the selecting item: family or chapter... 3.. Add a Keyword The keyword will be added to the current chapter. The link is created.. 3. Click OK.. contextual menu to change its name and its icon select a created description in the right part of the window then choose the Edit current chapter. Activate the ALL_FASTENERS.

e.. Specify a name for the new keyword.. the keyword will be visible in the Catalog Editor only and not in the Catalog Browser.. i. String. 4. In that case. contextual menu select a created description in the right part of the window then choose the Keyword default values.. The Chapter`s keywords dialog box is then displayed. command from the contextual menu. Click OK. This list provides all knowledge types.. Angle.. Click the Add Keyword icon or select the Insert -> Add Keyword. 5. Integer.1. 2. This value may optionally be unset by clicking the Unset button. Use the drop-down list to select the keyword Type. Once the keywords have been created. Boolean. 3. Enter a Default Value for the keyword. . The keyword is created and associated to the selected chapter. and so on. commands from the main menu to display the Keyword creation dialog box. You can uncheck the Visibility option if you do not wish the keyword to be visible. they can be easily modified using two methods: select the chapter in the catalog structure and use the End chapter object->Keyword default values.

. You can select .CATScript or . Or Click the Select external feature button to choose a PowerCopy. it can be easily modified. a Formula or Rules Checks feature in another document open in the current session. . commands from the main menu to display the Description definition dialog box. a Details.. Click the Add Component icon or select the Insert -> Add Component. Click the Select document button if you want to select a referenced object.. unset the displayed values or even remove a keyword. contextual menu. Activate the family you want to describe.CATGScript documents. Add a Component to a Family 1. . The Visible option is used by the catalog administrator to make a keyword visible or not when a user browses the catalog. 3. 2. This command lets you define a Minimum and a Maximum bound for the description value.CATPart.This dialog box lets you specify a new Name and a default Value for the selected keyword. Position your pointer on the Value field then use the contextual menu and select the Range. command...CATProduct. Your choice is displayed in the File name field.. . Just select the description in the right part of the window then double-click it or choose the Definition. Once the description has been created.

7. is displayed if you point on a document. Click OK when you have finished. In the Keyword name list. .jpg. You can click the Unset button to unset the displayed value. 5. etc. The description is created. select the element for which you want to set a value. 8. A default document preview. If you point on a feature. format. which is the Referenced document. . Click the Keyword values tab. 6.bmp.catalog file or the "External file preview" option to preview an external file in . If you click the "External file preview" radio button.. 9. nothing is displayed. You can also directly click the Select an external preview file button instead of clicking the External file preview radio button. Choose the "Local preview" option if you want to refer to a document stored in the . Enter your value in the Value field.4. This tab enables you to set values for all keywords you have previously defined. you can select a file in the Select File dialog box. Click the Preview tab. The complete path will then be displayed.

4.You can update all the descriptions of a chapter at the same time using the value of a string type keyword. The Type field will be automatically filled according to the file you selected. or select the Insert->Add Part Family. The Update descriptions name dialog box enables you to indicate a new Reference keyword. 2. commands to open the Part 3. . When you rename the description. Click the Preview tab to specify the type of browser preview you want to use. the Name value will be modified as well but if no Name has been specified. choose a chapter then select the Update descriptions name command from the Insert menu. you can modify the description without creating this keyword. click the Select Document button to define the document that will be referenced.. otherwise an error message will be displayed. Under the Reference tab. This document should be a CATPart with a single design table. Select a chapter.. Add a Part Family 1. Click the Add Part Family icon Family Definition dialog box. To do so.

etc. . format. If you click the "External file preview" radio button. is displayed .jpg. you can select a file in the Select File dialog box.A Default document preview. The complete path will then be displayed. Note that you can hide or add part family definition and keyword values by selecting the corresponding item from the contextual menu. Click OK.catalog file. 6. A sheet containing a component for each line of the design table is also created.bmp. 5. The "Store preview in catalog" option lets you save the preview in your catalog. which is the document stored in the . .. Choose the "Referenced document preview" option to preview the document you point to or the "External file preview" option to preview an external file in . The part family is created and displayed in the specification tree. Each information corresponds to a keyword in the chapter. any corresponding information contained in the design table is displayed. When you double-click the part family in the specification tree.

csv.csv contains the information required to create a chapter referencing subchapters (CHAPTER is specified in cell 1A with its name ALL_FASTENERS in 1B). An example of what one of the families could look like is given in the file SCREWS. and BuildCatalog.FASTENERS by a keyword named FASTENERS and identified by the names SCREWS and NUTS (in cells 4B and 5B). Open the file ALL_FASTENERS.csv. these two families of entities are described in ALL. SCREWS. It looks like this: The file ALL_FASTENERS.CATScript. It looks like this: . The names of the catalog documents containing the referenced chapters must also be given (SCREWS and NUTS with their paths in 4C and 5C). Have access to the files ALL_FASTENERS.csv.csv. Start the Catalog Editor workbench by selecting Infrastructure -> Catalog Editor from the Start menu. In this particular example. Open this file. 2. 3. 1.Creating a Catalog in Batch Mode This task explains how to create a catalog in batch mode.

This cell may be called.Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. each line represents a description of the constituent entities i. you can reserve one of the cells to indicate your own icon to be referred to. their location and their associated external preview. String. The first column may be empty or contain the name you want to associate to the description. Example: "DESIGNATION :"=="CHC" Make sure when entering paths and filenames in the . In the last column (and for familiess only).csv) can be preceded by their location (with the complete path). mm or km for a LENGTH. Note the following: The first cell is reserved for the declaration of the chapter type: CHAPTER for a chapter referencing subchapters or ENDCHAPTER for a family referencing one or more entities. Our example uses the default icons thus there is no ScrewIcon column in the above image. etc..csv format. the CATPart documents in column F of SCREWS. In the query syntax. After Keywords and Types. this symbol is used exclusively to isolate keywords whose names may contain non-alphanumeric characters. g for MASS. The second cell is reserved for the name of the chapter to be generated. keyword value) to enable queries on your chapter. their name. The values attributed to the magnitudes are assumed to be in the unit (mm for LENGTH. Integer. "ScrewIcon". Boolean and the units: m. For more information see "About Parameters" in the CATIA . etc). For more information see Using Icons at the end of this task. keyword name. If you do not wish to use the default icons supplied with the application to identify the chapter to be generated. The types allowed are Real. This column is optional. The V5 document names in the column located after the last keyword of the description line (in our example. . their keyword values. For more information see "About Parameters" in the CATIA .csv file that upper and lowercase characters are kept as is. for instance. otherwise an attempt is made to find these documents based on the Search Order. Do not use the quote symbol (") in any cell (chapter name.e.For each chapter (family or not) you must create either a text file (with columns separated by a comma or a semi-colon) or an Excel file (with cells separated by a comma or semi-colon) and save it in the .Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.. command. The mandatory items are Keywords to define the names of the keywords associated with the chapter and Types to define their unit (or their type for simple cases). you can specify the external preview file you want to link to the component.

Before being able to use the CATScript file in order to run the batch operation you must make sure the CclTypeLib library is loaded.. Open a second empty Excel file and. However. 6. cell separation by comma or semi-colon. On UNIX: The csv format is a text format recognized by UNIX. command.csv file supplied. with the aid of the ALL_FASTENERS. with the aid of the SCREWS. Any Excel file opened on Windows and saved in the csv format can subsequently be used on UNIX. Click the Automation tab. To do this. The following dialog box appears: .csv file supplied. On Windows: Open an empty Excel file and. This library declares the catalog creation method. complete the table giving all the keywords. Once you have completed the Excel file save it in the csv format making sure it is comma or semi-colon delimited. complete the table giving all the criteria required for the classification of the entities to be included in the chapter you want to create. select the Tools->Options. 7.e. types and catalog names required for the creation of the chapter. if you prefer to work exclusively on UNIX you can use any text editor provided you use the same syntax as the csv format i. 8. 5. The Options dialog box appears with the General category selected in the left-hand column.4. The catalog batch builder requires the creation of a csv file per chapter which results in the creation of a catalog document per chapter..

In the example above the CATScript file contains just one set of instructions for the batch-generation of one catalog. You are now ready to run the batch operation. The comments relating to these paths are shown above in red. Make sure it is in the Selected list before clicking OK.catalog file in the location you specify. However..CreateCatalogFromcsv InputFile . If the CclTypeLib library is not in the Selected list click on the Browse.Close End Sub As you can see.csv" ' Defines the absolute path of the output catalog file OutputFile ="E:\Catalog\SCREWS. 12. In our example. button and retrieve the library from intel_a\code\bin.catalog" ' Creates a document document of type CatalogDocument Dim Catalog As Document Set Catalog=CATIA.Add("CatalogDocument") ' Calls the CreateCatalogFromcsv method on Catalog to create the catalog Catalog. 11.9. If you want to use it. OutputFile ' Closes the document Catalog. written in the VBScript language.CATScript. Select the Tools ->Macro->Macros command. this file. a CATScript file can of course include several series of instructions for the generation of several catalogs. contains the information required to batch-generate a . Open the file BuildCatalog. 10. It can be used on both Windows and UNIX. the content looks like this: Language="VBSCRIPT" Sub CATMain() ' Defines the absolute path of the input csv or text file InputFile ="E:\Catalog\BuildFiles\SCREWS. The following dialog box appears: .. copy it and change the csvFile and catalogFile paths to adapt them to your environment.Documents.

csv ------------------------Terminal Chapter Creation ------------------------Creating chapter with the name SCREWS Creating keyword DESIGNATION of String type Creating keyword TYPE of String type Creating keyword DIAMETER of Length type with mm as unit Creating keyword LENGTH of Length type with mm as unit ------------------------------------------------------------DESCRIPTION NUMBER 1 DEFINITION: DESIGNATION = FHC M03-05 TYPE = FHC DIAMETER = 3 mm LENGTH = 5 mm Referenced document path : FHC_M03-05. allowing you to check verify successful creation of the catalog. ending with the total number of created descriptions as well as the catalog creation status. and a catalog with the name originally given in the Excel file. . Click Run. 6 descriptions have been created.. 14. If you want to open the catalog you have just created see "Previewing a Catalog". Select the appropriate CATScript file. You are advised to keep the csv files used for catalog generation as no changes can be made to the catalog without completely regenerating it in the way described above.catalog From E:\Catalog\BuildFiles\SCREWS. SCREWS.13.. For example: Creating E:\Catalog\SCREWS. This batch operation will generate: a report in the same location as the catalog file.catalog. -----------------------Batch successfully ended ------------------------ The above example shows only one description but the . Make sure that at the bottom of the box External File is selected indicating the location of the macro.report file details each description..CATPart .

You must then concatenate the folder/directory location by resetting the Version 5 environment variable "CATGraphicPath" in your current environment to point to the folder/directory. see "Managing Environments". command. . If for whatever reason the icon you wish to use is not found no icon will appear. Using Icons If you prefer not to use the default icons supplied with the catalog application. Entering just the name means that you must put all your icons in a single folder or directory which you must create (and not in the Version 5 filetree). In the New dialog box. you can associate one of your own with each chapter. you then only have to reset the variable specifying the receiving site.bmp extension) in the cell reserved for referring to your own icons.. When exporting the catalog.The second method to create a catalog is to click the New icon or select the File->New.. You can do that by putting: either the complete path indicating the location of the icon or just the name of the icon (without the . double-click the CatalogDocument type or select it then click OK. neither the default icon nor of course the icon you wanted to associate yourself. For more information about customizing environments. Entering the complete path has the disadvantage of presenting problems when exporting the catalog to another site.

appears to the right of the Table tab. the only chapter contained in the All_FASTENERS.catalog appears in a catalog navigator window.Previewing a Catalog This task explains how to navigate through catalogs using the Catalog Editor or the Catalog Browser. identifies a chapter and the folder + arrow icon identifies a chapter in another identifies a catalog family and the sheet + arrow icon identifies a family in another To find out how to use other icons. Double-click a family name or icon. described below. The entities contained in the selected chapter appear in the form of a table on the right-hand side of the navigator: . 2. open a catalog. Use the Catalog Editor 1. 3. in the navigator window. Double-clicking on a family displays. the ALL_FASTENERS. In a Version 5 session. Two things happen: The Preview tab. Double-click on ALL FASTENERS. see "Using Icons".catalog that you created in "Creating a Catalog" for example. all the chapters referenced by the family. The ALL FASTENERS chapter. The entities contained in the chapter selected then appear in the left-hand part of the catalog navigator as shown: Default Icons Two default icons are used: the folder icon catalog the sheet icon catalog.

catalog. Click the Preview tab to visualize the listed entities: 5. To narrow the selection criteria using the keywords you originally chose see "Making a Query in a Catalog". Click the Browser icon to open the Catalog Browser dialog box. In a V5 session. open the ALL_FASTENERS. . If you want you can now edit the entity just like any other V5 document.4. 2. Use the Catalog Browser 1. You can open an entity in either the Table or Preview tab by double-clicking it.

3. 4. By default. refer to the Browse a Catalog part in Using the Catalog Browser in this guide. For more information on how to query catalogs. Click the search icon. The search result is displayed . SCREWS for example. refer to the Making a Query in a Catalog task in this guide. Double-click a chapter. Click the Table>> button to show/hide the catalog descriptions and keywords. 7. Enter your search string in the Filter field. Click Close to exit the Catalog Browser. The parts included in the SCREWS end chapter are displayed with their corresponding preview. 6. the table is hidden. This browser also enables you to perform queries on keywords and descriptions: 5. For more information on the Catalog Browser.This dialog box lets you browse and preview the content of the current catalog. .

.

3. Click the Browse another catalog icon enables you to navigate to the selected catalog. Open the Catalog browser dialog box by clicking the Open catalog icon Tools->Catalog Browser commands. we have selected the SCREWS catalog. The Catalog browser is available in several workbenches such as Assembly Design. Generative Shape Design or Drafting. or selecting the to open the Select catalog dialog box.Browsing a Catalog This section introduces the Catalog Browser which provides interactive commands to browse a catalog and instantiate components in context. This dialog box 2. Part Design. . In our example. 1. Browse a Catalog This task introduces the interactive commands you can use to browse a catalog. Click Open to open your catalog.

You can also double-click an icon to directly open a chapter. By default.The current catalog name is displayed in the title bar and the current chapter name is indicated at the top of the drop-down list. This drop-down list gives you access to the five latest catalogs selected. . the catalog content is displayed with small icons but you can easily switch from small to large icons by clicking the corresponding button: or . The icon with an ascending arrow returns to the previous chapter selected.

4. .Search("FHC")>=0mm. the table is hidden. x. Click the search icon.DESIGNATION. 6. By default. 5. The search result is displayed. refer to the Making a Query in a Catalog task in this guide. for example. For more information on how to query catalogs. Enter your search string in the Filter field. Click the Table>> button to show/hide the catalog descriptions and keywords.

If one of the catalog objects does not point to any element. In the Catalog browser dialog box. Open the product to which you want to instantiate a part. is also displayed if no preview can be Instantiate Components This task explains how to instantiate parts. . An error icon found. PowerCopy and details. products. 3. select the part to instantiate. Drag the part onto the product in the specification tree then drop it when the pointer shape changes. 2. Instantiate Parts and Products 1. its description appears in red and the word "Broken" is added at the end between brackets.

The new CATPart is instantiated and displayed in the specification tree. This method can also be applied to instantiate a part from a part family as shown below: .

. and presenting the ability to be completely redefined when pasted. Refer to Instantiating Relations from a Catalog in the CATIA Version 5 Knowledge Advisor documentation. For more information. rules and checks can be stored in a catalog. a Check or Rules Formulas. This PowerCopy captures the design intent and know-how of the designer thus enabling greater reusability and efficiency. refer to the Instantiating Power Copies task from the CATIA Version 5 Generative Shape Design User`s Guide or the PowerCopy section from the CATIA Version 5 Part Design User`s Guide. formulas.Instantiate a PowerCopy A PowerCopy is a set of features (geometric elements. Instantiate a Formula. They can then be reused in a document by using an instantiation mechanism. constraints and so forth) that are grouped in order to be used in a different context.

refer to the corresponding workbench documentation. Click the place where you want to position the detail. 2. 4. In the Catalog browser dialog box. For more information on the other uses. select the Mechanical Design->Drafting workbench from the Start menu. Open your .CATDrawing document or. . refer to the Reuse a 2D Component task from the CATIA Version 5 Interactive Drafting User`s Guide. Double-click the detail.Instantiate a Draw Detail 1. The detail is instantiated. if you want to use an empty document. For more information on detail instantiation in the Drafting workbench. 3. select the detail you want to instantiate.

catalog open. Double-click on a family name or icon. SCREWS for example. The entities contained in the selected family appear in the form of a table on the right-hand side of the navigator: For any description contained in the selected family the query functionality evaluates the logical expression you enter and then displays the entities complying with the criteria you used. If a chapter contains a large number of entities one of the most effective ways of finding the entities you need is to narrow the selection criteria by means of the keywords you initially used to create the catalog. Have the ALL_FASTENERS.Making a Query In a Catalog This task explains how to make a standard or smart query in a catalog. . Making a Standard Query 1.

TYPE=="FHC" (for the comparison of character strings) The result is as follows: .DIAMETER==4mm (for numerical values) The result is as follows: or enter: x.In the expression." must precede each chapter keyword name. Here are some examples to be entered in the Filter: field below the Standard tab in the top-right of the navigator window. "x. Let's take a simple expression first. Enter: x. 2.

DIAMETER >=x.LENGTH (for the comparison of values between different keywords) The result is as follows: .or x.

Now let's take an example showing simple expressions connected by logical operators. Here are some examples showing more complex expressions: 4. Enter: (x. Enter an expression comprising arithmetic operators such as: (x.TYPE=="FHC") (for the comparison of numerical values and character strings) The result is as follows: For more information about this type of expression see the list of logical operators in "Constants.DIAMETER<=4)AND(x.Knowledge Advisor Programming Guide.LENGTH)>=10mm The result is as follows: . Units and Operators" in the CATIA .For more information about this type of expression see the list of comparison operators in "Constants. 3.Knowledge Advisor Programming Guide.DIAMETER + x. Units and Operators" in the CATIA .

Knowledge Advisor Programming Guide. see the list of arithmetical operators in "Mathematical Functions" in the CATIA . Enter an expression comprising arithmetic operators such as: min (x.Search ("FHC")>=0mm The result is as follows: . Enter an expression comprising arithmetic operators such as: x.For more information about this type of expression see the list of arithmetic operators in "Constants. Units and Operators" in the CATIA .Knowledge Advisor Programming Guide.DIAMETER.LENGTH)>=6mm This particular formula is not applicable to our example but if you want to get more information about this type of expression. x.DESIGNATION. 5. 6.

Assembly Design User's Guide).Knowledge Advisor Programming Guide. 7. . If a keyword includes characters other than upper or lowercase alphabet characters and numbers from 0 through 9 the name must begin and end with double quotes. When you have identified the entity you require you can: either edit it by selecting the line where it appears and clicking the Open button or copy it into an appropriate document (see "Inserting CATPart or CATProduct Documents from a Catalog" in the CATIA . If at any time you wish to redisplay the whole list of entities just click on the Reset button.For more information about this type of expression see the list of arithmetical operators in "String Functions" in the CATIA . 8.

Click the search icon . Double-click the SCREWS catalog.Making a Smart Query 1. Click the Display with browser icon to open the Catalog Browser: 2. The Filter dialog box opens: . 3.

Under the Basic tab. select the following values: .The Filter dialog box facilitates the query creation since you just have to choose your operator from the displayed pulldown lists then enter the corresponding values as shown below in our example: 4.

the query syntax is displayed in the Filter field of the Catalog Browser and the search result is as follows: 6. Click the Close button to exit the Catalog Browser.This query will search for any component which Designation and Type contain the value "F" and with a Diameter greater than 2mm and a Length lower than 10mm. Click Apply then OK. As you can see. . 5.

.

.Using Knowledgeware Capabilities Parameters Formulas Design Tables The Knowledgeware Language Working Through the Knowledgeware Capabilities Note that knowledgeware capabilities are not available when using the ENOVIA DMU Navigator.

Lines. as Parameters Refer to About Parameters for information on parameters. .. Refer to the Quick Reference of Tasks for information on simple interactions to be carried out on parameters..Parameters Creating a Parameter Specifying a Parameter Value as a Measure Specifying the Material Parameter Importing Parameters Creating Points.

The new parameter appears in 'Edit name or value of the current parameter'. ..CATProduct document by using the Properties command from the contextual menu. Click the icon. You just have to click the 'Define other properties. 1. See the Product Structure User's Guide for more information. The "Formulas" dialog box is displayed. The properties you define that way are also displayed in the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box. You can add properties to a . Select the Time item with 'Single Value' in the 'New Parameter of type' list. The dialog is similar to the f(x) dialog.CATPart document. Then click Apply.. then click 'New Parameter of type'.Creating a Parameter This task explains how you have to proceed to create a Time type parameter and assign a value to it. Replace the Time.1 name with Machining_Time and assign the 1000s value to this parameter. Open the KwrStartDocument. Click OK to terminate the dialog. The dialog box is modified as follows: 5.' button in the Product tab then click 'New parameter of type'. 3. 2. The Machining_Time parameter is added to the specification tree. 4.CATPart or a .

.

The value which is assigned to the parameter is deduced from the selection of two coplanar circular edges. 3. The new parameter appears in 'Edit name or value of the current parameter'. In the example below.1 name with Thickness. then click 'New Parameter of type'. The "Formulas" dialog box is displayed. then right-click in the value field of 'Edit name or value of the current parameter'. Select the Length item with 'Single Value' in the 'New Parameter of type' list. Replace the Length. In Tools->Options->General->Parameters. Click the icon. the 'Load extended language libraries' box of the Knowledge tab must be activated 2.Specifying a Parameter Value as a Measure A common way to assign a value to a parameter is to use the 'Edit name or value of the current parameter' field of the "Formulas" dialog box. The value you assign to a parameter can be deduced from a graphic selection. Open the KwrStartDocument. . a Thickness parameter of Length type is created. 5. 1.CATPart document. But there is another way to proceed. 4.

The "Measure Between" dialog box is displayed. Select the Measure. the inner circular edge is displayed in green. With the default settings of the Tools->Options->Visualization tab. 7. With the default settings of the Tools->Options->Visualization tab. In the document geometry area..6. Select 'Between' as Measure type.. the outer circular edge is displayed in black . command from the contextual menu. 'Edge only' as Reference mode and 'Edge only' as Target mode. then the outer circular edge located on the same face. select successively one of the inner circular edge of the part.

. The 17.5 mm value is displayed both in the "Formulas" dialog box and in the specification tree.5 mm value is displayed in the "Measure Between" dialog box. Click OK to terminate the dialog. 10.. Click 'Yes'.The 17. command can be accessed from the contextual menu of any editor. . A dialog box asks you whether you want to copy the measure result in the document. Click 'Close' in the "Measure Between" dialog box. 9. 8. The Measure.

You need to specify a material to set the values of the Mechanical_Property features. 3. By default. The Material parameter is displayed by default in the specification tree. Click OK in the "Formulas" dialog box. Double-click the Material feature in the specification tree to edit the parameter. then click OK in the "Edit Parameter" dialog box. 4. Click Apply. Select the Metal->Iron material. 5. The dialog box below is displayed. its value is set to None. b. Open the KwrStartDocument. The Mechanical_Property features are calculated from the Material value. Its value is set to None. Click the icon in the standard toolbar to display the available material library.CATPart document.Specifying the Material Parameter Value Whatever your document. 2. Select the part root feature then click to display the Mechanical_Property parameter values. Select the root feature in the specification tree. . the Material parameter is always displayed in the specification tree. 1. .

7. This is what you have to do to display the updated Volume. . you must have check the Tools->Options->General->Knowledge->Parameters->With Value . The dialog box below is displayed. Mass and WetArea properties after you have assigned a value to the Material parameter. b.This is what you should see now in the specification tree. Click OK in the "Edit Parameter" . "Formulas" and "Material Library" dialog boxes. Double-click the Material feature in the specification tree to edit the parameter. Reminder: To display parameter value. Click to display the Mechanical_Property parameter values (no changes). The Iron feature is added to the specification tree and the value of the Material parameter is modified. the Mechanical_Property parameters are automatically updated when the Properties option is selected in the contextual menu. 6. Valuating the Mechanical Property Parameters Once the Material value has been specified. Keep your document open and go to next task.

Select the root item in the specification tree and open the Properties dialog box from the contextual menu. . Click the icon to check that in the parameter list. The document mechanical properties have been updated from the value assigned to the Material parameter. 4. Click OK to terminate the dialog.1. 3. Select the Mass tab. 2. 5. Click OK to go back to your document. the mechanical property values are updated.

.". In a tabulated text file. If no formula is specified.txt file. A file selection dialog box is displayed. Multiple values are allowed.. The list of parameters to be imported into the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. 5. Click OK to import all the parameters from the input file to the KwrStartDocument..xls file(Windows NT only) or the TxCompanyFile0.CATPart document.CATPart document is displayed. just press the Tab key twice from column 2 to leave column 3 empty. 1. Then click Open. Select either the ExCompanyFile0. Open the KwrStartDocument. Click Import. The "Formulas" dialog box is displayed.. Here are the formatting rules the external file should comply with: Column 1 Parameter names Column 2 Parameter values. Use the Tab key to skip from one column to the other in a tabulated text file. Column 3 Formula. The imported parameters are now displayed in the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box and in the specification tree. the third column should be left empty.Importing Parameters Parameters and parameter values can be imported from a text file or from an Excel file (Windows™ NT). Click the icon. Values should then be separated by a ". 4. The imported value is the one delimited by the "<" and ">" tags. 3. 2. Column 4 Optional comment.

6. Click OK to terminate the dialog. .

Creating Points, Lines... as Parameters
To create elements such as Points, Lines, Curves, Surfaces, Planes or Circles and use them in knowledgeware relations, you can: either create these elements as 'Isolate' elements in the Generative Shape Design workbench. 'Isolate' elements also called Datum are elements that have no links to the other entities that were used to create them. For information on 'Datum' type elements, see the Generative Shape Design User's Guide. or create these elements by using f(x) capabilities and select the right type of element in the 'New parameter of type' list. The scenario below explains how to determine the position of the inertia axis of a pad. To do this, you must start from a pad, then: 1. create a line by using either method ('datum' or ) 2. use the inertiaAxis line constructor to specify that this line is to be the inertia axis of the pad. 3. retrieve the coordinate of the point which is located at the intersection of the inertia axis and the pad extrusion plane. 1. Access the Part Design workbench, create any sketch in the yz plane then extrude this sketch to create a pad. If need be, refer to the Part Design User's Guide. 2. Create a line intended to be used as an inertia axis afterwards. To do so, you can: 1. either click the "Formulas" icon , select the Line item in 'New Parameter of type', then click 'New Parameter of type'. 2. or access the Generative Shape Design workbench, then: 1. create two points by specifying their coordinates. 2. click the icon.

Then create a 'datum' line passing through the two points. After the line has been created, it is displayed in the specification tree as a datum. If need be, see the Generative Shape Design User's Guide.

3. Click the "Formulas" icon. In the parameter list, select the line you have just created (Open_body.1\Line.1). 4. Click 'Add Formula' and add the formula below in the editor:
Open_body.1\Line.1 = inertiaAxis(3,PartBody)

The inertiaAxis function is accessible through the Line constructors. The axis number 3 is the one which is in the extrusion direction (normal to yz). Click OK in the "Formulas" dialog box. The inertia axis is displayed in the geometry area. 5. Back to . Create three length type parameters: X, Y and Z.

6. Retrieve the coordinates of the point located at the intersection of the inertia axis and the 'yz plane'. To do so, create the formulas below:
X=intersect(Open_body.1\Line.1, 'yz plane').coord(1) Y=intersect(Open_body.1\Line.1, 'yz plane').coord(2) Z=intersect(Open_body.1\Line.1, 'yz plane').coord(3)

You get the intersect function from the Wireframe constructors and the point.coord method from the Measures item of the dictionary. 7. Check the value displayed in the specification tree as well as in the "Formulas" dialog box. The KwoGettingStarted.CATPart document which is used as a sample for the Product Engineering Optimizer User's Guide illustrates this scenario.

About Parameters
When you create a part like the hollow cylinder of our "Getting Started" example, you often start by creating a sketch, then you create a pad by extruding the initial sketch, then you add other features to the pad created. The final document is made up of features which define the intrinsic properties of the document. Removing one of these features results in a modification of the document. These features are called parameters. Parameters play a prominent role in knowledgeware applications. They are features that can be constrained by relations and they can also be used as the arguments of a relation. In addition to these parameters, CATIA allows you to create user parameters. These user parameters are extra pieces of information added to a document. User parameters are very handy in knowledgeware applications: they can be used to add specific information to a document they can be defined or constrained by relations they can be used as the arguments of a relation. A given relation may take as its arguments both types of parameters (intrinsic and user).

Displaying Parameters in the Specification Tree
The user parameters are displayed in the specification tree provided you check the 'Parameters' box below the 'Specification tree' settings in the Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Part Design dialog box. The user parameter list contains at least the Material parameter. The initial value of the Material parameter is set to None. In addition, parameters can be displayed with their values provided you check the 'With Value' box below the Parameter Tree View settings in the Tools->Options->General->Parameters dialog box

Copy/Pasting Parameters
The Tools->Options->General->Parameters check boxes allow you to: paste a parameter without the formula which defines it. For example: Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = 15 (if the With Value box is checked)

paste a parameter as well as the formula which defines it, but only if the parameters referred to in the formula are also selected in the copy. For example: Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = 15 if the Diameter parameter does not belong to the items selected for the copy but HolePlus will be pasted as Real.i = 15 = Real.j + 10 if Diameter is selected in the copy (use multi-selection). paste a parameter as well as the formula. Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = Diameter + 10

Parameters and National Support Languages
CATIA users working with non-latin characters should check the Tools->Options>Knowledge->Parameter Names->Surrounded by ' option. Otherwise, parameter names should have to be renamed in latin characters when used in formulas.

Quick Reference of Tasks
Parameters
Create a parameter Scenario Select a type in the "New Parameter of type" list, then click "New Parameter of type". The new parameter is added to the parameter list. A default name is given to the parameter. Edit / modify a parameter Select the parameter to be edited in the "Formulas" dialog box, then modify its value in the "Edit name or value of the current parameter" field . or or In the specification tree, double-click the parameter to be edited, then modify its value in the "Edit Parameter" editor. In the specification tree, right-click the parameter to be edited, then select the 'Parameter object->Definition...' function from the contextual menu.

Specify a parameter value as a measure Scenario 1. In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in "Edit name or value of the current parameter", then select 'Measure...' from the contextual menu. 2. In the geometry area, select successively the features determining the measure. Add a comment In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in "Edit name or value of the current parameter", then select 'Edit Comment...' from the contextual menu. or Edit the parameter, then in the edition box, right-click the value field(s) and select 'Edit Comment...' from the contextual menu.

Hide a parameter from the specification tree

In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in "Edit name or value of the current parameter", then select 'Hide' from the contextual menu. or Edit the parameter, then in the edition box, right-click the value field(s) and select 'Hide' from the contextual menu.

Specify a tolerance (Length or Angle parameter only) The default tolerance specified in “Tools->Options->Tolerance” can be redefined. In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in 'Edit name or value of the current parameter', then select 'Add Tolerance…' from the contextual menu. or Edit the parameter, then in the edition box, right-click the value field(s) and select 'Add Tolerance...' from the contextual menu.

Specify lower and upper bounds In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in "Edit name or value of the current parameter", then select 'Add Range' from the contextual menu. or Edit the parameter, then in the edition box, right-click the value field(s) and select 'Add Range...' from the contextual menu.

Specify an increment/decrement amount In the "Formulas" dialog box, right-click the value field in "Edit name or value of the current parameter", then select 'Change Step' from the contextual menu. or Edit the parameter, then in the edition box, right-click the value field(s) and select 'Change Step...' from the contextual menu.

Specify the Material parameter value Scenario Select the part you want to apply the material to, then click icon. Select one of the material in the library which the is displayed.

or or

Edit the material parameter from the specification tree, then enter the material value in the dialog box. In the "Formulas" dialog box, select the Material parameter in the parameter list, then modify its value in the "Edit name or value of the current parameter" field.

Update the Mechanical_Property parameters or or or Select the document root item, then select the Properties->Mass option from the feature contextual menu. Click OK.

Import parameters Scenario In the "Formulas" dialog box, click 'Import...'. A file selection dialog box is displayed. Select either a .xls file (Windows NT only) or a .txt file. Delete a parameter In the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter to be deleted, then click 'Delete Parameter'. The Material parameter cannot be deleted. or In the specification tree, right-click the parameter to be deleted, then select the Delete function from the contextual menu. The Material parameter cannot be deleted.

Formulas
Create a formula Scenario In the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter to be constrained, then click 'Add Formula'. Enter the formula in the "Formula Editor". or or In the "Formulas" dialog box, double-click the parameter to be constrained and enter the formula in the "Formula Editor". When editing a parameter, right-click the value field(s), then select Edit formula... from the contextual menu.

Edit / modify a formula

In the specification tree, right-click the formula to be edited, then select the Formula object->Definition function from the contextual menu. or or In the specification tree, double-click the formula to be edited. In the specification tree, double-click the user parameter, then click the f(x) button in the "Edit Parameter" dialog box. When editing a parameter, right-click the value field(s), then select Formula->Edit from the contextual menu.

or

Specify a measure in a formula Scenario or or or 1. Edit the parameter, right-click the value field in the parameter edition box, then select the 'Edit formula..." command from the contextual menu. 2. In the formula editor, click the Wizard button, select the Measures item in the dictionary then select one of the measure functions displayed in the wizard. 3. Fulfill the function prototype and allow for the required number of arguments. To enter an argument value, position the cursor where the argument is intended to be and capture the feature definition from the specification tree or from the geometry area. Activate / deactivate a formula In the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box, select the formula/activity parameter and modify its value in "Edit name or value of the current parameter". or In the specification tree, right-click the formula whose activity is to be modified, then select the Formula object->(De)Activate function from the contextual menu. When editing a parameter constrained by a formula, right-click the value field(s), then select the Formula->(De)Activate function from the contextual menu.

or

Import parameters and formulas

In the "Formulas" dialog box, click 'Import', then specify the import file path. The import file should be either a .txt file or a .xls file. Delete a formula In the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box, select the parameter which is constrained by the formula to be deleted, then click 'Delete Formula'. or In the specification tree, right-click the formula to be deleted, then select the Delete function from the contextual menu. When editing a parameter constrained by a formula, right-click the value field(s), then select the Formula->Delete function from the contextual menu.

or

Design Tables
Create a design table from the document parameter values Scenario Check the option "Create a design table with current parameter values". Select the parameters to insert, then specify the .xls (Windows™) or .txt file where the design table is to be created. Create a design table from a pre-existing file Scenario Check the option "Create a design table from a pre-existing file". Specify the file containing the design table data, then create the necessary associations. Edit a design table In the specification tree, double-click the design table to be edited. The CATIA design table is displayed. The active configuration is highlighted. or In the specification tree, right-click the design table to be edited, then select the DesignTable.object->Edition function from the contextual menu.

Delete a design table

or

o orr

orr In the specification tree, right-click the design table to be deleted, then select the Delete function from the contextual menu.

Access the design table values (see the Programming Guide) or CellAsReal Returns the contents of a cell located in a column intended for real values. CellAsBoolean Returns the contents of a cell located in a column intended for boolean values. CellAsString Returns the contents of a cell located in a column. CloserInfConfig Returns the configuration which contains the largest values less or equal to the values of the given arguments. CloserSupConfig Returns the configuration which contains the smallest values grreater or equal to the values of the given arguments. CloserValueInfInColumn Scans the values of a column and returns the smallest cell value which is the nearest to a specified one. CloserValueSupInColumn Scans the values of a column and returns the greatest cell value which is the nearest to a specified one. LocateInColumn Returns the index of the first row which contains a specified value. MaxInColumn Returns the greatest of a column values. MinInColumn Returns the smallest of a column values.

Formulas
Creating a Formula Specifying a Measure in a Formula Referring to External Parameters in a Formula Refer to About Formulas for information on formulas. Refer to the Quick Reference of Tasks for information on simple interactions to be carried out on parameters.

Creating a Formula
This task explains how to create a formula specifying that the external radius of a hollow cylinder is twice its internal diameter. Note that the radius of a sketch can be defined by a formula provided it is declared as a constraint. For a comprehensive information on how to write formulas, refer to the The Knowledgeware Language. 1. Make sure the Relations option is active in the Tools -> Options -> Part -> Display tab. 2. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. 3. Click the icon to display the "Formulas" dialog box. The Incremental box must be unchecked. Method 1 1. Double-click the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius parameter in the parameter list. The "Formula Editor" is displayed.

2. Enter the 2 * PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter relation in the formula field. Go to Tips for information on how to manipulate parameters and formulas. 3. Click OK in the "Formula Editor". Method 2 1. Select the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.1\Radius in the parameter list.

2. Click 'Add Formula'. The "Formula Editor" is displayed. 3. Enter the 2 * PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter relation in the formula field. Go to Tips for information on how to manipulate parameters and formulas. 4. Click OK in the "Formula Editor". 4. Click Apply to update the document. 5. Click OK to terminate the dialog.

Specifying a Measure in a Formula
Measures, i.e. values captured from the geometry area can be used in formulas. Here are some examples of measures can be used in formulas: distance between two points. total length of a curve. length of a curve segment - between a point and the origin or between a point and the curve extremity. length of a curve segment - between two points. area of an extruded surface. The purpose of this task is to explain how to specify that the value of a Length type parameter is equal to the curvilign abcissa of a point located on a curve. 1. Check the "Load extended language libraries' box in the Tools->Options->General-Knowledge tab. 2. Open the KwrMeasure.CATPart document. The whole document has been created with the Generative Shape Design product. The Extrude.1 and Extrude.2 surfaces are extruded from the Spline.1 and Spline.2 curves. The point whose abscissa is to be measured is Point.5. The origin of the curve where Point.5 is located on is Point.8

3. Click the Formula icon. The "Formulas" dialog box is displayed. 4. Create the CurveLengthFromOrigin parameter. . Select the Length item with 'Single Value' in the 'New Parameter of type' list, then click 'New Parameter of type'. The new parameter appears in 'Edit

name or value of the current parameter'. b. Replace the Length.1 name with CurveLengthFromOrigin. Click Apply. 5. Specify that the value of CurveLengthFromOrigin is the abscissa of Point.5: . Select the CurveLengthFromOrigin parameter in the parameter list, then click 'Add Formula'. The Formula editor is displayed. Check the 'Select Feature' box. b. Click the Wizard button then select the Measures item from the Dictionary list. c. In the list of measures, select the length(Curve,Point,Boolean) item. The length function is added to the Formula Editor.

d. Fill in the Formula editor field as indicated below. 1. Insert parentheses and allow for three arguments within the parentheses. The three arguments are: a curve to be selected from the geometry area, a point to be selected from the geometry area and a boolean.

2. Position the cursor where the first argument is intended to be typed. Then select the Spline.2 feature in the specification tree. The curve argument is added to the length definition. 3. Position the cursor where the second argument is intended to be typed. Then select the Point.5 feature in the specification tree. The point argument is added to the length definition. 4. Type a boolean for the third argument: True if the length is to be calculated from the origin, False if the length is to be calculated from the curve end.

5. Click OK to confirm the formula definition. You are back to the Formulas dialog box. The CurveLengthFromOrigin formula and value(47.5mm) are added to the parameter list. e. Click OK to add the parameter as well as its formula to the document.

Referring to External Parameters in a Formula
In a formula, you can use parameters defined in external documents. This works between any types of document. For example, in a CATPart document, you can specify a formula referring to parameters defined in a CATDrafting document. External parameters can also be used when working within an assembly. 1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document as well as the KwrImportParameter.CATPart document. Select the Window->Tile Vertically command from the standard menu bar. Both documents are displayed onscreen. 2. Make active the KwrImportParameter document. Click the icon to display the "Formulas" dialog box. 3. Select the Sketch.1\Radius.1\Radius parameter, then click 'Add Formula'. The formula editor is displayed. 4. In the KwrStartDocument specification tree, select the Hole.1 feature. The "External parameter selection" dialog box is displayed. 5. In the "External parameter selection" dialog box, select the Diameter object in the external parameter list. Then click OK. The Length.1 definition is carried forward to the formula editor. Complete the formula definition as on the figure below:

6. Click OK in the formula editor. You are back to the "Formulas"

dialog box. In the parameter list, the Sketch.1\Radius.1\Radius parameter value is modified according to the formula specified. In the KwrImportParameter specification tree, the 'External Parameters' node is added. Expand this node to display the Length.1 parameter. 7. Click OK to add the formula to the KwrImportParameter.CATPart document and exit the dialog. 8. Select the Edit->Links command from the standard menu bar. The dialog box which is displayed confirms there is a link between the KwrImportParameter\Length.1 object and the KwrStartDocument\PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter object. 9. Click Isolate in the "Links" dialog box. Then click OK. In the KwrImportParameter.CATPart specification tree, the External Parameters node can no longer be expanded and the Length.2 parameter is added below the Parameters node. 10. Select the Edit->Links command from the standard menu bar. A message box informs you that the active document has no external links.

About Formulas
Formulas are features used to define or constrain a parameter. A formula is a relation: the left part of the relation is the parameter to be constrained, the right part is a statement. Once it has been created, a formula can be manipulated like any other feature from its contextual menu. The formula language uses operators and functions of all types whereby you can carry out operations on parameters.

Displaying Formulas in the Specification Tree
Formulas are relations and as such they can be displayed below the Relations node provided you check the 'Relations' box below the 'Specification tree' settings in the Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Part Design dialog box. In addition, formulas can also be displayed below the Parameters node provided you check: the 'Parameters' box below the 'Specification tree' settings in the Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Part Design dialog box as well as the 'With Formula' box below the Parameter Tree View settings in the Tools->Options->General->Parameters dialog box

The Activity Parameter
A formula is a feature which is assigned a parameter called the activity. The activity value is a boolean. If the activity is set to true, the parameter value cannot be calculated from the formula. If a formula is created for a parameter which is not already constrained by another formula, the activity of the new formula is set to true by default.

A parameter can be constrained by several formulas, but only one formula can be active at a time. Before activating a formula on a given parameter, you must deactivate the other formulas defined on the same parameter. Activity value Relation icon in the specification tree false true

Importing Formulas
Parameters as well as the associated formulas can be imported from an external file. Refer to About Parameters and Importing Parameters for more information on how to import formulas.

.Design Tables Creating a DT from Current Values Creating a DT from a Pre-Existing File Refer to About Design Tables for information on design tables. Refer to the Quick Reference of Tasks for information on simple interactions to be carried out on parameters.

The scenario which is described below explains how to proceed in the first case. 2. c. . edit the CATIA design table generated. In the 'Parameters to insert' list. If need be replace the default name and comment for the design table. 3. select the parameters to add to the design table. select the PartBody\Pad. Click the Design Table icon in the standard toolbar.CATPart document. There are two ways to create a design table: either from the current parameter values or from a pre-existing file. b. create a table from the document parameters. The "Creation of a Design Table" dialog box is displayed. The 'Select parameters to insert' dialog box is displayed. 4.1\FirstLimit\Length then click Add. d. 1. 5. apply the design table to your document. No matter the existence of external data. Open the KwrStartDocument. For information on how to use the different dialog boxes related to the design table. Click OK. Check the 'Create a design table with current parameter values' option. See The Design Table Dialog for further information. specify a file to contain the design table generated. e. The design table creation process includes the following steps: . 6. go to The Design Table Dialog.Creating a Design Table from the Current Parameter Values A design table is a feature that you create either from your document parameters or from external data. you must create the design table in CATIA.

Click OK.txt file and close your application. the document is updated as well as the CATIA design table. Click Edit table. 12. Both items are displayed in the 'Inserted parameters' list.1\FirstLimit\Length parameter value with 80mm. Replace the PartBody\Pad. 10. This design table contains only one configuration. Click OK in the file selection dialog box. 7. Uncheck the 'Activity' option if you want to deactivate a design table and reuse its parameters in another design table.Repeat the same operation with the PartBody\Pad. Click Apply into the CATIA design table dialog. to start an Excel application (under Windows NT) or open the text editor under Unix.e.. you will have to select the parameters to add to your second design table among a restricted parameter list. i. 11. A file selection box is displayed. . Otherwise click OK. Specify the pathname of the design table to be created. from parameters which are neither referred to in an active design table nor used in any other active relation. The design table feature is added to the specification tree and a dialog box displays the newly created design table. 8.. 9.1\SecondLimit\Length item. A design table can only be created from non-constrained parameters. If you keep the 'Activity' option checked for DesignTable0 and try to create another design table. Click Cancel if you want to undo your last interaction. By default it is active. Save your Excel or .

2. 5. The scenario below describes how to proceed in the second case. The '<' and '>' symbols denote the current configuration. You can choose to create these associations automatically. select a configuration in the generated design table. edit the CATIA design table generated. Click Yes. e. select the pre-existing file containing the raw data. you must create the design table in CATIA.xls file. The Material parameter is the only one which is common to the document parameters and to the external design table. No matter the existence of external data. 1. d.CATPart document. Open the KwrStartDocument. Click Open. For information on how to use the different dialog boxes related to the design table. Here are the main steps to follow: . Select the KwrBallBearing.Creating a Design Table from a Pre-existing File A design table is a feature that you create either from your document parameters or from external data. . Design Table icon in the standard toolbar. create the associations between the document parameters and the external table columns. b. 3. Check the 'Create a design table from a pre-existing file' option. go to The Design Table Dialog. You can modify the default configuration proposed by CATIA. There are two ways to create a design table: either from the current parameter values or from a pre-existing file. Enter a name (DesignTable1 for example) and a comment. c. A multi-row design table is created. A dialog box asks you whether you want to perform automatic associations between the design table columns and the document parameters which have the same name. Click OK. 4. apply the design table feature to your document. Click the The "Creation of a Design Table" dialog box is displayed.

Click Apply. 6. Click Open. Click the The "Creation of a Design Table" dialog box is displayed. Enter a name (DesignTable2 for example) and a comment. The scenario below illustrates how to create a design table by associating one by one the document parameters with the input file columns. In the 'Parameters' list. Select the KwrBallBearing. select the d parameter. In the 'Columns' list. . Now. you have to associate one by one the document parameters with the design table columns. 8. A parameter couple is now displayed in the 'Associations between parameters and columns' list. 7. Selecting a parameter or an association in the list highlights the corresponding values in the geometry area. 3. 2. Then click Associate. Click OK. 5. Repeat the same operation for the Material parameter.xls file.CATPart document. The table design dialog box now displays side by side the document parameter list and the input file columns.1\Diameter item. 4. The "Automatic associations ?" dialog box is displayed. Check the 'Create a design table from a pre-existing file' option. 7.6. Click OK to end the design table creation. select the PartBody\Hole. The Iron parameter value is displayed in the specification tree. The design table dialog box informs you that there is no associations between parameters and columns. Select the configuration you want to apply to the document (line 5 for example). Design Table icon in the standard toolbar. Click the 'Associations' option. A file selection panel is displayed. 1. Click No. Open the KwrStartDocument.

The parameter list displays only the parameters of the selected features (and children).' button allows you to create automatically parameters and associations for items of the 'Columns' list. . For example. The 'Create parameters. the parameters which are declared in it are constrained parameters and you are not allowed to modify them.The parameter list can be filtered: either by clicking on a feature (either in the specification tree or in the geometry area). As long as a design table is active. Double-clicking a design table in the specification tree displays the design table with its set of configurations and allows you to select a new configuration. Click OK to end the DesignTable2 creation dialog. All the parameter values of the selected feature (and children) are highlighted in the geometry area.. The DesignTable2 feature is added as a relation to the specification tree. 9. You can select another configuration and apply it to your document. the configuration <1> is applied to the document. The 'Rename associated parameters' button replaces the parameter name with the column name. By default. by specifying a string in the 'Filter Name' field. A new material (Aluminum) is applied to the document and the hole diameter is modified. Double-click DesignTable2 in the specification to edit the table. typing *ength* displays all Length parameters by specifying a type in the 'Filter Type' field..

By creating associations. the document data is then exported to the design table. If no unit is mentioned within a cell: the unit taken into account is the one mentioned in the first row and if no unit is specified in the first row. the unit taken into account is the relevant SI unit. To simplify. Otherwise. imagine they all described by four parameters: the head width. Here is an example of an Excel sheet: When a configuration which contains empty cells is selected. a set of parameter values is called a configuration and it is registered in a row. You are provided with functions to read the design table parameters. the document data is then imported from the design table. This design table has as many columns as screw parameters and as many rows as sets of parameter values. column name column unit . When using a design table the trick is to associate the right document parameters with the right table parameters. Screws are a good example of mechanical parts that can be described by a design table. In a design table. These components can be for example mechanical parts just differing in their parameter values. the parameters associated with the empty cells are not modified. The Excel Sheet Format (on Windows) The values mentioned in the sheet cells have to be expressed in appropriate units. the right values won't be associated with the document parameters. The design table columns may not all correspond to your document parameters and you may decide to apply only part of the design table values to your document. The sets of four parameter values that can be assigned to a screw can be easily regrouped in a design table. A design table can be created from a CATIA document. It can also be applied to a document. A design table is a tool mainly intended to ease the definition of mechanical parts. But you will make the best use of it in a Knowledge Advisor application. the head height. Using these functions spares you all the association operations. These design table functions can be used when programming your checks and rules. It is provided to all CATIA users. This property enables you to modify parameters but only under certain conditions. the body width and the body height. Only Excel sheets created with Excel 97 and subsequent versions are supported. These values are stored in the form of a table either in a Microsoft ® Excel file on Windows™ or in a tabulated text file. you declare what document parameters you want to link with what table columns. The purpose of the design table is to drive the parameters of a CATIA document from external values.About Design Tables A design table provides you with a means to create and manage component families. The design table becomes a more powerful tool when it is used with the Knowledge Advisor.

Within a given column. Unit rules are the same as for the Excel sheets. Units can be specified in cells. you can change the units. Use the Tab key to skip from one column to the other. You can use your favorite text editor to create this design table. . No unit = SI The Tabulated Text File Format Here is an example of a tabulated file format.

. the design table looks something like this: No units in column Check box to modify the activity Displays the design table raw data. Check this box whenever you intend to re-access your design table on another platform. Values with units Duplicates the design table external data into the CATIA document.The CATIA Design Table Once it has been read and processed by CATIA.

The Knowledgeware Language Writing Formulas Design Table Functions .

The formula syntax is easy to use and learn. Here are some details about the objects provided in the dictionary.Writing Formulas A formula is a one-line statement that you can write either by typing directly the appropriate syntax in the editor field or by selecting items from the editor dictionary list. Constants. Units and Operators Mathematical and Trigonometric Functions String Functions Measures Constructors .

Pay attention to unit consistency when writing a formula. Arithmetic operators + * / () = ** Addition operator (also concatenates strings) Subtraction operator Multiplication operator Division operator Parentheses (used to group operands in expressions) Assignment operator Exponentiation operator Units 1. Units are written with an underscore instead of the usual "/" (example N_m2 . don't omit to specify a value with its unit in column 2. 2. When importing formulas. Operators and Units Constants The following constants are specified or recognized by CATIA when programming formulas. As a result.718282).Constants. false true PI E one of the two values that a parameter of type Boolean can have one of the two values that a parameter of type Boolean can have The ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter The base of natural logarithm (2. 3. they can be used anywhere in a formula in place of the actual values.

.instead N/m2).

ln(Real):Real Returns the natural logarithm. . max sqrt log ln round exp cos. ceil(Real): Real Returns the smallest integer value that is greater than or equal to the value specified in the argument.Real):Real Returns the minimum or maximum of a set of values specified in the argument. cosh cos(Real): Real Calculates the cosine(cos) or hyperbolic cosine(cosh). ceil floor int let min. floor(Real):Real Returns the largest integer value that is less than or equal to the value specified in the argument. int(Real):Real Returns the integer value of a number. log(Real):Real Returns the logarithm.Mathematical and Trigonometric Functions abs abs(Real): Real Calculates the absolute value of a number. round(Real):Real Returns a rounded number. Assigns a value to a temporary variable ( let x = 30 mm ) min(Real. exp(Real):Real Returns the exponential. sqrt(Real):Real Returns the square root.

acos(Real):Real Calculates the arccosine or hyperbolic arccosine. sin(Real):Real Calculates the sine or hyperbolic sine. tanh tan(Real): Real Calculates the tangent(tan) or hyperbolic tangent (tanh). sinh asin. atan(Real):Real Calculates the arctangent or hyperbolic arctangent. asinh acos. asin(Real):Real Calculates the arcsine or hyperbolic arcsine. acosh atan. atanh . sin.tan.

string.Extract(Integer.String. string.Search(String) : Integer Searches for the first occurrence of a sub-string in a string type parameter. Length ReplaceSubText Search ToLower ToUpper ToString . Integer) : String Returns the sub-string starting at a given position with a specified length.String) :String Replaces a sub-string with another sub-string within a character string. ToString(Integer) : String Converts an integer into a string.String Functions Here are the functions you can use to manipulate strings in formulas. Extract string.Length() : Integer Returns the string length. ReplaceSubText(String. ToLower(String) : String Changes all upper-case letters of a string to lower-case. These functions can also be used in the rules and checks of the Knowledge Advisor product. ToUpper(String) : String Changes all lower-case letters of a string to upper-case.

2) FirstName. Length) The Extract function has two arguments: Arguments StarIndex Length Description Required. Name. Syntax string.FirstName.Extract(0.Length()) Extract = la = FirstName.Extract(2. and Extract are string parameters. .Extract Function Description Returns the substring starting at a given position with a specified length. Substring length Example FirstName = Cilas Name = Cilas = Responsible. Index of the substring first character Required.Extract(StartIndex.

Syntax string.Length() The Length function has no arguments Formula Example FirstName = Cilas Name = Cilas = Responsible.FirstName.Length Function Description Returns the string length.Extract(0.Length()) .

Substring replacing SubString1 Formula Example Responsible = Cilas EVANS NewResponsible = Eazy EVANS = ReplaceSubText(Responsible.ReplaceSubText Function Description Replaces a substring with another substring within a character string. Required.SubString1."Eazy") . Syntax ReplaceSubText(InputString.SubString2) The ReplaceSubText function has three arguments: Arguments InputString SubString1 SubString2 Description Required."Cilas". Substring to be replaced Required. Input string.

. I1Search = 6 = Responsible. Returns the index of the start of the substring. Returns -1 is the substring specified is not found.Search("Cilas") I3Search = -1 = Responsible. Syntax string..Search(String) The Search function has one argument: Arguments String Description Required.Search("CILAS") .Search("EVANS") I2Search = 0 = Responsible.Search Function Description Searches for the first occurence of a substring in a String type parameter. Example Responsible = Cilas Evans = . Name of the substring to be searched for (should be put in quotes) or name of the String parameter.

Name of the string to be converted to lower-case (should be put in quotes) or name of the String parameter. Syntax ToLower(String) The ToLower function has one argument: Argument String Description Required.ToLower Function Description Changes all upper-case letters of a string to lower-case. .

Syntax ToUpper(String) The ToUpper function has one argument. Name of the string to be converted to upper-case (should be put in quotes) or name of the String parameter.ToUpper Function Description Changes all lower-case letters of a string to upper-case. Argument String Description Required. Formula Example FamilyName = Evans FirstName = Cilas Responsible = Cilas EVANS = FirstName + " " + ToUpper(FamilyName) .

Integer to be converted into string. Syntax ToString(Integer) The ToString function has one argument: Argument Integer Description Required.ToString Function Description Converts an integer into a string. Formula Example RevNumber = 1 Revision = Rev: 1 = "Rev: " + ToString(RevNumber) .

Both points must have been created with the Generative Shape Design product.CATPart.CATPart. in the Knowledge tab of the Tools->Options->General-Parameters. smartVolume(PartBody) : Volume Returns the volume of a PartBody.Boolean): Length Returns the length of a curve segment located between Point1 and one of the curve ends.CATPart.CATPart length(GSMCurve. Measures can only be accessed from the dictionary if.CATPart. distance(Point1.Measures Measures are functions that compute a result from data captured from the geometry area. Example: see the DistanceBetweenTwoPoints parameter in KwrMeasuresSamples. Example: see the SmartVolume1 parameter in KwrMeasuresSamples. Point2) : Length Returns the distance between point1 and point2. smartWetArea(PartBody): Area Returns the wet area of a PartBody. .CATPart length(GSMCurve) :Length Returns the total length of a curve. Example: see the ExtrudedArea parameter in KwrMeasuresSamples. Note that CurveLengthPointToEnd + CurveLengthPointToTheOtherEnd = CurveLength area(Surface): Area Returns the area of a surface generate by the Generative Shape Design product (an extruded surface for example). the 'Load extended language libraries' box is checked. Point2) : Length Returns the length of a curve segment delimited by Point1 and Point2. Example: see the WetArea1 parameter in KwrMeasuresSamples.Point1.CATPart length(GSMCurve. Example: see the CurveLengthBetweenTwoPoints parameter in KwrMeasuresSamples. Example: see the CurveLength parameter in KwrMeasuresSamples. Point1. Example: see the CurveLengthPointToEnd and CurveLengthPointToTheOtherEnd parameters in KwrMeasuresSamples. Measures are application-related objects and they won't be displayed in the dictionary if you don't have the right product installed (Part Design or Generative Shape Design for example).

CATPart.area(Curve) : Area Returns the area delimited by a curve. volume(closedSurface) : Volume Returns the volume of a closed surface. Returns X if 1 is specified. Example: see the Point6X parameter in KwrMeasuresSamples. Example: see the CurveArea parameter in KwrMeasuresSamples. Line2) : Angle Returns the angle between the Line1 and Line2 lines. Y if 2 is specified. angle(C. Z if 3 is specified. angle(direction1. point.CATPart. Point2) : Angle Returns the angle between the lines "C-Point1" and "C-Point2".CATPart.direction2) : Angle Returns the angle between two directions. Example: See the Angle1 parameter in KwrMeasuresSamples. .coord(Integer): Length Returns the coordinate of a point. Point1. Example: See Calculating and Checking a Volume. angle(Line1.

1 Pt2 => Open_body.Pt3))) in which the Pt1. Click F(x) and create an angle type parameter (Angle.2 from their coordinates.2 and Point. 1.1\Point.3 from their coordinates 2. create two points Point.1\Point.Pt2)).1 and Point. An Example of a Direction Constructor 1. Point.1. Define the Angle.2. Click F(x) and create a length type parameter. Pt2 and Pt3 definitions are captured either from the . create three points Point.1 for example) 3. Define the LineLength parameter by the formula below: LineLength=length(line(Pt1.2 The length value is displayed in the specification tree as well as in the parameter list of the "Formulas" dialog box. In the Generative Shape Design product. A constructor does not really create a feature that you can see onscreen. 2.Constructors Constructors are functions that you can only use embodied as the arguments of other functions such as measures. An Example of a Line Constructor In the Generative Shape Design product. The line constructor is used as the argument of the length measure. The following types of constructors are provided with the Part Design or Generative Shape Design products: Line Direction Point Plane Circle Wireframe. It creates a virtual object you can apply another function to. No line has been created but the value of the length parameter is the length of the line that would join Point.Pt2) in which the Pt1 and Pt2 definitions are captured either from the specification tree or the geometry area Pt1 => Open_body.1 parameter by the formula below: angle(direction(line(Pt1.1 to Point.direction(line(Pt1. Name it LineLength.

3 The length value is displayed in the specification tree as well as in the "Formulas" dialog box.point(200mm. 2.3 The angle value is displayed in the specification tree as well as in the "Formulas" dialog box.0mm)) The resulting value is 45 deg.1-Point2 and Point.1 for example) 3.1\Point. 0 )) in which the Pt1. The fourth argument of the constructor allows you to specified the trimmed or the complementary arc. Pt3.1-Point. Define the Length. Click F(x) and create a length type parameter (Length. In the Generative Shape Design product. The line constructor is used as the argument of the direction constructor.100mm. An Example of a Point Constructor 1. Edit the formula and replace the fourth argument value with 1. No line has been created but the value of the angle type parameter is the angle between the two directions defined by the Point.1 Pt2 => Open_body.2 for example) 2.0mm. create three points Point.2 Pt3 => Open_body.0mm.point(100mm.1.3 lines.1\Point. The circle3Pts constructor is used as the argument of the length measure. The direction constructors are used as the arguments of the angle measure.1\Point. Click F(x) and create an angle type parameter (Angle. Pt2 and Pt3 definitions are captured either from the specification tree or the geometry area Pt1 => Open_body.1 Pt2 => Open_body.1\Point. Pt2.2 parameter by the formula below: angle(point(0mm. 4. .specification tree or the geometry area Pt1 => Open_body.0mm).1\Point. No circle has been created but the length of a virtual curve has been calculated.3 from their coordinates.1 parameter by the formula below: length(circle3Pts (Pt1.2 Pt3 => Open_body.0mm).1\Point. Define the Angle. An Example of a Circle Constructor 1.2 and Point. Point. The curve length is modified.

.

Returns the contents of a cell located in a column. Returns the configuration which contains the smallest values greater or equal to the values of the given arguments. Returns the contents of a cell located in a column intended for boolean values. Returns the greatest of a column values.Design Table Functions The functions below can be used in formulas as well as in the Knowledge Advisor rules and checks. Returns an empty string if the cell is empty or if the function parameters are not properly specified. Returns the index of the first row which contains a specified value.xls design table illustrate how to use the design table access functions. CellAsBoolean CellAsString CloserInfConfig CloserSupConfig CloserValueInfInColumn CloserValueSupInColumn LocateInColumn MaxInColumn MinInColumn You don't need to create associations interactively to use these functions.CATPart sample along with the KwrDesignTable0. Scans the values of a column and returns the greatest cell value which is the nearest to a specified one. . Scans the values of a column and returns the smallest cell value which is the nearest to a specified one. Returns the smallest of a column values. The KwrProgramDT. Values returned by functions must be declared as user parameters before being used in relations. Returns the configuration which contains the largest values less or equal to the values of the given arguments. CellAsReal Returns the contents of a cell located in a column intended for real values.

.

5) Message("Column 5 line 1 . Integer from 1 to n. Required. Integer from 1 to n.4) .CellAsReal Function Description Returns the contents of a cell located in a column intended for real values. Line or configuration number.2.1. Should be put in quotes. Syntax CellAsReal(DesignTableName. Number or index of the table column. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. Returns zero if the cell does not contain a real or if the function parameters are not properly specified (see remarks). Remarks The real which is returned by the function should be added to your document as a user parameter. CReal) CReal=CellAsReal("DesignTable1". RowNumber. Required.value read is # (0 is expected)". Name of the design table you want to read. The CellAsReal function returns a nil value: when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers. Example This is the input design table: /* Rule created by CRE 04/06/99 */ /* Explains how to use the CellAsReal function */ CReal=CellAsReal("DesignTable1". ColumnNumber) The CellAsReal function has three arguments: Arguments DesignTableName RowNumber ColumnNumber Description Required.

value read is # (0 is expected)".15 is expected)". CReal) /* the cell is empty */ CReal=CellAsReal("DesignTable1". CReal) CReal=CellAsReal("DesignTable1".value read is # (0.Message("Column 4 line 2 .5.3) Message("Column 3 line 2 . CReal) .5) Message("Value read in DesignTable999 is # (0 is expected)". CReal) CReal=CellAsReal("DesignTable999".value read is # (0.1) Message("Column 1 line 5 .04 is expected)".5.2.

Required.1. Syntax CellAsBoolean(DesignTableName. RowNumber. Boolean2) } Boolean2=CellAsBoolean("DesignTable1". Example See the design table of CellAsReal for input data. Integer from 1 to n.5) if (Boolean2 <> true) { Message("Error !!!") } else { Message("Column 5 line 1 . Number or index of the table column.CellAsBoolean Function Description Returns the contents of a cell located in a column intended for boolean values. The CellAsBoolean function returns a false value: when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.5) if (Boolean2 == true) { . Name of the design table you want to read. Returns false if the cell does not contain a boolean or if the function parameters are not properly specified (see remarks). Integer from 1 to n.4. ColumnNumber) The CellAsBoolean function has three arguments: Arguments DesignTableName RowNumber ColumnNumber Description Required. This name is the string which identifies the design table.value read is # (true is expected)". Line or configuration number. /* Rule created by CRE 04/06/99 */ /* Explains how to use the CellAsBoolean function */ Boolean2=CellAsBoolean("DesignTable1". Should be put in quotes. Required. Remarks The boolean which is returned by the function should be added to your document as a user parameter.

value read is # (false is expected)".Message("Error !!!") } else { Message("Column 5 line 4 .1. Boolean2) } Boolean2=CellAsBoolean("DesignTable1". Boolean2) } .value read is # (false is expected)".1) if (Boolean2 == true) { Message("Error !!!") } else { Message("Column 1 line 1 .

Number or index of the table column. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree.1. Required. Remarks The string which is returned by the function should be added to your document as a user parameter.CellAsString Function Description Returns the contents of a cell located in a column. ColumnNumber) The CellAsString function has three arguments: Arguments DesignTableName RowNumber ColumnNumber Description Required. Line or configuration number. Integer from 1 to n.5) if (CString == "") { Message("No value read !!!") } else { Message("Column 5 line 1 .value read is # } CString=CellAsString("DesignTable1". Syntax CellAsString(DesignTableName. Integer from 1 to n. Should be put in quotes. Returns an empty string if the cell is empty or if the function parameters are not properly specified (see remarks). CString) . Example See CellAsReal the for input design table. /* Rule created by CRE 04/06/99 */ /* Explains how to use the CellAsString function */ CString=CellAsString("DesignTable1". Name of the design table you want to read.6) if (CString == "") { Message("No value read") } else { (true expected)".1. RowNumber. The CellAsString function returns an empty string: when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers. Required.

CString) } CString=CellAsString("DesignTable1". CString) } CString=CellAsString("DesignTable1".3) if (CString == "") { Message("No value read") } else { Message("Column 3 line 2 . CString) } .2.Message("Column 6 line 1 .3.value read is # ".value read is # ".value read is # (None is expected)".value read is # (Italian Marble expected)".1) if (CString == "") { Message("No value read") } else { Message("Column 1 line 1 . CString) } CString=CellAsString("DesignTable1".1.6) if (CString == "") { Message("No value read !!!") } else { Message("Column 6 line 3 .

one couple RowName/Value is required Required. RowName2. You should specify the units. Example Given the design table below: SketchRadius(mm) 1 2 3 4 120 130 120 140 PadLim1(mm) 60 50 60 50 PadLim2(mm) 10 30 20 40 The statement below returns 3: CloserInfConfig("DT1". RowName1. "PadLim2". Should be put in quotes. Value1. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. 60mm. When several configurations meet this condition.CloserInfConfig Function Description Returns the configuration which contains the largest values less or equal to the values of the given arguments.. Number or index of the table column. Required. "PadLim1". . 2 and 3 are all less or equal to the values specified in the function arguments. "SketchRadius". 130mm.. the function sorts out the possible configurations with respect to the column order as it is specified in the argument list. 40mm) The values of lines 1 . Should be put in quotes. ) The CloserInfConfig function takes the following arguments: Arguments DesignTableName RowNamei Valuei Valuei Description Required. Integer from 1 to n. Value2 . At least. Name of the design table you want to read. Syntax CloserInfConfig(DesignTableName.

the function finds two configurations meeting the criteria. the function scans the configurations 1 and 3 and searches for the largest "SketchRadius" value less or equal to 130 mm. The result is line 3. As the second parameter specified is "SketchRadius". Then it rescans lines 1 and 3 and searches for the largest "PadLim2" value less or equal to 40mm.As the first parameter specified in the argument list is "PadLim1". Again. 2 and 3 and searches for the largest "PadLim1" value which is less or equal to 60 mm. . the function scans the lines 1. Two configurations meet the condition: configuration 1 and configuration 3.

the function sorts out the possible configurations with respect to the column order as it is specified in the argument list. RowName2.. Syntax CloserSupConfig(DesignTableName. RowName1. "PadLim2". Value1. 60mm.. 20mm) . Should be put in quotes. Value2 . You should specify the units. ) The CloserSupConfig function takes the following arguments: Arguments DesignTableName RowNamei Valuei Description Required. Should be put in quotes. At least. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. one couple RowName/Value is required Required. 120mm. When several configurations meet this condition.CloserSupConfig Function Description Returns the configuration which contains the smallest values greater or equal to the values of the given arguments. "PadLim1". "SketchRadius". Example Given the design table below: SketchRadius(mm) 1 2 3 4 120 130 120 140 PadLim1(mm) 60 50 60 50 PadLim2(mm) 10 30 25 40 The statement below returns 3: CloserSupConfig("DT1". Name of the design table you want to read.

1) Message("Maximum value is # (0.2. ValueInf) . RealValue) The CloserValueInfInColumn function has three arguments: Arguments DesignTableName ColumnNumber RealValue Description Required. ColumnNumber. Remarks The CloserValueInfInColumn function returns 0: when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers. MinimumValue) MinimumValue=MinInColumn("DesignTable1".040 is expected)". This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. Number or index of the table column. MinimumValue) ValueInf=CloserValueInfInColumn("DesignTable1". Required. Should be put in quotes. Example /* Rule created by CRE 04/06/99 */ /* Explains how to use the MaxInColumn/MinInColumn */ /* & CloserValuexxxInColumn functions */ MaximumValue=MaxInColumn("DesignTable1".150 is expected)". Should be a real.CloserValueInfInColumn Function Description Scans the values of a column and returns the smallest cell value which is the nearest to a specified one. Required. MaximumValue) MinimumValue=MinInColumn("DesignTable1". Returns 0 if no value is found or if the function arguments are not properly specified (see remarks).5) Message("Minimum value is # (0 is expected)". Name of the design table you want to read. Value searched for. Syntax CloserValueInfInColumn(DesignTableName.41mm) Message("Closest inf value is # (0.3) Message("Minimum value is # (0 is expected)". Integer from 1 to n.

ValueSup=CloserValueSupInColumn("DesignTable1". ValueSup) .1 is expected)". 80mm) Message("Closest sup value is # (0.1.

Number or index of the table column. Remarks The CloserValueSupInColumn function returns 0: when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.5) Message("Minimum value is # (0 is expected)". Name of the design table you want to read. MinimumValue) MinimumValue=MinInColumn("DesignTable1". Returns 0 if no value is found or if the function arguments are not properly specified (see remarks). Should be a real. MaximumValue) MinimumValue=MinInColumn("DesignTable1". Should be put in quotes. Example /* Rule created by CRE 04/06/99 */ /* Explains how to use the MaxInColumn/MinInColumn */ /* & CloserValuexxxInColumn functions */ MaximumValue=MaxInColumn("DesignTable1".1) Message("Maximum value is # (0.CloserValueSupInColumn Function Description Scans the values of a column and returns the greatest cell value which is the nearest to a specified one.2. RealValue) The CloserValueSupInColumn function has three arguments: Arguments DesignTableName ColumnNumber RealValue Description Required. Integer from 1 to n. ColumnNumber. Syntax CloserValueSupInColumn(DesignTableName. Required.040 is expected)".41mm) Message("Closest inf value is # (0.3) Message("Minimum value is # (0 is expected)". This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. Required.150 is expected)". Value searched for. ValueInf) . MinimumValue) ValueInf=CloserValueInfInColumn("DesignTable1".

1 is expected)". ValueSup) .1. 80mm) Message("Closest sup value is # (0.ValueSup=CloserValueSupInColumn("DesignTable1".

ValueInf) . Can be a string or a boolean Remarks The LocateInColumn function returns 0: when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers. This name is the string which identifies the design table in the specification tree. Integer from 1 to n. ColumnNumber.150 is expected)".040 is expected)". Returns zero if the value is not found or if the function arguments are not properly specified (see remarks). Name of the design table you want to read.LocateInColumn Function Description Returns the index of the first row which contains a specified value. MinimumValue) ValueInf=CloserValueInfInColumn("DesignTable1". Value searched for. Syntax LocateInColumn(DesignTableName.5) Message("Minimum value is # (0 is expected)". MaximumValue) MinimumValue=MinInColumn("DesignTable1". Number or index of the table column.41mm) Message("Closest inf value is # (0. Required.Value) The LocateInColumn function has three arguments: Arguments DesignTableName ColumnNumber Value Description Required. MinimumValue) MinimumValue=MinInColumn("DesignTable1". Should be put in quotes.2.1) Message("Maximum value is # (0. Example /* Rule created by CRE 04/06/99 */ /* Explains how to use the MaxInColumn/MinInColumn*/ /* & CloserValuexxxInColumn functions */ MaximumValue=MaxInColumn("DesignTable1".3) Message("Minimum value is # (0 is expected)". Required.

1 is expected)". ValueSup) .ValueSup=CloserValueSupInColumn("DesignTable1". 80mm) Message("Closest sup value is # (0.1.

Name of the design table you want to read. Integer from 1 to n.1) Message("Maximum value is # (0. Number or index of the table column. ColumnNumber) The MaxInColumn function has two arguments: Arguments DesignTableName ColumnNumber Description Required.5) Message("Minimum value is # (0 is expected)". 80mm) . Example /* Rule created by CRE 04/06/99 */ /* Explains how to use the MaxInColumn/MinInColumn */ /*& CloserValuexxxInColumn functions */ MaximumValue=MaxInColumn("DesignTable1".41mm) Message("Closest inf value is # (0.150 is expected)". Should be put in quotes. MinimumValue) MinimumValue=MinInColumn("DesignTable1". Remarks The MaxInColumn function returns 0: when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers. This name is the string which identifies the design table.2.MaxInColumn Function Description Returns the greatest of a column values. Required. Syntax MaxInColumn(DesignTableName. MinimumValue) ValueInf=CloserValueInfInColumn("DesignTable1".3) Message("Minimum value is # (0 is expected)".040 is expected)". MaximumValue) MinimumValue=MinInColumn("DesignTable1". Returns 0 if the column does not contain numerical values or if the function arguments are not properly specified (see remarks).1. ValueInf) ValueSup=CloserValueSupInColumn("DesignTable1".

Message("Closest sup value is # (0. ValueSup) .1 is expected)".

ValueSup) . This name is the string which identifies the design table.1) Message("Maximum value is # (0.150 is expected)".5) Message("Minimum value is # (0 is expected)". ValueInf) ValueSup=CloserValueSupInColumn("DesignTable1".41mm) Message("Closest inf value is # (0. Should be put in quotes.040 is expected)". ColumnNumber) The MinInColumn function has two arguments: Arguments DesignTableName ColumnNumber Description Required. Required. Integer from 1 to n. MinimumValue) ValueInf=CloserValueInfInColumn("DesignTable1".3) Message("Minimum value is # (0 is expected)". Example /* Rule created by CRE 04/06/99 */ /& CloserValuexxxInColumn functions */ MaximumValue=MaxInColumn("DesignTable1". Remarks The MinInColumn function returns 0: when the design table passed as its first argument does not exist when the row or column numbers are out of range or not specified as integers.1.1 is expected)". Number or index of the table column. Syntax MinInColumn(DesignTableName. MaximumValue) MinimumValue=MinInColumn("DesignTable1". MinimumValue) MinimumValue=MinInColumn("DesignTable1". Returns 0 if the column does not contain numerical values or if the function arguments are not properly specified (see remarks).MinInColumn Function Description Returns the smallest of a column values. Name of the design table you want to read.2. 80mm) Message("Closest sup value is # (0.

.

The Design Intent Calculating and Checking a Volume Working with a Design Table About Rule Firing Knowledgeware Automation Optimizing a Volume Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body .Working Through the Knowledgeware Capabilities Introduction .

and for each scenario tips and techniques are given. from relations such as formulas and rules to optimization algorithms.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles. most facets of the CATIA knowledgeware capabilities are examined.Introduction Design Intent Configuration 1 of KwrProfilesDesignTable. This part is intended for advanced users. Before you tackle the scenarios defined in this guide it is better to have previous knowledge of the products below and have an idea of the basic tasks you can carry out with them: CATIA Infrastructure CATIA Part Design CATIA Generative Shape Design CATIA Knowledge Advisor CATIA Product Optimizer. . Throughout this part. In every chapter a scenario is developed around a specific theme.CATPart The bottle above is used to demonstrate the major knowledgeware techniques that can be used in CATIA Version 5 to help you design a product.

you are required to be able to refine your result and search for a design so that the exact volume of the bottle is 250 cm3. the internal volume remains in the [230 cm3 . This is explained in Optimizing a Volume. This chapter defines the requirements of the bottle used as an example and explains how to capture your design intent. you can propose any bottle shape as long as. but using Knowledge Advisor checks is a good way to be warned whenever the volume is out of range. To achieve this goal. The trick for you now is to determine the volume of the bottle. manufacturing or style considerations. This is explained in Calculating and Checking a Volume. have this volume updated whenever you change the bottle's shape and be warned should the calculated volume be out of range. describe your requirements through knowledgeware features. The approach followed to capture this design intent relies on measures. for example you can check and validate data during the design process or observe how your document behaves depending on such and such context. This is not a parameter you can modify. you must first of all define your product requirements.The Design Intent When developing a product. Design Requirements Suppose you are designing a new bottle and you are required to make a number of proposals to your marketing department. This is the only requirement as regards geometrical properties. Leaving aside considerations of style. These requirements may be the result of mechanical. Assembly Requirements It is planned to provide the bottle with a cap. it has been decided that selling this new perfume brand with . we use the Product Synthesis Optimizer capabilities and both available algorithms to design the final bottle shape.280 cm3] range. Having on hand a series of bottles' shapes fulfilling all requirements. The "measure" capabilities provide you with a function which calculates the volume of a body.e. After reviewing development plans with the marketing department. There is no real means to prevent you designing bottles too small or too large. for a first estimate. The approach you follow in knowledge-based design consists in integrating these requirements in specific tools so that. i. you are free to do what you want except for the following restrictions: the thickness of the bottle is determined by manufacturing considerations.

They want an immediate result on screen and they also want a clue as to whether they are still working within the authorized limits. Style Requirements Marketing already has an idea about the shapes they would like to study. To check the overall design of the product. the marketing people want to be able to generate the bottle assembly automatically on screen each time a bottle shape meets the requirements. The points making up the bottle neck are fixed as they must accommodate the cap. replay or modify a macro is discussed in CATIA Knowledgeware Automation. all contours are intended to be smooth. A CATIA Knowledgeware answer to this problem is a Knowledge Advisor rule which can be triggered whenever certain conditions are fulfilled and generate automatically the global assembly from a VB macro. You alter them to create a new bottle shape. you must create the spline. Our initial feature is a five-point spline. How you record .an already existing cap would be a saving. then rotate this spline. All this is described in Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body. they want profiles that are easy to be deformed by controlling one or more parameters. Then you have to create a fill at the aperture which is assumed to be the bottom of the bottle. join all the faces and thicken the resulting joined surface. This is explained in detail in About Rule Firing. The proposed shapes should be revolution bodies. Stylists want you to provide them with a flexible design. The other points are those providing the required flexibility. . the marketing department would like to have an idea of the assembly made up of the bottle and the cap. At this stage you obtain a revolution surface open at both ends. In other words. Although it is planned to re-design this cap. To create a bottle. The cap they plan to reuse is the one below: Reusing this cap affects the bottle neck design which must allow for a certain section as well as a certain depth. The longitudinal view of the product should exhibit no edges.

How to create a design table storing the data of all profiles and how to use a design table are explained in Working with a Design Table. you can store its parameters in a design table. .After a new shape has been designed and satisfies the requirements. The design table is a way to gather in an external file all the profiles satisfying the requirements.

280cm3] range. we will be using two CATIA knowledgeware capabilities. we want to be able to measure the bottle's volume. To achieve this goal.CATPart The bottle we start from is described in Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body. Specifying the Proper Settings Before going any further in the scenario which is developed in this Part. Measures are functions provided by various applications such as Part Design or Generative Shape Design to compute data. They can be accessed from an interactive dictionary. we want to be warned about whether the resulting volume is still in the [230 cm3 . check the settings below: . Checks are relations that don't modify the document but just tell you whether certain specified criteria are fulfilled. the measures and the checks. These functions can be used in formulas as well as in rules and checks. then each time the bottle's profile is modified. First of all.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles.Calculating and Checking a Volume Configuration 2 of KwrProfilesDesignTable.

A parameter with Volume. In formula editor. The "Formulas" dialog box is displayed. select the 'Measures' item. Click the icon or select the Tools->Formulas command from the standard menu bar. Select the 'Volume' item in the 'New Parameter of type' list.1 as its name is displayed and highlighted in the parameter list. Click 'Add Formulas'. click the Wizard button. 5. Open the KwrThickSurface. check the 'With Value' and 'With Formula' check boxes.CATPart document. But we recommend you check all the options below the specification tree settings.1 name with BottleVolume. Then click 'New Parameter of type'. the 'Load extended language libraries' box must be activated otherwise you won't be able to access the Measures in the knowledgeware dictionary. The dictionary is displayed. Calculating the Bottle Volume 1. In Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Part Design Check at least the 'Relations' and 'Parameters' boxes.In Tools->Options->General->Parameters In the Knowledge tab. replace the Volume. In the dictionary. 2. 3. Add parentheses after the function name in the formula editor. 6. . then select 'volume' in the measure list. 4. In the 'Edit name or value of the current parameter' field. specify cm3 as the default volume unit. Check the 'Select Feature' box. In the Units tab. In the Knowledge tab.

The new formula is displayed in the parameter list opposite the BottleVolume parameter.7. just click the Join.1) definition from the specification tree. You are back to the "Formulas" dialog box.1\Join. .1 feature. The formula definition you should get in the editor is something like: BottleVolume = volume (Open_body. Click OK in the formula editor. Position the cursor between the parentheses and capture the joined surface (Join. Click OK again in the "Formulas" dialog box to exit the "Formulas" dialog. To do this.1) 8. It is also displayed in the specification tree under the Parameters and Relations nodes.

3.Checking the Volume Value 1. Click OK. c. To do this: . 2. Select 'Information' or 'Warning' in the 'Type of Check' list b. Click the icon to display the check editor. Enter the string "Volume out of range' in the message field. select the Start->Infrastructure->Knowledge Advisor command from the tool bar. To do this. replace the default name with VolumeCheck. then access the Knowledge Advisor workbench. In the first dialog box. Define your check. The check editor is displayed. Enter the statement below in the edition window: (BottleVolume > 230 cm3) and (BottleVolume < 280 cm3) This is what your editor looks like at this stage of the dialog: . Select the document root feature.

In the specification tree.4. . Click OK to exit the dialog box and add the check to the document. the check icon is green.

In the scenario which is described above. you can select Open_body\Join. Using the 'Filter' box in the Formula Editor Selecting a feature in the geometry area or in the specification tree displays only the parameters related to the selected feature in the formula editor. Displaying parameter values in the geometry area To display parameter values in the geometry area. Clicking this button displays the editor of the relation which constrains the parameter. you get a message indicating that the volume function is expecting a surface instead of a solid.1. This applies for example to the radius of a circular sketch or to the width and length of a rectangular sketch. Displaying parameters in the "Formulas" dialog box The parameter list displayed in the "Formulas" dialog box depends on the selected feature. Note that it is always better to capture a feature definition from the specification tree. In the scenario described above. The 'Select Feature' mode is appropriate when the data to be entered in the formula appears in the specification tree or can be grabbed from the geometry area. 5. If you select a given feature in the specification tree.1 as the argument of volume. you cannot manipulate them as parameters in relations. you must have the "Formulas" dialog box open. You must use the 'Filter' mode when the parameter to be entered in the formula cannot be captured from the document. you display all the document parameters. 3. Such parameters are also highlighted in the geometry area. 2. Tips Parameters 1. 4. Then. If you try to specify PartBody\ThickSurface. Selecting a parameter in the parameter list will highlight this parameter in the specification tree and display its value in the geometry area. Using the 'Incremental' box Selecting a feature in the specification tree or in the geometry area displays in the editor only the first level of features right below the selected feature. 2. If you select the document root feature in the specification tree. the only feature you can capture from the geometry area is PartBody\ThickSurface. to capture the definition of the Join. Using the 'Select Feature' box in the Formula Editor Selecting a feature in the geometry area or in the specification tree allows you to carry forward the feature definition onto the formula editor. in the list of parameters displayed in the formula editor. you just have to select the 'Multiple values' option at parameter creation and enter the values one by one to specify the value list.1 which can not be passed as the argument of the volume measure. you display only the parameters related to this feature.The resulting document is KwrVolumeCheck. Formulas 1. This selection mode is akin to the .CATPart. Creating multiple-value parameters To assign multiple values to a parameter. 3. a push button is provided opposite the value field of its edition box. Using the dimensions of a sketch as parameters in relations Unless sketch dimensions are declared as constraints. you can also check the 'Filter' box then select the Open_body.1 feature.1 feature definition in the specification tree. Editing constrained parameters When a parameter is constrained.

and select the Open_body. Deleting and Erasing in the Formula Editor The Edit->Undo command does not operate in this context. severity and result parameters are displayed in the parameter list as well as the checked parameter. a green or red push button is displayed opposite the value field of 'Edit name or value of the current parameter'.'Filter' mode. This is what you can do if you don't see the difference. More parameters are displayed. Using the 'Select Feature' box in the Formula Editor Same as for formulas. Only four parameters are displayed in the editor. the formula activity and the parameters used as input in the formula.1 feature in the specification tree. Checks 1. Using the 'Filter' box in the Formula Editor Same as for formulas. The 'Incremental' mode is usefull when you work with large documents and when the parameter lists are long. Clicking this button displays the check editor. then click the "Formulas" icon. and click the "Formulas" icon. Now uncheck the 'Incremental' box. If you select the result parameter. . The icon erases the whole formula. Displaying a check in f(x) When you select a check in the specification tree. 4. Back to the scenario above.1 feature in the specification tree. 5. Displaying a formula in When you select a formula in the specification tree. the parameter list displays the constrained parameter. except that the "Filter" mode displays all the parameters below the selected feature. 4. Using the 'Incremental' box. Same as for formulas. When you enter the formula editor. the activity. check the 'Incremental' box. If you want to delete something you must use the Delete key. then select the Open_body. 2. create any formula (that you will cancel later on). 3.

Searching Interactively for Valid Shapes 1. How are you going to warp the profile of the bottle and search for other shapes? How can you capture all the data fulfilling the requirements? If need be.Working with a Design Table Configuration 3 of KwrProfilesDesignTable. As soon as you deform the spline: .1 feature and manipulate the D and E control points to deform the spline. an update icon is displayed on the root feature and on the formula as well.CATPart document. we first deform the bottle shape interactively by manipulating the control points of the spline. then we create and enrich a design table from the data of the documents fulfilling the requirements. the document color changes (by default it turns red) b. 3. In the scenario below. Update the Part by double-clicking the root feature in the specification tree or in the geometry area. . Double-click the Sketch.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles. Open the KwrVolumeCheck. how are you going to proceed to refine your design in order to obtain a given volume? Using a design table is a way to capture your design intent and modify your document through an external file. See Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body for a definition of the D and E control points. in the specification tree. 2.CATPart You now have a preliminary document.

Open the KwrVolumeCheck. As soon as you find the right profile.1 feature and add the xD. Click the satisfy the requirements. If the recalculated volume does not 5. In the renamed document. Initializing and Enriching a Design Table 1.CATPart document and save it under a new name. The figure below is an example of a valid shape.yD. . Refer to Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body for the definition of the control points. The constraints named x are defined along H while those named y are along V.4. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench by double-clicking the formula in the specification tree. access the Sketch. the check icon turns green. Redo these interactions until you obtain a bottle satisfying both your style criteria and your volume requirements. Add a tangency constraint on E with respect to H as on the figure below and name it TangE. xE and yE offset constraints on the D and E control points. Otherwise. follow the method below to create a design table intended to store the data related to this profile as well as the data corresponding to other profiles. icon to update the formula. 2. a message box is displayed informing you that the volume is out of range and the check icon turns red.

xE. 5.If need be. In the standard toolbar. Click OK.xls file to store the design table. Click Open. A single row design table similar to the one below is displayed. The 'Select parameters to insert' dialog box is displayed. In the "Creation of a Design Table" dialog box. yD. . Select the xD. In the "Select the Pathname of the File to be Created" dialog box. 4. 3. 6. specify the pathname of an . click the icon to create a design table. check the 'Create a design table with current parameter values' box. Click OK. Use the right arrow to move them to the 'Inserted parameters' list. yE and TangE parameters in the 'Parameters to insert' list. update the document and the formula.

As soon as you think a profile is worth saving..CATPart. you add a new row to the design table. Each time you do this. A single row table with the xD.. edit the control points and carry forward the edited values to the Excel table you have just created. The Microsoft Excel application is started. 8.xls file and re-open the renamed document.7. After the data of all the profiles to be stored have been added to the Excel table. edit the sketch and search for another profile. Save and close this document. close this .' button. Re-edit the design table. 9. select one by one each design table configuration in order to display the various shapes on screen. yD. Edit the created design table by clicking the 'Edit table. Click OK in the design table dialog box to add the created design table to your document. If you enrich the created design table with the data below: . Go back to KwrVolumeCheck. xE and yE and TangE parameter values is displayed.

In the scenario above. If you do this. you must insert the parameters one by one. yC. The parameters that cannot be inserted in a design table Only parameters which are not already constrained by any other relation or by any other design table can be used to create a design table.xls sample. . Parameters to be inserted can be multi-selected. Tips Selecting the parameters to be inserted in a design table 1. xC. BottleVolume reappears in the list. If you specify x in the 'Filter Name' field of the 'Select parameters to insert' dialog box. it does not appear in the 'Parameters to insert' list in the design table dialog box. the rank of the columns fits the rank of the parameters in the 'Inserted parameters' list. yD. xC. When the design table is created. xB. If you select the 'Renamed Parameters' in the 'Filter Type' list. you will display all the parameters with the letter x in their name (xA. xB. If you deactivate the formula. If a parameter is already constrained. the group of multi-selected parameters will be carried forward onto the 'Inserted parameters' list in the order in which they are displayed in the initial list. xA. yB. The bottle shape corresponding to each configuration of this design table is depicted by the figure which starts each chapter of this part. and start creating a new design table. xD. 2. How to make the selection The 'Filter Name' and 'Filter Type' filters can be used to restrict the display of a parameter list.this is what you get on screen when this design table is edited in the renamed document. xE. you will display all the parameters you have renamed in the "Formulas" dialog box (yA. If you want to have columns ordered in a given way in the design table. TangE). xE). The design table above is provided in the KwrProfilesDesignTable. yE. you can't see BottleVolume in the 'Parameters to insert' list. You just have to keep on pressing the Ctrl key while you select parameters. as long as the formula which defines the BottleVolume parameter is active. xD.

Clicking this push button displays the design table configuration along with the Filter field. 2. your design table takes on a broken status. you should be aware that the configuration number differs from the row number in the design table. Selecting a design table configuration When selecting a design table configuration. Editing parameters No matter how you edit a parameter which is referenced in a design table.How to make a query in a design table 1. Configuration 1 is defined in row 2. a broken or invalid design table is displayed as below: Editing or modifying the design table parameters 1. A design table push button opposite the value field indicates that the parameter value is constrained by a design table. you can't modify the values of the parameters inserted in it.' button to access the language dictionary. The broken status When the active configuration does not fit the set of configurations resulting from the query operation. You can type the filtering relation directly in the appropriate field or click the 'Edit. If neither action is undertaken.. In the specification tree. if the query relation is: TangE >10 deg and yE > 10mm. you get a message prompting you to either deactivate the filter (uncheck the filter box) or change your configuration. You cannot launch an optimization on parameters constrained by a design table. the list of displayed configurations will be restricted to: 2. The syntax of the query relation The syntax which is authorized in the 'Filter' field of the Design Table dialog box (Configurations tab) is the same as for Knowledge Advisor checks.Design table parameters and optimization As long as a design table is active. Modifying parameters .. In the scenario above. Constrained parameters cannot be used as free parameters or target parameters. the value field of this parameter is grayed out in the edition box and you are prohibited from modifying the value. .

5.CATPart document. Save the document under the KwrTipCreateAssembly. In the dialog box which is displayed. Click OK in the box which asks you whether you want to associate automatically columns with parameters.About Rule Firing Configuration 4 of KwrProfilesDesignTable.CATScript and KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart This scenario explains how to write rules and gives some tips about the process which is behind the rule firing. In the file selection dialog box. icon. In the KwrTipCreateAssembly. To do this: . Writing the Rules 1.CATPart document. Check that the KwrTipSave. 4. select the KwrProfilesDesignTable. check the 'Create a design 2. Two rules are created. Open the KwrBottleProfiles. replace the path defining the assembly components in the var1(0) and var2(0) definitions.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles. Click the table from a pre-existing file' box.CATScript macro. Click OK. Deactivate the design table from the contextual menu. Select Configuration 2 as the active configuration. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench to create the UpdateAndSaveRule rule. 3. The other starts a macro which generates an assembly with constraints.CATScript macros are downloaded in your environment as well as the KwrCap1.CATPart name. One launches a macro which updates and saves the document whenever the design table configuration results in a valid check.xls sample.

CATScript") Prior to clicking OK..\KwrTipCreateAssembly. e. Deactivate the rule. d.1\DesignTable. Click OK to add the rule to the document. 3. c.1\Configuration < 7 { Message("Document update and save") LaunchMacroFromFile("e:\users\. Use the same procedure to create the AssemblyRule rule below: if Relations.. b. 6. replace the path specified in the LaunchMacroFromFile function with the path where you have downloaded the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript") } else Message("Configuration # is invalid". double-click the design table icon in the specification tree then select a new row among the displayed configurations (from 1 to 6). enter the UpdateAndSaveRule name.1\Configuration) Prior to clicking OK. To do this. This message box is generated by the Message function in the rule. The assembly is generated. 7.. Relations. Click the icon. A message box is displayed ("Document update and save"). The message boxes warning about the update and save operations are displayed. Click OK in the Visual Basic message box.CATScript macro. enter the rule below: if Relations. replace the path specified in the LaunchMacroFromFile function with the path where you have downloaded the KwrTipSave. They are generated by the KwrTipSave.\KwrTipSave. In the rule editor. Reactivate DesignTable. You can see the different . 2.CATScript macro. Deactivate all the features below the Relations node of the specification tree then save your document. The macro which creates the assembly is launched. You get on screen a message warning you that an assembly is going to be created. Two Visual Basic boxes are also displayed. Firing the Rules 1.1\DesignTable. Reactivate AssemblyRule.CATScript macro.1\UpdateAndSaveRule\Activity == true LaunchMacroFromFile("e:\. In the first dialog box which is displayed.. Reactivate UpdateAndSaveRule.1 and modify the design table configuration. Click OK to display the main rule editor..

This selection mode is akin to the 'Filter' mode. Selecting a feature in the geometry area or in the specification tree allows you to carry forward the feature definition to the editor. Tips Entering Parameters in the Rule Editor To enter a parameter or a feature definition in the rule editor. c. or check the 'Incremental' box. the value of a parameter used in the set of conditions (if conditions) is modified. close the product which has been generated. you can: . 4. 2. The UpdateAndSave macro is launched but not the AssemblyRule macro which is deactivated. Modify again the design table configuration. Selecting a feature in the geometry area or in the specification tree displays only the parameters related to the selected feature in the formula editor. What Events Fire the Rules A rule is fired when: 1. reactivate AssemblyRule. or check the 'Filter' box. The Activate Command Cannot be Accessed from the Contextual Menu You are prohibited from modifying the activity parameter of a rule if the activity of this rule is controlled by another rule. either check the 'Select Feature' box.steps on screen. then deactivate AssemblyRule. To create the assembly corresponding to the new configuration. the rule body is modified. You must use the 'Filter' mode when the parameter to be entered in the formula cannot be captured from the document. Such parameters are also highlighted in the geometry area. . The Activate/Deactivate command is then removed from the contextual menu. Once the macro has finished running. Go back to the initial document. b. except that the "Filter" mode displays all the parameters below the selected feature. Selecting a feature in the specification tree or in the geometry area displays in the editor only the first level of features right below the selected feature.

.

2. depending on your needs.CATScript file. see the Knowledge Advisor Journaling Guide. Select the Tools->Macro->Start Recording.. then replay it later on or write it from scratch.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles. For more information. Recording the CATScript Macro To record the macro used in About Rule Firing: 1. Close all the documents open in your session.About Automation Configuration 5 of KwrProfilesDesignTable.CATPart A macro is a way to store instructions intended to be repeated a certain number of times. It can also be a good means to store intricate interactions or describe a document in a clear text file easy to edit and requiring less memory than a document. Knowledgeware automation provides you with a way to store operations in the form of a . Creating an Assembly using a CATScript Macro A CATScript macro is written in a language similar to the Visual Basic language. The recommended method is to start from a record then.. In this chapter we discuss the macro which is used to create the assembly in About Rule Firing then we introduce the knowledgeware automation objects. If you need a brush up on how to create an assembly. We will not dwell on the part which consists in creating an assembly as this guide deals more specifically with knowledgeware techniques. You can either record a CATScript macro. edit and modify the prerecorded macro. see the Assembly User's Guide. command from the standard menu bar then in .

End of recording 3. all the interactions are recorded in the CATScript file you have just specified.CATPart component. see the CATIA Knowledge Advisor Journaling Guide for information on how to record a macro. Press the Start button to start the macro recording. Refer to the figure below to see how to select the elements to be constrained. Select the Components->Existing Component. c...the "Record Macro" dialog box which is displayed. command from the root product contextual menu to add the KwrTipCreateAssembly. Specify a coincidence constraint to make the cap and the bottle axes coaxial. d.2 surface. Start of recording .1 plane of the bottle and the Pad. update the document. In the Assembly Design workbench. specify an offset constraint of 1 mm between the Plane. The product1 root product is created. specify the path of an external file. For more information. refer to the Assembly User's Guide. For the sake of clarity and to make lines shorter: some objects have been declared while others have been renamed the arguments passed in functions using the generic naming method are written in italics. This closes the file which records all the interactions described above. From now on. b. you must replace the path specified as the argument of the AddComponentsFromFiles method. If need be. Select the Tools->Macro->Stop Recording command from the standard tool bar.CATPart component then the KwrCap1. Taking a Look at the Macro The CATScript macro you have just recorded is similar to the one below. If need be. . Before replaying this macro. Select the Start->Infrastructure->Product Structure command from the standard tool bar.

Update This macro can be started either from a rule (see About Rule Firing) or directly by selecting the Tools->Macro->Run command from the standard menu bar.Documents. you follow the reference to an object with a period. the property name.\KwrTipCreateAssembly.Product Dim var1 ( 0 ) ' Replace the path below before replaying the macro var1 ( 0 ) = "E:\.1) Dim Ref2 As Reference Set Ref2 = Prod1.Value = 1. "*" Dim CstS1 As Collection Set CstS1 = Prod1. "*" Dim var2 ( 0 ) ' Replace the path below before replaying the macro var2 ( 0 ) = "E:\.Products. it is simple. and the new property value. an equal sign (=)...Add("Product") Dim Prod1 As Product Set Prod1 = PrDoc0. Ref2) Cst2. To set the value of a property. Visual Basic is based on objects which have their own methods and properties. Ref1. Ref3.Dimension.\KwrCap1. The tedious thing when you have no previous .CreateReferenceFromName(Bottle axis) Dim Ref4 As Reference Set Ref4 = Prod1.AddComponentsFromFiles var1..CreateReferenceFromName(Cap axis) Dim Cst3 As Constraint Set Cst3 = CstS1. but once you understand the basics of the language. At first sight.CreateReferenceFromName(Pad. Ref4) Prod1.000000 Cst2. About CATIA Automation Learning There is a lot to be learned before you can write a complete macro in Visual Basic.CATPart" Prod1. you can be up and running in no time at all.AddComponentsFromFiles var2.Dim PrDoc0 As Document Set PrDoc0 = CATIA.AddBiEltCst(1.Orientation = 2 Dim Ref3 As Reference Set Ref3 = Prod1.Products.2 face) Dim Cst2 As Constraint Set Cst2 = CstS1.AddBiEltCst(2..CATPart" Prod1.Connections("CATIAConstraints") Dim Ref1 As Reference Set Ref1 = Prod1.CreateReferenceFromName(Plane.

1. you just have to use the methods and properties of the .CATScript macro: parameters formulas design tables rules and checks. Knowledgeware Automation The objects below can be created and managed in a .CATScript" ProductDocument0. the value specified for the arguments of some methods are written using generic naming. you must first retrieve the collection object containing the Part relations by using the Relations method on the Part object.AddComponentsFromFiles var1. you must retrieve the collection object containing the Part parameters by using the Parameters method on the Part object.programming skills is that the macro you record is a raw macro with objects and properties chained in one statement as in the extract below: Dim ProductDocument0 As Document Set ProductDocument0 = CATIA. Modifying Knowledgeware Objects To manipulate a knowledgeware object. Creating Knowledgeware Objects The knowledgeware features are all created from the collection which refers to their type. You must replay it to check whether the scenario has been actually recorded.Add ( "Product" ) Dim var1 ( 0 ) var1 ( 0 ) = "E:\.1)).Product. to create a relation in a Part type feature.1:0(Brp:Sketch. For example. To create a parameter in a Part. These arguments are written in a form similar to the simple example below: Brp:(Pad.. If you perform interactions such as selecting an edge or a face. When you take a look at the macro. You don't have to worry much about generic naming as the definitions relying on this technique are automatically inserted in CATIA macros.Documents. This label is a coded description of the selected element.\KwrTipCreateAssembly. "*" When you tackle automation. you can see arguments which are neither Visual Basic objects nor usual data.Products.. This generic naming label appears when you record a . there are two ways to proceed: either you already have a background in Visual Basic and you can refer to the list of Programming Interfaces provided with the CATIA documentation to write a macro or interpret a prerecorded macro or you are a beginner and just record a scenario.CATScript macro by using the Tools->Options->Macros command. About Generic Naming Generic naming is a CATIA technique which creates a label whenever an element has been selected interactively.

Name if (InStrRev(strPartName.CATIA is your application ' You get the active document by using the ActiveDocument property ' on your application object Dim myDoc As Document Set myDoc = CATIA. Sub CATMain() ' Retrieve your active document .ActiveDocument.CATPart") : Exit Sub ' Retrieve the collection object which contains ' all the document relations ' Activate all the relations ' Display the relation names in a message box ' Note: Statements below could not be applied to a CATProduct Dim strRel0 As String Dim strRel1 As String strRel1 = "Here is the list of relations" & vbCrLf & strRel0 Dim myRelCol As Relations Set myRelCol = myDoc.Part.Activate() strRel1 = strRel1 & vbCrLf & myRel. myPos strPartName = myDoc.CATPart is not found.relevant object. strCATPart.-1) = 0)_ then MsgBox("Your document should be a .CATPart document and run the KwrRelations.1"_ then Set des1 = myRelCol.Update End Sub This macro displays the list of relations within the document.Configuration = 4 Next CATIA.Part. . An Example Open the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart". a message is displayed ' but you exit the procedure ' InStrRev is a standard VB function Dim strPartName.ActiveDocument ' Check whether the document is a CATPart ' Analyse the pathname of the document ' If the extension .Relations For Each myRel in myRelCol myRel.CATScript macro.Item("DesignTable.Name Next Msgbox strRel1 ' Make the configuration 4 active Dim des1 As Relation For Each myRel in myRelCol if myRel. changes the design table configuration and updates the document.".Name = "DesignTable.1"): des1.

The list of objects. otherwise the macro crashes. methods and properties you can actually use when writing a macro is given in the Programming Interfaces. . otherwise the macro crashes. it is better to check the document type in your script. Retrieving Collections Collections such as the Relations and Parameters objects can only be retrieved from a CATPart document.Tips Operations that Cannot be Recorded There are some operations that cannot be recorded but that can be programmed in a macro (the activation or deactivation of a relation for example). Access to this documentation is provided on the CATIA documentation home page. Retrieving a Collection Object When retrieving a collection object by its name. it is better to check whether the object exists. Prior to retrieving these collections.

They are all stored in the form of a design table. there is one that catches your attention. Fill in the fields with the data below: Optimization type Optimized parameter Target value Target value BottleVolume 250cm3 icon.Optimizing a Volume Configuration 6 of KwrProfilesDesignTable. but you would like to modify slightly its dimensions so that its internal volume is exactly 250 cm3. Configuration 2 is neat.xls applied to KwrBottleProfiles. Open the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart document. The . In the scenario below. Among the valid configurations.CATPart You now have a number of valid configurations. 2. we explain how to use the Product Engineering Optimizer to refine the results obtained for one of the bottles' shapes. The Gradient Algorithm 1. Access the Product Engineering Optimizer workbench and click the Optimization dialog box is displayed. 3.

2. The values of the free parameters are displayed in the optimization box. Click Cancel in the Optimization dialog box. upper bound: 200mm yD initial value 53mm lower bound: 0mm. upper bound: 200mm yE initial value 26 mm lower bound: 0mm. Click the 'Save Optimization' data box. After the process has finished running.1mm step for each free parameter. 3. otherwise you won't be able to save your optimization data. Simulated Annealing . Click 'Run Optimization' to launch the algorithm. The Simulated Annealing Algorithm 1. Fill in the fields with the values below: Optimization type Optimized parameter Target value Free parameters Target value BottleVolume 250cm3 xD initial value 82 mm lower bound: 0mm. upper bound: 200mm xE initial value 91 mm lower bound: 0mm.Free parameters xD initial value 82 mm lower bound: 0mm. upper bound: 200mm yD initial value 53mm lower bound: 0mm. upper bound: 200mm Specify a 0. Note that the results depend on the platform. gradient default values Algorithm Termination criteria 4. upper bound: 200mm Don't specify any step. Click the icon or double click the optimization feature in the specification tree to display the optimization dialog box. upper bound: 200mm xE initial value 91 mm lower bound: 0mm. Don't intervene to stop the process.Fast Algorithm . upper bound: 200mm yE initial value 26 mm lower bound: 0mm. 5. the target value is reached or almost reached.

Results versus Platforms The results of an optimization process may slightly depend on the platform. 5. The Conjugate Gradient (CG). 2. If the shape of the objective function is unknown. otherwise you won't be able to save your optimization data. the mass and the wetarea. then the gradient can be used. You cannot use these parameters as the objective of an optimization algorithm. differentiable at all points and with a single optimum). If the properties of the objective function are known (continuous.Termination criteria default values 4. These parameters are all displayed in the "Formulas" dialog box. A good way to reach quickly a solution when using the Simulated Annealing consists in specifying a low number of consecutive iterations without improvements (15 or 20). Click the Save Optimization data box. It is usually faster than the Simulated Annealing algorithm. it is recommended to start with a Simulated Annealing then refine the results with a gradient descent. Tips How to Optimize the Mechanical Properties of a Document The mechanical properties of a document are the volume. you can use either algorithm below: 1. This approach is slow but works for a larger amount of functions. The Simulated Annealing. Instead of using these parameters. you must use the appropriate measures. This is particularly true for the Simulated annealing algorithm [ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ] . How to Choose an Algorithm To perform an optimization. Don't intervene to stop the process. Click 'Run Optimization' to launch the algorithm.

Creating the Initial Spline 1. icon to draw a five point spline looking something like the curve below. and thickened. the open end corresponding to the bottom of the bottle is closed and the resulting shape is thickened.Appendix Creating a Deformable Revolution Body The bottle to be designed will be a five point spline rotated around an axis. . Click the icon. This is in short how you should proceed. 2. In the Part Design workbench. access the Sketcher by clicking the 3. Create a new part. the spline is rotated. Once it is created.

CATPart Creating the Revolution Surface . At this stage. Click the icon to access the formulas dialog box. Location on spline Offset along H Offset along V Tangency constraint yA = 12 mm yB = 10. then modify the offset names according to the names given in the table above. Use the icon to specify an horizontal tangency on points C and D. don't specify any offset on point D and E otherwise you won't be able to modify the bottle profile. you can set the D coordinates to 59 mm (along H) and 50 mm (along V) and the E coordinates to 77 mm and 17mm.4. The resulting document is KwrInitialSketch. 5.5mm yC = 10 mm none specified none specified horizontal Control point A Extremity on the neck xA = 0mm Control point B Next to A on the neck xB = 7mm Control point C Next to B on the neck xC = 14mm Control point D Next to C Control point E Other extremity none specified none specified horizontal none specified none specified none specified Use the icon to specify offset constraints on the three control points making up the bottle neck. Specify the constraints given in the table below. But if you wish to start from a spline similar to the one below.

This is what your revolution surface looks like from the bottom. icon to close the bottle . Do a complete rotation (0deg . 2. Access the Generative Shape Design workbench and use the lower part.1. This is now what you should get onscreen. Access the Generative Shape Design workbench and use the icon to rotate the spline created above around the H axis.360deg). The generated surface is opened a both ends.

Specify a 1. Now you can select the sketch feature in the specification tree to access the sketcher.3. The arrows displayed on screen when you apply the offset values should be directed toward the outside of the bottle (see the figure below). Adding an internal thickness entails subtracting the volume resulting from this internal thickness to the one calculated for the joined surface. But this would make things a bit more complicated as later on we want to measure the internal volume of the bottle. drag the D and E points and see how the global shape reacts. This thickness should be an external thickness. The resulting document is KwrThickSurface. [ Back ] [ Up ] . we could specify a first offset as well as a second offset.5 mm as First Offset and 0 mm as Second Offset. Access the Part Design workbench and use the icon to thicken the joined surface. This internal volume is to be calculated from the "Volume" measure of a surface. Save the resulting document. Thickening the Revolution Surface 1. 2. Use the icon to join the Revolute and Fill type features.CATPart When applying a thickness to the joined surface.

drawings and CATIA Version 4 models in documents.doc\src\basugwd0000.Workbench Description Page 1 of 2 Workbench Description Version 5 lets you create and manage parts. Opening a specific type of document activates the workbench and the associated workbench toolbar containing all the tools you need to edit the document. This section contains the description of the icons and menus specific to the CATIA Object Manager workbenches. meaning that you can manipulate several documents at the same time. There is a specific document type for each type of data you create with Version 5. You can even view the contents of the same document in several windows at the same time. The same applies to the contents of the menu bar and the commands on pulldown menus.htm 1/30/01 . so the Version 5 application window looks a little different depending on what type of document you are editing. The main application window looks like this (click the sensitive areas to see the related documentation): file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. assemblies. These commands are discussed in greater details elsewhere in the guide. Version 5 uses a multiple document interface (MDI).

doc\src\basugwd0000.Workbench Description Page 2 of 2 The section is organized as follows: Menu Bar Standard Toolbar Knowledgeware Toolbar View Toolbar Capture Toolbar Catalog Editor Graphic Properties Toolbar Viewing and Hiding Toolbars Viewing the Commands List Specification Tree Symbols Keyboard Shortcuts file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 .

Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. File For.doc\src\basugwd0100.. For more information about the Start menu..htm 1/30/01 . New from... refer to "Accessing the Navigation Tools". The contents of the Start menu vary according to the configurations and/or products installed..... Creating New Documents Creating a New Document from an Existing One Opening Existing Documents Closing Documents Saving Existing Documents Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name Saving Documents In Other Formats Saving All Documents Save All Print.. Open.. Start File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Start The Start menu is a navigation tool intended to help you toggle between different workshops. New.Menu Bar Page 1 of 5 Infrastructure Menu Bar This section presents the main menu bar available when you run the application and before creating or opening a document.. Close Save Save As See..

Menu Bar Desk. Undo Redo/Repeat Cut Copy Paste See....... Undoing Actions Redoing and Repeating Actions Cutting and Pasting Objects Copying and Pasting Objects Cutting and Pasting Objects Copying and Pasting Objects Deleting Objects Selecting Using the Search..doc\src\basugwd0100...... Send To Using the FileDesk Workbench Transferring Version 5 Data Page 2 of 5 Edit For. Define Selection Set Links.. Storing Selections Using Selection Sets Editing Document Links Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties View file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Command Storing Selections Using Selection Sets Delete Search.. Selection Sets. Properties..htm 1/30/01 ..

Toolbars Commands List.... Render Style Navigation Mode Lighting.. Viewing and Hiding Toolbars Viewing the Commands List Setting Document Window Layout Preferences Setting Document Window Layout Preferences About the 3D Compass Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass Using the Overview on the Specification Tree Using the Geometry Overview Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area Zooming In On An Area Zooming In Zooming Out Panning Rotating Looking At Objects Turning Your Head To View An Object Zooming In Zooming Out Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane Using Standard and User-Defined Views Using Rendering Styles Navigating Setting Lighting Effects Setting Depth Effects Viewing Objects against the Ground Magnifying Hiding and Showing Objects Using the Full Screen 1/30/01 .. Geometry Specifications Compass Reset Compass Specifications Overview Geometry Overview Fit All In Zoom Area Zoom In Out Pan Rotate Modify->Look At Modify->Turn Head... Ground Magnifier.htm Page 3 of 5 See. Depth Effect. Hide/Show Full Screen file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.Menu Bar For. Zoom In....doc\src\basugwd0100. Normal View Named Views..... Zoom Out.

Running and Editing Macros Customizing Toolbars Using Visualization Filters Customizing Settings Window For.. CATIA V5 Help CATIA User Companion Contents...... Visualization Filters. See. Index and Search What's This? file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Using Knowledgeware Capabilities Capturing and Managing Images for the Album Recording. New Window Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Cascade See.doc\src\basugwd0100.... Getting Contextual Help Accessing the Online Help Library Using the What's This? Command 1/30/01 ...htm See....Menu Bar Page 4 of 5 Tools For.. Options... Formula... Using Document Windows Using Document Windows Using Document Windows Using Document Windows Help For. Image Macro Customize..

doc\src\basugwd0100.htm 1/30/01 .Menu Bar What's This? User Galaxy About CATIA V5 Page 5 of 5 Using the What's This? Command Accessing the Dassault Systèmes User Galaxy Displaying Copyright Information file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

and Copying and Pasting Objects See Undoing Actions See Recovering Last Action Undone See Using the What's This? Command .Standard Toolbar See Creating New Documents See Opening Existing Documents See Saving Existing Documents See Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings See Cutting and Pasting Objects See Copying and Pasting Objects See Cutting and Pasting Objects.

Knowledgeware Toolbar See Using Knowledgeware Capabilities See Using Knowledgeware Capabilities See the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide .

This is the default View toolbar: This is the View toolbar in Walk mode: This is the View toolbar in Fly mode: See Navigating in Fly Mode See Navigating in Fly Mode See Navigating in Walk Mode See Navigating in Examine Mode See Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area See Turning Your Head To View An Object See Navigating in Fly Mode. Navigating in Walk Mode See Navigating in Fly Mode. Navigating in Walk Mode See Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views .View Toolbar The View toolbar appears in three different configurations.

See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Using Standard Views See Panning See Rotating See Zooming In See Zooming Out See Wireframe (NHR) See Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) See Shading (SHD) See Shading with Edges (SHD+E) See Customizing the View Mode See Hiding Objects See Displaying Hidden Objects .

Capture Toolbar See Capturing Selected Areas of Images See Capturing Simple Images See Capturing Simple Images See Capturing Simple Images See Saving Images to Other Formats See Printing Images from the Album See Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only) See Capturing Simple Images .

Catalog Editor See Add a Chapter See Add a Link to Another Catalog See Add a Family See Add a Part Family See Add a Keyword See Add a Description on an End Chapter See Previewing a Catalog .

Graphic Properties Toolbar The Graphic Properties toolbar is hidden by default. See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties See Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties See Using Layers .

Click the Toolbars tab. then dock the toolbar in the same or in another location by dragging it onto the the application window border you can drag a tool icon from a workbench toolbar. 3. Currently visible toolbars are indicated by a tick symbol to the left of the toolbar name. click the toolbar you want to view or hide. Right-click any icon in any toolbar. 2. The list of current toolbars is displayed.. then toggle the Hide or Show button to hide or show the toolbar. Method 2 1. You can also drag and drop an object onto an object: for example. 2. copy a fillet on a part. . and drop it onto a selected object: this is a quicker way to run a command. Currently visible toolbars are indicated by a tick symbol to the left of the toolbar name. Note that: you can detach toolbars from the application window border by dragging the double line to the left of the toolbar: you can drag the toolbar anywhere around the screen. In the list. Select the Customize. command to display the Customize dialog box. The list of current toolbars is displayed. Select View->Toolbars..Viewing and Hiding Toolbars Method 1 1.

.

1. dialog box is displayed: 2.Viewing the Commands List This task illustrated how to access a list of all available commands... Select View -> Commands List. Help about the command is displayed in the dialog box: . Select a command in the list... The Command List.

select any command in the list. double-click the name of the command in the list. The selected command is accessed if the appropriate workbench is already activated. then type the first letter to go to the commands starting with the letter you typed. To access a command rapidly. If you know the first letter of the command.3. . With the command still selected. click OK.

to move the tree using the scrollbar when the tree is too long. A sub-product. See Insert a New Product in CATIA Product Structure User's Guide. . You can generate a number of features that are identified in the specification tree by the following icons.Understanding Specification Tree Symbols 1. open the document InstanceName. See Insert a New Component in CATIA Product Structure User's Guide. A product.CATProduct. If you want to manipulate. Standard CATIA Icons The specification tree is associated to geometry.

with a single instance which is contextual. But their first reference has only one link. Instance of a part. . You can customize External References in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Part Design. See Insert a New Part in CATIA Product Structure User's Guide. A part tree contains a Body and three Planes. the way it is organized. The brown gear signifies the second or subsequent instance of a part that is contextual. built with another part's data) in a CATProduct. For more information refer to Soft Sub-Assemblies in CATIA Product Structure User's Guide.The little wheel to the left corner of the CATProduct icon is purple . yz plane or zx plane. Constraints. see : External references branch of the part : external geometry is copied from driving parts to contextual parts that are being driven. This symbol can appear when you import this part in another CATProduct. HDirection or VDirection. Publication : a CATPart or CATProduct element is published that is to say its geometrical data are exposed. refer to : Entering the Sketcher Workbench in CATIA 's Sketcher User's Guide. A part body. xy plane. For more information about Constraints. Surface. An offset constraint. This identifies a soft sub-assembly. For more information about Sketch. This symbol means that there is a geometrical representation of the part. Origin. select the General tab and check the box Keep links with selected object. Sketch. This unique link allows you to know the name of the document (CATProduct) on which the part 's external geometry rests. A model with geometrical representation. A pad. Geometry. For contextual parts. Circle (Wireframe and surfaces features). Absolute Axis. A surface constraint. Point (Wireframe and surfaces features). every instance keeps a link with its reference. This is a part and the green gear signifies the "original" instance of a part that is contextual (driven by another part. Reference of a part. You have access to the part's data. There is a distinction between the "original" and subsequent instances of contextual parts because the geometrical definition of contextual parts (Skillets) is dependant upon neighboring components in the Assembly. For more information refer to Managing a Product Publication in CATIA Assembly User's Guide.

. A broken link. No visualization of the product or the part. select the Product Structure tab and check the box entitled Do not activate default shapes on open. A broken link. You can visualize them in the document ChangeInstanceName2. You can activate or deactivate Shape representation in Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure. The geometry of the component disappears. you can generate a number of features that are identified in the specification tree by the following icons. The geometry of the component disappears.2. its references are missing but the user is able to find them back. The access to this product and the information about its constraints cannot be retrieved. A broken constraint. The access to this product is impossible because the link with the root document has been lost.CATProduct. Icons reflecting an incident in the geometry building When there is an incident in a CATIA document. The product's reference cannot be found. The product is downloaded.

you can put the product in the SHOW or NO SHOW area. see Creating a New Workbench Document. The Sketcher symbol is by default in NO SHOW. documents under it. a dimension problem when creating a fillet). before returning into the Part Design Workbench in which the icon finds back its original shape.A deactivated constraint (an offset constraint). A broken body. But you can reactivate the Sketcher representation by clicking in the contextual menu or by using the Hide/Show icon . By clicking in the CATProduct's contextual menu or by using the Hide/Show icon . Component to be updated. By double-clicking on this symbol you can return into the Sketcher workbench. By this means the geometry lighter. As a consequence. There has been an incident during the building of the part (for instance. A constraint to be updated (an offset constraint). You can also see this symbol when you create a part in the Sketcher workbench. For more information about the activation of a specific workbench within product structure. A product in NO SHOW. the CATPart is in the NO SHOW space as well : For more information about the SHOW/NO SHOW modes. the . . see Displaying Hidden Objects.

Escape Interrupt the current command F1 Get contextual online help Shift + F1 Get help on toolbar icons Toggle the specification tree overview on Shift + F2 and off Toggle specification tree display on and F3 off Alt + F8 Run macros Activate the graph is the model is active Shift + F3 and inversely Home Display the top of the graph End Display the bottom of the graph Page Up Relocate the graph one page up Page Down Relocate the graph one page down Ctrl + Page Up Zoom In the graph Ctrl + Page Down Zoom Out the graph Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of Up arrow a page to the top Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of Down arrow a page to the bottom Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of Left arrow a page to the left Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of Right arrow a page to the right Ctrl + Tab Swap active document windows Another useful shortcut Clicking an icon lets you run the command associated with that icon only once. .. double-clicking an icon lets you use the associated command as many times as you want without having to click on the icon several times. However.Keyboard Shortcuts Use this keyboard key (or combination).. To...

Customizing Customizing Toolbars Customizing Settings .

Customizing Toolbars and Workbenches Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping Managing User-Defined Toolbars Creating User-Defined Workbenches Customizing Command Properties Customizing Icon Size and Tooltips .

command to display the Customize dialog box. The dialog box contains the following tabs: Start Menu: customizes the Start menu and workbench access icons (as described in "Accessing the Navigation Tools") User Workbenches: lets you create your own workbenches Toolbars: lists the currently visible toolbars (default) Commands: lists the commands you can drag and drop onto a toolbar.. Select the Customize. For example. . Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars. and dragging a command away from a toolbar to delete the command. 1.Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping This task shows how to customize a toolbar by dragging and dropping a command onto the toolbar to add the command.. the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open: 2.

selecting the Edit category in the Categories list displays in the commands list all the commands likely to appear on the Edit menu. command has been selected. 3. In this example.Options: contains general customization options. the Capture. For example. You can then add macros to a toolbar. . Click the Commands tab to list the commands available. With the Toolbars tab open. 4.. the macro names are also listed. the toolbar the icon belongs to.. along with a short help message explaining the role of the icon. in the toolbars list. Note that the icon for the command is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box. allowing you to identify it. The category All Commands lists all commands available. Double-clicking any toolbar also highlights the toolbar name. double-clicking any icon highlights. You can also select the Select command. Select a command from the command list. If you created macros. The Categories list allows you to filter the listed commands by category: the category is the name of the menu in the menu bar.

You can also drag and drop commands which do not have icons: in this case.5. drag the command and drop it back inside the list of commands in the Customize dialog box. For more information about settings.CATSettings file: you recover it if you exit and restart. command has been added to the standard toolbar: 7. Drop the command onto the desired toolbar. . In our example.. the icon for the Image Capture.. refer to "About Settings" . the command name appears in the toolbar. To delete a command from a toolbar using the drag-and-drop mechanism. Your customization is stored automatically in the FrameConfig. 6. Drag the command from the command list to the toolbar to which you want to add the command.

3. and provides the commands for: creating new toolbars renaming toolbars deleting toolbars restoring the original content of selected toolbars. button.. the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open: 2. restore.Managing User-Defined Toolbars This tasks shows how to create. To create a new toolbar. rename. and click the Toolbars tab if it is not already activated.. hide and show user-defined toolbars 1.. delete. click the New. and an empty toolbar appears: . The New Toolbar dialog box appears with a default toolbar name (NewToolBar001). Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars and associated commands. command to display the Customize dialog box. Select the Customize.. The Toolbars tab lists the currently available toolbars. For example.

The new toolbar is added to the bottom of the list. then click OK.4. Enter the name of the new toolbar. In our example. the toolbar "MyToolBar" has been added to the list: . and an empty toolbar is added to the right of the main application window.

the toolbar "MyToolBar" contains three icons: .5. In our example. Click the Command tab and drag and drop commands onto the new toolbar.

button and enter the new name. then click OK. select a toolbar. . button restores the original contents of all toolbars. then click OK. The Restore All. 9. To restore the original contents of a toolbar. click the Delete. select a toolbar. To hide or display a user-defined toolbar. button. 8. 7..6. click the Toolbar tab again.. then click OK. click the Restore. click the Toolbar tab again. select a toolbar... click the Toolbar tab again. select a toolbar. and click the Hide or Show button to toggle toolbar display on or off. then click OK... click the Toolbar tab again. To rename a user-defined toolbar. click the Rename.. button. To delete a user-defined toolbar..

You can select a workbench then click the Ctrl. command to display the Customize dialog box..Creating User-Defined Workbenches This task explains how to create and customize workbenches. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars. For example. 3. . Shift... buttons to include them in the shortcut displayed in the Accelerator field. the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open: 2. 1. Alt or Other. Select the Customize..

option will be available only if there is an active workbench: if no document is open. the New. option to display the New User Workbench dialog box: . 4. button lets you see the list of available keys. Note that the New... Click the New... Click the User Workbenches tab. for example like this: Ctrl+. Just select a key then click the Add button. 5. The shortcut you define will appear besides the workbench name in the Start menu... Whichever method you use. option will not be available..The Other.. the corresponding choice is displayed in the Accelerator field. or double-click a key.

and activates "My Workbench". The New Toolbar dialog box and an empty toolbar are displayed: . deactivates the current workbench..6. . then click the OK button. then click the New... Click the Toolbars tab. option to start adding toolbars to "My Workbench". let's assume the name of the user workbench is "My Workbench". Clicking the OK button adds the workbench name to the list. represented by the icon top right: 7... Enter the name for your workbench. In our example..

8. The contents of the toolbar are added to your empty toolbar. 10. a CATPart document was open when we created "My Workbench". the Toolbars list contains the toolbars belonging to the selected workbench. Select a toolbar. Select a workbench from the Workbench list. 9.In the New Toolbar dialog box: the Workbenches list contains a list of all workbenches related to the current working context: in our example. Name the new toolbar to be included in your workbench. for example: . The toolbars belonging to the selected workbench are displayed in the Toolbars list. so the list contains all workbenches that could possibly be activated in a CATPart document.

. and close the Customize dialog box. Click OK.11. until you activate another workbench. You can then drag your new toolbar and dock it to the right of the application window so that your workshop now looks like this: Note: your user-defined workbench will remain active after it is created.

. we selected the Product Structure. In the example below. the Workbenches toolbar will look like this: Just click one of the icons to start the corresponding workbench. which appears when you start a session. Thus. This toolbar is activated when you select Workbenches from the toolbar list: The Workbenches toolbar displays the workbenches selected as favorites in the Start Menu tab of the Customize dialog box. Rendering and Catalog Editor workbenches as favorites. You can also insert your favorites workbenches in the Workbenches toolbar. or when you click the icon representing the current workbench. the list of workbench icons accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon.Your new workbench is added to: the top of the Start menu (and to the Favorites list in the Start menu tab) the "Welcome to V5" dialog box.

For example.. Select the Customize. . the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open: 2.Customizing Command Properties This task explains how to customize command properties by assigning keyboard shortcuts or icons to the commands.. 1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars and associated commands. The dialog box contains three tabs: Start Menu: customizes the Start menu and workbench access icons (as described in "Accessing the Navigation Tools") User Workbenches: lets you create your own workbenches Toolbars: lists the currently visible toolbars (default) Commands: lists the commands you can drag and drop onto a toolbar. command to display the Customize dialog box.

4. Select a category (menu name).Options: contains general customization options.. The Command Properties frame is added to the bottom of the dialog box: . then double-click a command. button. Click the Commands tab to list the commands available.. or select it and click the Show Properties. 3.

5. for example like this: Ctrl+. you just have to type c:alias_name in the PowerInput field to run the command. The User Alias field lets you assign an alias to the selected command. if needed. Shift or Other buttons to include them in the shortcut displayed in the Accelerator field. The Meta button is now named "Other". 6. click the Other. 9. Click the button to the right of the Icon option (bottom right). then browse to select the appropriate icon. Whichever method you use. the corresponding choice is displayed in the Accelerator field. 7. Enter a new name for the command. After clicking the Close button. in the title field. If you want to use another key. 8. button to see the list of available keys. . Click the Ctrl. or double-click a key. This displays the Icon Browser which lets you access all the graphic icons installed with the Version 5 software.. Select a key then click the Add button. For example: enter cap in the User Alias field then enter c:cap in the PowerInput field press ENTER The Capture command starts..

12.. and the Show Properties.10. Click the Reset. You can: restore the original settings of the present command or restore the original settings of all commands in the present category.: 11. Click an icon and click the Close button (if you used the Icon Browser). button changes to Hide Properties. The icon is now displayed for the command in the Commands tab... button to access the reset options... .. Click the Close button.

Select the Customize. Click the Options tab: ... 1. 3. Right-click any icon in any toolbar to display the list of toolbars and associated commands. the following toolbar list appears when no documents are open: 2. command to display the Customize dialog box. For example.Customizing Icon Size and Tooltips This task explains how to customize general options.

Check the Tooltips option to switch tooltips on or off. The default icon size is large. Uncheck this checkbox if you want the icons to be normal size. Tooltips are short help messages displayed when you point to icons. 5. Check the Large Icons option if you want large icons displayed. as explained in "Displaying Tooltips and Help Messages" .4.

Customizing Settings About Settings Locking Settings General Infrastructure Mechanical Design Shape Analysis AEC Plant NC Manufacturing Digital Mockup Equipments and Systems .

... part and print settings.. application window customization. etc..CATSettings. Permanent setting files are identified by the suffix: *. What Do Settings Files Contain? Temporary settings contain settings of a temporary nature (album screen captures. Deleting either types of files deletes your customization.) CATTemp contains two folders or directories: Album: contains screen captures created using the Tools->Image->Capture.. Temporary settings are created in a location referenced by the CATTemp variable. command CNext01. and are created in a location referenced by the CATUserSettingPath variable.. command. For example. background colors. roll file information.About Settings Types of Data Created by Version 5 Version 5 creates two types of data: application data contained in the documents you create and setting files which are non-editable There are two types of settings: temporary settings permanent settings.roll: roll file. command which displays the Options dialog box: . Permanent setting files store customization you perform mainly using the various tabs provided by the Tools->Options.. How Do You Specify Settings? You specify settings using the Tools->Options..

.

To access the settings for a specific configuration. The category names are the same as those listed on the Start menu.The left-hand column contains a list of categories used for organizing the different groups of settings. etc. The following table will help you determine where your settings are now located: Windows NT VARIABLE CATUserSettingPath CATTemp CATCache CATReport CATErrorLog CATMetasearchPath CATW3PublishPath V5R4 C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\CATSettings C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\CATTemp C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\CATCache C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\CATReport C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\CATTemp\error.) to be still stored in the user profile. The mechanism used is the CSIDL value mechanism. There are general settings for all configurations and products.log C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\CATTemp C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\CATTemp V5R5 C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp Obsolete C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATReport C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\error. and settings for each type of configuration installed. Where Are Settings Files Located on Windows? The location of settings files on Windows platforms is inspired by the general data and settings management requirements operating on the Windows 2000 platform. user settings and computer settings. but prevents them from roaming (CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA). click the "+" to display the subcategories.log C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp Windows 2000 . which provides an underlying infrastructure allowing you to separate user data. This implementation allows: your permanent settings (CATSettings) to roam as part of your user profile (CSIDL_APPDATA) your temporary settings (CATTemp. Clicking on the subcategory displays the settings tabs for that subcategory.

log C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp CATErrorLog CATMetasearchPath CATW3PublishPath Windows 95 and 98 VARIABLE CATUserSettingPath CATTemp CATCache CATReport CATErrorLog CATMetasearchPath CATW3PublishPath V5R4 C:\Windows\CATSettings C:\Windows\CATTemp C:\Windows\CATCache C:\Windows\CATReport C:\Windows\CATTemp\error.log C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\CATTemp C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\CATTemp V5R5 C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp Obsolete C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATReport C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\error.VARIABLE CATUserSettingPath CATTemp CATCache CATReport V5R4 C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\CATSettings C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\CATTemp C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\CATCache C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\CATReport C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\CATTemp\error.log C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp CSIDL Values in Environment Variable Paths .log C:\Windows\CATTemp C:\Windows\CATTemp V5R5 C:\Windows\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp Obsolete C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATReport C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\error.

we recommend the following settings to enhance performance: General category. The values: C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data (Windows NT) C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data (Windows 2000) C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application Data (Windows 95 and 98) are the defaults on these Windows platforms for the CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA values. Administrator Settings If you start a session in administrator mode using a specific environment.The values: C:\Winnt\Profiles\user\Application Data (Windows NT) C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data (Windows 2000) C:\Windows\Application Data (Windows 95 and 98) are the defaults on these Windows platforms for the CSIDL_APPDATA values. Performance tab: deactivate occlusion culling level of details (static) = 1 to 1. However. Visualization tab: deactivate the graduated color background deactivate preselect highlighting deactivate the manipulation bounding box . also in your home directory. refer to Locking Settings.2 level of details (while moving) = 10 to 11 General category. Location of Settings Files on UNIX Permanent settings are stored in the CATSettings directory in your home directory. For full details how to do so. Default Settings and Recommended Settings Default settings are provided by applications. temporary settings are stored in the CATTemp directory. you can lock settings so that other users running a session with the same environment inherit those settings and cannot change them.

on all tabs. Set the desired reset option. button to let you reset default settings.. Cache Management tab: work with cache management cache size = 600MB Selecting View->Render Style->Shading to work with shading without edges will also enhance performance. command provides a Reset. and for all categories. Accessing Settings Without Running a Session You do not need to start a session to be able to access your settings. How Do I Reset My Default Settings? The Tools->Options.... . The options are as follows: this page: resets the default settings for all options on the current tab the pages of the selected workbench: resets the default settings for all options on all categories in a selected workbench (included in a solution) the pages of the selected solution: resets the default settings for all options on all categories of a selected solution the pages of the selected solution and associated workbenches: resets the default settings for all options on all categories of a selected solution and associated workbenches (included in a solution) all the pages: resets the default settings for all options. Click the Reset. button. The Reset dialog box appears: 2.Product category. 1...

This function is useful for administrators because it allows you to set up user settings without having to start an interactive session first. On UNIX. the default folder is: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06\OS_a\code\bin where "OS_a" is: intel_a (Windows NT and Windows 2000 platform) win_a (Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 platforms). Enter the command: CATOptionsMgt The Options dialog box is displayed. . On Windows. the default folder is: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B06/OS_a/code/bin/ where "OS_a" is: aix_a hpux_a irix_a solaris_a.1. Specify your settings as usual. 2. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

Locate the following environment variable: CATReferenceSettingPath Note that the default setting for this variable is empty.htm 1/30/01 . or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. there is "zero administration" of settings: user settings are stored in the CATSettings environment as explained in About Settings. Scenario 1: Locking Settings for the Default Global Environment 1. Do not confuse running a session in administrator mode (a Version 5 concept) with logging on as administrator (a system concept). Note. 2.B06 environment to display the corresponding environment variables. Select the Start->Programs-> CATIA ->Tools->Environment Editor V5R6 command to display the Environment Editor. This is a useful procedure if you interested in locking settings. Double-click the CATIA .Locking Settings Page 1 of 7 Locking Settings This task explains how to run a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings so that other users running a session with the same environment inherit those settings and cannot change them. You must belong to the Administrators group. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. however. 4.V5R6. The scenario described reflects the Windows platform only. but the feature is also supported on UNIX. The scenario walks you through a procedure useful for locking settings for users of the default environment created at installation. but do not want to multiply environments on the same computer. By default. You will see an environment with the following name: CATIA 3. you need to log on as administrator because you are going to modify the default global environment (V5R6).doc\src\basugcu0205. Log on as an administrator. that not all settings can be locked. For the purposes of this particular scenario only.

for example: CATReferenceSettingPath E:\home\users\administrator\LockSettings Page 2 of 7 then click Set. This folder will contain the setting locks you will create later. Reset the variable so that it points to an existing folder.doc\src\basugcu0205. 6. The "Options" dialog box is displayed. command.V5R6.B06 -admin or: cnext -admin A session is started using the default global environment.Locking Settings Note that the default setting for this variable is empty. then select the Tools->Options. and a message informs you that you are running in administration mode. The folder access rights must be set up for read access only for end users.htm 1/30/01 . then OK to save and exit the environment editor. Click OK in the message box. Run a session using the following command: cnext -env CATIA . 5. and read/write for the person creating the setting locks. Note that a lock symbol like this General tab: appears opposite each option in the file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 7...

click on one of the appropriate lock symbols. This is particularly useful for administrators who need to identify which lock settings are active when the are multiple levels of concatenated locks.doc\src\basugcu0205.htm 1/30/01 . To set the locks.Locking Settings Page 3 of 7 Pointing the cursor to a lock symbol displays a message indicating the name of the folder/directory containing the lock settings. click the lock symbol for the User Interface Style option: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. 8. For example.

9. The lock settings are stored in the folder referenced by the CATReferenceSettingPath environment variable you reset earlier. 10. Because the user interface style was set to CATIA .Locking Settings Page 4 of 7 The lock symbol now looks like this: . Click OK to confirm.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugcu0205. An end user who starts a session with the normal startup commands (but not the cnext -env CATIA . will see this after selecting the Tools->Options.B06 -admin command) and using the same environment. end users running this environment will not be able to change this setting... command: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.V5R6. Exit the session.P2.

P1".doc\src\basugcu0205. Scenario 2: Locking Settings for User Environments You do not necessarily have to log on as administrator to customize an environment and set locks on settings: the lock mechanism is not limited to the global environment only. When locking settings on the Licensing tab.htm 1/30/01 . file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. you can lock access to individual configuration and/or product licenses. Now. Because the user interface style was set to "CATIA .P2".Locking Settings Page 5 of 7 The lock symbol now looks like this: . end users running this environment will not be able to change this setting to "CATIA . before you could only lock all the licenses together.

other end users starting a session on the same computer.doc\src\basugcu0205. start a session using the command: cnext -env myenv -admin where "myenv" is the name of the user environment. will inherit the locked settings. Scenario 3: Concatenating Settings Locks Different users may want to set different types of locks at different levels for a variety of reasons. end users of the same environment will inherit the all the locks set by those administrators.Locking Settings lock mechanism is not limited to the global environment only. Then.htm 1/30/01 . you must concatenate several CATReferenceSettingPath values as illustrated below: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. If several users set locks in different folders using the same environment. then lock settings in the same way as described in their first scenario. with the normal startup commands and using the same environment. Page 6 of 7 End users can customize their own user environments to store their own settings in a location referenced by the CATReferenceSettingPath environment variable. To implement this solution.

Locking Settings Page 7 of 7 In this example: one administrator (starting in administration mode) locks settings in "Environment 1" at the site level on the same site. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugcu0205. two administrators (also starting in administration mode) in two different workshops lock settings in "Environment 2" and "Environment 3" respectively users 1 and 2 run a Version 5 session with "Environment 2" and inherit the setting locks in "Environment 1" and "Environment 2" respectively users 3 and 4 run a Version 5 session with "Environment 3" and inherit the setting locks in "Environment 1" and "Environment 3" respectively.

General General Document Licensing Statistics Display Compatibility Parameters Devices and Virtual Reality .

Select the Tools->Options... if you exit a document without first saving it you cannot retrieve the data lost.General This task explains how to customize general-purpose settings.. and is available for both CATIA .P2 users only. However. Save The option Automatic save every .P2: sets the P2 user interface style. Select the General category (in the tree to the left). 2.P1 and CATIA . ..P2 users CATIA . When you restart a session. and is available for CATIA . you are prompted to retrieve the session data saved prior to the crash. Note that the automatic save can only be used to retrieve data following a crash. minutes allows you to specify a save frequency other than the default frequency (30 minutes). command. then the General tab: User Interface Style CATIA .P1: sets the P1 user interface style. 1.

the child documents it points to are also loaded. CATIA The Doc Installation Path field displays the current location of the online documentation. Conferencing is available on the Windows and UNIX platforms. the online documentation is located in: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B06doc Enter the path where the documentation is installed. For more information.Referenced Documents By default. A typical case of this would be a CATProduct or CATDrawing document. For more information. modification and deletion) 2D annotations (linked to cameras) creation. The actions replicated during a conference are the following: workbench transition object selection viewpoint modification (zoom. UNC (Universal Naming Convention) syntax is also supported. This may be useful for reasons of performance and efficiency. i. the child documents.e. If you open a father document containing unloaded child documents you can load one or more of these documents using the File->Desk command (see Using the FileDesk Workbench). and is based on two underlying prerequisites: NetMeeting (provided with Windows) the Communications Backbone (provided with the Version 5 infrastructure). This means that when a father document is loaded. By default. required for conferencing on UNIX. However. only the father document is actually loaded when you open it. modification and deletion. Refer to "Doc Installation Path" for more details. you will be able to run conferencing sessions: a conference host initiates a conferences and invites other users to join the conference as guests. the Load referenced documents option is checked. if you install the documentation on the network. the father document pointing to CATPart or model documents i. Conferencing If you installed a license for a DMU Navigator product. check or uncheck the Load referenced documents option then reopen the father document. you can map a drive and enter the appropriate path in this field. You must close the father document. rotation) 3D annotations (creation.e. Once a father document has been loaded you cannot load or unload its child documents as changing the option cannot apply retroactively. refer to "Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects" and "Dragging and Dropping Objects onto Objects" in this guide. Enable Drag_Drop Enables dragging and dropping in the viewers. . if you uncheck this option. Note that. refer to the DMU Navigator Users Guide.

3. Click OK to confirm. . Note: this drag and drop option does not apply to toolbar customization.

. Select the Tools->Options. click the Document tab: Document Environments . command. In the General category.Document This task explains how to manage document environments as well as linked document localization. 2. 1..

thus avoiding to search for and modify manually any occurrence of this path. When you access the Document tab. the Allowed and Not allowed buttons are grayed and thus cannot be selected by the user. File->Save. Setting the DLName environment as Current 3. A DLName is a name which stands for a folder. it may be defined as a logical name used for paths. buttons are active.) that will be displayed when accessing your documents Allowed: indicates that the environment may be set as "Current" or "Not allowed" Not allowed: indicates that the environment may not be set as "Current". The administrator may also define the folders in which users are allowed to work. In other words. File->Open. A document environment may be assigned one of the following states: Current: sets the selected environment as the current document environment and defines the dialog box (i. two document environments are displayed: Folder and DLName.. etc. Each modification of a path impacts the DLName. select "DLName". Edit->Links.e. In the Document Environments column. You have to assign it the "Allowed" state before selecting it as your "Current" environment. DLName is now defined as your current document environment as indicated by the "Current" value in the State column. Folder: default document environment in which the dialog access the folders containing the documents DLName: document environment that lets you access the folders containing the documents using DLNames.. Defining DLNames . If your administrator has locked the document environments. Only the Current and Configure.The Document Environment is a way of accessing your documents. 4. Select successively the Allowed and Current buttons.

5. you have to create the DLNames you will use.Now that you have set the DLName environment as your current environment.. Click the Configure. Click the Add button to create a new DLName. A default name and a default folder are assigned to the new DLName as shown below: .. button to open the Configure dialog box which lets you add or remove DLNames: 6.

click OK to close the Configure dialog box then OK to exit the Document tab. When logged on as administrator. Once you have defined your DLNames. When you finished adding DLNames. You may also choose a folder by clicking the Browse.. . 7. refer to Localizing Linked Documents further in this task. you are allowed to put them in a search order. 8. button..You can modify the name and folders by editing the cell in the list. Note: an "Orange" DLName state turns "Red" for the user which means that the DLName may neither be modified nor removed by the user. you can Lock or Unlock a DLName. Locking a DLName changes its state from "Green" to "Orange" (and inversely when you unlock the DLName). For more information.

refer to Opening Existing Documents in this guide. For more information. the following panel displays: The "Look in" pulldown list only contains the DLNames you defined in the previous steps. Select the desired File name and type from the list 3. 2. command.DLName Integration This task aims at giving you one example of the DLName integration with the File->Open command.. Click OK to open the document.. Instead of the usual File Selection dialog box. for instance. select the document type. . Click the Open icon or select the File->Open. Note: this File Selection dialog box is very similar to the File Selection displayed when opening existing documents since you can. 1.

command then in the General category.. The following dialog box appears: . This task shows you how to define a personal strategy for link resolution... The primary aim of the Linked Documents Localization.. 1. Its purpose is different from that of the Edit -> Links command (see Editing Document Links). click the Document tab. etc. function is to resolve document links and to manage in an easy way the strategy that will be used to locate your linked documents.DLNames are also integrated in the following commands: File->Save All File->Save All As File->Desk File->Send To Edit->Links Catalogs Search order ("Other folders" option). refer to the corresponding task in this guide by clicking one of the above hyperlinks. For more information on these commands. Select the Tools->Options. Localizing Linked Documents The "Linked Document Localization" replaces the "Search Order" command.

The Activate column indicates whether a strategy has been activated ("Yes" value) or deactivated (blank value). . the path used when you saved your document Folder of the pointing document: provides the current folder of your document Relative folder: provides a sub-folder with the same starting path Other folders: provides a user-defined list of folders ENOVIA5 (appropriate license is required) ENOVIA VPM database (appropriate license is required).The Link resolution strategy column contains the various strategies you can choose to localize your linked documents. all buttons except Configure... If your administrator has locked the Linked Document Localization. Choose a strategy from the proposed list: Folder of the link: provides the absolute path which was saved in the link. are grayed. i.e. 2.

. Click one of the buttons displayed in the right part of the dialog box. For more information on managing document environments.. These buttons are grayed out depending on the strategy you selected: "Activate" lets you activate a strategy that has been deactivated "Desactivate" enables you to deactivate a strategy "Up" and "Down" let you customize the strategy order "Configure" is available for the Other folders strategy only. refer to the Document Environments part in this task. .3. we are working in a Folder environment." button. a dialog box appears with a look depending on your current document environment. Here is a comparison between the former Search Order command and "Linked Documents Localization": Tools->Search Order Tools->Options->Document->Linked Document Localization = "Folder of the link" first = "Other folders" first = Deactivate "Other folders" = Only "Other folders" is activated Note: "Relative folder" is used for catalog component links. In our example. When you click the "Configure.

Folder environment

4. Select a directory in the "Look in" list then click the Add button. This puts the directory into the Search order list as shown below:

The icon lets you access your various directories and the move up in the directory hierarchy.

icon lets you

You do not need to enter the whole path in the "Look in" field. Just enter the main directory and press Enter. Any subdirectories are then displayed in the list. Select the appropriate subdirectory and click the Add button.

Note that you can use the multiselection to add your folders to the search order:

The Search order list is intended to contain the directories in which your linked documents are saved. You may wish to use different search order lists for particular uses and for different circumstances. 5. Continue adding your most frequently used directories to the list. When you have finished click the Export... button and save the list as a .txt file in the appropriate location in the Export Search Order dialog box:

6. You can make as many lists as you like. When you want to use one of these lists just click the Import... button. The Import Search order dialog box appears.

Right-clicking on any of the .txt files allows you to edit these files. If you then click the Open button the contents of the .txt file you chose is placed in the list and replaces the elements previously contained, if any. The Import Add... button lets you import and add a search order contained in a text file to the current Search order list. 7. The search order lists can easily be updated. To change the priority of a directory i.e. move it up or down in the list, select it then click the corresponding button: Up or Down. 8. To remove a directory, simply select it and click the Remove button. The Remove, Up and Down buttons are activated only when an item in the list is selected.

Licensing
Refer to "Reserving Licenses Using the License Manager" for detailed information about how to reserve configuration and product licenses using the License Manager.

Statistics
This task explains how to obtain workbench use statistics, to log the time spent in workbenches. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. Select the General category, then the Statistics tab.

3. Check the Workbench check box. There are two log display modes: File: the log is written to the file whose default name is Workbench.log, when you exit the session, in the location pointed to by the CATErrorLog variable. Consequently, the file is written by default to:
CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\Statistics\Workbench.log

Console: the log is written to a window. There are two log update modes: Add: the log is written to the existing log Session: the existing log is overwritten by the log of the current session.

The log can be formatted or non-formatted.
Example of formatted traces:
them=WORKBENCH:time=Fri Sep 22 16:55:33 2000:elps=0,000000:cpus=0,000000:Session=Start:User=EGD:Host=LARONDE them=WORKBENCH:time=Fri Sep 22 17:04:17 2000:elps=15,000000:cpus=15,000000:Session=Start:User=EGD:Host=LARONDE them=WORKBENCH:time=Fri Sep 22 18:18:45 2000:elps=15,000000:cpus=15,000000:Session=Start:User=EGD:Host=LARONDE them=WORKBENCH:time=Fri Sep 22 18:18:45 2000:elps=6047,000000:cpus=1750,000000:Workbench=CATStCLA:NLS=FreeStyle them=WORKBENCH:time=Fri Sep 22 18:18:51 2000:elps=3938,000000:cpus=1015,000000:Workbench=CATShapeDesignWorkbench:NLS=Shape Design Workbench

Example of non-formatted traces:
WORKBENCH:Fri Sep 22 18:22:17 2000:16,000000:15,000000:Start:EGD:LARONDE WORKBENCH:Fri Sep 22 18:22:17 2000:3703,000000:1671,000000:CATStCLA:FreeStyle WORKBENCH:Fri Sep 22 18:22:21 2000:3125,000000:671,000000:CATCloudEditorWorkbench:Digitized Shape Editor

Note that:

Workbench = internal workbench name NLS = NLS name of the workbench (the name which appears in the Start menu). When you change an option, exit the session and restart to take your settings into account.

Display
Navigation Performance Thickness Tree Visualization

Customizing Navigation Settings
This task explains how to customize display navigation settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General category, select the Display sub-category then the Navigation tab:

The Navigation tab lets you customize:

Preselect in geometry view: activates preselection highlighting. As you point to objects, different parts of the objects are highlighted in the geometry area, and the object name is highlighted in the specification tree.

Display preselection navigator after ... second(s): sets the amount of time, in seconds, which elapses before the preselection navigator appears after pointing at an object. Refer to "Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator" for more information about how to use the preselection navigator. For more information about navigating in fly mode, refer to "Navigating in Fly Mode".

Highlight faces and edges: controls the way faces and edges are prehighlighted and highlighted. How elements are prehighlighted and highlighted: is determined by whether you are in Design mode (editing an element in the context of an assembly) or in Visualization mode and varies according to the current visualization mode: shading with edges. shading, wireframe (NHR), dynamic hidden line removal (HRD). Note that some minor differences in the way elements are highlighted are noticeable using the HRD mode.

The default prehighlight and highlight colors are different, and can be customized using the Visualization tab. By default, faces and edges are highlighted. Depending on the element type, elements may or may not be displayed using the Z-buffer.

The following examples use the shading mode. When you are editing an object, a selected face is highlighted like this:

... and a selected edge is highlighted like this:

If you select the Pad or the PartBody in the specification tree, the whole object is highlighted like this:

If you are in Visualization mode in an assembly, the whole object is highlighted. Highlight bounding box: if you use the bounding box, this option highlights the bounding box when you point to it. Display manipulation bounding box: when clicking on an object, displays a box around the selected object if it uses manipulators:

Objects using manipulators can be manipulated by the 3D compass . For more information about manipulating objects using the 3D compass, refer to "Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass".

Limit display of manipulators on individual elements in multi-selection to ... elements: sets a limit on the number of elements selected in multi-selection mode (using the selection trap) on which manipulators can be displayed. You can select more elements than the limit (for example, by using the CTRL key to extend the selection), but any elements selected over the limit cannot be manipulated. This option is not activated when working in a 3D context. It is only activated using the Drafting applications, which often require the selection of large numbers of 2D elements, and only applies to those 2D objects which have handles (for example, texts and arrows).

Gravitational effects when navigating: fixes the X, Y or Z axis during navigation. While turning in Fly mode, this creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with respect to the fixed axis, as in a real plane. Animation during viewpoint navigation: set this option if you want viewpoint changes in certain contexts to be animated. To see an example of the effect of this option, check the option, then select a plane and click the Sketcher icon. The selected plane is slowly rotated until parallel to the screen just like during an animation. If you do not check this option, the selected plane is set parallel to the screen immediately (without the animation effect). Collision detection enabled: when flying and walking, detects if you collide with an object, so that you bounce off the object instead of going through it. Mouse Sensitivity: sets the mouse sensitivity when flying and walking: if you set a low value, pointing the cursor produces only slow, minor changes in direction; if you set a high value, pointing the cursor produces rapid, significant changes in direction. 3. Click OK to confirm, or Reset... and OK again to reset default settings.

Performance
This task explains how to customize display performance settings. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General category, click the Display category then the Performance tab:

Occlusion Culling Click "Occlusion culling enabled" to activate occlusion culling (for DMU Navigator). Occlusion culling improves display performance by avoiding redisplay of hidden elements, particularly useful when viewing highly compartmented scenes such as plants and buildings.

3D Accuracy and 2D Accuracy The accuracy setting controls the tessellation of surfaces (the surfaces of your geometry are built using a mesh of polygons). You have two choices: Fixed: sets a fixed sag value for calculating tessellation on all objects, which does not vary with object size: a low value (close to 1) means that a very fine mesh is used to render surfaces, but the drawback is that geometry will be redrawn more slowly when using the viewing tools a high value (close to 10) means that a very coarse mesh is used, but the advantage is that geometry will be redrawn more quickly.

Proportional to element size Tessellation is calculated according to object size: the larger the object, the coarser the tessellation. For the same sag value, the tessellation on small objects will always be finer than on large objects. The sag value used to calculate the tessellation of each object is calculated is as follows:
sag x radius of sphere/100

where: "sag" is the sag value you set using the slider (between 0.1 and 1) "radius of sphere" is the radius of a sphere encompassing the object entirely (this value is obviously higher on larger objects).

The preview area to the right shows you the effect of each setting. 2D accuracy settings are the same as for 3D. Level of Details (P2 only) You do not always need to view a high level of detail in your geometry all the time. You can use the Static and When Moving settings to add or remove display quality: Static: even if you do not want to move geometry, it is often useful to remove details you do not need to see. Set a low value if you want to see all the details, or a high value to remove details. While Moving: you will be able to move large parts more quickly if you set While Moving to a high value. When you release the mouse after moving the part, the normal level of detail will be redisplayed. In both cases, the higher the value, the lower the level of detail. Normally, you set Static to a low value, and While Moving to a high value. The added value is increased display performance.

Note that if you are using the Level of Details option with product structure or DMU Navigator functions, you must activate the cache for your LOD settings to be taken into account.

Transparency Quality Low (Screen Door): similar to viewing an object through a mesh or a screen. Use this setting when you need to look at objects through another transparent object. This mode is also recommended for increased display performance. When checked, the transparency is not impacted whatever value you set (between 1 and 255). High (Alpha Blending): similar to looking through clear glass. Use this setting when you need to view several transparent objects located at different depths of a scene. For example, looking through a car windscreen at other opaque objects inside the car. Note, however, that this mode is computation-intensive and consequently has an adverse affect on display performance. When checked, the transparency is impacted according to the value you set. Note that you also need to set the transparency coefficient on selected objects using the Edit->Properties command or Properties command on the contextual menu, by dragging the Transparency slider on the Graphic tab. Refer to Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties for more information.

Frames per second Check the Activate button if you want to control the minimum number of frames per second (frame rate) during animations (zooming, moving, flying,... etc.). The frame rate varies from 1 to 30. Setting a low frame rate keeps a maximum number of details visible, but animations are less smooth and fluid; setting a high frame rate limits visible details, but provides smoother, more fluid animations. This option is particularly useful, for example, in Fly mode: when flying within large objects, you may not need to see all the details, but you want to navigate through the object in as smooth a manner as possible.

Show Outline (wherever possible) This option is useful if you always want to display outlines for parts created from surfaces of revolution, for example, shafts, and cylinders. This setting determines whether you see outlines when using the NHR and Shading + Edges modes.

Whereas edge display is computed by your workstation's graphic adapter, outline display is computed by the display software. Note that, in large assemblies, displaying outlines may affect display performance. You may want to switch outline display off in this case.

Show Hidden Edges (whenever possible) Displays or hides the hidden edges of selected objects.

For example, when the hidden edges of this object are not displayed, it looks like this:

.. and like this when the hidden edges are displayed:

3. Click OK to confirm.

Thickness
This task explains how to set thickness properties. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. 2. In the General catagory, click the Display sub-category then the Thickness tab:

3. In the Index column, select a thickness type from the 63 values contained in the list. 4. If necessary, modify the Size in pixels or in millimeters by selecting the value to be modified then clicking it once. The Size in pixels reflects the result displayed on screen and the Size in mm corresponds to the printed version.

You cannot assign a size greater than 16 pixels. 5. Click OK to confirm.

Setting Specification Tree Options
This task explains how to set specification tree display options. 1. Select the Tools->Options... command. The Options dialog box appears with the General category selected in the left-hand column. 2. In the Display sub-category, select the Tree tab to display the document layout options. In the Tree Type section of the dialog box, you will notice that the option Classical Windows Style is selected by default. This is the conventional way of displaying the specification tree.

Classical Windows Style This option might, for example, be useful when working on solids and assemblies.

Structure .

dialog box and select the Fixed Size option in the Tree Item Size section. you can reduce the length of tree item names. You can of course specify the number you wish.Constructive Historic: Vertical If the whole of the tree is not displayed. The default number of characters is 8.. dialog box and select the Horizontal option in the Tree Orientation section. To do this... The tree will then look something like this: This option might.. Constructive Historic: Horizontal To do this. go back to the Tools->Options. for example. you may have to enlarge the window. Alternatively. Relational: Vertical . be useful when working on solids and surfaces. go back to the Tools->Options.

function.. then dragging the tree to a new location using the middle mouse button. be used for surface creation. you can move the tree by first clicking the reference axis (the geometry is displayed in low highlighting mode). this option shows all possible relations between the different items that go to make up the part.. dialog box and select the Horizontal option in the Tree Orientation section: This option could. Relational: Horizontal To do this.As you can see. If the specification tree prevents you from seeing the geometry. . for example.. go back to the Tools->Options.. You can also change the background colors using the Visualization tab via the Tools->Options.

If you want to manipulate the specification tree on its own (zoom it up and down. . the item is grayed out in the tree. if you select an item in the tree. and only the tree is active. click the reference axis in the bottom left corner of the document or any branch in the tree: the geometry is dimmed. then select the Hide/Show icon. etc. When the size of the tree exceeds the window size.).Activate the Visualization of Show/No Show When this option is checked. a scrollbar appears: you can then move the tree and navigate using the scrollbar.

. and in the Preview and workbench list areas of the Visualization tab itself. select the Display sub-category then the Visualization tab: The Visualization tab lets you customize: Graduated color background This option activates a graduated color background in all open documents. .Customizing Visualization Settings This task explains how to customize display visualization settings.. 2. In the General category. 1. For example. command. Select the Tools->Options.

. The color becomes gradually lighter towards the bottom of the document: ..but this document uses a normal color background: .this document uses a graduated color background.

Background: sets background color in all open document windows Selected element.) for the purpose of moving the objects more easily. . Anti-aliasing: activates anti-aliasing on all edges and lines. Refer to "Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass" for more information about how the compass is used on examples of where manipulators are used. Refer to "Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer" for a discussion of preselection and selection techniques Update needed: sets the color of objects to be updated.. Anti-aliasing makes jagged lines and edges appear smoother: . holes. Graphic manipulators are displayed on certain objects (planar patches. refer to the Part Design documentation for more information about updating objects Handles: sets manipulator handle colors. and the linetype used to display preselected elements. all elements including lines and planes (usually displayed in front of other elements) are displayed at their true depth in the 3D scene.. When activated. Surface boundaries: check this option to set the color and thickness of surface boundaries.. Display all elements using Z-buffer depth: activates the Z-buffer so that all elements hide each other. Low-intensity highlighting and Preselected element linetype: set colors of selected elements and low-intensity elements. and when switched off. lines and planes are always displayed in front of other elements. When deactivated.. edges and lines look jagged: .

Click OK to confirm...3. . and OK again to reset default settings. or Reset.

Compatibility V4 / V5 Infrastructure DXF Import/Export Format External Format V4->V5 Space V4->V5 Draw IGES DELMIA/Deneb .

2. The following dialog box appears. certain information was specified by means of the parameter settings in the declaration files. before attempting to read Version 4 data. These declaration parameters are no longer supported in Version 5 and there is no way to transfer them automatically to Version 5. The Options dialog box appears with the category tree in the left-hand column. 1. In the General category of the Options Tree. Select the Tools->Options. In CATIA Version 4. Such information must be provided by means of the Options dialog box shown above. select Compatibility and click the Compatibility tab.. The Options dialog box lets you: display faces and surfaces visible in shading mode in CATIA Version 4 open CATIA Version 4 models referencing an external PROJECT file specify the code page identifying unlabeled data .. command.V4 / V5 Infrastructure This task shows you how to customize Compatibility settings.

in the Conversion part of the Options dialog box. Opening CATIA Version 4 models referencing an external PROJECT file In V4. in the PROJECT File Path field. Make sure you complete this field before displaying a Version 4 model. the location of the PROJECT file referenced by the V4 model you wish to display. the only way to access such data is to provide Version 5 with precise information about the PROJECT file's whereabouts. Displaying faces and surfaces visible in shading mode in CATIA Version 4 In V4. Enter.declare the code page to be stored in the CATIA data to be written when saving Version 5 CATPart documents as CATIA Version 4 models. On UNIX. check the box Display elements with the Display Mode Sensitive attribute off. You can display such models on Windows and on UNIX. . Bear in mind the following: If you do not specify the PROJECT file path before opening the model. even those that were not in shading mode. Also. a warning message will appear. you must make sure that the code pages of the model and the PROJECT file are compatible. However. for example:/u/users/username/PRJDirName The following reference tables in the PROJECT files can now be accessed in Version 5: attribute and class tables annotations/dimensions. There are no restrictions as regards the PROJECT file's code page. the address to be specified should look something like this: http://UNIXmachinename/path/PRJDirName Note that the external PROJECT file referenced by the model can only be on UNIX. you must therefore disable the CURRENT DISPLAY MODE SENSITIVE attribute. To display all faces and surfaces. you must first make sure an http server has been installed on the machine where the PROJECT file resides. In Version 5. If it is external. certain model data must be contained in a PROJECT file which can either be internal to the model or external. by default. the display attribute CURRENT DISPLAY MODE SENSITIVE enables you to decide whether to display the hidden parts or not. only faces and surfaces that were in shading mode in Version 4 are shown in models displayed by means of the CATIA Site Navigator. If you want to display the model on Windows. 4. You can now visualize in Version 5 all Version 4 faces and surfaces. 3. just specify the path. To do this.

In Version 4.e. The writing code page ISO-8859-1 is the default value so normally. Declaring the writing code page when saving Version 5 CATPart documents as CATIA Version 4 models For a full scenario illustrating this functionality see "Saving Version 5 CATPart Documents As CATIA Version 4 Models" in the CATIA . open the WRITING_CODE_PAGE list in the V4 Declarations part of the dialog box (indicated by the arrow above). IBM-392. These declaration parameters are no longer supported in Version 5 and there is no way to transfer them automatically to Version 5. To do this. if you want to use a writing code page other than ISO-8859-1.WRITING_CODE_PAGE declares the code page to be stored in the Version 5 data to be written.DEFAULT_DS_CODE_PAGE declares the language to identify the data read if this data is not labeled (i. EUC-KR. Such information must be provided by means of the dialog boxes described below. before attempting to read Version 4 data. you must specify the appropriate language from the list provided.Specifying the code page identifying unlabeled data In V4. information such as the language used to identify unlabeled readable data was specified by means of the parameter settings in the declaration files. unless another code page was already specified. and so forth). you can go ahead with the save. In Version 4. Click OK to confirm. For Version 4 data that is not labeled with a standard code page (for example. the declaration parameter catsite. 7. However. 6. 5. select the appropriate code page and click OK. EUC-CN. and not labeled with a standard code page such as ISO8859-x. the declaration parameter catsite. if it is just labeled EBCDIC or ASCII. click on the DS_DEFAULT_CODE_PAGE list in the V4 Declarations part of the dialog box and select the appropriate language. .V4 Integration User's Guide. ASCII-DS-xxx or EBCDIC-DS-xxx) other than US English.

the two points are considered to be geometrically at the same location. It is fixed to 10-3mm. The modification of the Model Dimension parameters should only be used to respect the V4 standards. has an impact upon the precision of geometrical calculation. you can change the Model Dimension parameter to fit your V4 standards. The management of the resolution is different in V5 and in V4 : In V5 the main concept for tolerances is the Resolution which defines the minimum length of a valid object. Note that this is also the V4 default value. Be aware that modifying this value without consideration can affect dangerously the V4 geometry. In V4. which can be modified in CATIA V4. Before saving a V5 Part as a Model. In V4. The whole set of tolerances will be computed from this Model Dimension according to the V4 recommended values. The most appropriate value to fit V5 resolution is 10000mm. tolerances are driven by the Model dimension. V4 tolerances will be computed according to V4 recommended values from this Model Dimension. The Model Dimension Parameter. The management of confusions ("Do two objects have the same geometry?") is a direct consequence of the resolution: if the distance between to geometric points is less than the resolution. . The value by default is 10000mm and it corresponds to the V4 value.Declaring the Model Dimension when saving Version 5 CATPart documents as CATIA Version 4 models It is possible to customize Model Dimension for V4 models generated in V5. model tolerances can be modified through Standards -> Model Function.

Import with unit and/or scale factor You can apply a scale factor between the imported file and what you want to get from the original Drawing.. . Click the DXF tab. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. . you may customize units. 2.DXF Import/Export Format As you import/export a CATDrawing from/into a DXF/DWG file. 3.. 1. either working view or background sheet. destination and/or format. Select Tools -> Options. Imported file destination.

To modify the mapping of an existing DXF line type. select the corresponding CATIA line type in the next combo box and click Add. 4. enter its name in the input field. 14 and Autocad2000. 13. Export all sheets in distinct files: export either all sheets or only current sheet of a multi-sheet drawing.Import Space Configuration: This functionality allows you to choose which drawing space you want to import : Model Space or Paper Space or Both. do not hesitate to remove useless types from the mapping list using the Remove button. To map a new DXF line type. double-click this type in the list. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the dialog box. but you can use this option to customize the mapping of the line types used by DXF and by CATIA. For better performances. DXF/DRW export files format Note that Version 5 supports DXF/DWG formats version 12. You can export either all sheets or only current sheet of a multi-sheet drawing. . select the new CATIA line type and click Add. Import line type mapping: A default mapping is available.

BYU and IFF. For ProE. both direct and indirect modes are used on NT. command. It is only supported in the indirect mode. 1. Others Exact geometry support : recovery of CAD's exact geometry to generate US geometry (NCGM). Select the Tools->Options. SolidEdge. STL. Save Coorsys in cgr : store part coordinate systems in . Preferred Conversion Technology Indirect : use of CAD license. ACIS and DXF 3D : use the direct mode on NT. this is the indirect mode only. . Click the External Formats tab. Expand the General category in the left-hand tree . parasolid. Direct : no use of CAD license. Visu Format Unit : The supported visualization formats are : SLP. OBJ. Modify the settings as desired. 4..Customizing External Format Import This task explains how to customize the import settings. For Solidworks. The Options dialog box appears 2.. UG and IDEAS. 3. You imported a CAD Part through the Insert ->Existing Component command.cgr file. For ProE 20i and UG v15.

a link is kept with the original part and stored into the directory of your choice. Click OK to confirm your operation. Simplified Representation : only part simplified representation is supported. IDEAS Tesselation Parameter : parameter of IDEAS chordal deviation.cgr files. ProEngineer Quilts Read : Quilts are supported in the . Output Path : When importing a part. To set the name of the part simplified representation to use before the Assembly conversion. where they can be subsequently manipulated in V5. 5. . you can customize the Output File for generated data. In non-associative mode. Whenever a CAD cached part file (from the original CAD assembly) is modified. the associated part files of the imported CAD assembly can be converted as well.Associative Mode Associative Mode : Associative mode is disabled when cache is not activated. Using associative mode places the individual CGR part files in cached memory. it is re-converted so that the V5 geometry of the CAD part is always up to date. Non-associative mode is referred to when the "Associative" feature is disabled. check this box and enter the name. How associative mode works : When an assembly file is converted to V5.

deformations occur so that the C0 or C1 nodes become C2. Select the V4/V5 SPACE tab. whenever it is possible. otherwise the Surface is segmented. a Surface may be deformed and cut into several pieces (where it is not C2).. 1. In order to keep a C2 continuity with the geometric objects. somes Faces are created in V5.V4->V5 Space You can customize given options when using interoperability from version 4 to version 5. Select the Tools -> Options.. By default the segmentation is not activated : the Surfaces are deformed until the nodes are C: . Click Compatibility in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. Segmentation When V4 Surfaces are migrated into CATIA V5. command. Deformation For a Surface. the number of generated V5 Faces vary according to another parameter : the maximum length allowed for deformation. 3. To resort to segmentation and / or modify the maximum deformation value. you had to use the following parameters : . 2. By using segmentation.

1 for example. is taken into account. The maximum value can be modified via this panel. The unit is the millimeter because it is the V4 model's unit in general. How to use this Segmentation and Deformation panel : Now these environment variables can be modified via the Tools -> Options -> General -> Compatibility -> V4/V5 SPACE command.Export Segmentation : 1 Export MaxDeformation : 0. the standard value of the maximum deformation is 0. we have taken the example of the migration of a model's Surfaces and Solid. The following table indicates the number of Faces created in V5 for a V4 Surface according to the maximum value of Deformation (defined by D in the table). With Segmentation : Name of the V4 Surface Number of V5 Faces for D=0. For a model dimension of 10m. The default value is -1. If the value of "Maximum Deformation" is negative.1 *SUR18 *SUR26 *SUR83 *SUR128 *SOL48 31 23 8 81 1129 4 6 1 5 589 . In order to analyze the influence of the maximum value allowed for Deformation upon the number of V5 generated Faces. called Intersection Projection. the value in the panel is used. tick the Use Of Segmentation box. To use Segmentation.001 Number of V5 Faces for D=0. The geometric standards are listed in the following dialog box in CATIA V4 : If this value is positive or equal to 0. the model's value.001mm. By default the Segmentation is not activated.

1 *SUR18 *SUR26 *SUR83 *SUR128 *SOL48 4. Click OK to confirm the operation.001 or D=0.Without Segmentation : Name of the V4 Surface Number of V5 Faces for D=0. 62 23 8 81 1139 .

Geometry import When importing geometry. Dimension conversion mode When converting dimensions. command. this ditto is automatically exploded.V4 / V5 DRAW You can customize given options when using interoperability from version 4 to version 5. Click OK to confirm the operation. Click Compatibility in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. As result each element in that ditto can be modified separately. 4. 3. 1.. Explode ditto mode When importing a ditto (or component). Select the Drafting V4 tab.. you can decide that you do or do not create centers and end points. the resulting dimensions can or cannot be edited (modified). 2. . Select the Tools -> Options.

.

In the EXPORT section you will see that you can choose from several options: The default Standard option and the BSpline option allow you to select which curve and surface types you want to be generated. Only the surfacic decomposition of the original model is stored. This may be useful in cases where curves are the only form of input accepted. You may wish to round digits up or down to 7. If you select the BSpline option all curves and surfaces are converted into B-splines. 1.Customizing IGES Settings This task shows you how to customize IGES settings. then the Compatibility category. 9 or 10 digits. then click the IGES tab.. If you select Surface solid decomposition will be identical in both the original model and the resulting file. Only the wireframe decomposition of the original model is stored. command. The default Surface option and the Wireframe option allow you to select the representation mode. Select the General category. . Select the Tools->Options. If you are happy with the settings you have selected and do not want the Save as igs dialog box to appear the next time you save (for more information about "Exporting CATPart Data to an IGES File" refer to the CATIA Data Exchange Interfaces User's Guide). Wireframe is a new option in Version 5 and should be used if you want 3D visualization of solid edges to be identical in both the original model and the resulting file. 2.. 8. If you leave the default Standard option selected the curve and surface types created in the Part are kept as is. check the Do not show dialog box option. If so. check the Round up/down real number option and use the Number of digits list provided.

you can select : Tools -> Options -> General -> Display -> Visualization -> Colors : Surfaces' boundaries. If you select the join option. You can select the tolerance which is used to join the surfaces : If you know the tolerance of the system which has created the IGES file.rpt) and an error file (filename. Click OK. and recover separate shells into CATIA. If this option is active.In the Import section you have the possibility to join the surfaces of the model : If you want to join the surfaces of your IGES model into a shell. These files are created in a location referenced by the USERPROFILE variable on NT and by the HOME variable on UNIX. . make sure that model is constituted of one part. while importing IGES files to CATIA. If you select the option : join surfaces of each group. it is better to begin with a small tolerance. In case you used to handle several parts in one single IGES Model. The software try to knit the surfaces of each group into one shell per group. the software will try to knit the surfaces from an importable file into a shell. make sure that each part corresponds to an associativity instance (402). This option is useful if you intend to work with IGES models which enclose separate parts. For more information refer to Customizing Visualization Settings. To see the boundaries of the created shell.err). Otherwise. You can select the Join option in the Settings : Tools -> Options -> General -> Compatibility -> IGES -> Import : Join. The import operation generates a report file (filename. you can use it. The default location is the folder Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATReport on Windows NT (where "user" is your logon id) or the CATReport directory in your home directory on UNIX. 3.

Setting the DELMIA/Deneb Compatibility Tab The following procedure describes how to set the DELMIA/Deneb Compatibility tab. the General option is highlighted. as shown in the figure below. Setting this tab enables your V5 system to use D5 data created with DELMIA (formerly Deneb Robotics) software. . click on the ball to expand the tree. 1. If the gray ball next to General (in the left bar) has a plus (+) sign next to it. 2. By default. Select the "DELMIA/Deneb Compatibility" tab. Select Tools->Options. The compatibility option appears. 3. and does not show its three sub-options.

If more than one library is currently in the list. 6. Enter the full path name of the project library in the PATH block.4. . 5. This will place the selected library at the top of the root library list. Click the Register button to register this path in the root library list. Several project libraries can be entered in the root library list. select the one which you would like to be the current project and click the Set Current button. Whenever work is saved or imported. The last project selected by the Set Current button remains the current project until it is changed again. the system looks in the current project directory. Press the OK button.

Parameters Knowledge Parameter Tolerance Symbols Units .

Parameter names Users working with non-latin characters should check the Tools->Options>Knowledge->Parameter Names->Surrounded by ' option. Measures are specific functions to be used in formulas and rules. For how to create and use user functions. Otherwise. parameter names should have to be renamed in latin characters when used in formulas. Select the Tools -> Options command. The Knowledge Advisor User's Guide provides you with tasks explaining how to use measures.Customizing Knowledgeware This task explains how to specify the options you may need to check when working in knowledgeware applications. This is what you can see onscreen: Parameter Tree View Check Tools->Option>Knowledge->Parameter Tree View->With Value to display the parameter values in the specification tree. 2. The 'Language' check box is to be checked by those of you using measures in relations or using user functions. The Options dialog box is displayed. see the CATIA Application Architecture documentation. Check the Tools->Option>Knowledge->Parameter Tree View->With Formula to display the formulas which constrain the parameter in the specification tree. 1. Select the General option. Refer to Using Knowlegeware Capabilities for more information. Most options are related to parameters and formulas. . Click the Knowledge tab. 3.

Language Check the Tools->Options>Knowledge->Load extended language libraries whenever using measures in relations or user functions. .

. If you create an Angle type parameter then assign a tolerance to it. Using the tolerances specified in the figure opposite: If you create a Length type parameter then assign a tolerance to it. To do this... the default values displayed in the tolerance edition box will be 1 mm and 0 mm.' command from the contextual menu. right-click the value field then select the 'Add Tolerance. The default values which are displayed in the tolerance dialog box are those you have specified in the Parameter Tolerance tab. If you uncheck the 'Default Tolerance' box. Angle and Length type parameters can be assigned a tolerance. the default values displayed in the tolerance edition box will be 1 deg and 0 deg. all value fields are grayed out and you can't specify any default values. edit the parameter.Parameter Tolerance The Parameter Tolerance tab allows you to specify the default tolerance of Angle and Length type parameters.

1. then click the tab Symbols. This tab lets you customize: Constraint Style Dimension Style Display at Creation Note that a Preview glyph displays your preferences as you are specifying them. then the Parameters category. .Customizing Constraint Appearance This task shows you how to customize the display and style of the constraints defined in your document. Click General category. 2. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed.

5. Choose any of these colors. The Constraint Filter dialog box contains filter options available for all the constraints that can be defined for the geometry. To choose between the constraints you wish to see or not in the geometry area. 4. To set the colors where appropriate. click the arrow of the constraint type combo box. A list appears containing the current color and the colors available by default. click the Filter button. See CATIA for more information. You can define a personal color too.Constraint Style 3. .

Uncheck the constraints you do not wish to display and click OK to confirm. this option displays the constraints defined on the active product. 6. You can then decide the constraint types you wish to display by checking the appropriate options. . This option is specific to Assembly Design workbench. The Product frame contains the Show on active product option.The Filter frame contains three options: Show all: shows all the constraints Hide all: hides all the constraints Conditional Filter: once activated. You can then decide whether you wish to display the constraint status or not. It also makes the Filter by Type options available. it makes the options of the Status Filter frame available. If activated. or display unverified or verified constraints.

9. This option increases the number of graphic symbols you can see in the geometry area. For example. Check Displays iconified constraint elements. you can see symmetry axes. enter 9mm. The glyph previews the new overrun. The glyph previews the new gap. Display at Creation . 10. Set the Scale option to Large. Check Highlight pointed elements to make sure the application highlights the constrained elements when their constraints are pointed to. You can set: Small Medium Large 8. The default gap is 2mm. For example. Enter a value to define the overrun between construction lines and geometric elements. enter 5mm. For example. 11. Enter a value to define the gap between construction lines and geometric elements. This defines the size of the symbols for tangency and parallelism constraints.Dimension Style 7.

it applies to all constraints you are creating. 12.'Name = Value (formula)': the constraint (or parameter) name and value are displayed as well as the possible formula defined for this constraint. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the Options dialog box. The Display mode option lets you choose between three options: .12. . . However. you can edit each constraint individually by using the contextual menu available. . Whatever mode you choose.'Value': only the constraint (or parameter) value is displayed.'Name = Value': the constraint (or parameter) name and value are both displayed.

.

1. the 'Dimension Display' check boxes allow you to define: whether you want to display trailing zeros the upper and lower limits for using an exponential notation how many decimal places to display .Customizing Units This task explains how to customize units. The list of available units for this magnitude is displayed right below the magnitude list (the magnitude name is grayed out). the list of available units is: 2. You can define or redefine: the default unit and the display of values for magnitude type parameters. Select the line with the magnitude whose unit is to be redefined. command. For example. In the General category. click the Parameters sub-category. In the upper part of the dialog box.. 2. select the unit you want to define as new default unit in the selection list (in the example above. 4.. In the lower part of the dialog box. the Inch has . if you want to redefine the Length unit. If you want to redefine a default unit: 1. then the Unit tab. Select the Tools->Options. the default unit along with its symbol is displayed for each magnitude: 3.

06e+005mm if the upper limit for an exponential notation is set to 5. The new settings will apply immediately both to documents already loaded and to those subsequently loaded. .5. Example: a 10. If you want to define the exponential notation limits. been selected).000057 mm will be displayed as 5. Click OK to confirm your choice. Example2: 0.571 mm will be converted to 10.The default values for length. Example1: 105700 mm will be displayed as 1. If you want to display trailing zeros. check the appropriate options. 7. If you want to redefine the decimal places. Example: a 10 mm value will be converted in 10. 8.000 mm if the number of decimal places is set to 3.70e-005mm if the lower limit for an exponential notation is set to 4. check the 'Display Trailing Zeros' box.57 mm if the number of decimal places is set to 2. mass and time are millimeters. The magnitude definition is updated in the magnitude list right above. kilos and seconds. enter the value under and below which you want to display a magnitude type parameter in an exponential form. 6.

Devices and Virtual Reality Calibration Devices .

Automatic or Manual: Automatic 1. Indicate the screen Width and Height in the Screen Dimensions area. 2. In the 3D Picking Calibration area. In the General category. . select the mode used for 3D picking by clicking the corresponding radio button.. command. Position the tracker at the middle bottom of the screen 2. The DMU Immersive Review license is required to display this tab. Select the Tools->Options.Calibration This task explains how to define 3D picking settings.. select the Devices and Virtual Reality sub-category: 3. 1. Click the Calibration tab: 4.

. Indicate the screen Width and Height in the Screen Dimensions area. Measure the distance (in millimeters) between the tracker and the screen corners in order to enter the corresponding coordinates in the Upper Left. Upper Right and Lower Right fields 2.Manual 1.

The peripheral devices concerned are primarily: the joystick the spaceball/space mouse. command. After installing Version 5. In the General category. Select the Tools->Options.Customizing Device Settings This task explains how to set up peripheral devices. select the Devices and Virtual Reality sub-category.. 3. 2. Click the Devices tab: . 1. you must connect your peripheral devices and install the appropriate drivers.. The spaceball and space mouse are supported on all P2 products on all supported platforms. The joystick is supported on: Windows 95 or Windows 98 (for the DMU P1 product range only) the P2 product range.

For more information. . refer to "Stereoscopic Viewing". three-dimensional images: On: enables stereoscopic vision Off: disables stereoscopic vision.The Devices tab lets you customize: Stereo Enables or disables stereoscopic visualization of graphical data with a perception of realistic.

However. The process name on Windows is "CATDeviceBroker" and is referenced by the following line: CATDeviceBroker in the file: %windir%\system32\drivers\etc\services The process name on UNIX is "CATDeviceBroker" and is referenced by the following line: CATDeviceBroker in the file: /etc/services By default. these services are initialized during the installation. when you set up communications ports. you must edit the appropriate files manually at a later date. Use the default value (unless the peripheral device you are using has special requirements). spaceball/space mouse): the device broker is started automatically when you start a session Manual: use this setting if you are using peripheral devices for which native support is not provided by Version 5. Virtual Reality Starting Mode Specifies how a process called the "device broker" is started: Automatic: use this setting if you are using the peripheral devices for which native support is provided by Version 5 (joystick. A process filters the mass of events generated when using I/O devices and relays only the useful events to Version 5. 6668/tcp 6668/tcp .Maximum frequency for event sending Maximum frequency (number of events per second) at which events are sent by peripheral devices. if you decide not to do so during the installation. and the appropriate files are modified.

If you are using the peripheral devices for which native support is provided by Version 5 (joystick.. and OK again to reset default settings. Exit your session.Automatically Started Daemons This part of the tab lists the peripheral devices for which native support is provided by Version 5: Space Daemon: spaceball/space mouse SW_Joystick: joystick. Check the corresponding option to ensure that the peripheral device will be activated and recognized the next time you start a session. you must run it manually. spaceball/space mouse): the peripheral broker process is started automatically when you start a session. 4.. Otherwise. . or Reset. 5. This setting requires the use of a peripheral broker. then restart for your new settings to take effect. Click OK to confirm.

Infrastructure Product Structure Material Library Rendering .

Product Structure Cache Management Enovia/VPM Node Customization Product Structure .

the DMU Navigator browses released directories in the order listed to check whether it is located in one of them. it is tessellated. The first time a component is inserted.) is inserted into a DMU Navigator CATProduct document: Design mode: in this mode. The site administrator is normally responsible for the released cache. Visualization mode: in this mode. is inserted from the cache system. The cache system is organized into two parts: Local cache: a read/write directory located locally on your machine and used to store cgr files. etc. Released cache: a read-only cache which is not necessarily located locally on your machine. The user is normally responsible for the local cache. The next time this component is required. The cache system is managed via the Cache Management tab in the Options dialog box. Using a cache system considerably reduces the time required to load your data. the component is tessellated and saved in the local cache. V5 CATProduct. if the cgr file exists in the database. the DMU Navigator requests that. a representation of the geometry only is available and the corresponding cgr file. All cache options can be locked. Several directories can be defined for the released cache. If the cgr file cannot be found in the local cache. This means that the corresponding cgr file is computed and saved in the local cache as well as displayed in the document window. This task explains how to customize data cache settings . V5 CATPart. the exact geometry is available and the document is inserted as is.Customizing Cache Settings Working with a Cache System Two different modes are available when a component (V4 model. it be downloaded. If it is still not found. An additional check is run: if the cgr file is not found in the local or released caches. the cgr file which already exists (and not the original document) is automatically loaded from the local cache. if it exists. Reading Components from a Database: The cache system works in exactly the same way when components inserted into a CATProduct document come from a database.

(Optional) Set the Check timestamp option: The timestamp option serves to check whether or not the tessellated cgr file is . Turn the cache activation mode on or off: By default.A DMU Navigator document 1. The user can enter the path to his own local cache location. Click Product in the left-hand box 3. command. and if permitted by the site administrator. The default size is 10 MB. The Options dialog box appears 2. 6. 5. Select the Tools->Options. The default directory is the user's home directory under UNIX and the USERPROFILE directory under Windows. (Optional) Enter the paths identifying the cache locations: Browse buttons let you locate the file you want. 7. Click the Cache Management tab 4. the activation mode is set to off. one or more paths to released cache locations... (Optional) Set the maximum size for the local cache (in write mode).

9. then runs CATDMUUtility batch process without defining . . the release accuracy value is taken into account.vox option. and if older. no tessellation is done and the cgr file in the data cache is loaded.up-to-date. The data is pre-tessellated. Note that you need to exit and restart to see the effects of customization. How does the administrator define the release accuracy value? he sets a precise and required value in the release Accuracy field. the system checks the original document's date against that of the corresponding cgr file. tessellates the document again overwriting the out-of-date version. Released Accuracy The default value for released accuracy is 20mm This value can also be defined by the administrator. so click OK to confirm. If dates are the same. If clicked. 8. Turning this option off means that no check is run and cgr files in the cache are systematically loaded.

PSN Display Options . Select the Tools->Options. the Options dialog box is divided into four parts: CDM Interoperability Administration PSN Display Options Customize Session Building V4 CDM Cache Management CDMA Interoperability Administration There are two pushbuttons in this part: Checking the Database Administration box lets you define the parameters for connection to the CDMA databases you wish to use (see "Connecting an ORACLE or DB2 Database to Your Version 5 Environment" in the CATIA .. select the Infrastructure->Product Structure category in the tree on the left. Click on the EnoviaVPM tab.. command. 2.Customizing EnoviaVPM Settings on UNIX Only (V4 Integration) This task shows you how to customize EnoviaVPM settings (possible on UNIX only).V4 Integration User's Guide).V4 Integration User's Guide). The following dialog box appears: As you can see. 1. Checking the ENOVIAvpm/Product Structure Mapping box lets you map CDMA and assembly attributes (see "Mapping CDMA and Assembly Attributes on UNIX" in the CATIA . When it appears.

they are automatically highlighted in the corresponding PSN graph. You can also specify the access method in the field Access method. If you do decide to use this option you should be aware that performance will be adversely affected. This means that whenever you select one or more models in a PSN graph they are automatically highlighted in the Version 5 session. . Customize Session Building There is one checkbox in this part: Checking the Load all EnoviaVPM properties box means that when a session is built all the properties visualized in VPM that have not been mapped will be loaded as user properties. When selected in a Version 5 session.There is one checkbox in this part: Checking the Automatic Highlight in PSN box sets the automatic highlight for the identification of models in a PSN graph from a Version 5 session and vice-versa (see "Building a CATIA Version 5 Product from a VPM1.1 PSN Window" in the CATIA .V4 Integration User's Guide). V4 CDM Cache Management There is one checkbox in this part: By default the Work with the V4 CDM cache system box is unchecked. To use the cache system check the box and provide the location of the V4 local cache in the field Path to the V4 local cache.

Instance Name. Nomenclature.. Check Customized Display. Then. reference or description to a product or a component..) between the two # by the term of your choice and it will appear in the Product Structure. The following dialog box appears : 2. .. Source. RE. 1.Nodes Customization This task shows you how to give a particular name. Description. Select the Tools->Options. command and click the Nodes Customization tab. you can select different options : Part number (#PN#).. Definition. Revision (#RE#).. You can directly replace the diagram (PN.

2. command. then the Product Structure sub-category. Select the Infrastructure category. Select the Tools->Options.. then the Product Structure tab: Defining the Default Part Number of the Component to be Imported Check Manual input if you wish to assign the name you wish to the component you insert into the assembly. 1. . Ensuring Default Shapes are not Activated When Opened Check Do not activate default shapes on open if you want the product to appear when opened without any active representation..Customizing Product Structure Settings This task explains how to customize Product Structure settings.

Note that the Constraints option is checked by default.Customizing the Specification Tree Check the display options you need: Automatic Expand to display the tree totally expanded Constraints to display the constraints and dimensions defined in the document Parameters to display the parameters defined using the Formula command Relations to display the relations defined using the Formula command. .

.. menu item. 2. Click the Infrastructure category then select the Material Library subcategory to display the Material tab: . command. Select the Tools -> Options.Material Library This tasks explains how to define material general settings using the Tools -> Options. 1...

and so on. In this case. Enter the path to the user-defined catalog or use the icon to open the Material Directory Path dialog box which lets you browse your folders to the desired location. you can activate the ClearCoat Support option to be able to use its specific data. Check the Material Parameter Creation option if you want to create parameters when applying a material onto a part or a product. 5.Real Time Rendering User`s Guide) and to not have to exit the current session. whenever you wish to add properties to a material (by double-clicking on it and choosing the Analysis or Drafting tab for examples) a warning message is issued: .sgi. In this case. browse the following Internet site: http://www. tiff. along with the ClearCoat product successfully installed. the system automatically looks for . rgb.3. the "Material=None" parameter will not appear in the specification tree. 4. i. For detailed information about ClearCoat 360. Click OK. Activate the Warning when adding new properties to a material. Once the warning option has been activated.cc360 extension files (if these files exist in the same directory) to replace the images used to define the material textures.e.com/software/clearcoat/ 6. If you use a SGI workstation. You no longer need to overwrite the default catalog (see "What You Should Know Before You Start" in the CATIA .

.This to let you know that the material have been modified when you accessed the analysis or drafting properties.

command then in the Infrastructure category.. Select the Tools->Options.. click the Rendering sub-category. Rendering Display 1. The Display tab appears: .Rendering This task explains how to customize Rendering display and output settings as well as sticker mapping and adjustment.

.Setting Light Display This area lets you control the display of inactive lights: check the "No display for inactive lights" option to turn off inactive light display check the "Full display for inactive lights" option to turn on inactive light display.

. Rendering Output .Photo Studio User`s Guide." field lets you specify the texture update threshold in degrees the "Computation passes" field lets you indicate the number of texture passes For more information on dynamic reflection display.Setting Environment Display This area lets you to set the type of environment display: check the "No display for inactive environments" option to turn off inactive environment display check the "Simplified display for inactive environment environments" option to display inactive environments in a simplified way check the "Full display for inactive environments" option to turn on inactive environment display. refer to Previewing an Environment in the CATIA. Setting Reflection Display This area lets you define reflection parameters: check the "Enable dynamic environment reflections" option to update environment reflections on reflecting objects check the "Show wall textures in reflections" option to display wall textures on reflecting objects you can use the "Texture size in static" and the "Texture size while moving" options to indicate the texture size used when the product geometry is still and when it is moved the "Update when viewpoint..

In the Output area. Two options are checked: . specify whether the image size is defined "From active viewpoint" or "Fixed". 2. 4.. Click the Sticker tab. indicate the output type. command then in the Infrastructure category.. you must then enter the image width and height in pixels. 2. In the Image Size area. On screen or On disk. you must then specify the new path and the new name of the image. Select the Tools->Options. Select the Tools->Options. i. click the Rendering subcategory.1. Click the Output tab: 3..e. Stickers 1. If you selected the "Fixed" option.. click the Rendering subcategory. command then in the Infrastructure category. If you selected the " On disk" option.

However. This may be useful to adjust different parts of a same sticker on adjacent faces. uncheck the Gizmo automatic center option if you do not want to the gizmo to be automatically centered when applied in Planar Projection mode.3. The default relative scale is 1. These values are those displayed under the Adjustment tab of the Stick dialog box. uncheck the Absolute Scale option if you do not want to use absolute scale values when adjusting the sticker. 4. In the Sticking area. . In the Layout area. absolute values are proposed in UV mode but they are approximative. Note: this option is relevant in Planar Projection mode only.00 which corresponds to the optimum sticker covering on the whole surface.

Mechanical Design Part Design Assembly Design Sketcher Structure Design Drafting Functional Tolerancing .

Part Design Display General .

refer to "Associating Bodies" in the CATIA Part Design Users Guide Version 5. refer to the CATIA Knowledge Advisor Users Guide Version 5 Relations Bodies under operations (operations attaching bodies in different ways (Add. Select the Tools -> Options command. Click the Mechanical Design category. 1. containing two categories of options: There are six options available for customizing the Specification tree display. 2. . If you wish to know what parameters and relations are. Intersect. The Options dialog box is displayed. Assemble.Customizing the Tree and Geometry Views This task shows you how to control the display of the elements you create in the specification tree. Remove. It also shows you how to control the display of features in the geometry area. External References Constraints Parameters (created using the Knowledge Advisor capability. then the Part Design subcategory. then the Display tab. For more. The tab appears. Union Trim).

. The Only the current operated solid option is used when editing features belonging to attached bodies only. sketches are present in the tree but you need to use the expand capability) There is one option available for customizing the geometry display. It lets you display only the features of the current body.Sketches (If the Sketches option is checked. If unchecked. the sketches are displayed in the specification tree during creation.

command. then the Part Design subcategory. 1. 2. then the General tab.. Click the Mechanical Design category. The tab appears.Customizing General Settings This task shows you how to set general settings. Select the Tools -> Options.. containing four categories of options: External References Update Delete Operation CGR previsualization .

Check Automatic: parts are updated automatically .Check Confirm when creating a link with selected object . which means that if they are shared by other features. This option is used as you are editing parts included in assemblies. If later you need to cut the link between external references and their origin. refer to the CATIA Assembly Design Users Guide Version 5. Synchronizing assumes that all modifications to the other parts affect external references included in your part. .Check Create external references in Show mode to define the visualization mode for the elements while they are being created. they will not be deleted. Delete Operation . If this option is deactivated. you just need to use the Isolate command.Check Synchronize all external references for update to make sure that CATIA updates elements copied from other parts.External References . Sketches will be deleted only if they are exclusive. . Update . the application will update your part only. .Check Display the Delete dialog box if you wish to access filters for deletion (see "Deleting Features" in the CATIA Part Design Users Guide Version 5). copied elements for example.Check Delete referenced sketches if you wish to delete sketches associated to features while you are deleting those features.Check Only use published elements for external selection if you want to make only published elements valid for selection. . and their origins when you are editing these elements.Check Manual: you wish to control your update operations.Checking the Keep link with selected object option lets you maintain the links between external references. . For more about designing parts in assembly context.

This option lets you improve performance when working in Assembly Design workbench.CGR previsualization .Conversely.Check Save a CGR previsualization if you wish to save the CGR format whithin the CATPart format when you are saving your part. . It also ensures that the data contained in the CGR format and the data contained in the CATPart format are similar at a given time. check Don't save a CGR previsualization if you do not wish to save the data contained in the CATPart document in CGR format. . You can then choose to remove the existing CGR previsualization or not by checking Clean existing CGR previsualization.

Assembly Design General Constraints .

. It is the default mode. "All levels' allows you to update all the constraints defined on all the levels of the active component. The Options dialog box appears. 1. Select Tools -> Options.. The General tab appears.Customizing Assembly Design Settings This task will show you how to customize Assembly Design settings. Click the Mechanical Design category. then the Assembly Design subcategory. You can also update only the active level of the active component or all the levels of the active component. 2. The "Manual" option lets you decide when you need to update your design. Access to geometry . displaying the following options: Update You can set an automatic or a manual update..

Publication Management . you can then you set your constraint) . the cursor changes to an eye symbol.Constraint (clicking on any constraint icon. the application launches the Design mode. check the option "Display warning when moving a component involved in a Fix Together". If you want to see a message indicating that you are moving components attached together. . translation or rotation . The message will appear whenever you will apply the following commands to components fixed together : compass.Define Multi-Instantiation . snap and manipulate .The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" ensures that the application will automatically launch the Design mode when using the following commands: .Update Move components The option available controls the display of a warning message that appears when moving components.Reuse Pattern .Translate .Manipulate . meaning that the Design mode is then active.Snap .Rotate .

Customizing Assembly Constraints
This task will show you how to customize Assembly Design constraints. 1. Select Tools -> Options.... The Options dialog box appears. 2. Click the Mechanical Design category, then the Assembly Design subcategory. 3. Click the Constraints tab. The following options are available: Paste Components

You can paste one or several components without the assembly constraints applying to them. You can paste one or several components with the assembly constraints applying to them, only after the Copy command. You can paste one or several components with the assembly constraints applying to them, only after the Cut command. You can paste one or several components always with the assembly constraints applying to them. Constraint Creation

This option lets you define the way of setting constraints: either using all the geometrical elements or only published geometrical elements. To create constraints with published geometrical elements only, check Only use the published geometry. For more information about publication, refer to "Managing a Product Publication" in the CATIA Assembly Design Users Guide Version 5. Quick Constraint

The Quick Constraint command is based on a ordered list of constraints to be created by the application. The setting available here lets you reorder the list of constraints having priority when applying the Quick Constraint command to the selected geometrical elements. What you need to do is select the constraint type you wish to reorder and click the arrows to the right of the selection to reorder the selected constraint. Additionally, you can create detected constraints if the option Creation of detected constraints is on.

Sketcher
Customizing Sketcher Settings

Sketcher
The Sketcher options will help you sketch your profile with given options. For example, the grid will make it easier to sketch a profile requiring parallel lines. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Expand the Mechanical Design option, then click Sketcher. The Sketcher tab appears, containing the following sets of options: Grid Sketch Plane Geometry Constraints Colors

Setting a Grid To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the Primary spacing and Graduations fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid.

Click the Display box to display the grid in your session. You will note that this capability is also available in the Sketcher Options toolbar. Check the Snap to point option if your sketch needs to begin or end on the points of the grid. Once you have chosen all of your options, click OK to confirm the operations. These options are applied.

The Allow Distortions option allows applying different graduations and spacing between H and V.

Setting the Sketch Plane In the Sketch Plane frame, check the Shade sketch plane option. This lets you view the sketch plane in the Sketcher workbench. However, note that the grid must be displayed too to see the shaded plane.

The sketch plane is shaded in the Sketcher workbench.

Now, check Position sketch plane parallel to screen to make sure that each time you will enter the Sketcher workbench, the sketch plane will have the right position.

Customizing Geometry Creation When sketching circles or ellipses, you may prefer not to create their centers. Version 5 lets you decide what you really want to create. By default, the Create circle and ellipse centers option is on. Just uncheck it if you do not need to create centers when sketching.

Solving mode (switch button) When you want to move geometry, you can decide that you move either the minimum number of the elements, the maximum number of these elements, or still the minimum number by modifying the shape of these elements, if needed.

The Dragging of the elements category provides these options: Standard mode: you move the as many elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.

Minimum move: you move the as few elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.

Relaxation: method for solving element moving by minimizing energy cost. This implies that the new elements are newly distributed over the sketch, globally speaking.

Constraints You can create or not the geometrical or dimensional constraints detected by the SmartPick tool. If all of the detection options are unchecked, the Create detected constraints option is not available.

SmartPick (switch button) As you create more and more elements, SmartPick detects multiple directions and positions, and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired detections. This task shows how to do so:

The SmartPick category provides these options: Support lines and circles Alignment Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency Horizontality and verticality Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect when sketching. Disabling SmartPick completely is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, it may be a good idea to disable SmartPick to concentrate only on the geometry.

Colors Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors correspond to colors illustrating: Graphical properties Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the Tools->Options dialog box. OR Constraint diagnostics Colors that represent constraint diagnostics are colors that are imposed to elements whatever the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given diagnostics. As a result, as soon as the diagnostic is solved, the element is assigned the color as defined in the Tools->Options dialog box.

You can assign default colors to all the elements. If you click the Visualization of diagnostic switch button, the following dialog box appears:

Over-constrained elements: the dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions were applied to the geometry. Inconsistent elements: At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when elements are under-constrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to a solution. Not-changed elements: Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. As a result, geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated. Iso-constrained elements: All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its geometrical support. If you click the Other color of the elements switch button, the following dialog box appears:

Isolated elements: use-edge that no more depend on the 3D. Protected elements: non-modifiable elements. Construction elements: A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch. This element is used as positioning reference. It is not used for creating solid primitives. SmartPick: colors used for SmartPick assistant elements and symbols.

Structure Design Settings
This first task shows you how to customize Structure Design settings. 1. 2. 3. Select Tools -> Options... from the menu bar. The Options dialog box appears. Click Mechanical Design -> Structure Design in the left-hand box. Click the Structure Design tab.

The Structure Design tab lets you customize:

Member and plate default colors and materials: Member color: select the default color for members in the box list. Plate color: select the default color for plates in the box list. Member material: select the default material for members in the box list. Plate material: select the default material for plates in the box list. Manage user types: Add: enter the name of the member or plate type then click Add to add user types. Remove: select the member or plate type in the list then click Remove to remove user types. Paths to directories containing sample standard catalog sections and available sections: Catalog storage / Directory: identifies the path of the directory containing sample standard catalog sections: downloaddirectory/OS/startup/components/structuralcatalogs where OS is the operating system, for example intel_a (Windows NT). Section storage / Directory: identifies the full path of the directory containing available sections, for example e:\tmp. This directory contains resolved user-defined sections stored here directly and any sample standard or user-defined catalog sections accessed via the Other section... option. It is recommended that an empty directory be identified. Click OK in the dialog box when done.

4.

Drafting
Dimension Creation General Settings Generation Geometry Layout Manipulators Customizing Company Standard Management

Dimension Creation
You can customize given options when creating or re-positioning dimensions. 1. Select the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design command. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the Dimension tab.

Dimension Creation

Dimension following the mouse (ctrl toggles): you can decide that the dimension line is positioned according to the cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process. Constant offset between dimension line and geometry: the distance between the created dimension and the geometry remains the same when you move the geometry. Default dimension line/geometry distance: if you position the dimension according to the cursor, you can define the value at which the dimension is created. If you create associativity between the dimension and the geometry, you can define the value at which the dimension will remain positioned. End dimension creation at line-up: aligning a dimension to another automatically ends the command, you do not have to click in the free space. If you click the Associativity on 3D switch button the following dialog box appears:

A link can be applied between a dimension and the 3D part. As a result, when you update the drawing, the dimension is automatically re-computed. If you do not check this option, when you perform the update, you need to re-create the dimension afterwards. Create driving dimensions: the dimension you will create will drive the geometry. A new field appears in the toolbar during creation process, it allows you to enter the driving dimension value.

By default, dimension circles on their: the dimension you will create between a circle and another element will be either on the circle center or on the circle edge. Move

Activating Move only selected sub-part allows you to move only a dimension sub-part (text, line, etc.). You can activate the snapping option selecting Activate Snapping (shift toggles). The Configure switch button allows you to choose either the dimension to be snapped on the grid or/and the dimension value to be located at its default position between symbols (it will work only if the cursor is between the symbols).

Holding on the Shift key allows you to temporarily deactivate or activate this mode. Line-Up

You can organize dimensions into a system with a linear offset. The offset will align the dimensions to each others as well as the smallest dimension to the reference element. Analysis Display Mode

Colors can be customized with the Activate analysis display mode option. If you activate this mode, it allows you to assign the desired color(s) to the desired dimension types by clicking the Types and colors switch button.

You will then be able to visualizing the colors assigned to the different types of dimensions.

General Settings
This task shows you how to set general settings to be used in the Interactive Drafting workbench. 1. Select the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design command. 2. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 3. Select the General tab.

Ruler Checking the Show Ruler option displays the ruler in your sheet. It means you visualize the cursor coordinates as you are drawing. Y Grid To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the Primary fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid. The Display option allows displaying the grid in your session. You will note that this capability is also available via the Interactive Drafting Options toolbar. The Snap to point option needs be checked if the geometry needs to begin or end on the points of the grid. The Allow Distortions option allows applying different graduations and spacing between H and V. Rotation The Rotation Snap Angle option allows snapping with a given angle for rotating elements. This option is used to rotate text elements (text, frame, or leader). In other words, it defines the snapping value used when rotating an element using the Select or Rotate commands. The Automatic Snapping option allows to automate this option.

Colors You can customize given options for modifying the drawing background color. As shown below, you can customize the color type.

This is what you get if you do as detailed above:

You can modify the background colors at any time. Tree You can display or not parameters and relations in the specification tree. View axis When you activate a view, you can choose to visualize the view axis. In addition, you can define whether these axes can be zoomed. 4. Once you have chosen all of your options, click OK to confirm the operations.

Geometry and Dimension Generation
You can customize given options for controlling geometry and dimension generation whenever you need to update sheets. 1. Select the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design-> Drafting command. The Options dialog box appears. 2. Select the Generation tab.

the Linetype for some views dialog box appears: Select the line type you need and click Close. Drafting properties options) and either activate or de-activate the Not cut in section views options. For this. View tab): Generate axes Generate center lines Generate (threads) Generate fillet (boundary) Hidden lines 3D colors inheritance: the colors of a part can be automatically generated onto the views. Project 3D wireframe Both the wireframe and the geometry can be visualized on generated views. you can define that given parts will or will not be sectioned into section views or breakout views (Generative Drafting workbench). then the Edit -> Properties command from the menu bar from the Assembly Design workbench (Mechanical tab. Apply uncut specification In an assembly. the generated views will result white and therefore not necessarily properly visualized. linetype switch button If you click the linetype switch button.Geometry generation / Dress up The following geometry is possibly generated (provided you check the desired options using the contextual menu. you select one view. Be careful: if the color of the part is white and the 3D colors inheritance option checked. . Properties option.

. a dimension will appear on a view so that this dimension needs not be also created on another view. Click OK to confirm the operation. If you check the Generate dimensions when updating the sheet option. The dimensions are generated on the views on the condition the settings were previously switched to the dimension generation option. In other words. this option makes the application automatically generate dimensions each time you update the sheet. 3.Dimension generation The generated dimensions are positioned according to the views most representative.

the Create detected constraints option is not available.Geometry Creation You can customize given options when creating 2D geometry. or still adding constraints to this geometry. Constraints creation You can create or not the geometrical or dimensional constraints detected by the SmartPick tool. Geometry You can decide that you want to create circle and ellipses centers and that you want to be able to drag elements. either or not using autodetection (or SmartPick). If all of the detection options are unchecked. The Options dialog box appears. Select the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design-> Drafting command. 1. 2. . Select the Geometry tab. end points included.

Modify the reference size. and more and more relationships with existing elements. Constraints types (switch button) You can define which types of constraints you will visualize as you . Note that if the Visualize constraints option is unchecked. if needed.SmartPick (switch button) As you create more and more elements. Check the Visualize constraints option to visualize the logical constraints specific to the elements. if needed. Modify the constraints color using the combo. you can decide to filter out undesired detections. Constraints Visualization 1. 3. the elements are not available. perpendicularity and tangency Horizontality and verticality Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect when sketching. Consequently. This task shows how to do so: The SmartPick category provides these options: Support lines and circles Alignment Parallelism. it may be a good idea to disable SmartPick to concentrate only on the geometry. SmartPick detects multiple directions and positions. Disabling SmartPick completely is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. 2.

the element is assigned the color as defined in the Tools->Options dialog box.create the geometry. OR Constraint diagnostics: Colors that represent constraint diagnostics are colors that are imposed to elements whatever the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given diagnostics. These two types of colors correspond to colors illustrating: Graphical properties: Colors that can be modified. You can assign default colors to all the elements. Colors Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. the following dialog box appears: . as soon as the diagnostic is solved. These colors can therefore be modified using the Tools->Options dialog box. As a result. If you click the Visualization of diagnostic switch button.

Iso-constrained elements: All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. This is also the case when elements are under-constrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to a solution. . Protected elements: non-modifiable elements. geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated. As a result. If you click the Other color of the elements switch button.Over-constrained elements: the dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions were applied to the geometry. Not-changed elements: Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. Inconsistent elements: At least one dimension value needs to be changed. the following dialog box appears: Isolated elements: use-edge that no more depend on the 3D. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its geometrical support.

Construction elements: A construction element is an element that is internal to. the sketch. and only visualized by. 4. It is not used for creating solid primitives. Click OK to confirm your operation and quit the dialog box. SmartPick: colors used for SmartPick assistant elements and symbols. . This element is used as positioning reference.

View and Sheet Layout You can customize given options when creating views or when adding sheets. 2. . containing the following sets of options: View creation When creating a view. 3. New sheet You can define that when creating a new sheet. Click Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box. 1. Select the Layout tab. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box appears. you want the source sheet to be the first or one sheet from another drawing. and that you want broken and breakout specifications to be reproduced. you can define that you want or not the view name. scaling factor or frame to appear.

. in the case of texts. 2. modify the size of the manipulators. if needed. The size of the manipulators is a reference size which corresponds. Manipulators The settings below can be used for any type of manipulators (texts. You can make manipulators zoomable and. Select the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design-> Drafting command. 1. center lines. for example. leaders. The Options dialog box appears. to the diameter of the rotation manipulators. dimensions and so forth).Manipulators You can decide that you will visualize given manipulators whenever creating or modifying dimensions. Select the Manipulators tab.

you will click on the manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box that appears. 2. Insert text before Allows inserting a text before. both blanking are modified. use the Ctrl key.Dimension Manipulators You will define which manipulators you will visualize and therefore use when creating and/or modifying dimensions: 1. 4. To modify only the selected overrun extension line. 3. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box that appears. both overrun extension lines are modified. Modify overrun If you drag select one overrun manipulator. Modify blanking If you drag select one blanking manipulator. without using the Properties dialog box. To modify only the selected blanking. For this. Insert text after . use the Ctrl key.

Move dimension line Allows moving the dimension line and only it by dragging to the new location. Move value Allows moving the dimension value and only it. 5. Click OK to confirm the operation. 7. you will click on the manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears. Move dimension line secondary part Allows moving the dimension line secondary part and only it by dragging to the new location. For this. 6. without using the Properties dialog box. .Allows inserting a text after. 3.

Enter one of the following files ISO.Customizing Company Standard Management This task shows you how to edit the list of the parameters values which impact the representation of the texts and dimensions. 1.CatDrawStandard JIS. Enter install_root/reffiles/Drafting.CatDrawStandard . 2.CatDrawStandard ANSI.

Click Mechanical Design then Functional Tolerancing in the left-hand column. The Options dialog box is displayed.. The Tolerancing tab displays four different categories of options: Standard Rotation Manipulators View Display . 2. Select Tools -> Options. the display of the manipulators as well as the display of the axes. 1. command..Functional Tolerancing and Annotation Workbench This task shows you how to customize the rotation of the elements.

The rotation will be snapped to the increment you enter.JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) Rotation You can define an angle for rotating elements.Standard You can choose between three conventional standards: . Enter the desired angle value. Manipulators You can define whether manipulators can be zoomed in or not. or leader). frame. You can also assign a size to the manipulators. This option is used to rotate text elements (text.ANSI (American National Standards Institute) . Before View Display After .ISO (International Organization for Standardization) .

. .you can define whether the axis can be zoomed in or not. .you can define whether the axis can be visible or not.When you activate a view.

Shape General Display Free Style .

the deviation tolerance value. Optimizer and Profiler User's Guide). In this case if the continuity is over the set value the element is not created/modified. organized in separate areas depending on the type of setting. You can define: the constraint tolerance value used to define the continuity variation.Free Style Settings This task explains how to customize settings for FreeStyle workbenches. In the Geometry area. The options for FreeStyle settings appear. . FreeStyle Optimizer and FreeStyle Profiler. check: Tolerances: to impose user-defined tolerances to every elements to be created and modified within a FreeStyle workbench. Geometry Auto-detection Display Tuning 3. Select the Shape -> FreeStyle category in the tree to the left. 1. Select the Tools -> Options command. In this case you accept the conversion up to the set tolerance value. used when converting elements using the Converter Wizard for example (see Approximating/Segmenting Procedural Curves and Approximating/Segmenting Procedural Surfaces in the FreeStyle Shaper. The Options dialog box is displayed. namely FreeStyle Shaper. 2.

This maximum order value ranges from 5 to 12 included. or converting elements using the Converter Wizard for example.Max order: to set the maximum allowed order along the U (and V) directions of curves and surfaces. In the Auto-Detection area. in a given direction. you can choose to display: the point coordinates as the pointer moves along the geometry by selecting the Coordinates checkbox the remote mode dressing by selecting the Search dressing checkbox. 5. In the Display area. you set the information to be displayed on the geometry as you manipulate it. 4. Segmentation: to set the single element segmentation mode when extending a curve or a surface. that is: the Control Points on the geometry .

and so forth) . and so forth) the Contact Point at every connection between connected elements (such as blend and match curves and surfaces. and so forth) the Tension manipulators at every connection between connecting elements (such as blend and match curves and surfaces. fill surfaces.the Continuities at every connection between elements (such as blend and match curves and surfaces. and so forth) the Curvature texts on an element (such as blend and match curves and surfaces.

the Order number along the U (for curves) or U and V directions (for surfaces). . you set the values used when manipulating views or geometry. See Editing Surfaces Using Control Points. 6. refer to the CATIA Version 5 Infrastructure User's Guide. For further information on the Performance tab. Customizing Performances Settings. Click OK to confirm setting these options. 7. and Manipulating Views in the FreeStyle Shaper. In the Tuning area. Optimizer and Profiler User's Guide for example.

Analysis Tolerance Analysis .

Tolerance Analysis General Fastening .

contact. then the Tolerance Analysis subcategory. Feature Colors Define the default colors of tolerance analysis features: rigid support. mechanical joint. Select Tools -> Options.Customizing General Settings This task will show you how to customize Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly general settings. displaying three categories of options: File Out Folder Define the folder path where to save file out of tolerance analysis. The Options dialog box appears. Conversion Range Define the range value to switch between tolerance interval and statistic law.. 1. . flexible support. 99. fastening.. 2.73% of measures contained in the tolerance interval represent the statistic law field. Click the Analysis & Simulation category. In our example. then the General tab The General appears.

.

. Select Tools -> Options. 2. then the Fastening tab. The Options dialog box appears.Customizing Fastening Settings This task will show you how to customize Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly general settings.. 1. Click the Analysis & Simulation category. The Fastening tab appears. Settings available are: Before Point Planar Riveting After Revolute or Spherical Revolute Define the mechanical joint take into account to represent riveting before and after fastening activity. Settings available are: Before After . displaying four categories of options: Spot Welding Define the mechanical joint take into account to represent spot welding before and after fastening activity. then the Tolerance Analysis subcategory.

Point Planar Spherical Revolute Bolting Revolute or Spherical Revolute Revolute or Spherical Revolute Define the mechanical joint take into account to represent bolting before and after fastening activity. Settings available are: Before After . Settings available are: Before Point Planar Spherical Revolute Spot Glueing After Revolute or Spherical Revolute Revolute or Spherical Revolute Define the mechanical joint take into account to represent spot glueing before and after fastening activity.

Point Planar Revolute or Spherical Revolute .

AEC Plant Display General .

Change the settings as desired: To change the grid step. Select the Plant Layout tab. 4. 1. For all other options. select the button next to an element to include it in or exclude it from the specification tree. Select the Product category from the left column of the dialog box.Display This task explains how to specify which Plant Layout elements are displayed in the specification tree. The Options dialog box is displayed. Contours and Grid Planes have not been selected. From the menu bar. . 2. 5. Click OK to accept the new settings. select Tools -> Options. 3. In the example above. so these elements would not be displayed in the specification tree. select the input field and key in a new value.

.

NC Manufacturing Display Resources Operation Output .

7.Display This task explains how to customize Display settings for NC Manufacturing products. Select the Display tab to customize: the display of the specification tree the colors of displayed geometry and parameters the tool display during tool path replay the handling of geometry necessary for manufacturing. 4. 2. . In the Tool Path Replay area: select the checkbox if you want to display the tool near your cursor position on the trajectory during a tool path replay. organized in tab pages. Select the NC Manufacturing category in the tree to the left. In the Tree Display area: select the checkbox to activate the PPR tree display mode. Select the colors to be used to identify the various manufacturing entities by means of the combos in the Colors area. The options for NC Manufacturing settings appear. In the Complementary Geometry area: select the checkbox to create a CATPart dedicated to manufacturing-specific geometry in the Product List part of the PPR tree. 1. Click OK to apply the settings and quit the dialog box. 6. 3. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. 5.

In the Tool Selection area: select the checkboxes to activate automatic tool query and tool preview modes In the Tool Catalogs and PP Tables area: enter the path of the folder containing tool catalogs and PP tables. 1.Resources This task explains how to customize Resource settings for NC Manufacturing products. . Select the Resources tab to customize: the path name for Tool catalogs and PP tables the selection of tools. The options for NC Manufacturing settings appear. organized in tab pages. 3. 5. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. Select the NC Manufacturing category in the tree to the left. 4. 2. Click OK to apply the settings and quit the dialog box.

Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. Select the checkbox in the When Copying area if you want geometry links to be duplicated in a copied operation. . 1. 2. The options for NC Manufacturing settings appear. Select the checkbox in the Default Values area if you want operations to be created with the values used in the current program. Select the NC Manufacturing category in the tree to the left. 6. 3. organized in tab pages. 4. Click OK to apply the settings and quit the dialog box. Select the desired checkboxes in the After Creation area to specify the way you want your machining operations to be created. Select the Operations tab to customize: the use of default values the creation of machining operations the duplication of geometry links. Otherwise the geometry must be defined for the copied operation. Otherwise the default settings delivered with the application are used. 5.Operation This task explains how to customize Operation settings for NC Manufacturing products.

2. Select the NC Manufacturing category in the tree to the left. organized in tab pages.Output This task explains how to customize Output settings for NC Manufacturing products. Select the Output tab to customize the type of PP files that will be proposed for generating ISO code output. 3. Click OK to apply the settings and quit the dialog box. Select the desired checkbox in the Post Processor area: None: no Post Processor is defined. . Cenit: you can choose from among the Post Processor parameter files proposed by Cenit to generate your ISO code. IMS: you can choose from among the Post Processor parameter files proposed by IMS to generate your ISO code. 1. The options for NC Manufacturing settings appear. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. ISO code output is not possible in this case. 4.

Digital Mockup DMU Navigator DMU Space Analysis DMU Fitting DMU Immersive Review DMU Optimizer DMU Tolerancing Review .

DMU Navigator DMU Navigator General Invention Machine Tools .

The DMU Navigator tab is active . Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears 2. Click the Digital Mockup category. 1.Customizing DMU Navigator Settings This task explains how to customize DMU Navigator settings.

Click preview checkboxes as appropriate to change the automatic display setting of preview windows when creating cameras. 5. In this case. from the 3D . 6. Change the color. Uncheck the Update on product move option if necessary. manipulating objects. a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or a HTML page on the intranet. Set Hyperlink Representation to Name: By default.The DMU Navigator tab lets you customize: Hyperlink representation (name) Automatic display of preview windows Marker Default Properties Scene Default Properties 3D annotation update (when moving the product) You can add hyperlinks to your document and then use them to jump to a variety of locations. 8. etc. hyperlink names are displayed : all hyperlink will be textual. The name you give the link in the Manage Hyperlink dialog box when you create it will appear when using go to hyperlink. 3. preview windows are automatically displayed. font type and font size of 2D markers Note: Defining the Marker default properties in the Tools->Options->DMU Navigator sets the selected properties as default properties and changes how new annotations will look when you create them. you will perform the update operation manually using the update item annotations contextual menu. By default. 4. for example. to a marketing presentation. Change the Scene background color if necessary 7. Click OK in the dialog box when done.

Graph options UML Only objects and actions are displayed. Display of actions in tree A :Only the action label is displayed (example: Generates). variants and concepts are displayed. SAO: The action is displayed in the <subject> <action> <object> form (example: Motor Generates Noise). you get onscreen a sample of a graph. ASO:The action is displayed in the <action>(<subject>-><object>) form (example: Generates(Motor->Noise). PROBLEMS. CONCEPTS and VARIANTS nodes. IMC In addition to objects and actions. ACTIONS. problems. Sample Elements: In addition to the basic tree. you just see onscreen the tree with the OBJECTS. .Customizing General Settings Document contents at creation Empty:After a File->New.

Customizing Invention Machine Tools The Tree Display section relates to the listing of the problems in the Problem Manager. The address of the KnIS site should appear in the KnIS Site edit box. The Concept presentation in tree section has options for you to choose to display concepts related to all problems or only those related to user defined problems. select User problems only. The Start ENOVIA portal option opens the effects/examples in the ENOVIA portal. If you do not want to see the ones detected by the FunctionalSystem. The Knowledge Base Access section determines how you access the information in the Knowledge and Innovation Server (KnIS). Absolute and Relative addressing options lets you . The Start Web Browser in CATIA (NT only) opens the default Web Browser and displays the effects/examples from KnIS in it. Choosing All problems causes the problems detected by the FunctionalSystem and the user defined ones to appear in the list.

delete. or move the parts of the model. . The Trimming Variant Change Mode section has options for choosing to use the Trimming Wizard to guide you through the process of trimming a component or to use Free Edit to add.choose the method to use.

DMU Space Analysis DMU Clash DMU Clash .Detailed Computation DMU Clash Publish DMU Sectioning .

then the DMU Space Analysis subcategory. 2. 3. . 1. Click Digital Mockup category.Customizing DMU Clash Settings This task explains how to customize the clash settings of the Clash command. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. Click the DMU Clash tab.

Click OK in the dialog box when done . List by product tab. the default clearance value.The DMU Clash tab lets you customize the following clash command settings: Retrieve Information: retrieves clash results for comparison purposes: From previous computation From PDM: from both Enovia V5 and Enovia VPM. if necessary. Note that in the case of Enovia VPM. comparison is available on UNIX only. First line automatically selected: automatically selects the first line in the List by Conflict or List by Product tab (default setting). Type of Computation: sets the default computation type and. During Initial Computation: has the system compute and display the penetration depth and minimum distance for all interferences detected during the initial computation. No comparison (default setting) Results Window / Automatically open: automatically displays the results window when you run a clash command computation. Display in Results box: three options to set the default display in the results box of the Check Clash dialog box: List by conflict tab (default setting). 4.

curves for clashes) and the penetration depth or minimum distance are computed. 1. By default. .Detailed Computation This task explains how to customize the detailed computation settings of the Clash command. It can be run at element or product level. the detailed computation is run at element level. 2. Click the DMU Clash .Detailed Computation tab.DMU Clash . The detailed computation mode defines what is computed when you select a conflict or product in the Check Clash Results box. 3. The graphics representation of interferences (triangles for contacts and clearances. Click Digital Mockup -> DMU Space Analysis in the left-hand box. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears.

The DMU Clash . you are not totally free in your choice. Element: lets you work globally at product level while allowing you to pinpoint the elements involved. If you select this option. None: No triangles or surfaces are computed. you must set an accuracy. 4. Numeric Result: specifies the numeric result computed and displayed. This representation is used to obtain the yellow and green surfaces. Penetration depth or minimum distance: The penetration depth of clashes and the minimum distance for clearances is computed and displayed. however. You can combine various options to set your detailed computation mode. Note: The graphics display and storage of the triangular representation is costly and may adversely affect performance. Surface: Yellow and green surfaces identifying products in contact and products separated by less than the specified clearance distance respectively are computed and displayed. Clash Result: specifies the graphics representation for clashes. For example. Contact & Clearance Result: specifies the graphics representation for contacts and clearances. The value entered defines the maximum value for the length of the longest side of a triangular representation of the results. None: No intersection curves are computed. Note: Element analysis in Detailed Results and Visualization boxes is only available if the level of detail is set to Element. if you select the Element level of detail. Click OK in the dialog box when done . Triangles: Yellow and green triangles identifying products in contact and products separated by less than the specified clearance distance respectively are computed and displayed. Product: gives information at product level only.Detailed Computation tab lets you customize the following settings: Level of Detail: sets the level of detail. None: No penetration depth or minimum distance is computed. Curve: Red intersection curves identifying clashing products are computed and displayed. clash result curves and the penetration depth or minimum distance will always be computed.

.

Browser automatically opened: automatically opens a browser displaying results when clash results are exported. Style sheet: lets you select and apply your customized style sheet. Click Digital Mockup -> DMU Space Analysis in the left-hand box. 2.DMU Clash Publish This task explains how to customize publish settings of the Clash command. 1. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. 3. The DMU Clash Publish tab lets you customize XML publish settings: Default path: sets the default location in which to save the XML file. Click the DMU Clash Publish tab. Click OK in the dialog box when done . 4.

Click the DMU Sectioning tab The DMU Sectioning tab lets you customize: Section Planes: sets default section plane settings. Normal X.0 or at the center of the bounding sphere around the products in the selection you defined. Click Digital Mockup -> DMU Space Analysis in the left-hand box 3.Z: specifies the absolute axis along which you want to orient the normal vector of the section plane (master plane in the case of slices and boxes).Y. 1. Origin: locates the center of the plane at absolute coordinates 0.0. .Customizing DMU Sectioning Settings This task explains how to customize sectioning settings. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears 2.

Always 2D view: always displays the 2D view in the results window. Click OK in the dialog box when done . Steps: specifies the spacing between grid lines. De-activating this option means that results are computed when you release the mouse button. Automatically open: automatically displays a results window when in the Sectioning command. Units are current units set using Tools -> Options. automatically adjusts the level of detail of the grid display when you zoom in and out. Style: sets the grid representation to lines or crosses.Hide the plane in the No Show space: transfers the plane to the No Show space on exiting the command. Relative mode: places the center of the grid on the center of the section plane (master plane in the case of slices and boxes). Double-clicking the plane in the specification tree transfers it back to the Show space. Results Window: sets default results window settings. The default value is 100. Absolute mode: sets grid coordinates with respect to the absolute axis system of the document. Section fill: fills in the section to make a surface for measurement and display. 4. Section Grid: sets default grid options. Automatically reframe: automatically fits the results into the available space in both the results and preview windows when manipulating the section plane in the document window. Compute the result while moving the plane: automatically updates sectioning results while manipulating the plane. Automatic filtering: if clicked.

DMU Fitting DMU Fitting DMU Manipulators .

Customizing DMU Fitting Settings This task explains how to customize DMU Fitting settings. . Please see "Defining a Shuttle" in the DMU Fitting Users Guide. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears. This option lets you specify a maximum rotation angle for the shuttle. 2. 3. Click the DMU Fitting item The DMU Fitting tab is active. Click Digital Mockup in the left-hand box. 1. Shuttle Angular Validation lets you set the angular shuttle validation option in the Edit Shuttle dialog box.

. 3. Click OK in the dialog box when done.Path Finder Automatic Smooth: if checked. the smooth is performed within the Pathfinder command clicking OK.

2.Customizing DMU Manipulators This task explains how to customize DMU Fitting settings. . 1. Click Digital Mockup in the left-hand box. Select Tools -> Options from the menu bar: The Options dialog box appears.

the clash Beep option is unchecked. By default.The DMU Manipulation tab lets you customize Fitting Simulator commands settings: Clash Beep Click Clash beep checkbox to activate the Beep during interference analyses. simulation recordings. Automatic Insert Configurations On mouse release: lets you record positions on mouse release (this is the default mode) While mouse moving: Distance: specifies the minimum distance step during simulation recording Angle: specifies the maximum rotation angle step during simulation recording Check the "while mouse release" record mode The "Distance" and "Angle" fields are no longer grayed out. Manipulation Modes for Shuttle Simulation Lets you validate the shuttle simulation detecting clashes. No clash detection simulation context : default detection mode in Clash detection on : activates the clash detection mode (the product in clash is highlighted in the geometry area while recording the simulation ) Stop on collision : activates the stop mode. This setting is linked to the Automatic Clash Detection toolbar the icon changes automatically with respect to the option checked. it means the simulation is stopped at the first clash. etc. enter the appropriate values to record the the motion. the products are highlighted in the geometry area .

. Click OK in the dialog box when done. 3. Orientation value: specifies the cylinder height (second area) where the shuttle is snapped onto the object.Snap Sensitivity lets you customize the snap functionality parameters: The snap works within a sphere and a cylinder Position value: specifies the sphere radius (first area) where the shuttle is snapped onto the object.

Click the DMU Immersive item The DMU Immersive Review is active The DMU Immersive Review tab lets you customize the following starting options (as entering the DMU Immersive Review Workbench) Viewpoint tracking: if set.DMU Immersive Review This task will show you how to manage representations as alternate shapes automatically. command. Click OK in the dialog box when done. The Options dialog box appears 2.. three-dimensional images. 1.. . the viewpoint changes as your head turns if you use a head tracker device. Please refer to Customizing Devices Settings Stereoscopic: Enables or disables stereoscopic visualization of graphical data with a perception of realistic. Expand the Digital Mockup category from the left-hand tree 3. P3 grid: lets you display the P3 grid when you enter the DMU Immersive Workbench 4. Select the Tools->Options. You need to launch the device driver. This option is linked to Stereoscopic option which enables or disables 3D visualization of your session.

.

the one loaded when opening the product. Select the required representation. .. for example Offset. The Options dialog box appears 2. Click the DMU Optimizer item to display the corresponding tab 4. the Manage representation dialog box is automatically updated with the offset representation.Managing an Alternate Shape This task will show you how to manage representations as alternate shapes automatically. 5. Select the Tools->Options. 1. Customize the representation settings as required: Manage as alternate shape: if set the resulting offset shape is managed as the offset component alternate shape (i. Expand the Digital Mockup category from the left-hand tree 3. Click Ok to confirm your operation After a new offset calculation. input component) Activate Shape: if activated the Offset representation is the one visualized in the session.. command.e. 6. Default Shape: if activated the offset representation will be the default shape. if you right-click the product and select Manage representations.

In DMU Optimizer. . it is impossible to generate various alternate shapes with the same name. Only the last generated alternate shape is taken into account.

ready for use the More Colors. The colors you define are visible when using the Related Surfaces capability. Click Digital Mockup then DMU Tolerancing Review. option. The Options dialog box is displayed.. You can set the color of highlights for related surfaces. The DMU Tolerancing tab that appears displays two options: Related surface color 3. Click the combo box to select the color of your choice. .. 1.DMU Tolerancing This task shows you customize DMU Tolerancing settings. A list appears containing: a blank color field a list of default colors from the color palette. 2. Select the Tools -> Options command.

allowing you to define the colors of your choice. inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the spectrum.. Select More Colors. or choose More Colors. The empty boxes below are reserved for your own custom colors. at the bottom of the color list to access the color palette. Either you select a color. The Color dialog box appears. . click anywhere in the colored area or drag the cross 7. In the Basic Colors area. The full color palette and color customization tools are displayed. the first sixteen colors (in the top two rows) are the same as those at the top of the previous list..4. Click Define Custom Colors to expand the Color dialog box.. The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum.. 6. 5. The remaining four rows contain extra colors. To define a new color.

Automatic Design Mode 12. 10. Check Automatic Design Mode if you wish to access technological data in your session.e.Use the slider to adjust your color. 11. 9. click the Add to Custom Colors option to add the custom color. Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red. otherwise remember that models are loaded in Visualization Mode. This makes the brightness of the custom color vary. i. Click on the custom color to apply it to related surfaces. The HSL (Hue. without associated technological data (only visualization data is loaded). . 8. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your exact color specifications. Once you are happy with the color. Green and Blue) values vary according to where the cross is located. Click Apply to return to the original color palette.

Equipments and Systems Electrical Assembly Design Electrical Wire Routing Electrical Harness Installation Circuit Board Design .

Electrical Library Electrical Library Electrical Library Access .

Click Equipments & Systems in the left-hand box. Select the Tools->Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed. Associate an electrical type to the currently selected Family.Electrical Library In order to valuate the keywords automatically when the devices are stored in the catalog with their properties. 5. you need to define a mapping between keywords of each family and the attributes of the component type... 2. Click the Electrical Library tab. 1. button customize the mapping between the catalog and the electrical objects define the keyword attributes. 3. The tab lets you: define the current catalog using the Browse. . 4. Click the Electrical Assembly Design workbench.

6. Click OK to validate the options. Define for each keyword the corresponding reference attribute. The result looks like this: Use the combo list to select the corresponding attribute.Use the combo list to select the corresponding type. . 7.

The mapping definition can be set by the administrator. refer to CATIA .Infrastructure User's Guide . To get more information about the Administration Mode in CATIA. In this case it can also be locked.

Electrical Library Access Electrical System Functional Definition takes advantage of Electrical Library for the mapping between functional equipments and connectors to V4 library parts. It lets you define: the library names and their location in the upper frame the location of the compatibility table if it exists (for example: c:\Temp) . The compatibility sets a relation between the External Reference attribute of the functional component and the Part Number attribute of the physical component. 4. The V4 libraries access is defined in the Tools -> Options menu. This is done in EFD. 2. These relations are stored in a compatibility table. Select the Tools -> Options menu. 3. Moreover. in csv format. 1. Click the Electrical Library Access tab. a compatibility can be established between functional and physical components in order to reduce the list of physical components available for a functional component. Click Equipments & Systems in the left-hand box. The Options dialog box is displayed. Click the Electrical Assembly Design workbench. It consists in the definition of the corresponding physical components for functional equipments or connectors.

refer to Mapping Functional Components to Physical Parts The Electrical Library Access can be set by the administrator. To add a library in the list. For more information about the interoperability with CATIA . Enter the library name and path then click OK to validate. the functional equipment which External Reference is ExtRefEqt is compatible with three physical equipments which PartNumber are PN1. Let's see its structure: In this sample. 8. 7. PN3. PN2. click the corresponding button. enter its path in the Compatibility Storage Path field. The dialog box opens: 6. In this case it can also be locked. refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide .5.Electrical System Functional Definition. using respectively the Remove or Edit button. To get more information about the Administration Mode in CATIA. To gain access to the compatibility table. You can delete or modify the library access.

This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files. This is done using Tools -> Options from the menu bar. Click the Electrical Wire Routing workbench. Select the Tools -> Options command. . 4. 3. Click OK in the dialog box when done. you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.Electrical Wire Routing Before you start your first working session. 2. 1. The General tab is displayed: This tab lets you customize: the wire extremities management the property naming to be displayed as a column title the separation code file access the extremity color. The Options dialog box is displayed. Expand the Equipments & Systems in the left-hand box. Settings will not be lost if you exit your session.

Signal-Arc manages compatibility between signal and pathways. Two options are now available: Signal-Signal manages compatibility between signals. This file is used during the Automatic Routing and the Routing Simulation. In that case. Push the Edit button to enter a new rule. The Routing Rule Editor is displayed. Those Separation Codes may be File Based. The line above the input field is a reminder of the knowledgeware syntax.arrow. To add properties to the list. Property Naming Select a property in the Favorites list and enter a name in the Favorite column Title field. Extremity Color .Wire Extremities Management The Favorites list contains the properties displayed in the Interconnection frame of the Wire Extremities Management dialog box. do the reverse: select the property from the Favorites list and click the <--. The Eraser icon is used to clean the input field. using CATIA Knowledgeware. select the property in the Available list and click the ---> arrow. define the path to access the compatibility table by clicking the Browse button to choose the separation code file. To remove properties. but this rule may combine several conditions. Only one rule can be implemented at a time. The Separation Codes may also be Rule Based. It is displayed in the Wire Connection Management dialog box: Separation Code File The Separation Code File area is used to define Separation Code rules to optimize the routing.

The Extremity Color field is used to change the color of the extremities boxes. Select a color from the color combo box. or .

Choose the Equipments & Systems in the left-hand box. The General tab is displayed: This tab lets you define: the bundle segment color on creation the Link option: Geometrical link: This option is activated by default. 3. you can customize the way you work to suit your habits. 2. This is done using Tools -> Options from the menu bar. 1. The Options dialog box is displayed. This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files. the electrical connection is created at the same time as the bundle segment you need to create a geometrical bundle prior to define a bundle segment when the selection is completed. . the bundle segment creation options: Automatic link: Mandatory geometrical bundle: These options are activated by default.Electrical Harness Installation Before you start your first working session. Select the Tools -> Options command. Settings will not be lost if you exit your session. the bundle segment is extended to the last extremity. Click the Electrical Harness Installation workbench.

.4. Click OK in the dialog box when done.

2. 3. Click Equipments & Systems in the left-hand box. If you check the Update documents in session box. Click the Circuit Board Design workbench: The Circuit Board tab is displayed. your change will be applied to the current document. . The Options dialog box opens. 1. You can set a default height for the component used when importing data: the . Click OK to validate. These are permanent settings. the Default height will be used as the component pad height.Circuit Board Design Settings This task shows you how to change the user settings. You can set the color of your choice to the different areas. 4.lib file contains the component footprint. You can also browse to specify the default catalog. Select the Tools -> Options menu. If its height is null.

.

What You Need Before Installing Version 5 Hardware Requirements Basic Software Requirements Additional Software Requirements How Are Version 5 Products Packaged? More About the Licensing Mechanism .

512 MB of RAM is recommended for DMU applications on large assemblies and for the CATIA . The minimum resolution required for Windows workstations is 800 x 600. On Windows workstations.htm 1/30/01 . and 1280 x 1024 on UNIX workstations. In addition to CATIA P2 Products. System unit and graphic requirements are platform specific and are detailed in the topics that follow: Disk drive: an internal or external disk drive is required to store program executables.Hardware Requirements Page 1 of 5 Hardware Requirements Common Hardware Requirements The following requirements are common to all operating systems supported by Version 5 Release 5.doc\src\basugap0100. which can optionally be downloaded to disk. to perform graphic manipulations (zoom.DMU SPACE ANALYSIS (SP1) The robustness of the overall solution is dependant on the robustness of the operating system and the hardware environment used. The minimum recommended size for usability reasons is 17 inches. this support is also available with following products: l l CATIA . pan. Internal/external drives: a CD-ROM drive is required for program installation and access to the online documentation. The 3-button mouse is recommended for usability reasons. hardware texturing capability is strongly recommended when using Version 5 products that use texture mapping. Optional components and features: SpaceBall and SpaceMouse can be used.). Memory: 256 MB of RAM is the minimum recommended amount of memory for all applications. etc.Digitized Shape Editor 2 (DSE) product. Requirements may be greater when large amounts of data are used. usage environment and paging space (minimum recommended size: 2 GB). a 2-button mouse may alternatively be used (the third button is emulated with a keyboard sequence). The necessary drivers are delivered with the device. compatible with the selected platform-specific graphic adapter. in addition to the mouse. in which case the amount of RAM has to be adequate for the number and complexity of textures to be used.DMU NAVIGATOR 1 (DN1) CATIA . The IntelliMouse (two buttons plus wheel) is an alternative to the threebutton mouse on Windows workstations. Display: A graphic color display. Windows and UNIX hardware configurations certified by Dassault Systemes for running products are published at: file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Keyboard: a specific keyboard compatible with selected installation locale may be required for national language support. rotate. the wheel acting as the middle button and allowing additional manipulations such as panning and scrolling. Pointing device: 3-button mouse. When selecting a graphic adapter. program data.

The Version 5 infrastructure supports in multithread mode up to 16 graphics adapters and 32 CPUs. Note that graphic performance on local transformations (panning. and provides multi-threaded graphics support on the AIX. high color.0. incidents specific to these configurations or adapters would not be accepted for support.htm 1/30/01 . Pentium III or Pentium 4-based workstations running Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98.com/solutions/engineering Page 2 of 5 Although products might run on other configurations or other graphic adapters. System Unit Intel Pentium II. This graphic adapter should have the following capabilities: 16 bits. a resolution of 1280 x 1024 is recommended for usability reasons. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Graphic Adapter An OpenGL-capable graphic adapter is required. zooming. The updated list of these adapters is published on the following web site: http://www.Hardware Requirements http://www. only generic graphic adapters that have been tested on Windows 95 and Windows 98 will be documented.doc\src\basugap0100. Windows 95 or Windows 98 Important: Windows 95 and Windows 98 apply only to CATIA Platform 1 (P1). or Windows 2000. Tested Graphic Adapters on Windows 95 or Windows 98 Whereas Dassault Systemes has certified complete configurations (workstation model and graphic adapter) for Version 5 running on Windows NT and Windows 2000. Support for Computers Running Multiple Processors The Version 5 infrastructure detects if your computer is equipped with multiple processors. rotating model) will depend on the selected graphic adapter. double buffered visual 16 bits Z-buffer (when hardware accelerated) stencil buffer (1 bit) minimum supported resolution is 800 x 600.ibm. SGI and Solaris platforms to enhance visualization performance.com/solutions/engineering Windows NT and Windows 2000 System Unit Pentium II or Pentium III-based workstations running Microsoft Windows NT Workstation version 4.ibm.

3 provided that the requirements described below are met. rotating) will depend on the selected graphic adapter. true color. is published on the CATIA V5 Web site at URL: http://www. Power2 or Power3 processor families. Network Adapter An active LAN adapter (Ethernet or Token Ring.htm 1/30/01 .doc\src\basugap0100. installed and configured) is required for licensing purposes. certified at Dassault Systèmes for running Version 5 products. double buffered visual 24 bits Z-buffer stencil buffer minimum supported resolution: 800 x 600. Note that graphic performance on viewing functions (panning. based on PowerPC 604 (166 MHz minimum clock speed). supported on AIX Version 4 Release 3.Hardware Requirements Graphic Adapter Page 3 of 5 A graphic adapter with a 3D OpenGL accelerator is required.com/solutions/engineering IBM AIX System Unit Any RS/6000.2 or 3. zooming. Graphic Adapter One of the following graphic adapters is required: GXT500P GXT550P GXT800P GXT800M GXT2000P GXT3000P GXT4000P GXT6000P HP-UX System Unit file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Supported Configurations An updated list of hardware configurations.ibm. The graphic adapter should have the following capabilities: 24 bits. a resolution of 1280 x 1024 is recommended for usability reasons .

E.July 1997) or 10. Octane2 or Onyx2 workstations based on R5000. Ultra60 or SUN Blade 1000 workstation based on the UltraSPARC processor. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug. Sun Solaris System Unit Any Ultra1. 5 (Workstation Additional Core Enhancements for HP-UX 10. provided that requirements described below are met. Indigo2. provided that the requirements described below are met.0. supported on IRIX 6. (November 1999).C. 4 (Workstation Additional Core Enhancements for HP-UX 10. C-Class or J-Class workstation supported on HP-UX Version 10.20 and HP-UX 11.20 A.0 A.Hardware Requirements Page 4 of 5 Any B-Class. Graphic Adapter One of the following graphic adapters is required: Integrated graphic adapters on O2 workstations Solid Impact.doc\src\basugap0100. provided that requirements described below are met.C. supported on Solaris 2.5. or SI/SE Super Solid Impact. Ultra30. support of HP-UX 11.20 A.20 .E.December 1999). Octane. R10000 or R12000 processors.0.C. Note: because of binary incompatibilities between HP-UX 10. Solaris 7 or Solaris 8. Ultra10. Ultra2.6. Graphic Adapter One of the following graphic adapters is required: Visualize-FXE Visualize-FX2 Visualize-FX4 Visualize-FX5 Visualize-FX6 Visualize-FX10 SGI IRIX System Unit Any O2.E. or HPUX 11.0 is limited to a strict run-time support. or MXI/MXE VPro V6 VPro V8 Infinite Reality. or SSI/SSE High Impact Maximum Impact.20 .htm 1/30/01 .

doc\src\basugap0100.htm 1/30/01 .Hardware Requirements Graphic Adapter One of the following graphic adapters is required: Creator3D Creator3D Series III Elite 3D Model M3 (Ultra10-440 Mhz workstations only) Elite 3D Model M3 and M6 (Ultra60 workstations) Expert3D. Page 5 of 5 file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.

ibm. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.com/solutions/engineering A localized version of the operating system may be required when the selected installation locale latin. Terminal Server is also available Windows 2000 Server and Windows 2000 Advanced Server. when installing the graphic ad and associated drivers. Windows NT and Windows 2000 The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Version 4. for appropriate corrective service to the software described in the topics that follow. Service Pack 5. Terminal Server is supported with Microsoft Windows Terminal Server Edition. when installing the graphic adapte associated drivers. for the Japanese language environment) Note: For remote access from networked clients.ibm. Version 5 P2 products do not operate on Windows 95 or Windows 98. with the following components: A Microsoft implementation of OpenGL libraries is delivered with Windows 95 OSR2 or Windows 98 libraries may be updated depending on selected graphic adapter.0 and Windows 2000 deliver an implementation of OpenGL libraries.0 with Service Pack 4.doc\src\basugap0200.Basic Software Requirements Page 1 of 3 Basic Software Requirements Common Software Requirements Refer to the Program Directory or contact your IBM Support Center. The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2. Dassault Systèmes will provide recommendations related to driver levels ba certified configurations through the following website at: http://www. Thes libraries may be updated depending on the selected graphic adapter. Dassault Systèmes will provide recommendations related to driver levels based graphic adapters through the following website at: http://www. with the following components: Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 to be installed in addition on the server.com/solutions/engineering a localized version of the operating system may be required when the selected installation locale Latin1 (for example. at Service Pack 4 level on the Windows NT server. Windows 95 or Windows 98 (P1 products only) Note: The Windows 95 and Windows 98 environments apply only to Platform 1 (P1). or Windows 98. Access through standard br requires Citrix MetaFrame 1. or Service Pack Windows 2000 Professional.htm 1/30/01 .

5. delivered with the operating system) A localized version of the operating system may be required when the selected installation locale di ISO code pages. at minimum level 1.C. Note: Because of binary incompatibilities between HP-UX 10.0 OpenGL and GL3.C.4 for AIX 4. delivered with the operating system HP FORTRAN Runtime Environment (delivered with the operating system) HP-UX 700 OpenGL 3D API Runtime Environment CDE (Common Desktop Environment.E.2m.20 A. 5 (Workstation Additional Core Enhancements for HP-UX 10. delivered with the operating system). at minim 5. support of HP-UX 1 limited to a strict run-time environment.2 for AIX 4.July 19 10. or H 11.20 .6.20 . including: C Set++ for AIX Application Runtime: at minimum level 3.3. 4 (Workstation Additional Core Enhancements for HP-UX 10. including: ANSI C++ Runtime Environment (aC++.0 A.0.1.3 operating systems) CDE (Common Desktop Environment.2 (5648-A81) at minimum level 4.doc\src\basugap0200.0. Sun Solaris file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.3. C++ and Fortran77 standard execution environment (delivered with the operating system) OpenGL (delivered with IRIX execution environment) IRIX Interactive Desktop (delivered with the operating system) WorldView is required when the selected installation locale differs from ISO-1. HP-UX The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: HP-UX Version 10.3. SGI IRIX The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: IRIX 6.C.E.3 (5765-D52) (C Set++ Application Runtime is shipped with AIX Operating System).Basic Software Requirements Windows 2000 Server and Windows 2000 Advanced Server. or 5801-AAR-7070. Page 2 of 3 IBM AIX The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: AIX Version 4 Release 3. P/N 04L2123). IBM XL Fortran Runtime Environment for AIX (5765-C11.E.20 and HP-UX 11. (November 1999).21.December 1999).20 A.htm 1/30/01 .2 Runtime Environment (delivered with AIX 4.2 or 3. including: C.

0.htm 1/30/01 . including: Page 3 of 3 C and C++ runtime environment (delivered with the operating system) OpenGL runtime environment (delivered with the operating system) the Fortran runtime environment is delivered with Version 5 CDE (Common Desktop Environment. Solaris 7 or Solaris 8. delivered with the operating system) a localized version may be required when the selected installation locale differs from ISO-1. file://E:\Www\SESV5R6\BasEnglish\basug.doc\src\basugap0200.Basic Software Requirements The following components at the minimum indicated level are required: Sun Solaris 2.6.

0). either: Microsoft Internet Explorer (delivered with Windows NT 4. Licensing . HP-UX.adobe.01. at minimum level 4. Printing and browsing of this documentation requires Adobe Acrobat Reader at minimum level 3. Windows 98.com/prodindex/acrobat/readstep. IRIX. Windows 2000). HP-UX. An HTML browser is required to access this documentation: In a UNIX environment (AIX. Solaris): AIX. Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 3.5 In a Windows environment (Windows 95. PDF documentation (Portable Document Format) is delivered in addition to HTML documentation.0 may be downloaded from: http://www. incidents specific to other browsers than the above. Netscape Navigator at minimum level 4. IRIX. Service Pack 1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 (delivered with Windows 2000) or.5.0. Solaris: Netscape Navigator at minimum level 4.Additional Software Requirements Specific Software Requirements Access to Online Documentation Online documentation and the User GALAXY (online product marketing information) are delivered in HTML format. Windows NT.mentioned products are not eligible for support.html) Although access to the online documentation might work on other HTML browsers.

A cluster is a group of from 3 to 12 network license servers that jointly serve vendor-managed concurrent licenses that are enrolled on the cluster rather than on an individual server. even in the case of nodelock licensing. If you decide not to use HAL. IBM License Use Management (LUM). refer to the LUM documentation "Using License Use Management Runtime" for your platform. at minimum level 4. A LUM configuration file (i4ls.ini) is required on Version 5 clients to access concurrent licenses from these servers: IBM LUM.5. With HAL. your Version 5 session remains active and another license is requested from another license server. you can configure your computer as a Microsoft Terminal Server Client. . a network license is used. it is strongly recommended to upgrade all the servers to LUM Version 4. nodelock licensing is available on Windows 95 and Windows 98. you create a cluster of network license servers.Windows workstations must have a LAN Card (Ethernet or Token Ring) and TCP/IP installed and properly configured. If you install Version 5 on a computer running Microsoft Windows NT Server.8. at minimum level 4. When you use this feature. or Windows 95/98 workstations must have nodelock licenses. but export the display of the Version 5 session to your local computer (much the same way as when exporting a display on UNIX). IBM License Use Management may be obtained. Beginning with Version 5 Release 5. When you use this option. from: http://www. when the server goes down.5.5. if the license is granted. Consider that for HAL cluster members. Terminal Server Edition Version 4. Windows NT or Windows 2000 server. the total number of licenses granted is increased by one. but there is no need to have the workstations connected to the network.ibm.0 SP4.com/is/lum/lumdownl. the license server must be a UNIX.5. If the license is granted. This will allow you to run Version 5 on the Terminal Server.htm IBM License Use Management High-Availability Licensing (HAL) enables you to set up an environment in which there is a very high degree of certainty that concurrent licenses will be available.9 is required when HAL (High Availability Licensing) licensing mechanism offered by LUM is used Windows 95 and Windows 98 are not supported on IBM LUM license servers. For more information about High-Availability Licensing.software. For Windows 95/98 clients. at no charge.5 is required on UNIX or Windows NT license servers IBM LUM. at minimum level 4. even if a network license server goes down. the total numbers of licenses granted stays the same. No additional software is required when accessing nodelock licenses.8 is required on Windows 2000 license servers IBM LUM. is required to serve concurrent licenses across a network.

the interpreter is Visual Basic Script (VB Script). For Windows. the interpreter is BasicScript from Summit Software. it is included in Version 5 as a shared library. UNIX Version 5 Release 5 provides support for the following main plotter/printer languages: CalComp C907 CGM-ISO. ATA.2124 are delivered with Internet Explorer 4. Please contact the appropriate printer/plotter vendor for support.Macro Replay Capabilities Version 5 has built-in macro record and replay capabilities. However. for the targeted printers/plotters. VGS 2. Macros recorded in either the UNIX or NT environments can be replayed in either environment.0 Postscript. ClearCoat Technology on SGI .01 SP1. because of differences between BasicScript and VB Script. compatible with the targeted version of the operating system. it is delivered with Microsoft Internet Explorer. of the corresponding vendors' drivers. VB Script libraries at level 3. CALS Hewlett Packard HP-GL/2-RTL and HP-GL or IBM-GL subsets OCE Graphics GPR50: VDF plotting routines Versatec: VCGL: Versatec Graphics Software VGS 2.1. at minimum level 3.1. For UNIX. Printer and Plotter Support Windows Support of printers and plotters on Windows is performed through the availability. macros written "by hand" will run only if the developer uses features supported by both interpreters. or at higher levels with later versions of Internet Explorer.0 VRF: Versatec Graphics Software.0.

sgi.Support for ClearCoat Technology on SGI UNIX/NT Workstations ClearCoat technology (SGI only) is supported for more realistic shading effects. This life-like rendering technology improves greatly the fidelity of styling reviews. You can access this new technology on SGI Unix/NT workstations by downloading the dso/dll library from the following site: http://www. Once the ClearCoat software is installed. .code/bin)..com/manufacturing/partners/catia This library must be installed in the Version 5 filetree containing runtime code (. This technology reproduces the reflective nature of glossy materials such as paint. plastic and glass.. the environment mapping textures applied in Version 5 will be modified in a way to produce the ClearCoat effects.

These configurations are offered at an attractive price compared to the sum of the individual product prices. To be able to use Version 5. If you already have a custom configuration. thus allowing you to adapt the configuration content to the most specific user needs. you must use LUM to migrate your server license database to support custom configuration growth. and remains a single solution from a licensing point of view. while offering a single solution from a licensing point of view. After initial installation. the content of custom configurations is dynamically defined at ordering time. corresponding to most frequent user profiles across industries and processes. you can extend it by adding products. There are two types of configurations: standard configurations contain a pre-defined list of products. you need to purchase and acquire at least one configuration license. . The result is a competitively priced solution. The resulting new seat definition is still a single solution from a licensing point of view. To do so: stop your LUM license server migrate your server license database to the new format using the command: i4ccmig then import your new license as usual.How Are Version 5 Products Packaged? The Version 5 product packaging model is based on the concepts of configurations and products. the configuration mechanism lets you manage the evolution and growth of your user profile content by allowing you to add new products. But before you do so. Configurations Configurations are a convenient and attractive way for you to order and install the adequate combination of products for each type of user. The content of a custom configuration is defined by adding individual products (see product delivered as "add-on" below) to an existing standard configuration.

versus "add-on" price.Products Products are the elementary software building blocks for Version 5 installations. to take into account multiple users potential. Shareable product licenses do not have serial numbers. As a "shareable" product. . or to leave it for another user. allowing the user to obtain the license at the beginning of the session. Version 5 may be ordered in three ways: As a standard configuration As an "add-on" product on top of a standard configuration to build a custom configuration. Prices of products ordered in this mode are different. In this case the product is delivered with its own license key.

For instance. based on LUM (License Use Management). The products within a configuration cannot be shared. Licenses for Version 5 configurations are acquired and released for the total configuration. In all cases. If the display changes. using one display. Add-on and shareable products require a license for a configuration which includes at least the prerequisite products. The following licensing principles apply: Using a given Version 5 product requires a license for it and for its prerequisite products Using a given Version 5 configuration requires a license for it. regardless of the number of processes.More About the Licensing Mechanism Version 5 delivers identical licensing mechanisms on UNIX and Windows environments. The functions within a configuration cannot be shared. Licenses for Version 5 configurations are acquired and released for the total configuration. uses one license per product used. Concurrent Licensing A user on one machine. Version 5 can be used in two licensing modes: nodelock or with concurrent usage of licenses on a network. licenses are acquired at the beginning of the process. and released at its termination. a user can launch the following simultaneous processes: a Version 5 interactive session a Version 5 process executed through an OLE container application replay of macros recorded from captured sequences of Version 5 user interactions. There is no limit to the number of Version 5 processes launched for a given license (product or configuration). . then an additional license is taken for the corresponding process. Nodelock Licensing The use of local display of the hardware configuration is mandatory for Version 5 usage in nodelock mode.

are required to enter a special demo license key. In both cases. Version 5 is capable of running in demo mode. With this mechanism.Demo Usage In addition to its normal mode of operation where all licensed functions are accessed.see list below): Existing Version 5 customers. The qualified prospect can get first hands-on experience. can switch from standard mode to demo mode (Tools->Options->Licensing tab). copying and pasting Version 5 documents with the NT clipboard Recording and replaying macros. As the user restarts a session. the following functions are disabled: File Save and Save as File Read (except for prepared Version 5 demo documents) Embedding Version 5 documents in OLE documents Opening Version 5 documents using OLE technology Cutting. and create the first parts. This will ensure that the code starts automatically in demo mode. a favorable business environment is created for accelerating sales cycles. the demo mode will be automatically used. who may be given the Version 5 code for evaluation purposes. verify the ease of use of Version 5. with some disabled functions (such as File->Save . . who have a minimum of one regular license. Qualified prospects. When using Version 5 in demo mode. customers can explore add-on products for which they do not yet have a license. on UNIX and NT.

The key that corresponds to an underlines letter on a menu or control (also referred to as a mnemonic access key). The starting point for a selected range of objects. A technique where a display area automatically scrolls without direct interaction with a scroll bar. Compare anchor point. A graphic design technique that involves adding colored pixels to smooth the jagged edges of a graphic. See desktop toolbar. An active window is typically at the top of the Z order and is distinguished by the color of its title bar. Designing software to be usable and accessible to the widest range of users. A text box in which the input focus automatically moves to the next control as soon as a user types the last character. Window containing the Version 5 application. The movement of text to fill a remaining gap after a user deletes other text.Glossary A accelerator key access bar access key See shortcut key. accessibility active active end active object active window album anchor point anti-aliasing application window apply auto-exit auto-joining automatic scrolling . To commit a set of changes or pending transactions made in a secondary window. including users with disabilities. The state when an object is the focus of user input and its operations are available. The ending point for a selected range of objects. An anchor point is usually established at the object logically nearest the hot spot of the pointer when a user presses a mouse button. It is usually established at the object logically nearest the hot spot of the pointer when a user releases a mouse button. Object currently being edited. typically without closing that window. The window in which a user is currently working or directing input. Compare inactive window. Compare active end. Collection of images you generate with the Tools -> Capture command.

Applications can use the standard clipboard formats provided by Windows or register their own custom formats. See also multiple document interface. child menu. unsigned integer value.) The act of clicking. A clipboard format is identified by a unique. See also press. data or their references after a user carries out a Cut or Copy command. either checked (set) or unchecked (not set)." Depth effect for viewing parts or all of a 3D object between two planes. A standard Windows control that displays a setting. (n. See insertion point. control. called the "format name. Compare option button. (v. Compare stop. A document window used within an MDI window. C cancel caret cascading menu check box To halt an operation or process and return to the state before it was invoked. Each language (or group of languages) has its character set child menu child window click clipboard clipboard format clipping close character set .auto-repeat An event or interaction that is automatically repeated. or submenu). A character is any symbol used for the organization. A standard Microsoft Windows interface control that provides a discrete area for entering each character. A menu that is a submenu of a menu item (also referred to as a hierarchical menu. A group of such symbols used to describe a particular language.) To position the pointer over an object and then press and release a mouse button. or representation of data. To remove a window. See cascading menu. Auto-repeat events usually occur when a user holds down a keyboard key or presses and holds a special control (for example. scroll bar buttons). A user can also edit text within the control. The area of storage for objects. B background box edit Area in document windows to which you can apply a background color. The data format of a memory object on the clipboard.

The encoding values in a code set provide the interface between the system and its input and output devices. The menu contains the commands that are contextually relevant to the selection. and the most frequently used. It contains the encoding values for a character set or several character sets. A standard Windows control that initiates a command or sets an option (also referred to as a push button). A set or group of objects whose aggregation is recognized as an object itself (for example. A code page (or code set) is a table mapping a given character (from a given character set) to a hexadecimal code position. Specific to the conditions in which something exists or occurs. It answers the questions "What is this" and "Why would I want to use it?" Compare reference Help and task-oriented Help. characters in a paragraph. or code point. for that code page. A menu that is displayed at the location of a selected object (also referred to as a shortcut menu). A set of objects that shares some common aspect. A standard Windows control that combines a text box and interdependent list box. . An object that holds other objects. Information about an object and its current condition. named range of cells in a spreadsheet. Compare disjoint selection. See also locale. A selection that consists of a set of objects that are logically sequential or adjacent to each other (also referred to as range selection). or a grouped set of drawing objects). such that making a change to one object affects another object in the set. A secondary window with no title bar that is displayed next to an object.code page code set collection column heading combo box command button composite constraint container context-sensitive Help contextual contextual menu contextual window contiguous selection A collection of characters that make up character set. You display the contextual menu by right-clicking. it provides contextual information about that object. A standard Windows control that can be used to provide interactive column titles for a list. A relationship between a set of objects.

unless a user makes an explicit choice. The command button that is invoked when a user presses the ENTER key. list boxes. The desktop is also a container and can be used as a convenient location to place objects stored in the file system. To manipulate an interface element. combo boxes. A selection that consists of a set of objects that are not logically sequential or physically adjacent to each other. A link that propagates a value between two objects or locations. A secondary window that gathers additional information from a user. chooses options. The visual work area that fills the display. See unavailable. Compare contiguous selection.control current cursor An object that enables user interaction or input. or set values. often to initiate an action. such as buttons. display information. See also input focus. A generic term for the visible indication of where a user's interaction will occur. such as a toolbar. D data-centric design data link default default button A design in which users interact with their data directly without having to first start an appropriate editor or application. similar to the taskbar. such that is aligns itself with the edge of another interface element. with which the user enters text. or directs the action of the command. A device-independent measure to use for layout. One vertical unit is equal to one-eighth of an average character height for the current system font. typically a window or pane. and pointer. State of an object when selected. palette window. See also extended selection. and property sheet. A dialog box usually contains one or more controls. One horizontal unit is equal to one-fourth of the average character width for the current system font. Compare message box. desktop desktop toolbar dialog base unit dialog box dimmed disjoint selection dock . insertion point. and edit boxes. A toolbar that docks to the desktop. An operation or value that the system or application assumes. A default button typically appears in a secondary window. See also taskbar.

document document window double-click duplicate A common unit of data (typically a file) used in user tasks and exchanged between users. Performs mirroring or pattern operations on an active object. and attributes. a document is given a unique filename by which it can be retrieved. explicit selection A selection that a user intentionally performs with an input device.) To type a character from the keyboard. Compare multiple selection list box. (n. E See text box. Compare implicit selection.) To press an release a mouse button twice in rapid succession. See also disjoint selection. See extended selection and list box. and Paste. extended selection list box A list box that supports multiple selection. A window that provides a primary view of a document (typically its content). (v. enter (v.. extended selection A section technique that is optimized for the selection of a single object or single range using contiguous selection techniques (that is. but is optimized for a selection of a single object or single range.. Copy. edit field Edit menu . a dialog box is usually displayed for the user input of this additional information. (n. embedded object See OLE embedded object. canceling any existing selection when a new selection is made). such as Cut. However. behavior. When a user chooses the command. it also supports modifying an existing selection using disjoint selection techniques. When saved on disk." suffix added to a menu item or button label to indicate that the command requires additional information to be completed.) A classification of an object based on its characteristics. A common drop-down menu that includes general purpose commands for editing the current object.) The act of double-clicking. ellipsis The ".

Save.F filter File menu font font size Tool for organizing elements of V4 model document into layers. A generic term used to refer to any graphic or pictorial image that can be used on a button or in a message box. or object. heterogeneous selection hierarchical menu hold down homogeneous selection hot spot hot zone . group box H handle Help menu An interface element added to an object that provides a control point for moving. The specific portion of the pointer (or pointing device) that defines the exact location. or other operations pertaining to that object. Compare heterogeneous selection. See also context-sensitive Help. A selection that includes objects with the same properties or type. reshaping. Compare icon. A common drop-down menu that includes commands for file operations. and Print. such as Open. typically represented in points. The size of a font. and task-oriented Help. A selection that includes objects with different properties or type. Compare homogeneous selection. A common drop-down menu that includes commands that provide access to Help information or other forms of user assistance. To continue pressing a keyboard key. The interaction area of a particular object or location with which a pointer or pointing device's hot spot must come in contact. G geometry area glyph Area of a document window in which application data are displayed and edited. or mouse button. See cascading menu. A standard Windows control that groups a set of controls. to which a user is pointing. A set of attributes for text characters. sizing.

The location where the user is currently directing input. . without opening it into its own window. Compare active window. A window in which a user's input is not currently being directed. A technique that allows a user to directly interact with the content of an OLE embedded object without executing an explicit activation command. Also used for text box controls to indicate input focus. Compare outside-in activation. (n)) A reference to an object that is linked to another object. See also explicit selection.I icon implicit selection inactive inactive window A pictorial representation of an object. An orientation where the long dimension of a rectangular area (for example. in-place activation input focus input focus appearance insertion point inside-out activation interoperability J jump A special form of a link that navigates to another location (also referred to as a hyperlink). Ability to exchange Version 5 data between Version 5 workshops Ability to exchange data between Version 5 and OLE-compliant applications. Ability to exchange data between CATIA Version 4 and Version 5. screen or paper) is horizontal. See also OLE linked object. (v. The ability to edit an OLE embedded object in place. The visual display of a control or other object that indicates when it has the input focus. The state of an object which it is not the focus of a user's input. L label landscape link The text (or graphic) that identifies a control (also referred to as a caption). An inactive window is typically distinguished by the color of its title bar. A selection that is the result of inference or the context of some other operation. Compare glyph. The location where text or graphics will be inserted (also referred to as the caret).) To form a connection between two objects.

numeric formatting. To make a window its largest size. languages. Compare dialog box. and collation. such as time formatting. A command button that displays a menu.link path list box list view locale localization The descriptive form of referring to the location of a link source (also referred to as a moniker). the titles is the entry in the menu bar. See also minimize. A list of textual or graphical choices from which a user can choose. palette window. A part of a user's environment dedicated to international data to define conventions for a specified culture. See multiple document interface. A choice on a menu. See access key. The duplication is defined by symmetry. or cultures. See also extended selection list box. below the title bar. See also maximize. A horizontal bar at the top of a window. A standard Windows list box control that displays a set of objects. this means to hide the window. A text or graphic label that designates a particular menu. that contains menus. See also contextual menu. and property sheet. message box minimize mirror mnemonic . A standard Windows control that displays a list of choices. A secondary window that is displayed to inform a user about a particular condition. For drop-down menus. conversion. and character classification. The control also supports different views and drag and drop. The process of adapting software for different countries. M marquee maximize MDI menu menu bar menu button menu item menu title See region selection and bounding outline. for cascading menus the menu title is the name of its parent menu item. To minimize the size of a window: in some cases. An operation creating a 3D object by duplicating an initial object.

See child window. non-default drag and drop A drag (transfer) operation whose interpretation is determined by a user's choice of command. Modal often describes a secondary window that restricts a user's interaction with other windows. and parent window. It is also used as a generic term to include other pointing devices that operate similarly (for example. model CATIA Version 4 model. multiple document A technique for managing a set of windows whereby interface (MDI) documents are opened into windows (sometimes called child windows) that are constrained to a single primary (parent) window. modeless Not restrictive or limiting interaction. Compare extended selection list box and single selection list box. . modal N network license A license maintained on a network license server for use upon request by a License Use Runtime (LUM) client. most recently used List of most recently used files (MRU) located in the File menu for easy access. Compare modal. when pressed. mouse A commonly used input device that has one or more buttons used to interact with a computer. independent selections. Compare modeless. trackballs and head pointers). modifier key A keyboard key that. changes the actions of input. multiple selection list box A list box that is optimized for making multiple. model document Document containing a CATIA Version 4 model. Modeless often describes a secondary window that does not restrict a user's interaction with other windows. (and held). Compare nodelocked license.A restrictive or limiting interaction because of operating in a mode. often exclusive in some way to other forms of interactions. These commands are included in a pop-up menu displayed at the destination when the object is dropped. mode A particular state of interactions. A secondary window can be modal with respect to its primary window or to the entire system. moniker See link path.

OLE embedded object OLE linked object operation option button outside-in activation P package palette window An OLE encapsulation of a file so that it can be embedded in an OLE container. Compare network license. Compare check box. separate container.nodelocked license A type of license locked to a specific node. See also child window and multiple document interface. and relationships. See also property sheet. A primary window that provides window management for a set of child windows. The name that describes the technology and interface for implementing support for object interaction. A standard Windows control that allows a user to select from a fixed set of mutually exclusive choices (also referred to as a radio button). operations. Object Linking and Embedding. A technique that requires a user to perform an explicit activation command to interact with the content of an OLE embedded object. See also link. One of the separate areas in a split window. An object that represents or provides an access point to another object that resides at another location in the same container or a different. Compare dialog box and message box. A modeless secondary window that displays a tool bar of other choices. pane parent window persistence . O object OLE An entity or component identifiable by a user that can be distinguished by its properties. while physically residing in another document. Compare inside-out activation. A data object that retains the original editing and operating functionality of the application that created it. A generic term that refers to the actions that can be done to or with an object. such as colors or patterns. so that the product can be used only at that node. The nodelocked license is installed on the computer for which it was created. The principle that the state of an object is automatically preserved.

pointer A graphic image displayed on the screen that indicates the location of a pointing devices (also referred to as a cursor). Repeat the last operation. appearance. primary window The window in which the main interaction takes place. See also property page. property inspector A dynamic properties viewer that displays the properties of the current selection. or value. such that when the container is opened.(v. the windows of the contained objects are restored to their former positions. (n. . press To press and release a keyboard key. property sheet control A standard Windows control used to create property sheet interface. progress indicator control A standard Windows control that displays the percentage of completion of a particular process as a graphical bar. progress indicator Any form of feedback that provides the user with information about the state of a process. See also property sheet.) A unit of measurement for type (1 point equals approximately 1/72 inch). property sheet A secondary window that displays the properties of an object when a user chooses its Properties command. Compare dialog box. point R radio button range selection redo See option button. preview Tool allowing you to view a document or album image prior to printing. push button See command button. portrait An orientation where the long dimension of a rectangular area (for example. Compare property sheet. usually of a particular type of object. See contiguous selection.) To position the pointer over a particular object an location. screen or paper) is vertical. See also secondary window and window. property page A group of properties on a tabbed page or a property sheet. project A window or task management technique that consists of a container holding a set of objects. See also click. property Attribute or characteristic of an object that define its state.

The direction of the arrow indicates the direction in which the information scrolls. except that it also supports individual character and paragraph properties. Clicking (or tapping) in the scroll bar shaft scrolls the information by a screenful. S scale scope Operation that resizes the contents of document prior to printing or previewing. To identify one or more objects upon which an operation can be performed. The definition of the extent that a selection is logically independent from other selections. A window that provides information or supplemental interaction related to objects in a primary window. See also scroll bar shaft. A selection technique that involves dragging out a bounding outline (also referred to as a marquee) to define the selected objects. Compare task-oriented Help and context-sensitive Help. A component of a scroll bar that allows the information to be scrolled by defined increments when the user clicks it. selections made in separate windows are typically considered to be independent of each other. The context or way an object relates to its environment. The component of a scroll bar that provides the visual context for the scroll box. Click using the right mouse button (to display contextual menu).reference Help region selection relationship rich-text box right-click A form of online Help information that can contain conceptual and explanatory information. A standard Windows control that is similar to a standard text box. An object or set of objects hat have been selected. A standard Windows control that supports scrolling. The user can drag the scroll box to view areas of information not currently visible. For example. scroll scroll arrow button scroll bar scroll bar shaft scroll box secondary window section view select selection . See also scroll box. 3D view of a cross-section generated using a plane. A component of a scroll bar that indicates the relative position (and optionally the proportion) of the visible information relative to the entire amount of information. To move the view of an object or information to make a different portion visible.

presented in the form of a tree structure. such as moving. See contextual menu. the split bar visually separates window panes. An operation allowing splitting 3D objects using a plane. A graphical control point of an object that provides direct manipulation support for operations of that object. A keyboard key or key combination that invokes a particular command (also referred to as an accelerator key). or scaling.selection appearance selection handle selection set Send To separator settings shell shortcut shortcut icon shortcut key shortcut menu single selection list box size grip slider specification tree spin box split split bar The visual display of an object when it has been selected. Set of setup parameters and user preferences stored in non-editable files. . A standard Windows control that displays and sets a value from a continuous range of possible values. Tool used for sharing document files with other users. A division between panes that appears where a window has been split. An entry in a menu used to group menu items together. A generic term that refers to an action or technique that invokes a particular command or performs an operation with less interaction than its usual method. A control composed of a text box and increment and decrement buttons that allow a user to adjust a values from a limited range of possible values. sizing. such as brightness or volume. A link presented as an icon that provides a user with access to another object. A special control that appears at the junction of a horizontal and vertical scroll bar or the right end of a status bar and provides an area that a user can drag to size the lower right corner of a window. A list box that only supports selection of a single item in the list. A group of selected objects that you can store and retrieve. A generic term that refers to the interface that allows the user control over the system. Area of the document window reserved for viewing the design specifications of a part.

right. left. or mode on or off. The title bar also acts as a handle for dragging the window. typically places at the bottom of a window. function. Compare context-sensitive Help and reference Help. An area that allows the display of state information of the information being viewed in the window. Compare cancel. They are read and converted to Version 5 documents for further processing. buttons for each open primary window. Typical view available in 3D workshops: top. See cascading menu.tdg" extensions. back. T tab control targeting taskbar A standard Windows control looks similar to a notebook or file divider and provides navigation between different pages or sections of information.split box standard view status bar status bar control stop STRIM/STYLER models submenu A special control added to a window. These files have the same ". To determine where pen input is directed. that allows a user to split a window or adjust a window split. The taskbar includes the Start button. isometric. The horizontal area at the top of a window that identifies the window. Information about the steps involved in carrying out a particular task. Model files generated by STRIM or STYLER. A special toolbar that docks on an edge of the desktop supplied by the system. To halt a process or actions. typically adjacent to the scroll bar. A command button used in a toolbar (or status bar). A keyboard key that alternates between turning a particular operation. task-oriented Help template text box thread title bar toggle key toolbar toolbar button . bottom. A standard Windows control in which a user can enter an edit text (also referred to as the edit field). A process that is part of a larger process or program. An object that automates the creation of new objects of a particular type. A frame or special area that contains a set of other controls. A standard Windows control that provides the functionality of a status bar. and a status bar. typically without restoring the state before the process began. front.

W well control window A control that is used to display color or pattern choices. The view can be named. V view toolbar viewing tools VRML Toolbar containing viewing tools. See also primary window and secondary window.toolbar control tooltip transfer appearance tree control A standard Windows control designed with the same characteristics as the toolbar. VRML complements HTML. A vector-based language for modeling three-dimensional environments. A standard Windows control that allows a set of hierarchically related objects to be displayed as an expandable outline. It sends ASCII text files over the Internet. Tools for viewing contents of current document in different ways. This format is useful for viewing Version 5 data using a Web browser. 3D view an end user can generate by customizing view parameters. for a control or graphic object. Also referred to as named view. To reverse one operation performed on an object. which are translated by the VRML viewing engine at the other end. A window is a separately controllable area of the screen that typically has a rectangular border. A standard Windows object that displays information. U unavailable undo user-defined view The state of a control or data whose normal functionality is not presently available to a user (also referred to as dimmed). typically used like an option button. Virtual Reality Markup Language. A form of user assistance that automates a task through a dialog with the user. The visual feedback displayed during a transfer operation. A standard Windows control that provides a small pop-up window that provides descriptive text such as a label. wizard .

Similar to the multiple document interface. . Z Z order The layered relationship of a set of objects. A standard Windows pen interface control that supports text editing. except that the window displayed within the parent window are of objects that are also contained in the workspace. on the display screen. A window or task management technique that consists of a container holding a set of objects.workbench workspace writing tool Set of tools for completing specific tasks. such as windows. Each type of document can be edited with a document-specific set of tools. where the windows of the contained objects are constrained to a parent window.

Index Symbols & Numerics A B G H O P U V C I Q W D L R Z E M S F N T .

Symbols /regserver /unregserver Numerics 3D compass choosing orientation .

command . .A About CATIA V5 command accessing most recently used (MRU) documents accessing web site actions redoing repeating Album icon Album.. .. . . . . .

.B back view Best orientation bottom view bounding outline .

. ..C capture toolbar Capture.. . . . command capturing images selected areas of images Cascade command CATCommandPath CATDictionaryPath CATDocView CATFontPath CATGalaxyPath CATGraphicPath CATIA V5 Help command CATICPath CATMsgCatalogPath CATReferenceSettingPath CATReffilesPath CATSettings folder/directory catstart command CATStartupPath CATTemp . . CATUserSettingPath centering . .

.. Cascade CATIA V5 Help catstart Close CNEXT cnext . . . .. . Capture. . .character set characteristic element clipboard clipping plane Close command closing documents CNEXT command cnext command code point code set colors customizing setting command Toolbars commands About CATIA V5 Album. . .. . .

... net use New Window New.. ... .... Options.. Next View next view Normal View Object Open. .Contents and Index Customize Cut Delete Depth Effect... Lighting.. Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) Examine Fit All In Fly Full Screen Geometry Ground Image Capture. Look At Magnifier. .. .

exe Shading (SHD) Shading with Edges (SHD+E) Specifications . . . . ... . Search Select setcatenv Setup. Properties Quick Hidden Line Removal (HRD) RCMD Redo Rotate Save Save All Save As.Other Selection. . . . Perspective Previous View previous view Print .. Overview Pan Parallel Paste .. . . . . .

Index and Search command contextual help Copy command Copy icon copying CATIA V5 images to OLE-compliant applications copying and pasting objects copying images to clipboard creating CATIA V5 data in OLE-compliant applications new documents user-defined views Ctrl-clicking .Swap Hide/Show Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Turn Head Undo User Galaxy Walk What's This? Wireframe (NHR) Zoom Area Zoom In Zoom Out Contents.

Customize command customizing colors general settings . . performance settings print settings settings toolbars toolbars by drag and drop customizing toolbars creating deleting renaming restoring original contents toggling to hide or show Cut command cutting and pasting objects . .

. . . command depth effects foggy Near Limit deselecting displaying document windows full screen graphic properties hidden objects parallel view perspective view document windows documents closing creating new dxf type igs type .D Delete command deleting images in album objects demo mode Depth Effect...

Dynamic Hidden Line Removal (HRD) .opening existing previewing before printing saving saving all saving in other formats saving under another name setting automatic save frequency stl type stp type txt type VRML type dragging and dropping icons onto objects objects onto objects dxf type documents . . .

E embedding CATIA V5 data in OLE-compliant applications objects environment global user environment files Erase icon Examine command . .

F File Selection Box Fit All In command icon Fit in Page fitting all in Fly command front view Full Screen command full screen display .

. global environment graphic properties displaying editing Ground command .G geometry area getting help .

H hardware prerequisites help accessing online help library accessing web site contextual on toolbar icons online glossary searching online status bar help messages switching off tooltips tooltips hiding objects horizontal ground command HRD HSL values .

I igs type documents . . Image Capture. . . command images capturing capturing selected areas of copying to clipboard deleting from album previewing in album printing renaming in album saving to other formats installing on UNIX on Windows isometric view ...

command linking objects Look At command looking at through viewport ...L Landscape LD_LIBRARY_PATH left view LIBPATH lighting effects neon light one light source switching off light sources two light sources Lighting.

command menu bar most recently used (MRU) documents multiple selection by Ctrl-clicking by Shift-clicking .M macros background information creating from scratch deleting editing recording running Magnifier...

..N navigating changing views viewing objects against the ground Near Limit net use command New Window command New. command Next View command next view command NHR No Show space Normal View command Normal View icon .

. .. command opening document in new window existing documents most recently used (MRU) documents V4 models operations .O Object command .. Object Linking and Embedding objects copying and pasting cutting and pasting deleting pasting OLE container applications document server OLE-compliant applications copying CATIA Version 5 images to creating CATIA Version 5 data in embedding CATIA Version 5 data in online glossary help Open.

command Overview command . command Other Selection..repeating reversing undoing Options....

. .P page orientation page setup Pan command Pan icon panning using mouse paper format paper margins Parallel command parallel view Paste command pasting objects PATH permanent settings Perspective command perspective view Pixel icon Portrait power input mode prerequisites hardware software preselect highlighting .

previewing before printing previewing images in album Previous View command previous view command Print command print settings . . . banner information best orientation center color customizing Fit in Page gamma factor image position and size landscape line specifications options origin page orientation page setup paper format paper margins .preselection navigator Preview icon .

. . . . .portrait preview area print to file quality factor reset printer defaults scale printer setting up on UNIX printer configuration file printing images quickly to a file privileged plane profile Properties command . .

Q quick hidden line removal (HRD) Quick Print icon quick printing . . . .

R RCMD command Redo command redoing actions renaming images in album rendering dynamic hidden line removal (HRD) shading (SHD) shading with edges (SHD+E) wireframe (NHR) repeating the last action reversing last action RGB values right view roaming profile roll file Rotate command Rotate icon rotating using mouse runtime environment variables CATCommandPath CATDictionaryPath CATDocView . .

.CATFontPath CATGalaxyPath CATGraphicPath CATICPath CATMsgCatalogPath CATReferenceSettingPath CATReffilesPath CATStartupPath CATTemp CATUserSettingPath LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH PATH SHLIB_PATH .

.S Save All command Save As... icon Save command saving all documents documents documents automatically documents in other formats documents under another name images to other formats scaling print images Search command searching online help Select command selecting by Ctrl-clicking by Shift-clicking characteristic elements using selection sets using the bounding outline using the pointer selection sets .. command Save As..

. automatic save frequency colors document layout preferences lighting effects setting up printer on UNIX settings permanent setting files temporary Setup. .iss file shading (SHD) Shading (SHD) command Shading with Edges (SHD+E) Shading with Edges (SHD+E) command SHD SHD+E Shift-clicking SHLIB_PATH shortcuts keyboard Shown option silent installation .exe command Setup.setcatenv command setting . .

Specifications Visible command standard toolbar standard views back bottom front isometric left right top starting by dragging and dropping icons in language other than English using commands (UNIX) using commands (Windows) using document icons status bar status bar help messages stl type documents stp type documents Swap Hide/Show command switching off tooltips . .silent installation file software prerequisites specification tree .

.

T TargetId temporary settings Tile Horizontally command Tile Vertically command title bar toolbars creating deleting hiding renaming restoring original contents toggling to hide or show viewing Toolbars command tooltips top view Turn Head command turning head txt type documents .

U Undo command undoing actions user environment User Galaxy command .

V Vector icon view toolbar viewing . along normal to plane fitting all in hidden objects hiding objects looking at objects against the ground panning rotating turning head using mouse centering panning rotating zooming zooming in zooming out VRML type documents .

.W Walk command What's This? command wireframe (NHR) Wireframe (NHR) command Wireframe icon workbench workbench toolbar .

Z Zoom Area command Zoom In command Zoom In icon Zoom Out icon zooming an area zooming in zooming out zooming using mouse .